40+ Easy Appetizer Recipes Perfect for a Crowd - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/appetizers/ Tried & True Recipes ยท No Refined Sugars Tue, 23 Dec 2025 16:43:26 +0000 en-US hourly 1 https://wordpress.org/?v=6.8.3 https://foolproofliving.com/wp-content/uploads/2024/07/cropped-cropped-Foolproof-Living-Favicon-image-resized-32x32.png 40+ Easy Appetizer Recipes Perfect for a Crowd - Foolproof Living https://foolproofliving.com/category/appetizers/ 32 32 Smoked Salmon Platter https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-platter/ https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-platter/#respond Wed, 17 Dec 2025 18:10:03 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=85332 Ingredients You’ll Need for a Smoked Salmon Board Most of the ingredients for this platter are easy to find, and…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

Whenever I am entertaining friends, I like having a few reliable dishes that don’t require planning ahead or a long list of ingredients. My only rule is that they should offer a nice mix of textures and tastes, like something creamy, something tangy, something fresh, and a little crunch in there too.

Oh, and the food photographer in me wants it to be as colorful as possible.

This simple smoked salmon board checks all those boxes. It is less about exact measurements and more about how you place each ingredient so the whole board feels balanced. Over the years of working with food, I have learned that a few small choices can make something simple look thoughtful on the table. 

My hope is that this guide gives you enough structure to feel confident, while still letting you make it your own.

Ingredients You’ll Need for a Smoked Salmon Board

Most of the ingredients for this platter are easy to find, and you may already have a few of them in your fridge. The goal here isn’t to follow a strict list but to bring together a mix of textures and colors that complement the main ingredient, smoked salmon. 

I’ll walk you through what I used, along with a few substitution ideas, so you can build a board that fits your taste, budget, and whatever is available at your grocery store:

Ingredients in small portions from the top view.

Smoked Salmon

My top choice for this platter is cold-smoked wild salmon, but farm-raised smoked salmon would also work.

While you are in the smoked salmon aisle, you might also see other packaged salmon labeled as lox, gravlax, or even hot-smoked salmon. I’ve also seen flavored options, where smoked salmon is coated with flavorings like mustard, dill, or other fresh herbs.

How are smoked salmon, lox, and gravlax different from each other?

Smoked salmon is cured and then smoked, giving it a gentle smoky taste, whereas lox is cured with salt and not smoked, with a mild, briny taste. Gravlax is similar to lox but cured with dill, sugar, and salt, offering a more herbal taste.

You can use all of those as you are setting up your smoked salmon board. Each kind will offer a slightly different taste and texture, but all of them would work.

How much smoked salmon per person? I usually plan for about 3 ounces (85g) per person. You can always serve less or more, depending on your guests.

What to look for at the store: Use a brand you trust and pay attention to a few qualities:

  • The salmon should have a light natural shine, but it shouldn’t look overly oily. Too much oil often means it wasn’t cured properly.
  • Check the ingredient list. The highest quality smoked salmon will often list only salmon, salt, and smoke. Avoid brands with added colorings, oils, or long lists of hard-to-pronounce preservatives.

Fresh Produce & Vegetables

For the vegetables, I like to keep things simple and easy to find. The goal is to add color, freshness, and a bit of crunch to balance the salmon.

For this smoked salmon tray, I used sliced Persian cucumbers, cherry tomatoes cut in half, and thinly sliced radishes.

While I personally suggest these everyday vegetables, please keep in mind that there is no set rule here. Feel free to use whatever looks good at the store or what you already have in your fridge.

I also like to use fresh herbs to complement the vegetables and add a pop of fresh color to my smoked seafood platter.

Fresh dill is usually the classic pairing with salmon, but chives or parsley work just as well. Just a small handful scattered around the board is more than enough.

Cheese & Eggs

I like adding a soft, creamy element to my smoked salmon board, like soft cheese and eggs, because their textures and flavors pair well with the salmon’s smoky flavors.

Cheese: When it comes to cheese, I prefer soft varieties like cream cheese, feta, and labneh as they are easier to spread on bread or crackers. 

As you can see in the photos, I served my smoked salmon platter with whipped cream cheese, as it is widely available and easy to just scoop into a small bowl. If you want a more flavorful soft cheese, you can pick up a tub of Boursin. 

If you are serving this as an appetizer during the holidays, creme fraiche or mascarpone can be a luxurious addition to your board.

Alternatively, if you want to take things up a notch, you can whip up a batch of my Whipped Feta or even my copycat version of CAVA’s Feta Dip.

Eggs: Hard-boiled eggs are traditional, but soft-boiled eggs work just as well if you like a creamier center. I like to cut them in half, but you can also slice them depending on how you plan to arrange them on your board.

Pickled & Briny Add-Ons

I always include at least one pickled or briny element on my smoked salmon board. The acidity helps cut through the richness of smoked salmon and cream cheese, offering yet another layer of texture and flavor.

  • Capers, pickled onions, olives, or marinated artichokes: Any of these will work. Capers are the classic choice, but pickled red onions add a pretty color, and marinated artichokes bring a Mediterranean touch that pairs surprisingly well with salmon. You can pick one or mix a couple together, depending on what you have on hand.
  • Red onion: Thinly sliced red onion is a common pairing with salmon, but if you don’t love raw onion, you can place scallions in a small bowl or leave them out completely.

Breads & Crackers

I like offering a mix of breads and crackers so guests can build their bites however they like. Feel free to choose two or three options that you enjoy. Really, anything sturdy enough to spread with whipped cream cheese and hold the salmon and toppings will work.

You don’t need a large variety, but having a few different textures makes the board feel more elevated.

  • Bagels and bread: Mini bagels are always a hit, especially when you include plain, everything, or sesame. Thinly sliced and lightly toasted French baguette or rye bread are great options as well.
  • Crackers: I usually include a few types. Bagel chips (I love the ones from Stacy’s), assorted crackers, or even pita chips work well. If you or your guests need gluten-free options, my Homemade Seed Crackers are a perfect choice, or get your favorite gluten-free cracker from the store.

Drinks & Wine Pairings (Optional)

I think we can all agree that you can’t serve a smoked fish platter like this without serving some drinks. It is optional, but below are a few of my favorites:

  • Dry white wine: A chilled Sauvignon Blanc or Pinot Grigio works beautifully. Both cut through the richness of the salmon without overpowering it.
  • Sparkling wine: Prosecco or Champagne are great options for a celebratory Mother’s Day brunch or a Christmas holiday gathering.
  • Non-alcoholic: Sparkling water with a slice of lemon or lime is my go-to, but any citrusy or herbal sparkling drink works well here.

How to Assemble a Smoked Salmon Platter

Think of these steps as a little guidance rather than strict rules. There is no right or wrong way here; these steps are mainly to help you keep everything looking balanced.

Here’s how I usually put the platter together so it feels thoughtfully arranged:

Steps showing how to arrange cream cheese, capers, and smoked salmon on a platter.

Step 1 – Start with the bowls: Begin by placing the whipped cream cheese in a medium bowl and the capers in a small one, then set them on your platter. I like to place the smaller bowl just to the right and slightly under the cream cheese, so it doesn’t feel crowded. 

Starting with the bowls will give you anchor points, which makes it easier to fill in the rest of the platter without everything sliding around. It also adds height, making the board feel more styled and intentional.

Step 2 – Add the salmon: Arrange the salmon in loose folds or ribbons on each side of the bowls, slightly off-center. I like to set them so that each piece is visible (rather than on top of each other), so your guests can easily serve themselves.

Keep in mind that we are not aiming for perfection here. Try to leave a little space around the edges to make room for the vegetables and keep the platter from looking too packed. 

A collage of images showing how to make a smoked salmon platter appetizer.

Step 3 – Layer in the vegetables: Tuck the cucumber slices, cherry tomatoes, radishes, olives, and red onions around the salmon. Think about color as you go. If you place two vegetables of the same color side by side, swap one with something with a different color or texture.

This simple trick keeps the platter from looking flat and makes it feel brighter without needing more ingredients. 

Step 4 – Add the eggs: Scatter the halved eggs on both ends of the platter. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle with Everything but the Bagel seasoning (or simple salt and black pepper) so that they are properly seasoned.

Smoked salmon appetizer platter arranged with vegetables and cheese from the top view.

Step 5 – Finish with lemon and herbs and serve: Tuck in a few lemon wedges and sprigs of fresh dill to complete the whole platter. Lastly, serve the platter with toasted baguette slices or your favorite crackers on the side so everyone can build their own bites.

Expert Tips for Success

Color and texture balance: Spread out the colorful ingredients for visual appeal. I also like mixing different textures. So doing something crisp, something creamy, something briny, so every bite feels interesting.

Use small bowls: There is no set rule here, but I like to place creamy and liquid-y items like cheese and sauces (if using) in small bowls on the plate. However, as you are choosing your bowls, keep the size of your platter in mind. You do not want them to take over the whole platter.

Don’t forget utensils for serving: Be sure to place a butter knife next to the cream cheese for spreading and a small serving tong (or a small fork) by the smoked salmon so people can help themselves.

Serve with small plates: This makes it easier for guests to build their own bites and keeps the platter looking tidy for longer.

Have extra vegetables ready: If you’re hosting a larger group, keep a small stash of sliced cucumbers, tomatoes, or radishes in the fridge. You can quickly replenish the platter without stopping to prep more food.

Keep food safety in mind: Because smoked salmon is a perishable protein, I try not to leave it out at room temperature for more than 2 hours. If you’re serving this outdoors or in warm weather, shorten that time a bit. I prefer to replenish with fresh slices rather than leaving the entire package out at once.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Smoked salmon platter from the top view.
Print

Smoked Salmon Platter Recipe

This smoked salmon platter is an easy-to-assemble appetizer great for any party, whether it is a brunch or holiday gathering. Made with store-bought smoked salmon, crisp everyday vegetables, creamy whipped cream cheese, and briny olives and capers, it’s a showstopping centerpiece you can put together in 20 minutes. Serve with crackers or toasted bread so guests can build their own bites.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 521kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 oz whipped cream cheese
  • ¼ cup capers drained
  • 12 oz smoked salmon wild-caught, preferably
  • 2 Persian cucumbers sliced
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • 3 radishes sliced thinly
  • ½ cup olives black, green, or a combination of both
  • ½ red onion sliced thinly – pickled onions
  • 4 hard-boiled eggs cut in half lengthwise
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon Everything but the Bagel seasoning optional (or just salt and pepper)
  • 4 slices lemon
  • ½ cup fresh dill optional
  • 8-10 slices French baguette toasted and/or crackers to serve

Instructions

  • Put the whipped cream cheese in a medium-sized bowl and capers in a small bowl. Arrange them on a large oval platter (or a board). I like to place the smaller bowl of capers to the right of the cream cheese bowl, slightly lower towards the top of the platter.
  • Place the salmon slightly off-center, fanned or folded into loose ribbons. Leave a little space around the edges to tuck other items in later.
  • Arrange the sliced cucumbers, cherry tomatoes, radishes, olives, and red onions around the salmon.
  • Scatter the halved hard-boiled eggs on both ends of the platter. Drizzle them with olive oil and sprinkle with Everything but the Bagel seasoning.
  • Garnish with lemon slices and fresh dill.
  • Serve with a toasted baguette or crackers on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: I usually serve 3 oz (85g) of smoked salmon per person, so this recipe serves 4 adults. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • How long does a salmon platter stay fresh? Once assembled, it is best to consume it within two hours for food safety. It is best to take out just enough and replenish as needed. I like to keep extra salmon and veggies ready in the fridge and add to my board throughout the evening.

Nutrition

Calories: 521kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Cholesterol: 235mg | Sodium: 1790mg | Potassium: 543mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 1463IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 169mg | Iron: 5mg

Make-Ahead Instructions and Storing Leftovers

How to make ahead: If you want to make this smoked salmon platter ahead of time, you can prepare most of it a few hours in advance, which is especially helpful if you’re hosting. Simply:

  • Prep all the components: Slice the vegetables, boil the eggs, and gather the pickled items in advance. Arrange everything on the platter, then cover it tightly with plastic wrap and refrigerate.
  • Add the salmon right before serving: I like to open the smoked salmon at the very last minute before serving so it stays fresh.

How to store leftovers: If you have leftovers, store each component in separate airtight containers. 

Smoked salmon is perishable, so aim to eat it within 24 hours. The vegetables, herbs, and pickled items usually last a bit longer, but I prefer consuming everything within a day or two.

How to use leftover salmon: Leftover salmon (and vegetables) is great to add into eggs, into a simple green salad, or tucked into a wrap for an easy lunch the next day so nothing is wasted.

FAQs

How much smoked salmon should I buy for a party platter?

If you are serving it as an appetizer, I recommend buying 2-3 oz (57-85g) of smoked salmon per person; if it is your main meal, it is best to go for 4-5 oz (114-142g) per person.

Can I make a smoked salmon platter the night before?

You can prep most of the ingredients ahead of time, but I prefer to open the salmon right before serving so it stays fresh. You can slice the vegetables, boil the eggs, and set aside any pickled items the day before. When you’re ready to serve, all you have to do is assemble the board.

What wine or drinks pair well with smoked salmon?

Crisp, light drinks complement the richness of salmon best. Dry white wines like Sauvignon Blanc or Pinot Grigio are classic, but if you are serving them for a special occasion, something festive like Prosecco, Cava, or Champagne also works well. For a non-alcoholic option, I like serving it with a flavored sparkling water.

More Easy Appetizer Recipes

Chances are, you are here because you need an easy yet delicious appetizer. The good news is that we have plenty of those on this website. Below are a few more easy appetizer recipes I think you might also like:

  • If you want another beautiful board that comes together with simple ingredients, my Meat and Cheese Platter walks you through everything from choosing the best meats and cheeses to arranging them to make the board feel balanced and inviting. 
  • For something quick and crowd-pleasing, my Olive Oil Bread Dip takes just a few minutes to make and is the perfect restaurant-style appetizer to set out with warm bread. 
  • And if you’re looking for a fun, make-ahead option, my Baked Goat Cheese Balls are crisp on the outside and creamy inside. I usually make a batch, keep them in the freezer, and bake them right before my guests arrive.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/smoked-salmon-platter/feed/ 0
Harissa Roasted Carrots https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-carrots/ https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-carrots/#respond Mon, 29 Sep 2025 21:22:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83581 Growing up in the Mediterranean, the first thing you learn is that vegetables are never an afterthought. Most meals are…]]>

Growing up in the Mediterranean, the first thing you learn is that vegetables are never an afterthought. Most meals are actually planned around them, and this recipe is a perfect example of that. 

Everyday ingredients like rainbow carrots (naturally sweet, inexpensive, and beautiful when roasted) become the star of the plate when paired with harissa, the North African chili paste I turn to often in my cooking. 

And of course, we can’t forget the whipped feta, the creamy and tangy spread that social media has made famous for good reason.

I tested this dish several times to ensure the steps are clear and the cleanup is minimal. Ready in about 50 minutes from start to finish, the result is a side that looks stunning on the table but comes together with ease. It is such a great recipe to serve as part of a holiday spread, alongside a weeknight meal, or even as an appetizer on a mezze platter.

Ingredients You’ll Need

This recipe has three main components: the creamy whipped feta, the roasted harissa carrots, and the assembly finished with a honey drizzle.

Below, I am sharing some helpful notes on ingredients from my recipe testing. You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For the Carrots:

Carrots: I love using rainbow carrots here because they’re colorful, and when they get roasted, they become slightly caramelized, which pairs beautifully with harissa. 

However, any carrots you have on hand would work. The important thing is to choose ones that are similar in size so they roast evenly. 

Before roasting, I like to give them a good scrub and peel them for a smoother texture, although this step is optional. I usually grab about two to three bunches for this recipe, and if any are very thick, I slice them in half lengthwise.

Harissa: You can go a few different routes here:

Honey: This is a key ingredient in this recipe, so don’t skip it. It helps caramelize the carrots and tames the spiciness of harissa. If you don’t have honey on hand, you can substitute it with maple syrup or agave syrup.

Garnishes: Here is where you can mix it up and make this recipe your own. The toppings are what take these harissa-glazed carrots to the next level. Here are my favorites:

  • Drizzles: I am using honey because the sweet and spicy combo is unbeatable. You can also try maple syrup for a deeper sweetness or opt for tahini lemon sauce for a savory flavor.
  • Nuts: My go-to is pistachios, but almonds, cashews, or even toasted pine nuts would be delicious. If you can, toast them slightly in a pan to enhance their flavor.
  • Fresh Herbs: I opted for parsley, but you can use any herb you love, such as dill, cilantro, or mint. You can even use the carrot tops; just wash and dry them thoroughly before chopping them finely.
  • Optional: During the holiday season, I also use a handful of pomegranate seeds to add a pop of color.

For the Whipped Feta: 

For the creamiest base, start with a block of feta packed in brine rather than the pre-crumbled kind. And for the yogurt, choose plain, unsweetened whole milk Greek yogurt for the creamiest texture. 

Ingredients for the creamy whipped feta spread.

You’ll find the full whipped feta ingredients in the recipe card below. For more tips, steps, and variations, check out my full Whipped Feta Recipe post. 

Alternatively, you can use Cava’s Feta Sauce or my Tahini Yogurt Sauce as a spread; both will provide a similar creamy base.

How to Make Harissa Carrots

The beauty of this recipe is that most of the work happens in the oven. While the carrots roast and caramelize, you whip the feta and prep the toppings. 

Step 1 – Prep the pan: Set your oven to 400°F (204°C) and line a large sheet pan with parchment paper for easy cleanup. 

I know some people recommend against using parchment paper to achieve the most browning, especially when roasting root vegetables like carrots. I prefer to use it to make the clean up easier, but you can go either way.

Steps showing the making of the harissa and spreading it over the carrots.

Step 2 – Make the marinade & coat: In a small bowl, whisk together the olive oil, harissa, honey, and lemon zest. Always taste the mixture before adding any seasoning, especially if you are using a store-bought harissa. 

Add the carrots and toss until fully coated. I like to use my hands here to really work the marinade into all the nooks and crannies, but a pastry brush can also be used.

Images showing the roasted carrots and whipped feta.

Step 3 – Roast: Arrange the carrots in a single layer on the sheet pan, leaving a little space between each one so they bake and caramelize instead of steaming. 

Roast the carrots for about 30 minutes, flipping them halfway through, until caramelized and tender in the center. If your carrots are on the thinner side, start checking around the 25-minute mark.

Step 4 – Make the whipped feta: While the carrots are roasting, break the feta into chunks and add it to a food processor along with the Greek yogurt and lemon zest. 

Pulse it a few times, and then as the food processor is running, slowly drizzle in olive oil until smooth and creamy, scraping the sides as needed. Blend for about 40-45 seconds, until smooth, to maintain a thick and spreadable consistency.

Images showing the assembly of roasted harissa carrots recipe.

Step 5 – Assemble and Garnish: Once the harissa carrots are done, let them cool for 10 minutes so that when you add them on top of the feta cheese spread, they don’t melt.

Spread the whipped feta onto a large serving platter, arrange the carrots on top, drizzle with honey, and sprinkle with pistachios and parsley.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat

One of my favorite things about this honey harissa carrot recipe is that it can be served hot from the oven, made ahead, and enjoyed chilled. Not to mention, they store well in the refrigerator for later use.

Make Ahead: You can roast the carrots and make the whipped feta up to a day in advance. Store them separately or assemble them right away so the dish is ready to serve as soon as you need it. 

Storage: Store the leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 2-3 days. The whipped feta may firm up slightly as it chills, so take it out of the fridge 10 minutes before serving to allow it to become creamier. 

Reheating: When it comes to reheating, I do not recommend heating the whipped feta. However, you can reheat the carrots in a 325°F (163°C) oven for about 8-10 minutes, or until they are heated through. Then, reassemble the recipe as written.

Expert Tips for Best Results

While this harissa-roasted carrot recipe is quite simple to put together, here are a few things I learned during my recipe testing:

  • Pick similar-sized carrots: Choose carrots that are roughly the same size so they roast evenly. If some are very thick, cut them in half lengthwise so everything bakes at the same rate.
  • Taste before salting: Some harissa brands are saltier than others, so always give the marinade a quick taste before seasoning to avoid over-salting the carrots.
  • Flip halfway: Give the carrots a quick toss and turn them halfway through roasting so they caramelize evenly and don’t burn on one side.
  • Let them cool slightly: Let the carrots sit for 10 minutes before serving to prevent the whipped feta from getting melty and soggy.
  • Loosen thick harissa: Harissa paste can vary in thickness, so if yours is very thick, whisk in a splash of olive oil to loosen it and help coat the carrots more evenly.

Serving Suggestions

While you can enjoy these carrots straight from the oven, they are even better when paired with a full meal. Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve them:

Harissa roasted carrots garnished with pistachios and drizzled with honey.

FAQs

Can I use harissa powder instead of paste?

I wouldn’t recommend using harissa powder by itself for the full effect. Instead, you can make a quick harissa paste with harissa powder in minutes and use it to coat the carrots.

How do I tone down the spice?

You have a few options here. You can make your own harissa or buy a brand that offers a mildly spiced harissa. Additionally, keep in mind that serving the carrots over dairy naturally helps to tone down the spice.

What toppings or spices work best?

Chopped pistachios are my go-to, but almonds, cashews, or even toasted pine nuts are great alternatives. Fresh herbs, such as fresh parsley, dill, or cilantro, add a pop of color and freshness.

Do I need to peel carrots before roasting?

It is a personal choice. If you are buying organic carrots, you can give them a good scrub under cold water and roast them with the skins on. Still, if you prefer, you can peel them as well.

More Harissa Recipes to Try

When I have harissa on hand, I find myself adding it to everything from roasted vegetables to grain bowls. If you want more ways to use harissa, here are a few of my favorites:

  • My Harissa Dressing is a bright and spicy five-minute dressing that I drizzle over salads, grain bowls, grilled meats, and even roasted veggies.
  • For dinner, my BBQ Harissa Chicken is smoky, juicy, and takes just twenty minutes of hands-on time. And if you prefer a recipe that requires no grilling, then I suggest my Harissa Honey Chicken, which caramelizes beautifully in the oven for the perfect sweet-and-spicy bite.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Harissa roasted carrots garnished with pistachios and parsley.
Print

Harissa Roasted Carrots Recipe

These rainbow carrots are roasted with harissa until caramelized, then served over creamy whipped feta and topped with honey, pistachios, and fresh herbs.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 306kcal

Ingredients

For The Harissa Carrots

  • 2 lbs rainbow carrots (18-20 carrots) ~ 20 oz, scrubbed and peeled
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons harissa
  • 1 tablespoon honey plus more to drizzle on top
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest from one lemon
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt optional – add after tasting harissa first
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Whipped Feta

  • 8 ounces feta whole block
  • ½ cup Greek yogurt whole milk / unsweetened
  • 1 teaspoon Zest of a lemon
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil

As Garnish

  • 2 tablespoons honey
  • 2 tablespoons pistachios roughly chopped
  • 1 tablespoon fresh parsley chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400°F (204°C). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together olive oil, harissa, honey, and lemon zest. Taste for seasoning and season with salt if necessary.
    Person making harissa sauce and spreading carrots with the sauce.
  • Add the carrots to the prepared sheet pan and spread the harissa mixture evenly, ensuring the carrots are fully coated with the mixture. Spread them on a single layer.
  • Roast for 30-35 minutes, flipping them halfway through to ensure even roasting.
  • Remove from the oven and let them cool down for 10 minutes.
    Side by side photos showing the roasted carrots and whipped feta.
  • While carrots are roasting, make the whipped feta. Break the feta into large chunks and place it in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the metal blade, along with Greek yogurt and lemon zest.
  • Pulse a few times to mix, and then turn the machine on and drizzle the olive oil over the tube. Let it run for 40-45 seconds, stopping once or twice to scrape the sides of the bowl to ensure even mixing.
  • Grab a large serving plate, spread the bottom with whipped feta cheese, and then transfer the now-slightly cooled harissa carrots on top.
    Photos showing the assembly of the dish.
  • Drizzle with 1-2 tablespoons of honey and garnish with pistachios and parsley.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields enough harissa carrots to serve 6 people, with approximately 3 carrots per serving, depending on the size of the carrots used. The nutritional values are per serving and include the calories coming from whipped feta.
  • Carrots: While I roasted the carrots whole, you can cut them into 1 1/2- to 2-inch chunks and roast them that way.
  • Spread at the bottom: Whipped feta is optional here, and you can serve the harissa carrots by themselves if you prefer. Alternatively, my yogurt tahini sauce would be a great option as a spread.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be placed in an airtight container and kept in the fridge for 3-4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 306kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 803mg | Potassium: 588mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 17g | Vitamin A: 25521IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 261mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/harissa-carrots/feed/ 0
Whipped Feta Dip https://foolproofliving.com/whipped-feta-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/whipped-feta-dip/#respond Mon, 29 Sep 2025 19:54:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=83576 Ingredients You’ll Need You only need four main ingredients to make this whipped feta recipe, so choose the best ones…]]>
Aysegul

Whenever I have friends over, I like to go beyond the usual meat-and-cheese plate and put together a spread that feels a little more Mediterranean and creative without being complicated. 

Over the years, I’ve built a few go-to menus that always get oohs and aahs, and after this whipped feta cheese recipe took off on social media last year, I added this version to the mix. Now I get the same question every time: “Is the recipe on the blog?

It’s popular for a reason: it’s incredibly versatile. Serve it as a cheese dip, spread it under roasted vegetables, or thin it into a sauce; top with savory herbs and spices or go sweet with honey and nuts. 

Think of this creamy feta recipe as a simple base you can dress up a dozen ways. After months of testing, I’ve dialed in the texture so it delivers every time.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You only need four main ingredients to make this whipped feta recipe, so choose the best ones you can find, as their flavor really shines through. 

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

You can find the exact measurements in the recipe card below, but here are some notes from my testing:

Feta Cheese: For the creamiest whipped feta cheese, start with an 8-ounce block of feta packed in brine. You can use either cow’s milk or sheep’s milk feta, but the most important thing is choosing one you like for its flavor, creaminess, and saltiness.

I do not recommend pre-crumbled feta because it often contains caking agents that make the dip grainy. Since we will be blending everything in the food processor, there is no need to buy it pre-crumbled.

Greek Yogurt: Some whipped feta recipes call for cream cheese or sour cream, but I prefer using whole milk unsweetened Greek yogurt for a lighter, tangier base. 

Because it’s thicker and less watery than regular yogurt, it keeps the dip extra creamy while adding a subtle tang. For the best texture, avoid fat-free or 2% yogurt.

Olive Oil: Use your favorite extra virgin olive oil. It doesn’t have to be fancy or expensive, just something you like, since the flavor really shines through.

Lemon zest: Adding a little lemon zest brightens the dip, brings fresh aromatics, and adds a bit of tang.

Optional Add-Ins: I wanted to make this recipe with minimal ingredients, so it is quick and easy to put together. However, if you’d like, you can also add a clove of fresh or roasted garlic for a mild garlic flavor and a squeeze of lemon juice for a bit more tangy flavor.

How to Make Whipped Feta Cheese

Whipped feta comes together in just minutes, and the key is blending it just enough to achieve a smooth, creamy texture without overblending. Here’s how I do it step by step:

Step 1: Prep the feta: First, drain the brine, pat the block dry to prevent a watery dip, and break it into large chunks. This way, there is no excess moisture, and it can blend smoothly. 

Process photos showing how to make creamed feta cheese dip.

Step 2: Blend: Add the feta, Greek yogurt, and lemon zest to the food processor or blender. Turn on the processor and slowly pour in the olive oil through the feed tube. 

Pro Tip: Most whipped feta recipes use ¾ cup of Greek yogurt, but during my recipe testing, I found that using a lesser amount (½ cup of yogurt) yielded a more spreadable dip than a sauce-like, runny whipped feta.

Pouring the olive oil slowly helps the cheese and yogurt emulsify into a silky mixture. If you’re using a high-power blender, blend for a shorter time, as it will thin out more quickly.

A collage of images showing the making of the creamy Greek yogurt feta dip.

Step 3: Scrape halfway through blending: For a smooth and evenly blended whipped feta, stop the machine and scrape the sides with a spatula once or twice during the whipping process.

Doing this also helps with gauging the texture. I thought that 40-45 seconds of blending yielded the perfectly silky and smooth texture, but you can adjust the blending time according to your preference.

Step 4: Serve and garnish: Spoon into a bowl and finish with olive oil and your favorite toppings.

Ways to Customize Whipped Feta with Different Toppings

While this feta spread is perfectly delicious on its own, adding toppings is an easy way to dress it up and make it feel new every time you serve it. Choose a savory or sweet topping below and make it your own:

  • Savory Toppings: Sprinkle with fresh parsley, mint, or dill, plus a pinch of sumac, red pepper flakes, black pepper, or Aleppo pepper. You can keep it light, as I did in the photos, or spread it on a platter and layer on more herbs for a dramatic look.
  • Sweet Toppings: Drizzle a little honey and a handful of toasted pine nuts or crushed pistachios for a more dessert-like spread.
  • Spice Blends: If you prefer a lighter approach, sprinkle it with a pinch of my Mediterranean Seasoning or za’atar for an even more Mediterranean dip. Both bring a subtle herby flavor without overpowering the dip.

How To Make Ahead and Store?

Add this whipped feta cheese dip recipe to your collection of party appetizers asap! Why? Because it stores well and can be made ahead of time. Here’s how I do it:

Make-ahead: You can prepare it up to 2 days in advance. It gets slightly thicker as it sits. If you plan to serve it as a dip, you can serve it right away. However, though it is optional, if you want to use it as a spread for a perfectly creamy, silky texture, you can give it a quick whiz in the food processor right before serving. 

Storage: Transfer the dip to an airtight container. It keeps well in the refrigerator for 3 to 4 days. If the dip appears slightly separated after sitting in the fridge, let it rest at room temperature for a few minutes, then give it a quick stir before serving.

Freezing: I do not recommend freezing whipped feta as the texture changes and turns grainy once thawed, so it’s best enjoyed fresh.

Notes from My Kitchen: What I Learned Making This Recipe

After plenty of testing (and a few grainy batches), I’ve figured out what makes whipped feta turn out silky and creamy every time. Here are the tips I wish someone had told me from the start:

  • Use a block of feta cheese: A block of feta in brine is creamier and fresher, while pre-crumbled feta often contains caking agents that make the dip too grainy.
  • Taste your feta first: Some feta cheese sold at supermarkets can be very salty. Since this dip relies on just a few basic ingredients, it would be hard to mask that, so it is best to taste it before whipping it.
    • Too salty? Place the block in an airtight container with enough water covering it and let it sit in the fridge for a couple of hours or overnight. This helps reduce some of the excess salt.
  • Bring to room temperature: If possible, remove your feta from the fridge 5-10 minutes before blending. This is optional, but it will make your dip blend smoother. 
  • Food processor or blender: I prefer using a food processor because it allows for easier control over texture and thickness. In contrast, a blender (especially a high-speed blender) blends faster, which may result in a runny creamed feta cheese dip. Therefore, if you are using a blender, pulse and check often instead of running the machine continuously.

How To Serve Whipped Feta

Don’t get me wrong, this is a wonderful appetizer dip served with fresh veggies like radishes, cucumbers, and bell peppers. However, there are many other ways to use it in your daily cooking, especially if you are a fan of Mediterranean cuisine.

Images of recipe ideas that uses this whipped feta recipe.

Here are some of my go-to ideas:

  • Build a Mezze Platter: Serve your freshly made feta yogurt dip alongside other classics, such as Mediterranean Hummus, Tzatziki Sauce, Baba Ganoush, and fresh vegetables, warm Pita Bread, or pita chips.
  • Add it to any platter: This recipe is not just for a mezze platter. It is wonderful for any meat, cheese, or even seafood platter. I especially love it in my Smoked Salmon Platter.
  • Sandwich or Wrap Spread: Use it as a substitute for mayonnaise or other spreads in your favorite sandwiches and wraps. I love spreading it on lavash bread and then adding some Adana lamb kebab or Chicken Kofta before rolling it into a wrap.
  • As a Creamy Base: Spread a generous layer on a plate and top with roasted, grilled, or even air-fried vegetables. I love pairing it with my Harissa Carrots or Grilled Eggplant whenever I want an impressive side dish, or my Air Fryer Beetroot during the holiday season when I need a pop of color on the table.
  • With Grilled Meats and Kebabs: Serve it alongside Middle Eastern classics like Shish Tawook, Chicken Shawarma, or Lamb Kebabs for a cool, creamy contrast.
  • For Grain Bowls: Add a dollop over any of your Mediterranean bowls as a sauce. It works wonderfully with my CAVA Bowl and Chicken Shawarma Bowl.
  • Over toast with Eggs: Spread it on toast and top with fried or poached eggs, or serve it alongside Turkish Eggs for a savory breakfast or brunch.

FAQs

What’s the best feta for whipped feta?

Use a whole block of feta (not pre-crumbled feta) that you like the taste and creaminess of; it can be cow’s milk or sheep’s milk. I recommend choosing a brand that is not overly salty.

Can I make whipped feta without yogurt?

Yes, you technically can, but I find that the version made with yogurt is better. Still, you can use a splash of water or milk (about ¼ cup) to thin it out and blend until smooth.

How do I thicken whipped feta?

Start with a smaller amount of yogurt and add more as needed until you reach your desired consistency. If your dip turns out too thin and you want to thicken it, blend in a little more feta or chill it for 10-15 minutes to allow it to firm up as it cools.

Can I make this ahead of time?

Yes, you can make it up to 2 days ahead. Simply make a batch, store it in an airtight container, and give it a quick stir right before serving.

How long does whipped feta last?

It keeps well for 3-4 days in the refrigerator. Just give it a quick stir or pulse in the food processor before serving.

Can I freeze whipped feta?

I don’t recommend freezing this whipped feta spread as it turns grainy once thawed. It’s best enjoyed fresh.

Other Mediterranean Dips and Feta Recipes You Might Like

If you enjoyed this feta Greek yogurt dip, you might also like these other feta-packed and Mediterranean-inspired recipes I make regularly. They’re just as fresh and simple to make:

  • If you love that restaurant-style creaminess and sauces, try the cult favorite CAVA Feta recipe. It’s another wonderful dip (or topping) made with feta, roasted onions, jalapenos, and garlic.
  • If you want something cozy and baked, my Spinach and Feta Borek has a super crisp dough, melty feta, and is perfect for when you are having people over. 
  • And if you are in the mood for something refreshing, my Watermelon Cucumber Salad with cucumber, feta, and fresh mint is perfect for warm weather.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Person scooping whipped feta with pita bread.
Print

Whipped Feta Dip Recipe

This quick 5-minute whipped feta dip is made with just 4 simple ingredients. Creamy, tangy, and perfect for spreading or dipping.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 228kcal

Ingredients

  • 8 ounces feta cheese whole block (both cow's milk or sheep's milk feta would work)
  • ½ cup Greek yogurt unsweetened & whole milk/full fat
  • 1 teaspoon Zest of a lemon
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil plus more for drizzling on top

Optional toppings

  • Handful of fresh herbs such as parsley, dill, and mint
  • Pinch of Sumac or red pepper flakes

Instructions

  • Break the feta into large chunks and place it in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the metal blade.
    A collage of images showing the making of whipped feta cheese spread in a food processor.
  • Add in the Greek yogurt and lemon zest.
  • Turn the food processor on. While it is blending, slowly add olive oil through the tube.
  • Blend until smooth, no more than 40-45 seconds, stopping halfway through to scrape the sides as needed.
    A collage of images showing the whipped feta in a food processor and in a serving platter with veggies.
  • Transfer to a bowl and garnish with fresh herbs. Finish with a light drizzle of olive oil and a sprinkle of sumac or red pepper flakes.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ½ to 1 ¾ cups whipped feta, ideal for four servings. The nutritional values below are per serving and do not include calories from the optional vegetables and pita bread shown in the pictures.
  • Feta: Use a mildly salty block of feta for the best whipped feta recipe.
  • Storage: Transfer leftovers to an airtight container and store in the fridge for 3-4 days. Give it a stir before serving.
  • Troubleshooting Consistency and Texture: You have two variables to consider here: the amount of yogurt used and the blending time.
    • For a thicker dip, use ½ cup of yogurt, as written in the recipe.
    • For a looser, more sauce-like, spreadable texture, add ¼ cup more (a total of ¾ cup) yogurt.
    • Too grainy? Blend it a bit longer by stopping and scraping the sides a few times.

Nutrition

Calories: 228kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 52mg | Sodium: 656mg | Potassium: 72mg | Fiber: 0.04g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 241IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 308mg | Iron: 0.4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/whipped-feta-dip/feed/ 0
Turkish Ezme https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/ https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/#respond Mon, 25 Aug 2025 18:22:02 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=82987 What Is Turkish Ezme? Ezme is a finely chopped Turkish tomato salad or dip that you can make in 10…]]>

What Is Turkish Ezme?

Ezme is a finely chopped Turkish tomato salad or dip that you can make in 10 minutes. Today, I’m sharing my mom’s version, along with the tips I’ve learned from her, to make it authentically spicy or more gentle.

This year, I made it my mission to share some of my favorite kebab recipes, and you simply can’t talk about kebabs without mentioning their ultimate pairing: Turkish ezme

Turkish ezme on an oval plate from the top view.

Pronounced exactly as it looks, this bright tomato salad (or dip) is one of the most authentic dishes you’ll find alongside kebabs in Turkey.

Often described as a Turkish “salsa” by those trying it for the first time, for those of us who grew up with this simple dish, Turkish ezme is so much more. It’s refreshing, a little spicy, and the perfect companion not only to kebabs but to any grilled meats.

Originating from the regions best known for their kebabs, Gaziantep, Urfa, Adana, and Mardin, Turkish ezme is a staple that’s deeply woven into the kebab tradition. Each region puts its own spin on it; Gaziantep’s version (referred to as Antep Ezme) is usually spicier, while Urfa’s might lean more tomato-forward.

If you’ve ever been to a kebab restaurant, you’ll know what I mean. The moment you order, they don’t ask whether you’d like ezme on the side. They just bring it, often with a side of lavash or pita bread for scooping, along with other staples like cacik (pronounced ja-juk, aka the Turkish cousin of tzatziki) and hummus. It’s part of the ritual, and to me, it’s as essential as the kebab itself.

Traditional Turkish ezme is made with finely chopped onions, ripe tomatoes, and peppers mixed with red pepper paste, lemon juice, and a handful of spices. 

Depending on how it’s prepared, it can be spicy (called Acılı Ezme) or more mild if you remove the seeds of the peppers or cut back on the red pepper flakes.

Ingredients You’ll Need & Why They Matter

The ingredients in Turkish Ezme dip are simple, fresh, and rooted in the flavors of the Eastern Mediterranean. While it uses everyday ingredients, there are some nuances that I’d like to share to ensure your version is as close to the original.

Ingredients for the recipe with text on each ingredient.

Yellow Onion: Traditional Ezme is made with yellow or white onions. At first, a whole onion may seem like a lot, but once it’s finely chopped and mixed in, it melts into the salad and gives just the right balance. 

While not traditional, red onion would also work, but it would have a slightly sweeter flavor.

Garlic: The authentic version of this Turkish dipping sauce does not use garlic, but my mom always did, so I am following in her footsteps. That small tweak is what makes my family’s version unique. It can be omitted if you are a purist.

Kosher Salt: I use kosher salt not only to flavor the overall ezme but also to soften the chopped onion and garlic. It also helps mellow their sharp, raw flavors.

Tomatoes: Authentic Turkish ezme is traditionally made with tomatoes from the Southeastern region of Turkey. Because of the hot, dry climate, those tomatoes are less juicy than what we often find here in the US.

For the best results, use firm, not overly ripe, tomatoes such as Roma, heirloom, or even cherry tomatoes. Whatever you choose, it’s important to remove the seeds.

Ezme should be juicy enough to scoop up with bread but not watery. If taking the seeds out feels like too much work, you can chop the tomatoes finely and strain them briefly through a fine mesh sieve to get rid of the excess liquid.

In the winter months, when good tomatoes are harder to come by, some people turn to canned whole peeled tomatoes. While that can work in a pinch, I find the taste of fresh tomatoes makes the biggest difference in capturing the true spirit of ezme.

Green Peppers: The authentic recipe uses Turkish sivri biber. The name literally means “pointed pepper,” and that’s exactly what it looks like: long, thin, and tapering to a point. 

Since I cannot get my hands on sivri biber here in the US, I use Anaheim, jalapeno, or serranos as an alternative. I remove seeds to keep the spice levels mild, but if you prefer yours spicy (and want to make an acili ezme recipe, as we say in Turkish), feel free to keep some.

Red Pepper Paste (or Tomato Paste): Red pepper paste is yet another traditional ingredient used in most kebab and meze recipes. I buy mine online. Tukas’s red pepper paste is my favorite. However, tomato paste is a good substitute.

Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice is the best, but if bottled juice is all you have on hand, that would work in a pinch.

Fresh Herbs: I kept the recipe simple and only used fresh parsley, but my mom always added a few tablespoons of chopped fresh mint and dill in addition to parsley. If you are growing your own herbs, this is a fantastic recipe to put them to good use.

Sumac: A sprinkle of sumac is the finishing touch for this Turkish salad. I buy sumac online, but you can find it in the Middle Eastern/Mediterranean section of your grocery store. If you can’t get your hands on it, you can omit it. Your salad will still taste great.

Urfa Chili Pepper (or Aleppo Pepper or Red Pepper Flakes): For a smoky finish, use the traditional Urfa chili (Urfa biber). If you prefer a bit more straightforward, less smoky, bright finish, use Aleppo chili (Pul biber). If you do not have either of those, a pinch of any red pepper flakes you have on hand would also work.

Optional Add Ins:

Classic Turkish ezme is usually made with the ingredients I listed above, but depending on the region and sometimes the creativity of the chef, you will find different variations. The add-ins below are not traditional in every version, but they are wonderful ways to build on the base and make it your own.
Pomegranate Molasses (optional): You’ll often see restaurants finish off this Turkish red sauce with a drizzle of pomegranate molasses, especially if they are serving it as a part of a meze platter. 

While it is an optional ingredient in this recipe, if you are into Mediterranean cooking, I highly recommend investing in a bottle. It provides a unique depth, a fruity tartness that can’t be replicated with just lemon juice.

When shopping for pomegranate molasses, look for a brand that lists only one ingredient: pomegranate concentrate. That way, you’ll get the purest taste without added sugar or preservatives. The one I always buy online is Eastanbul.

Olive Oil: A tablespoon (or two) of olive oil drizzled at the last minute makes it richer. I recommend an extra virgin olive oil that is mild in flavor, such as Garcia de la Cruz.

Walnuts: A close cousin of Turkish ezme is a dish called Gavurdağı Salatası. In some parts of Turkey, it’s common to add a handful of chopped walnuts, which makes the salad richer and adds a pleasant crunch. You can mix them in with the vegetables or simply sprinkle them on top as a garnish.

Pomegranate Seeds: For a beautiful pop of color, a juicy burst of sweet-tart flavor, and a delicate crunch that makes the dish feel even more special, you can add (2 tablespoons) pomegranate seeds.

How to Make Turkish Ezme?

Making this authentic recipe is surprisingly simple, and it all starts with fresh, high-quality ingredients. This Turkish dip gets its signature texture from chopping everything very finely by hand, which gives the salad its unique, crushed consistency. Here is how I make it in my kitchen:

Person chopping onions.

Step 1 – Mince and Soften the Aromatics: On a large cutting board, finely chop the onion and garlic. Sprinkle them with kosher salt and gently knead the mixture with your hands.
Adding the salt not only helps soften the raw onions but also mellow their sharpness. Transfer the mixture to a medium-size mixing bowl.

A collage of images showing of the cutting tomatoes and peppers.

Step 2 – Add the Fresh Vegetables: Using a sharp knife, carefully remove the seeds from the tomatoes and chop them finely. If you’d rather not fuss with seeding, chop them and give them a quick press through a fine mesh sieve to remove the extra liquid.

Next, remove the seeds from your peppers and chop them as finely as possible. When cutting peppers, I highly recommend wearing gloves if you have them. The oils can cause a burning sensation on your hands and sting really badly if you accidentally touch your eyes.

Transfer the tomatoes and the peppers to the bowl. Some cooks use a food processor for convenience, but I find it’s easy to over-process and end up with more of a puree of vegetables. I think hand chopping is worth the effort, especially if you are looking for the most authentic version of this Turkish red sauce.

Person mixing the ingredients for ezme in a bowl.

Step 3 – Mix in the Flavorings: Stir in the red pepper paste (or tomato paste), lemon juice, chopped parsley, sumac, and Urfa chili flakes (if using).

Step 4 – Thoroughly Combine: Using a large spoon, gently mix everything together until all the ingredients are well incorporated and evenly coated. Don’t rush this step, as ezme should feel like one unified mix, not separate vegetables.

Step 5 – Finish and Serve: You can serve it straight from the bowl, but if you want to do it the way we do it in Turkey, then transfer it to a small to medium-sized oval plate. Drizzle with pomegranate molasses or olive oil (if using) and serve right away, ideally with some warm pita or lavash on the side.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips

Make Ahead: This Turkish dip actually tastes even better after it has rested. I often make it a few hours in advance and let it chill in the fridge so the flavors can deepen and meld.

Keep in mind that the juices will settle as they sit, so you may have to drain them before serving.

Storage: Leftover ezme keeps well for 2-3 days when stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator. Just be sure to give it a good stir before serving, and again, drain the juices as needed.

Freezing: This dish is best when enjoyed fresh, so I do not recommend freezing it as it will lose its signature texture when thawed.

Expert Tips from My Turkish Kitchen

Use a fine mince when chopping by hand: The secret to ezme’s classic texture is how finely everything is chopped. You don’t want big chunks in there. Take your time when chopping; it is part of what makes this recipe so good.

Dealing with excess juice: Earlier, I mentioned removing the seeds from the tomatoes to get the authentic texture that ezme is known for. But if you don’t mind some extra juice, that’s perfectly fine too. It will still taste fresh and delicious.

Using a food processor: My mom would probably turn in her grave if she saw me recommending a food processor when making ezme. Traditionally, everything is chopped by hand, and I still believe that’s the best way to get the right texture. That said, I know it can be a real time-saver, especially if you’re making a big batch.

If you do decide to use one, here’s what I recommend:

  • Start with the harder vegetables (onions, garlic, peppers) and chop them finely before adding the softer tomatoes.
  • Once you add the tomatoes, use short pulses instead of running the machine continuously. This helps you avoid ending up with a puree and keeps that slightly crushed consistency that makes ezme special.

Make it your own: Once you’ve made the basic recipe I shared below, try creating your version by adding a bit more heat (there is a reason people ask for ‘acili ezme’, the spicy version of this dish) or incorporating some of the optional ingredients I mentioned above.

How to Serve Turkish Ezme (The Ultimate Kebab Side Dish)

Ezme is one of those dishes that goes with almost everything. While it’s a classic alongside kebabs, its fresh, tangy flavor also makes it a great match for other Mediterranean favorites, from grilled meats to mezze platters.

  • With Kebabs or Grilled Meats: Ezme is the ultimate side to dishes like Adana Kebab or Chicken Kebab. Its acidity and spice help balance the richness of the meat, which is exactly why it’s such a common pairing in Turkey.
  • Part of a Meze Platter: Add it to a Mediterranean-inspired mezze platter alongside hummus, baba ganoush, and muhammara. Don’t forget the lavash, Turkish pide bread, or pita bread (or pita chips) for scooping! This dish is meant for sharing.
  • As a Spread or Sandwich Topping: Use leftover ezme as a spread for sandwiches or wraps the next day. It’s especially good on my Grilled Lamb Burgers, adding a bright, tangy kick that makes them even more special.
Spicy ezme served on an oval plate from the top view.
Print

Turkish Ezme Recipe

This authentic Turkish Ezme is a refreshing tomato and pepper salad that pairs perfectly with kebabs or grilled meats. Quick, fresh, and versatile. Vegan, no-cook, and gluten-free recipe.
Course Side Dish – Salad
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 73kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 yellow onion medium size
  • 1 clove garlic finely minced
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 4 medium tomatoes
  • 2 green peppers Anaheim, jalapeño, or serrano, seeded
  • 1 tablespoon Turkish red pepper paste or tomato paste
  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 1 tablespoon sumac
  • ¼ teaspoon Urfa chili Aleppo pepper, or red pepper flakes (optional)
  • 2 tablespoons pomegranate molasses optional

Instructions

  • On a large cutting board, finely chop onion and garlic. Sprinkle with kosher salt and knead gently to soften. Transfer to a large bowl.
    Person chopping onions for ezme.
  • Remove the seeds of your tomatoes and give them a fine chop. Alternatively, you can chop them first and strain through a fine mesh strainer to remove the juices. Transfer the tomatoes to the bowl.
    Person chopping tomatoes and peppers on a cutting board.
  • Chop the seeded peppers finely and add them to the bowl.
  • Stir in the red pepper paste, lemon juice, parsley, sumac, and chili flakes (if using). Mix well to combine.
    Person mixing ezme salad ingredients in a bowl.
  • If using, drizzle with pomegranate molasses and serve*.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 to 2 1/2 cups of ezme, which is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Storage: Leftovers will keep well for 2-3 days when stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator.
  • *Let it rest before serving: It is optional, but if you have the time, chill it in the fridge for about 30 minutes before serving. This gives the ingredients a chance to mingle and develop deeper flavor. Just keep in mind that it will release some of its juices as it sits, so you may want to spoon out the excess liquid before bringing it to the table.
  • Adjusting the spiciness: If you prefer your ezme to be on the milder side, I recommend taking the time to remove all of the seeds of your peppers and avoid using red pepper flakes.

Nutrition

Calories: 73kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.5g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 624mg | Potassium: 512mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 1623IU | Vitamin C: 77mg | Calcium: 34mg | Iron: 1mg

FAQ’s

Is ezme spicy?

Ezme has a gentle heat, but you can easily control the spice level. If you prefer it mild (or not spicy at all), take the time to remove all of the seeds of your peppers and omit using red pepper flakes.

How does Acılı ezme vary by region?

In Turkey, every region puts its own spin on ezme. In Gaziantep, it’s usually spicier, in Urfa it leans more tomato-forward, and in Adana it often includes extra pepper paste. My mom’s version here is closest to what you would find in kebab restaurants across the country.

Can I make it less acidic?

Absolutely. If you’re sensitive to acidity, try reducing the amount of fresh lemon juice or skipping the pomegranate molasses. It will still taste fresh and delicious.

How long does Turkish ezme last in the fridge?

As long as it is stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator, it should still be fresh for up to 3 days.

Other Turkish Salads You Might Like:

If you’re already convinced to make this Turkish ezme salad recipe, you’re already on your way to creating a fantastic feast. Here are a few more fresh and delicious Turkish salad recipes to serve alongside your grilled meats:

  • My go-to Turkish summer salad, Piyaz, is A zesty and refreshing salad made with white beans, red onions, tomatoes, and parsley, all tossed in a simple lemon-olive oil dressing. It’s a perfect complement to rich, grilled meats.
  • For a simple side salad that will pretty much work with any grilled meat and vegetable, look no further than my Turkish Shepherd Salad.

This post may contain affiliate links. If you purchase through these links, I may earn a small commission, at no additional cost to you.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/turkish-ezme/feed/ 0
Texas Caviar Recipe (Cowboy Caviar) https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/ https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/#comments Wed, 25 Jun 2025 18:24:29 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=22788 For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re…]]>

For years, I avoided this cowboy bean salad anytime I saw it at a potluck or outdoor party. If you’re like me and didn’t grow up eating it, you might agree that some versions can be overly sweet.

Then I came across Dorie Greenspan’s version in her cookbook Everyday Dorie (affiliate link) and decided to give it another shot. To my surprise, it was nothing like what I had tasted before. Her cowboy caviar dressing was perfectly tangy with just a touch of sweetness, balancing out the earthy beans in the best way.

Cowboy caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.

This recipe, sometimes called Texas Caviar, Cowboy Caviar, Cowboy Salad, or even Cowboy Bean Dip, is my take on her version, with a few minor tweaks.

Whatever name you use, it’s one of the easiest dishes to throw together, and it works as a dip, a salad, or a chunky salsa perfect with a side of tortilla chips.

Texas Caviar Ingredients

For a quick overview, find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card below. But for truly foolproof results, here are my top tips as you shop and prep:

The Dressing Ingredients:

Some versions of this recipe use bottled Italian dressing, but I find those to be overly oily and lacking in depth. What makes this Cowboy Caviar dip different is the homemade lime and olive oil dressing. It’s just enough to coat the beans and veggies without weighing them down, adding brightness and balance in every bite.

Ingredients for cowboy caviar's dressing.

Here are a couple of helpful ingredient notes as you make the dressing:

Lime zest and lime juice: My version of the Texas Caviar dressing uses both lime zest and fresh lime juice to bring out a bright, tangy flavor. Four tablespoons of lime juice might sound like a lot, but trust me, it’s just the right amount.

If you prefer a milder taste, you can use 2 tablespoons of red wine vinegar and reduce the lime juice to 2 tablespoons.

And just a quick tip: it’s always easier to zest the lime before squeezing it.

Spices: I use a small amount of ground cumin and sweet paprika, following Dorie’s recipe. I think they add a beautiful depth and a welcome punch. Still, if you’re not a fan of either spice, feel free to leave them out.

Sweetener: I almost always reach for natural sweeteners like honey or maple syrup, but granulated sugar works in a pinch if that’s what you have on hand.

Garlic: Whenever I make a salad dressing, I love using fresh garlic. I think the sharp bite and depth of flavor just can’t be replicated. But if you prefer something milder, you can substitute it with 1 teaspoon of garlic powder.

Salad Ingredients:

A photo showing what's in Texas caviar.

Beans: I use a combination of black beans and black-eyed peas in my version of this Cowboy Caviar salad. In my opinion, black-eyed peas are pretty much a must in any Texas Caviar dip recipe. You can swap red kidney beans or pinto beans in place of the black beans if you’d like, and you’ll still get the heart of the dish.

Canned beans help keep things quick and easy, but you can absolutely cook them from scratch if that’s your preference.

Just be sure to rinse and dry them well before assembling the salad to avoid extra liquid watering it down.

Corn: In the summer, I love using fresh shucked corn when it’s in season. But if you’re making this at another time of year, frozen (and thawed) or canned (rinsed and drained) corn works just as well.

Onion: I use a combination of finely chopped green onions and red onions because I love the distinct flavors each one adds. You get a mix of color, crunch, and both mild and sharp flavors. If you prefer a milder taste, you can leave out the red onion. Or if you want something with more bite, skip the green and just use red.

Peppers: Most Texas Caviar recipes use a combination of red bell peppers and jalapeño, and for good reason. Each one brings its own unique flavor. If you like a bit of heat, feel free to leave some of the jalapeño seeds in for a touch of spiciness.

Tomatoes: During the summer months, I love using colorful cherry tomatoes for this Texas Caviar dip. But really, any kind of tomato will work. Heirloom, beefsteak, or even regular Roma tomatoes are all good options. Just be sure to cut them into small, bite-sized pieces so they mix easily with the other ingredients.

Avocado: It is optional and not traditional, but I think a ripe avocado makes a great addition, especially if you’re planning to serve this as a dip with chips on the side. Just be sure to cut it into small cubes so it blends in nicely.

Fresh Herbs: I used a handful of finely chopped fresh cilantro leaves, but if you are not a fan, you can use fresh parsley instead.

How To Make Texas Caviar?

Making this recipe takes no more than 15-20 minutes and requires no special equipment. 

Step 1 – Make the Cowboy Caviar Dressing: 

Person making Texas caviar dressing.

In a mixing bowl, whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, paprika, kosher salt, honey, and garlic until fully combined.

Or, if you prefer, add everything to a mason jar, put the lid on, and give it a good shake.

You can also make the dressing a day or two ahead of time to speed things up even more when you’re ready to assemble the dip.

Step 2 – Assemble the salad:

Cowboy caviar salad from the top view in a bowl.

In a large salad bowl, combine the drained and rinsed black beans and black-eyed peas with the corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeños, tomatoes, and chopped cilantro.

If you’re using avocado, I recommend adding it just before serving so it doesn’t brown.

Step 3 – Drizzle and Serve:

Images showing how to make Cowboy caviar.

Drizzle the dressing over the salad and gently toss to combine, being careful not to break up the beans too much.

This is also a good time to give it a taste and adjust the seasoning if needed.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips:

One of the best things about this Cowboy Salad recipe is that it can be made ahead of time (one or two days). In fact, I recommend it because the extra time allows the flavors to mingle and develop. Here’s how I do it:

  • To make ahead:
    Prepare the dressing and chop all the salad ingredients except the avocado. Toss everything together in a large bowl, drizzle with the dressing, cover tightly, and refrigerate. If you’re using avocado, add it just before serving to keep it from browning.
  • Storing leftovers:
    Transfer any leftover Cowboy Caviar to an airtight container and keep it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Before serving, give it a good stir and freshen it up with a squeeze of lime juice and a sprinkle of salt if needed.

Expert Tips for The Best Texas Caviar

While this recipe is pretty straightforward, below are a few helpful tips for the best results.

  • Let it rest: This step is optional, but I recommend letting the salad rest in the fridge for about an hour before serving. It gives the tangy lime juice dressing time to soak into the beans and veggies, bringing everything together.
  • Evenly cut vegetables: The most time-consuming part of this recipe is chopping the vegetables, but it’s worth taking your time. Aim to cut everything into similar-sized pieces so each bite feels balanced. Try to slice the tomatoes thinly and cut the peppers into small, bite-sized pieces, ideally smaller than the black-eyed peas.
  • Be gentle as you toss: When mixing the salad, go slowly and gently to avoid breaking the beans. This helps keep the texture nice and prevents everything from turning into mush. 

Cowboy Caviar Variations and Substitutions

Making this Cowboy Caviar dip your own is easy because, let’s face it, this simple recipe is endlessly customizable. Here are a few ideas to get you started:

  • Add more veggies: You can pack your Cowboy Caviar with even more fresh vegetables. Try thinly sliced cucumbers, chopped celery, or even finely diced radishes for extra crunch and color.
  • Add fruit: I’ve seen versions of this recipe made with sweet fruit like mango or pineapple. It might sound unexpected, but the sweetness pairs nicely with the tangy dressing, adding a refreshing twist, especially when served as a dip with chips.
  • Switch up the dressing: While my favorite part of this recipe is the tangy lime dressing, I sometimes change things up with my chili lime vinaigrette, which incorporates chili powder and adds a more Mexican-inspired twist.
  • Toss in grains: I love adding a cup of cooked quinoa, wild rice or farro to make it a filling salad especially if I am making this recipe as a part of my weekly meal prep.
  • Make it vegan: If you prefer a vegan version, just swap the honey for maple syrup or agave.

What To Serve with Texas Caviar?

It’s no secret that this recipe makes a great side dish or appetizer, whether you’re heading to a summer BBQ, a potluck, or packing lunch for work. But if you’d like to turn it into a full meal, you have plenty of options. Here are a few ideas:

  • Grilled Meats and seafood: Serve it alongside grilled chicken, shrimp, or salmon for a light and colorful plate. It’s a perfect match for summer cookouts or easy weeknight dinners.
  • With chips on the side: This Cowboy Salsa recipe makes a great appetizer when served with tortilla chips. I like using the scoopable kind, so you can get a little bit of everything in each bite.
  • With eggs: Scrambled eggs wrapped in a tortilla with a generous spoonful of Texas Caviar makes an excellent breakfast burrito. It adds freshness, texture, and just the right amount of zing to your morning meal.

FAQs

What is Texas Caviar?

Texas Caviar is a recipe originally created and served by Helen Corbitt, the culinary director of Neiman Marcus, in 1940s Dallas.

Made with a combination of canned or cooked beans (i.e. red, black, or pinto), black-eyed peas, peppers, tomatoes, garlic, and other extras like corn, avocado, mango, and various herbs and spices, since then it has stood the test of time and become a Southern classic.

Texas Caviar vs. Cowboy Caviar: Is There a Difference?

The dish was originally created in Texas, which is how it got the name “Texas Caviar.” Over time, people started calling it “Cowboy Caviar” as a fun, casual nickname.

How far in advance can you make cowboy caviar?

You can make Cowboy Caviar up to 2 days in advance. Just store it in an airtight container in the fridge, and it should still taste fresh and delicious. If you’re planning to include avocado, wait to add it until right before serving to keep it from browning.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

More Delicious Bean Salads You’ll Love

Fan of bean salads? Me too! Here are a few more that you might like:

  • My Corn and Black Bean Salad is yet another great alternative to a bean salad that you can serve with chips on the side.
  • What makes my Five Bean Salad recipe the best bean salad is the garlicky mustard dressing. Just like this cowboy caviar recipe, it uses a combination of canned beans and some lightly boiled fresh green beans.
  • If you have extra black eyed peas, then my Black Eyed Peas Salad is just as fresh and satisfying. Not to mention, it takes 15 minutes to make.
Texas caviar in a bowl with two spoons on the side.
Print

Texas Caviar Recipe

This Texas Caviar (aka Cowboy Caviar)loaded with black-eyed peas, corn, tomatoes, peppers, and tangy lime dressing makes the best salad, dip, or side dish. Ready in 30 minutes and can be made ahead.
Course Salad
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 192kcal

Ingredients

For The Dressing:

  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon lime zest
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon paprika sweet or smoked
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon honey
  • 2 cloves garlic minced

For The Caviar Dip:

  • 1 can black beans 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • 1 can black eyed peas 15-oz can, drained and rinsed
  • ½ cup corn kernels frozen (and thawed), canned (and drained) or fresh corn would all work
  • 3 scallions both white and green parts are chopped
  • cup red onion chopped finely or diced
  • 1 red bell peppers chopped (approx. 1/2 cup)
  • 1 jalapeno pepper seeded and chopped
  • ½ cup cherry tomatoes sliced thinly
  • ½ avocado ripe – cut into small cubes
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro rinsed and chopped

To Serve With (Optional)

  • Your favorite hot Sauce
  • Tortilla Chips

Instructions

  • To make the dressing: Whisk together the olive oil, lime zest, lime juice, ground cumin, smoked paprika, salt, honey and garlic. Set it aside.
    Person making Texas caviar dressing with lime juice.
  • For the Texas Caviar dip (or salad): Place, black beans, black eyed peas, corn kernels, scallions, red onion, bell peppers, jalapeno pepper, cherry tomatoes, avocado, and fresh cilantro in a bowl.
    The ingredients for Cowboy caviar in a bowl from the top view.
  • Drizzle it with the dressing and give it a gentle toss. Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.
    Person drizzling the salad with dressing and mixing it.
  • If preferred, add in a few dashes of your favorite hot sauce and serve with tortilla chips.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 5-6 cups of Cowboy caviar ideal for serving 6 adults as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving and does not include the calories coming from (optional) tortilla chips.
  • Make ahead: You can make this recipe up to 2 days in advance. If you go in that direction, add the avocado right before serving to avoid browning.
  • Storage: Keep leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
  • If you want to go with more of the traditional Italian salad dressing route instead of the lime dressing I used, feel free to use my Italian salad dressing below: ¼ cups extra virgin olive oil
    2 tablespoons white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
    1 tablespoon freshly squeezed lemon juice
    1 clove of garlic, minced
    1 teaspoon dried basil
    1/4 teaspoon dried oregano
    ¼ teaspoon crushed red pepper (optional)
    ½ teaspoon Kosher salt (I use Diamond kosher salt)
    ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Nutrition

Calories: 192kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 326mg | Potassium: 386mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 982IU | Vitamin C: 39mg | Calcium: 31mg | Iron: 2mg

This post was originally published in March 2019. It has been updated with some additional information with no changes to the original recipe in July 2025.

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/texas-caviar/feed/ 44
Burrata Caprese https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/ https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/#comments Wed, 18 Jun 2025 22:05:34 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=67454 Key Ingredients to make Caprese Salad with Burrata Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a…]]>

Key Ingredients to make Caprese Salad with Burrata

Caprese burrata salad is a cinch to make and requires just a few key ingredients from the grocery store or farmer’s market. You can find the full list of ingredients in the recipe card at the bottom of this post. Below are some helpful tips as you shop for this recipe’s ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Burrata cheese: Fresh burrata cheese is a soft Italian cheese with a delicate, creamy center, similar in taste and texture to fresh mozzarella. It’s usually sold submerged in water in a tub. Before using it in your salad, take it out of the fridge and let it come closer to room temperature to enhance its flavor and texture. 

Also, drain off any excess liquid before tearing it into pieces.

Tomatoes: I like to use a mix of large heirloom tomatoes and sweet cherry tomatoes. The juicy heirlooms bring a meaty, steak-like texture to the salad, while cherry tomatoes add a pop of sweetness. Feel free to use any variety you have on hand, including Roma, beefsteak, vine-ripened, or grape tomatoes.

To get the best flavor, keep your tomatoes on the counter (not in the fridge) and try to use them within a few days of buying them. For easy, clean slices, I recommend using a serrated knife.

Fresh basil leaves: To finish the salad, use whole basil leaves or tear them gently with your hands instead of cutting them with a knife, which can bruise their delicate leaves and release bitter flavors.

Balsamic vinegar: If your budget allows, look for a traditional, aged balsamic vinegar from Modena. Its deep sweetness and complex flavor will elevate the salad. However, you can absolutely use a more affordable condiment-style balsamic vinegar and it’ll still taste delicious!

Extra virgin olive oil: I prefer a single-origin extra virgin olive oil with mild, fruity notes for this recipe. It adds a lovely finishing touch and complements the creamy burrata perfectly.

Seasonings: Keep it simple with kosher salt and freshly cracked black pepper. A final sprinkle of flaky salt adds a nice, salty crunch.

How to Make this Burrata Caprese Recipe?

The combination of burrata, tomato and basil is just as delicious here as a traditional caprese salad. The good news is that making it is quick and easy with only a few steps:

A collage of images showing how to make burrata Caprese recipe.

Step 1 – Prepare tomatoes: Slice the larger tomatoes using a serrated knife into ⅓-inch thick slices. If using cherry tomatoes, cut them in half (or you can quarter them as well). 

Grab a large serving platter and arrange the sliced tomatoes overlapping until it covers the bottom of the plate. 

Sprinkle it with salt to ensure they are properly seasoned.

Step 2 – Add burrata: Place burrata balls in the center of the serving platter. Alternatively, gently cut them into smaller pieces with a sharp paring knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes. Alternatively, you can carefully tear into small chunks by hand.

Step 3 – Season: Sprinkle the tomatoes and burrata with the remaining salt and black pepper. Finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil and balsamic vinegar ensuring that each slice of tomato gets a bit of oil and a bit of balsamic vinegar.

Garnish with torn basil leaves before serving.

How to Store Leftovers?

Leftover burrata caprese will keep in an airtight container in the fridge for 2–3 days. Keep in mind that the burrata’s creamy center will solidify a bit over time, so it won’t be quite as creamy on days two and three.

Before serving leftovers, drain off any excess liquid to prevent them from becoming soggy. To “revive” your burrata caprese, add a few fresh tomato slices and some fresh basil leaves, then drizzle with a little extra olive oil and balsamic vinegar. Finish with a sprinkle of flaky salt for a fresh, vibrant bite.

Expert Tips

  • Use peak season tomatoes for the ultimate flavor. While creamy burrata may seem like the star of the show, slightly ripe, juicy tomatoes are just as crucial for the most delicious dish. When shopping for tomatoes for this recipe, take a moment to ensure that they are not overly ripe and free of any bruises.
  • Season tomatoes liberally:  Don’t be shy about salting the tomatoes. Properly seasoning them draws out their natural juices and enhances their sweet, vibrant flavor.
  • Serve at room temperature: To achieve the perfect burrata “ooze”, bring it to room temperature before tearing and adding it to the salad. This way, it will be extra creamy with a soft and spreadable texture.
  • Presentation is key: This is a showstopping salad that will become the talk of the table. Be creative – assemble the tomatoes somewhat haphazardly and whimsical. Allow the burrata to shine in the center or scattered into pieces.
  • Resist the urge to overcomplicate it: This is a super simple tomato salad that truly shines when made with in-season, high-quality ingredients. Stick to the basics and let the fresh flavors speak for themselves. There is no need for extra bells and whistles!
  • Double the recipe or halve it for a small crowd: The recipe below serves four, but I could honestly eat the whole thing myself. Double or triple the recipe for a large party, or halve it when serving for one or two.

Variations

While the combination of basil, burrata, and tomatoes is quite simple and effective, you can take this recipe to the next level by changing it up a bit. Here are a few variations I’ve tried and recommend:

  • Use balsamic reduction instead of balsamic vinegar: Balsamic reduction (also known as sweet balsamic glaze) is reduced balsamic vinegar that is sticky and sweet, and can add just another level of flavor to this burrata caprese salad recipe. Simply drizzle your burrata salad with balsamic glaze at the very end (instead of the balsamic vinegar drizzle) for a robust and tangy finish.
  • Change up the Dressing: Take it up a notch with a simple basil dressing for caprese salad, like Basil Vinaigrette or go for Balsamic and Lemon Dressing.
  • Add avocado: Although unconventional, a ripe avocado adds another layer of creaminess and color to this tomato burrata salad. Simply slice a ripe avocado (or cut it in cubes) for an added layer of flavor and texture.
  • Add summer fruit: Add a handful of summer berries, such as sliced juicy strawberries or raspberries, or some ripe stone fruit like peaches and apricots for a burst of color and natural sweetness.

What to Serve With Caprese Burrata Salad

When you put this Caprese salad with burrata on the table, I think we can all agree that it will be the star of the show. Make it a part of your Memorial Day Menu, Labor Day Menu, or 4th of July celebrations! Here are some pairing and serving suggestions:

  • Crusty Bread: Serve it with warm crusty bread like French baguette or No Knead Olive Bread on the side for an appetizer that is guaranteed to impress.
  • Bruschetta: Slice a baguette, brush with olive oil and toast just before serving alongside the tomato caprese with fresh burrata, or make it a part of your Meat and Cheese Platter.
  • Grilled or Roasted Meats: Give it a nice boost of protein and serve it as a side dish with Marinated Shrimp Skewers, Grilled Mahi Mahi, Greek Yogurt Chicken or Shrimp Scampi.
  • Pasta: Go all-out Italian and serve it with a main dish, such as my Garlic Butter Pasta or Lemon Ricotta Pasta.
  • Crisp White Wine: If all else fails, treat yourself to this gorgeous salad and a crisp, chilled glass of wine like an Italian Pinot Grigio or Sauvignon Blanc.
Burrata Caprese styled on a plate from the top view.

FAQs

What is burrata?

Creamy burrata cheese is an Italian cow’s milk cheese that features an outer shell of fresh mozzarella wrapped around a soft-center of stracciatella (cheese curds and cream).

Where does burrata cheese come from?

Burrata originated in Puglia, Italy at the Castel del Monte and since has become a global sensation around the world.

What’s the difference between burrata and caprese?

Burrata is the soft cheese ball with a creamy center, whereas caprese is the simple Italian salad that can be made with either burrata or fresh mozzarella.

What is the difference between burrata and mozzarella?

Burrata and mozzarella are both creamy, white, semi-soft Italian cheeses very similar in appearance. However, burrata is made with an outer layer of fresh mozzarella and filled with soft, stringy curd and cream known as stracciatella (the cheese, not the gelato). As a result, it has a super creamy texture and taste. Mozzarella is made from cow or water buffalo milk that is firm and bouncy.

How to cut burrata?

Instead of slicing it with a knife (as you would with mozzarella cheese), try breaking it using your clean hands. I usually like to break it into chunks, revealing all the creamy bits, and place it over the tomatoes.

How do you eat burrata?

Burrata is typically first sliced with a knife (or torn with clean hands) to reveal its creamy soft center, drizzled with olive oil and flakey sea salt, then eaten just as is with a fork, summer produce, or toasted bread.

Other Tomato Salad Recipes You Might Also Like:

Whether you simply love the combination of tomato, basil, and burrata, or need some delicious ideas to use up your summer tomatoes, I have plenty of recipes I know you’ll love. Below are a few that I make over and over again during the peak tomato season:

  • My Caprese Chicken Sandwich is an open-faced sandwich that’s a wonderful weeknight recipe, with the same classic flavor profile as burrata caprese. It’s a fantastic summer dinner idea.
  • For a quick and easy weeknight dinner, my Pizza Caprese celebrates the flavors of the classic Italian recipe by turning it into a pizza that’s especially great when serving kids.
  • If you want to travel down to the South Mediterranean, try my Piyaz – Turkish Tomato White Bean Salad for another tomato salad recipe that’s a bit different but just as delicious.
  • Try my quick Tomato Cucumber Mozzarella Salad for a simple summer side that you can make in less than 15 minutes.
Burrata Caprese placed on a plate from the top view.
Print

Burrata Caprese Recipe

Put your fresh summer tomatoes to good use with this Burrata Caprese recipe that you can make in 10 minutes.This easy summer salad combines the classic Italian flavors we all love, but uses Burrata instead of mozzarella cheese.
Course Salad
Cuisine Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 93kcal

Ingredients

  • 4-5 large tomatoes
  • ¾ teaspoon kosher salt or flaky sea salt
  • 2 balls burrata cheese 8 ounces in total
  • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves torn
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil plus more for finishing
  • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze

Instructions

  • Slice tomatoes into ⅓-inch thick slices. Arrange them on a serving platter. Sprinkle tomato slices with ½ teaspoon salt.
  • Arrange burrata balls in the middle or gently break them with a sharp pairing knife and scatter the chunks over the sliced tomatoes.
  • Sprinkle everything with the rest of the salt and freshly ground black pepper. Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar.
  • Garnish it with basil leaves. Serve!

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe serves 4 generously. I usually serve one ball of burrata and two medium-sized tomatoes for 2 people. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply this recipe using this ratio.
  • Tomatoes: While we use heirloom tomatoes in the recipe, you can use any type of tomatoes you have on hand. Cherry tomatoes, vine-ripened tomatoes and even roasted tomatoes would work in this recipe.
  • You can serve burrata as a whole or gently break it to reveal the creamy center. This way, your guests can easily serve themselves.
  • Storage: Leftover burrata caprese will keep for 2-3 days in an airtight container in the fridge. However, keep in mind the buratta’s cream will solidify and lose its viscosity over time, so it will not be as creamy on days two and three.

Nutrition

Calories: 93kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 0.4mg | Sodium: 444mg | Potassium: 307mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1108IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 21mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/burrata-caprese/feed/ 2
Greek Lamb Meatballs https://foolproofliving.com/greek-lamb-meatballs/ https://foolproofliving.com/greek-lamb-meatballs/#comments Mon, 24 Mar 2025 20:28:28 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=80784 Meatball dinners are a lifesaver when you’re short on time. If you love these Greek lamb meatballs, feel free to…]]>

Meatball dinners are a lifesaver when you’re short on time. If you love these Greek lamb meatballs, feel free to check out some of my other favorites, like Turkish Meatballs for a bold, spiced twist or Turkey Zucchini Meatballs for a lighter, veggie-packed option.

And if you’re in the mood for something handheld, my new Lamb Burger recipe is just as flavorful and quick to make. It’s perfect for a weeknight dinner with tzatziki on top.

What You Need To Know in A Nutshell:

  • Taming the Gamey Flavor: Lamb has a stronger, more distinct taste than beef, which some find too “gamey.” This ground lamb meatballs recipe uses a mix of fresh mint (or parsley), lemon zest, and feta cheese (a small amount of dairy) to help mellow that flavor, making these meatballs well-balanced and delicious.
  • Make Ahead Friendly: Prepping these simple lamb meatballs a day ahead makes them an ideal protein-packed meal for busy weeknights and allows the flavors to develop for an even better taste. But you can also cook them immediately if you are short on time.
  • Evenly Sized Meatballs: A small cookie scoop (affiliate link) is a game-changer for portioning—ensuring uniform meatballs that cook evenly every time. If you don’t have one, a tablespoon works just as well—just aim for consistent sizes for even cooking.
Greek lamb meatballs served over a bed of lemon orzo garnished with tzatziki sauce and mint.

How To Make Greek Lamb Meatballs?

This lamb meatball recipe comes together with a few easy steps. You can serve them with tzatziki on the side or use them in a Greek-inspired grain bowl for a satisfying weeknight dinner. But first, let me show you how to make them:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  1. Gather your ingredients: You can find the complete list of ingredients in the recipe card below, but here are some ingredient substitutions:
    • Ground Meat: While this recipe is made with lean ground lamb, you can use a 50/50 mix of ground beef and lamb for a milder flavor.
    • Bread crumbs: Panko breadcrumbs or regular bread crumbs can be used interchangeably in this recipe. Use a gluten-free brand if you are following a gluten-free diet.
    • Fresh herbs: Fresh mint is a classic pairing with lamb, but fresh parsley, fresh oregano, or fresh dill can also be used.
    • Cheese: Feta cheese is one of the most popular cheeses used in most Mediterranean recipes, but crumbled goat cheese can also be used. Alternatively, if you prefer your lamb mince meatballs to be dairy-free, omit using them.
  2. Preheat & Prep: Preheat oven to 425 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
A collage of images showing how to make the lamb meatball and feta mixture.
  1. Mix Ingredients: In a large bowl, combine the ground lamb, onion, panko breadcrumbs (or regular breadcrumbs), garlic, spices, egg, lemon zest, feta (if using), and chopped herbs. Give the meatball mixture a good mix until all the ingredients are thoroughly combined. If you have the time, cover it with stretch film and let it marinade in the fridge for an hour or even overnight. Otherwise, move on to the next step.
Lamb mince balls formed into a ball and placed on a sheet pan.
  1. Form meatballs: Using a small cookie scoop or a spoon, measure about 1 ½ to 2 tablespoons of the mixture to form meatballs. Your meatballs can be slightly smaller or larger, but the more important thing here is to have them as equal in size as possible so that they can cook evenly.
  2. Bake or Pan Fry: While I prefer the baked option for more of a hands-off cooking approach, you can cook your lamb meatballs in a pan as well. Here is how I do it:
    • To bake in the oven: Arrange the lamb meatballs on the prepared baking sheet, spacing them about 1 inch apart for even cooking. Bake for 10 to 12 minutes or until a meatball inserted with a meat thermometer registers 160 degrees F. (71 C). It is optional, but if you want, turn the broiler on in the last 2 minutes of the baking time for slightly crispy and golden browned lamb meatballs.
    • To cook on the stove top: Heat a tablespoon of olive oil in a large cast iron skillet (or you can use a nonstick pan) over medium heat. Once shimmering hot, add your meatballs on a single layer and cook for about 8-10 minutes, turning a few times to ensure even browning. Work in batches if needed to avoid overcrowding.
A collage of images showing what to do with lamb meatballs.
  1. Serve: Enjoy them as a quick appetizer with tzatziki sauce on the side, or serve them over a bed of my creamy lemon orzo, garnished with pickled red onions, kalamata olives, fresh mint (or the herb of your choice) and a squeeze of lemon juice.

Expert Tips:

While this Greek lamb meatball recipe is pretty straightforward, there are a few things that I’d love to include to help you succeed on your first try:

  • Taste your feta before adding salt: Some feta brands are saltier than others, so give it a quick taste before seasoning your meat mixture. You can always add more salt, but you can’t take it out!
  • Let them sit before baking: If making the meatballs ahead of time, take them out of the fridge 30 minutes before baking. This helps them cook evenly, preventing the centers from being too cold while the outside browns.
  • Mix by hand: While some recipes suggest using a food processor to mix the meatball mixture, I don’t recommend it. Overmixing can make the meatballs dense and tough. Instead, use your hands to gently combine the ingredients for the best texture.

What to Serve with Lamb Meatballs?

Many people wonder about what to do with lamb meatballs. The good news is that these Mediterranean lamb meatballs are a dynamic protein you can enjoy in multiple ways:

  • As an appetizer: The classic pairing for lamb meatballs is tzatziki sauce, but if you want to kick things up a notch, try pairing them with a bold harissa sauce or a creamy tahini yogurt sauce, mint yogurt sauce for a delicious appetizer. Simply plate your lamb and feta meatballs, add a bowl of your sauce, and don’t forget some warm pita bread for scooping—it’s all about those perfect bites!
  • Make Greek lamb bowls: Get creative and toss your easy lamb meatballs into a bowl with Mediterranean veggies such as pickled onions, cucumbers, and tomatoes, then use rice or another grain as your base. My favorite options include: Lemon Parmesan Orzo, Bulgur Wheat Pilaf, and, for a gluten-free option, Lemon Quinoa
  • Serve them with a salad: Skip the bland chicken and use these Greek meatballs as a topping for a simple Greek Salad or a refreshing Greek Yogurt Cucumber Salad
  • Stuff them into pita pockets: For an easy handheld meal, tuck these lamb meatballs into warm pita bread with lettuce, tomatoes, onions, and a drizzle of tzatziki for a Mediterranean-inspired wrap.

If you make this Greek Lamb Meatballs recipe, please take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Photos by Tanya Pilgrim.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Lamb meatballs with tzatziki on a plate from the top view.
Print

Greek Lamb Meatballs Recipe

Juicy, flavorful, and ready in under 30 minutes, these Greek Lamb Meatballs are a must-try! Made with aromatic spices, fresh herbs, and a touch of lemon zest, they’re perfect as an appetizer with homemade tzatziki sauce or served over lemon orzo for a satisfying meal.
Course Appetizer, Weeknight Dinner
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Halal
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 12 minutes
Total Time 32 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 418kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 lb ground lamb
  • ½ cup onion finely chopped
  • ¼ cup panko breadcrumbs (or regular breadcrumbs)
  • 3 garlic cloves minced
  • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon ground coriander
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt*
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 large egg
  • 2 teaspoons lemon zest ~ zest of 1 large lemon
  • cup feta cheese crumbled, (optional) plus more for garnish
  • 2 tablespoons fresh mint/parsley chopped finely, plus more for garnish
  • 1 teaspoon olive oil to keep your hands moist

For Serving (optional*)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
  • In a large mixing bowl, place 1 lb ground lamb, ½ cup finely chopped onion, ¼ cup panko breadcrumbs, 3 cloves of minced garlic, ½ teaspoon ground cumin, ½ teaspoon ground coriander, ½ teaspoon kosher salt, ¼ teaspoon black pepper, 1 large egg, 2 teaspoons lemon zest, ⅓ cup crumbled feta cheese, and 2 tablespoons finely chopped fresh parsley.
    Images showing how to serve lamb meatballs.
  • Using your hands or a large spoon, mix everything until all ingredients are well combined.
    Person shaping meatballs.
  • Scoop about 1 ½ to 2 tablespoons of the mixture (a small cookie scoop works beautifully here ), coat your hands with a small amount of olive oil, and roll it into a ball.
  • Repeat this process for the rest of the meat.
  • Place the meatballs on the prepared baking sheet, spacing them evenly (about an inch) apart. You should end up with approximately 18-22 meatballs.
  • Bake 10-12 minutes or until the meatballs are lightly browned and a meatball inserted with a meat thermometer registers 160 degrees F. (71 C)
  • If desired, during the last 2 minutes of baking, turn the broiler on to give the meatballs a slightly crispy, golden-brown finish. However, keep a close eye on them to prevent burning.
  • Serve meatballs by themselves with tzatziki on the side or with lemon orzo. Garnish with a few tablespoons of crumbled feta, pickled red onions, and chopped mint/parsley.
    Images showing how to serve lamb meatballs.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 18-22 lamb meatballs ideal for serving 4 adults with 4-5 meatballs per serving. The nutritional values below do not include the optional serving ingredients and are per serving.
  • Salt: Before adding salt, be sure to taste your feta, as some brands can be saltier than others.
One of the best things about this lamb feta meatball recipe is its versatility—it can be made ahead, stores well, and even freezes beautifully for a quick meal when you’re short on time. Here’s how I do it:
  • Make Ahead: Blend your lamb and feta mixture, form it into evenly sized meatballs, then place them on a parchment paper-lined baking sheet. Cover with cling wrap and store in the fridge up to 1 day in advance to cut your prep time before they go into the oven.
  • Storage: First, be sure to bring your baked lamb meatballs to room temperature. Then, store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
  • Reheating: Bake them in a low-heat oven of 275 degrees F for about 5 minutes or until they’re heated through.

Nutrition

Calories: 418kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 23g | Fat: 33g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 14g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 135mg | Sodium: 677mg | Potassium: 335mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 150IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 112mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/greek-lamb-meatballs/feed/ 2
Air Fryer Asparagus https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-asparagus/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-asparagus/#respond Sat, 08 Mar 2025 16:54:35 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=48753 Why You Need To Know In a Nutshell With the help of air frying technology, getting deliciously crispy asparagus is…]]>

Why You Need To Know In a Nutshell

With the help of air frying technology, getting deliciously crispy asparagus is easier than ever now. Here are a few reasons why you should give this recipe a try:

  • The quickest method: Compared to roasting in the ovencooking on the stovetop, or steaming it, roasting asparagus in the air fryer is faster, with only 13 minutes from start to finish. 
  • Perfect texture every time: The light and crispy texture of air fried asparagus can’t be duplicated through any other method. It also has less oil than deep fried asparagus.
  • Easy to jazz up: Easy customizations with different spices, add-ons and toppings make this a new favorite you’ll make again and again.
  • Versatile: It is the perfect side dish, healthy snack, or a great addition to recipes like Asparagus Salad, Asparagus Tart and even Butter Lettuce Salad.
Air fried asparagus on a plate from the top view

Ingredients

This air fryer asparagus recipe has five simple ingredients:

  • Fresh asparagus
  • Olive oil
  • Minced garlic
  • Kosher salt
  • Black pepper

You probably have most of these at home already.

Ingredients for cooking asparagus in air fryer

How to Cook Asparagus in Air Fryer

  1. Preheat the air fryer: Plug in your air fryer and let it preheat to 375 F / 190 C. Rinse and dry asparagus spears. Place the asparagus on a cutting board. While holding the bunch with one hand, cut the woody ends by one inch from the bottom using a sharp knife.
person showing how to prepare asparagus for cooking with multiple step by step pictures
  1. Season the asparagus: In a large bowl, combine the trimmed asparagus, a little bit of oil, minced garlic, and salt and black pepper. With clean hands or kitchen tongs, give it a toss to make sure that each asparagus spear is thoroughly coated with the mixture.
asparagus in the air fryer before and after it is cooked
  1. Arrange in the basket: Carefully arrange asparagus spears in the air fryer basket in a single layer. A larger air fryer might fit all the asparagus stalks, but a smaller air fryer may require multiple batches. 
  2. Cook until tender: Cook for only 6-7 minutes until tender, but don’t forget to turn the spears halfway through. If you are using thin asparagus, air fry for 3-4 minutes.
  3. Transfer to serving platter: Carefully transfer to a serving plate, season with salt and pepper, a squeeze of fresh lemon juice (or a sprinkle of parmesan cheese), and serve while it is still warm.

How to Store & Reheat

Use this air-fried asparagus recipe to batch-cook asparagus for your weekly meal prep and store it in the refrigerator following my directions below:

  • Storage: Let the leftovers of your cooked asparagus come to room temperature, place in an airtight container and store for up to 3 days in the fridge.
  • How to Reheat Asparagus: To reheat, air fry your asparagus at 375 F / 190 C for about 3 minutes making sure to give it a toss halfway through the cooking process.

Recipe Variations

Want to check it up and make it your own? Here are a few ways to take your air fryer roasted asparagus to a whole new level:

  • Freshen with herbs: Fresh herbs give this dish new flavor. Try basil, parsley, mint or chives.
  • Experiment with spices: Make this dish unique each time with new spices. Try paprika, garlic powder or even red pepper flakes to start.
  • Use lemon zest and balsamic: Drizzle it with a mixture of lemon zest, balsamic vinegar (or lemon juice) and a little olive oil to give it a refreshing flavor.
  • Sprinkle with cheese: Shredded mozzarella or parmesan cheese makes the dish more scrumptious.
  • Imitate Asian flavors: Use soy sauce, maple syrup or honey to create an Asian-inspired sauce.

Expert Tips

  • Take time to trim asparagus, dry it thoroughly and cook in single layers – even if it requires batch cooking. This is crucial for light, crispy asparagus. 
  • Change the cooking time if necessary. As I mentioned earlier, this recipe was tested both with thick asparagus and pencil thin asparagus. If you are using thin asparagus, be sure to reduce the cooking time by half. And don’t forget to turn the asparagus halfway through cooking.
  • Add variety with new flavors. Make this dish new each time by experimenting with spices, herbs and other fresh ingredients.
  • For more of a crispy air fryer asparagus, air fry it for 1-2 more minutes.
  • Keep in mind that the cooking time may differ from one air fryer to another. I tested this recipe in my Instant Vortex 6 Quart Air Fryer (affiliate link). For the best results, it is best to keep a close eye on the asparagus and check doneness after the 5-minute mark.
Air Fryer Roasted Asparagus in the basket right after it is cooked

Serving Suggestions

There isn’t one right answer when it comes to serving this air fried asparagus recipe. It tastes great in so many ways, so consider your options! 

FAQs

What temperature do you air fry asparagus?

The ideal temperature for air frying asparagus is 375 F degrees (190 C).

How long to cook asparagus in air fryer?

Cooking asparagus in air fryer takes about 6-7 minutes at 375 F degrees. 

How to cook frozen asparagus in air fryer?

Frozen asparagus takes 9-10 minutes to cook in the air fryer, but there’s no need to thaw beforehand.

How long do you reheat asparagus in air fryer?

Air frying leftover asparagus only takes 3 minutes to reheat, so it couldn’t be easier. 

Do I need to adjust the cooking time when using thin asparagus?

Yes, you do. This recipe was tested both with thick asparagus and thin asparagus. By thick asparagus, I mean the regular asparagus you would find in most grocery stores. Thin asparagus is usually available for a short time at the beginning of spring. You can cook both types of asparagus in an air fryer. However, the thinner should be cooked for a shorter amount of time. While the exact time depends on how thin the asparagus stalks are, shortening the air frying time by 2-3 minutes (and keeping a close eye on it) is a good place to start.

Why did my asparagus come out stringy and tough?

If you do not take the time and cut the woodsy ends, you will end up with stringy and tough asparagus.

Do I need to soak my asparagus before air frying?

No, you do not need to soak asparagus before air frying. Instead, we recommend giving it a quick rinse and drying it as much as possible.

Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this air fryer asparagus recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

asparagus in air fryer basket from the top view
Print

Air Fryer Asparagus Recipe

Learn how to cook asparagus in air fryer for perfectly crispy and tender asparagus cooked in less than 10 minutes by using only a teaspoon of oil. Easy, quick, and convenient.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 3 minutes
Cook Time 7 minutes
Preheating Air Fryer 3 minutes
Total Time 13 minutes
Servings 4 people
Calories 33kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 pound asparagus* woody ends trimmed
  • 1 teaspoon olive oil
  • 1 garlic clove minced (optional)
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat air fryer to 375 F degrees.
  • Place asparagus, olive oil, minced garlic, and salt and black pepper in a bowl. Using your clean hands or kitchen tongs, toss to make sure that each asparagus spear is coated with oil, garlic and seasonings.
  • Arrange them in your air fryer basket making sure that they are on a single layer. If you have a smaller air fryer, you may have to air fry your asparagus in batches.
  • Cook until tender for 6-7 minutes making sure to toss halfway through the cooking process.
  • Carefully transfer the now air fried asparagus to a platter and serve right away.

Notes

  • Thick Asparagus vs Thin Asparagus: This recipe was tested both with thick asparagus and pencil-thin asparagus. If you are using thin asparagus, be sure to reduce the cooking time by half. And don’t forget to turn the asparagus halfway through cooking.
  • To Store: Let your cooked asparagus come to room temperature, place in an airtight container and store for up to 3 days in the fridge.
  • How to Reheat Asparagus: To reheat, air fry your asparagus at 375 F / 190 C for about 3 minutes making sure to give it a toss halfway through the cooking process.
  • For more of a crispy air fryer asparagus, air fry it for 1-2 more minutes.
  • I listed fresh garlic as an optional ingredient as this recipe would work perfectly without it. You can also substitute fresh garlic with 1 teaspoon garlic powder if you wish.
  • Optional toppings: Depending on what I am serving it, I usually finish it off with a squeeze of fresh lemon juice (ideal if I am serving it seafood) or a sprinkle of parmesan cheese (ideal if I am serving it with chicken or meat dishes).

Nutrition

Calories: 33kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 234mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 858IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-asparagus/feed/ 0
Baked Goat Cheese Balls https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/ https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/#comments Sun, 29 Dec 2024 17:08:15 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=15644 Is there anything better than tangy cheese coated in breadcrumbs and baked until crisp on the outside and creamy on…]]>

Is there anything better than tangy cheese coated in breadcrumbs and baked until crisp on the outside and creamy on the inside? I think not. I also think that goat cheese makes some of the most flavorful dishes, so make sure to try any of our Goat Cheese Recipes if you are a fan as well. 

On a side note, if you’ve ever been to Lisa Vanderpump’s restaurant, Sur, then you know all about their famous fried goat cheese balls. I know people who visit the restaurant just to order them! The good news? With our recipe, you can now recreate a baked version of the goat cheese balls at Sur right at home. They’re just as delicious but a bit lighter and perfect for any occasion.

Baked Goat Cheese Balls served on a plate by a person.

Ingredients

This baked goat cheese ball recipe is made with just a handful of simple ingredients readily available in any grocery store. We will need:

  • Fresh herbs: I love the savory mix of fresh thyme and parsley. Other herbs that would be delicious include fresh rosemary or basil.
  • Panko bread crumbs: We love the extra crisp bite of plain panko breadcrumbs, but this is your chance to have fun with the coating. While it’s not traditional, you can use Italian-seasoned breadcrumbs, Melba toast crumbs, or even swap out half the breadcrumbs for crushed pecans or walnuts. For a gluten-free option, try almond flour crackers. Simply use your food processor to break them down into fine crumbs, making it easy to coat your goat cheese balls to perfection.
  • Garlic powder: Garlic powder adds a nice savory bite to the breadcrumb mixture. Toss in some lemon zest for a bright citrus flavor.
  • Egg: One large egg is needed to coat the goat cheese before dipping it into the breadcrumbs.
  • Dijon mustard: A hint of Dijon mustard adds a unique flavor to the egg mixture.
  • Seasonings: All you need is a sprinkle of Kosher salt and black pepper for each layer of the dipping station.
  • Goat cheese: We recommend buying a whole goat cheese log instead of goat cheese crumbles. You can buy them in 4 oz portions or a large 12 oz log.

How to Make Goat Cheese Balls?

Goat cheese bites are a quick and easy recipe that requires a quick setup of your breading station and a chill in the freezer. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

  1. Prep baking sheet: Line a small baking sheet (small enough to fit in your freezer) with parchment paper.
  2. Prepare dipping station: In a small shallow bowl, mix the fresh thyme and parsley. In another small bowl, whisk together the egg, mustard, salt, and pepper. Third, toss the panko breadcrumbs and garlic powder in another small bowl.
  3. Cut goat cheese: While you can use a sharp chef’s knife, we prefer unscented dental floss to cut the goat cheese into 12 equal goat cheese rounds. This works best if your goat cheese log is chilled, so do it right after you remove it from the fridge. To slice goat cheese using a dental floss:
    1. Using a knife, score the surface of the goat cheese log into 12 equal sections.
    2. Cut yourself a long (about 20 inches long) unscented dental floss and slide it under the log at the first score mark.
    3. Cross the ends of the floss over the log, pulling them in opposite directions to slice through the cheese cleanly. Repeat this process until you slice the whole log, wiping the floss with a paper towel as needed.
    4. Roll each piece into a small ball between the palms of your hands.
  4. Coat goat cheese balls: Start by dipping each goat cheese ball in the herb mixture. Then, roll them in the egg mixture and allow the excess liquid to drip off. Then, gently press them into the panko mixture to ensure they are fully coated.
  5. Freeze goat cheese balls: Transfer the goat cheese balls onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Freeze for 30 minutes.
  6. Bake: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Bake the goat cheese balls for 8-10 minutes, or until golden brown.
  7. Serve: Cool slightly, drizzle with honey, and serve warm.

Make Ahead and Storage Tips

Talk about a goat cheese appetizer that’s a true make-ahead marvel. The best part? You can prepare these ahead of time, freeze them, and have them ready to pop in the oven whenever you need them. Frozen goat cheese balls that bake up in minutes are a lifesaver when you want something quick, effortless, and absolutely impressive.

  • Make Ahead and freezing instructions: Follow the recipe as written, flash freeze them (meaning place them on a sheet pan, freeze until hardened), transfer to a ziplock freezer bag, label, date, and freeze for up to 2 months. If baking from frozen, add 2 minutes to the baking time and keep an eye on them to ensure they are not burning.
  • Storage: While these goat cheese bites are best served the day they are made, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the refrigerator for 3 days.
  • Reheat: Reheat the balls of goat cheese in a low oven (300 degrees F) until warm, about 5 minutes.

Expert Tips

Here are some of my helpful tips for the best baked goat cheese balls recipe:

  • Cutting the goat cheese: The goat cheese is easiest to cut when it is cold. The best method is with unflavored dental floss. However, you can use a sharp knife, but make sure to wipe the knife clean with a paper towel after each slice.
  • Set your dipping station up before starting: It’s best to prep your ingredients before starting since the process happens quickly.
  • Dredge quickly: Go through the breading station quickly and thoroughly, then pop them right into the freezer.
  • Ensure they are cold before placing them in the oven: Even though it sounds like an extra step to freeze them before baking, it helps to make the outside crispy while the inside stays soft and creamy.
  • Fried goat cheese balls: While we love the baked version, you can certainly fry goat cheese balls for a crisp, golden treat. Heat 1–2 inches of vegetable oil in a shallow skillet over medium heat until it shimmers. Fry the goat cheese balls in batches (preferably two) for 1–2 minutes, turning frequently to ensure they cook evenly and achieve a beautiful golden-brown crust on all sides.
  • Double the recipe: This recipe makes 12 individual balls—double or triple the recipe, depending on the number of people you serve. Or, make them mini by cutting the goat cheese rounds in half and reducing the baking time to 5-6 minutes.
  • Bake them right before serving: If you’re serving these goat cheese balls as an appetizer, we highly recommend serving them warm for the best experience. We like to pop them in the oven just before our guests arrive so they’re greeted with the irresistible aroma of golden, creamy goat cheese oozing with tangy, melt-in-your-mouth goodness.

Serving Suggestions

When it comes to serving baked goat cheese balls, the possibilities are as delightful as the dish itself! Whether you are planning an elegant appetizer, a show-stopping salad, or just looking to add a little magic to your meal, these versatile bites have you covered. 

Goat cheese appetizer balls served as a holiday cheese spread.
  • Appetizer: Serve them with a drizzle of honey or extra virgin olive oil. Or, add them to your Meat and Cheese Platter for a little pizzazz.
  • Salad: Enjoy a French classic and turn it into a Baked Goat Cheese Salad. This also does double duty as a delicious holiday appetizer salad or elegant weeknight dinner at home.
  • Croutons: Turn them into cheesy croutons to top off a warm, comforting bowl of soup, like creamy Butternut Squash Soup or velvety Zucchini Soup.
  • Pasta & grain bowls: Crumble them over pasta or add them to your favorite grain bowls for a tangy goat cheese twist that adds creamy texture and bold flavor.

You Might Also Like

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Baked goat cheese balls served on a plate by a person.
Print

Baked Goat Cheese Balls Recipe

These Baked Goat Cheese balls are coated with herbs, dipped in an egg-mustard mixture, and then rolled in breadcrumbs. You can prep these ahead of time and freeze them until you are ready to serve. They make the perfect appetizer for any cheese board setup and usually disappear a few minutes after they come out of the oven.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Cooling time 30 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 12 Goat Cheese Balls
Calories 122kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon chopped fresh thyme
  • 2 tablespoons chopped fresh parsley
  • ¾ cup panko breadcrumbs
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 large egg
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 12-ounce log goat cheese
  • 2 tablespoons honey for drizzling (optional)

Instructions

  • Line a small baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Prep your dipping station: First, place fresh thyme and parsley in a small shallow plate and mix to combine. Second, place panko and garlic powder in a shallow bowl. Stir to combine. And third, whisk egg, mustard, salt, and pepper in a small bowl and set aside.
  • Cut the goat cheese into 12 pieces. You can slice them using (unscented) dental floss (see notes for more*) or a knife. Roll each piece into a small ball.
  • Dip each goat cheese ball in the herb mixture, ensuring it is coated on all sides. Next, roll them in the egg mixture (allowing the excess liquid to drip), then press the panko mixture gently to ensure it is fully coated with the panko breadcrumbs.
  • Transfer the goat cheese balls onto the parchment-lined baking sheet. Place in the freezer for 30 minutes.
  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Remove the cheese from the freezer and bake in the oven for 8-10 minutes or until golden brown on top.
  • Let it cool for a few minutes, drizzle it with honey, if preferred, and serve while still warm.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 12 baked goat cheese balls, ideal for 6 servings (2 per person). The nutritional values below are per serving. 
  • Slicing the goat cheese: While you can use a sharp chef’s knife to slice the cheese, we find it easier to use an unscented dental floss to cut it into 12 equal goat cheese rounds. This works best if your goat cheese log is chilled, so do it right after you remove it from the fridge. To slice goat cheese using a dental floss:
    1. Using a knife, score the surface of the goat cheese log into 12 equal sections.
    2. Cut a long (about 20 inches) unscented dental floss and slide it under the log at the first score mark.
    3. Cross the ends of the floss over the log, pulling them in opposite directions to slice through the cheese cleanly. Repeat this process until you slice the whole log, wiping the floss with a paper towel as needed.
    4. Roll each piece into a small ball between the palms of your hands.
  • Make Ahead and freezing: The best part of this recipe is that you can prepare these ahead of time, freeze, and have them ready to pop in the oven whenever you need them. Frozen goat cheese balls that bake up in minutes are a lifesaver when you want something quick, effortless, and impressive. To freeze, follow the recipe as written, flash freeze them (meaning place them on a sheet pan, freeze until hardened), transfer to a freezer bag (or a freezer safe airtight container), label, date, and freeze for up to 2 months. If baking from frozen, add 2 minutes to the baking time and keep an eye on them to ensure they are not burning.

Nutrition

Calories: 122kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 54mg | Sodium: 171mg | Potassium: 39mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 391IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 58mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baked-goat-cheese/feed/ 2
Butternut Squash Bruschetta https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/ https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/#comments Fri, 25 Oct 2024 15:11:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=8033 The best Thanksgiving hors d’oeuvres have it all, and this fall bruschetta is no different. The butternut squash cubes roast up…]]>

The best Thanksgiving hors d’oeuvres have it all, and this fall bruschetta is no different. The butternut squash cubes roast up beautifully, leaving you with sweet, caramelized bits of squash. Layer that on top of a toasted baguette slice slathered with herbed goat cheese and cranberry sauce, and you will have a butternut squash crostini worthy of an elegant dinner party or casual finger food.

If you are like us, a big fan of butternut squash appetizers, be sure to check out our Butternut Squash Salad and Butternut Squash Soup, as well.

Thanksgiving bruschetta with butternut squash and cranberry sauce from the top view.

Ingredients

This easy butternut squash appetizer is easy to make with a few simple ingredients from the grocery store. We will need the following ingredients:

  • Butternut squash: Look for a medium-sized whole butternut squash heavy for its size. I prefer cutting butternut squash at home into small cubes rather than buying the precut packages. Alternatively, acorn squash, delicata squash, or any pumpkin variety can also be used in this recipe.
  • Olive oil: Go for extra-virgin olive oil for the fruity flavor.
  • Ground cinnamon: Ground cinnamon powder adds an extra background warmth.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper enhances all those butternut squash flavors.
  • Goat cheese: I love creamy goat cheese here (check out any of my Goat Cheese Recipes), but you could also use Ricotta Cheese, cream cheese, or mascarpone cheese.
  • Heavy cream: Heavy cream adds extra richness and loosens the goat cheese to a spreadable consistency. Whole milk is a good substitute.
  • Scallions: Green onions add extra color and a mild onion flavor.
  • Garlic: Garlic gives us that punchy bite.
  • Fresh herbs: I love fresh parsley, but fresh thyme is a great option.
  • Crusty Bread: Hearty, thick slices of sourdough bread are divine, but you can also make No Knead Artisan Bread if you have the time or use slices of baguette for smaller bruschetta.
  • Cranberry sauce: I love to use my Maple Cranberry Sauce, which I always have in the fridge this time of year, but any leftover cranberry sauce will work.
  • Nuts: Toasted sliced almonds or walnuts add a layer of crunch and texture.
  • Honey: Floral honey elevates the butternut and cranberry with sweetness, but it is optional. Maple syrup can also be used.
  • Toppings: Feel free to add toppings such as flaky sea salt, red pepper flakes, chopped sage leaves, or rosemary for extra flavor.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

There are several additions to this butternut appetizer, such as:

  • Balsamic glaze: Omit the honey and finish it with a tangy and sweet balsamic glaze instead.
  • Caramelized onions: Give the butternut squash an extra layer of savory flavor with rich and delicious Caramelized Onions.
  • Apple: Butternut squash and apples go so well together, so roasting some cubed apples with the squash is a delicious addition. Good apples for cooking include Fuji, Granny Smith, Pink Lady, and Gala.
  • Pomegranate seeds: Sprinkle on some pomegranate seeds for additional color and sweet, tart flavor.

How to Make Bruschetta with Butternut Squash?

This autumn bruschetta is easy to make. I like to mix the goat cheese while the butternut squash is roasting in the oven. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
Steps showing how to roast butternut squash and prepare goat cheese mixture.
  1. Season butternut squash: Add the small chunks of butternut squash cubes to the prepared sheet pan. Toss the butternut with olive oil, cinnamon, 1 teaspoon Kosher salt, and black pepper and redistribute into a single layer.
  2. Roast squash cubes: Roast for 30 – 35 minutes, until fork tender and golden brown. Toss them halfway through for even browning.
  3. Whip goat cheese: In a small bowl, whisk together the goat cheese and heavy cream until smooth. Stir in the other teaspoon of Kosher salt, scallions, garlic, and parsley.
  4. Toast bread: Lightly toast the bread slices in the oven, toaster oven, or toaster.
A collage of images showing how to assemble butternut squash bruschetta recipe.
  1. Assemble bruschetta: Spread 1-2 tablespoons of the goat cheese mixture on each slice of bread, followed by 1-2 tablespoons of cranberry sauce.
  2. Add roasted squash: Add the butternut squash mixture and sliced almonds or walnuts. Drizzle with honey, sea salt, and fresh sage, if using.

Make Ahead and Storage

Following the right storage instructions allows you to make this butternut crostini ahead of time. This allows you to get one step ahead if serving it as a party appetizer or as part of your Thanksgiving spread.

  • Make Ahead: Roast the squash and prepare the goat cheese mixture. Store each component separately in the refrigerator for 4-5 days.
  • Storage: The assembled butternut squash bruschettas will keep for one day. After that, the bread becomes soggy and soaks up too much moisture.
Butternut bruschetta being drizzled with honey.

If you try this Butternut Squash Bruschetta recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

Butternut squash bruschetta with goat cheese from the top view.
Print

Butternut Squash Bruschetta Recipe

A festive and colorful butternut squash bruschetta recipe featuring cinnamon-spiced roasted squash cubes atop layers of sourdough bread, goat cheese, and cranberry sauce. This is the perfect recipe to serve as an appetizer or use up the leftovers the day after Thanksgiving.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 1 hour
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 466kcal

Ingredients

For The Roasted Butternut Squash

  • 1 medium sized butternut squash peeled, deseeded, and cut into ½ inch cubes
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 2 teaspoon Kosher salt divided
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Goat Cheese Spread

  • 8 ounces goat cheese at room temperature
  • 2 tablespoons heavy cream
  • 3 stalks scallions chopped
  • 1 clove garlic finely chopped or pressed
  • ¼ cup parsley chopped

For The Bruschetta

  • 6 slices sourdough bread or any other crusty bread
  • 1 cup maple cranberry sauce
  • ½ cup sliced almonds or chopped walnuts
  • 1 tbs Honey (or more) optional drizzle
  • Sea salt optional sprinkle to finish
  • Handful of sage leaves chopped (optional)

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Spread the butternut squash cubes on the prepared baking sheet. Drizzle with the olive oil and sprinkle with the ground cinnamon, 1 teaspoon kosher salt and pepper. Toss to combine.
  • Roast for 30 – 35 minutes, turning halfway through until tender. Remove from the oven and set it aside to cool.
  • Place the goat cheese and heavy cream in a bowl. Using a fork, stir and “whip” until smooth.
  • Stir in the other teaspoon of Kosher salt, scallions, garlic, and parsley.
  • Lightly toast the bread slices in the oven, toaster oven, or toaster.
  • Spread the bread with 1-2 tablespoons of the goat cheese mixture, followed by 1-2 tablespoons of cranberry sauce.
  • Add some roasted squash cubes and sprinkle each slice with almonds or walnuts.
  • Drizzle with honey, a pinch of sea salt, and chopped sage, if using.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 6 bruschettas, which is ideal for 6 servings. We roasted the butternut squash but you can use leftover squash as well. 
  • Enjoy warm or cold: You can enjoy the roasted squash bruschetta warm, just as all the components come out of the oven, or chilled if the squash and goat cheese have been made ahead. If you prefer it warm, rewarm leftover squash on a baking sheet in a low oven (300 degrees F) for 8-10 minutes, until warm.
  • Smear garlic on bread: For that traditional bruschetta approach, you have two options. You can smear a raw garlic clove over the surface of the toasted bread slices, or make a paste with roasted garlic and spread it on instead.
  • Storage: While you can store the leftovers in an airtight container for one day, we think this bruschetta tastes best on the day it is made.

Nutrition

Calories: 466kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 23mg | Sodium: 1306mg | Potassium: 197mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 756IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 125mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/herbed-goat-cheese-bruschetta-with-butternut-squash-and-cranberry-jam-2/feed/ 10
Potato Roses https://foolproofliving.com/potato-roses/ https://foolproofliving.com/potato-roses/#comments Sun, 20 Oct 2024 12:51:57 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78546 Visually impressive, individual potato rosettes are an appetizer that delights for Thanksgiving and Christmas holiday dinners, or a pretty potato…]]>

Visually impressive, individual potato rosettes are an appetizer that delights for Thanksgiving and Christmas holiday dinners, or a pretty potato flower recipe to enhance your Mother’s Day or Easter brunch. They are savory and decadent—the perfect complement to almost any meat, chicken, or veggie main dish. 

If you’re looking to elevate your celebratory meals this year, this potato roses recipe will certainly dazzle your guests. For those who adore a good theme, we also have a tutorial on How to Make Apple Roses that can round out your floral feast.

Potato roses on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Don’t be intimidated by the intricate look of these rolled potato roses. We’ve tested this recipe again and again so we can share with you the simplest path to potato rosette success! You, too, can create a beautiful rose potato of your own with a few basic ingredients:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Unsalted butter: The unsalted butter in this recipe is used to grease your muffin tins. We tested the recipe with oil sprays, as well as olive oil, but butter created a far superior end result for these rose potatoes and ensured they did not stick to the pan.
  • Potatoes: While we used Yukon gold potatoes for the potato bacon roses pictured here, russet potatoes will also work just fine. We do recommend that you keep the skin on, as it not only helps to keep the potatoes intact, but also adds a nice visual edging to each potato rosette. 
  • Olive oil: The olive oil in this recipe for potato roses is used in coating the sliced potatoes. If you prefer avocado oil, it will work as a suitable alternative. 
  • Fresh herbs: For our bacon and potato roses, we used fresh rosemary. You could also substitute in fresh thyme or fresh sage. If you prefer to use dried herbs such as an Italian seasoning blend, just keep in mind that you’ll need to adjust the recipe to only 1 teaspoon, if you’re using dried herbs.
  • Garlic: We tested this potato rose recipe with both fresh garlic and garlic powder. While they both work, we preferred the result with the garlic powder, as it dispersed amongst the potato and bacon roses more evenly.
  • Seasonings: Beyond the fresh (or dried) herbs mentioned above, the only other seasonings you need are some Kosher salt and freshly ground black pepper. 
  • Parmesan cheese: The parmesan cheese in our potato roses with bacon serves two main purposes—it adds a wonderful umami flavor to the dish, and it acts as a binder (or glue) to hold the layers together as it melts during the baking process. 
  • Bacon: We tested this recipe with both traditional bacon and with turkey bacon. They both came out excellent, so feel free to select your personal preference on the bacon. 

How to Make Potato Roses?

You needn’t have any special chef skills to achieve perfect potato roses with bacon. We have laid out the instructions step-by-step for you below. If you follow them, you will be able to prep your own in less than 30 minutes. 

Person showing how to prepare potatoes to make this recipe in a collage of photos.
  1. Preheat your oven. Set the temperature to 400 degrees F/204 C. Take your 2 tablespoons of melted butter and generously coat 6 of the 12 muffin tin cups. Ensure each cup (including the corner and sides) is fully greased to prevent sticking.
  2. Slice your potatoes. With the skin on, slice your potatoes using a mandolin with a handrail (also referred to as a handguard) into very thin slices, approximately 1/16 – ⅛ thickness. If you do not have a mandolin, you can do this step with a sharp knife. However, do your best to slice them as thinly as possible.
  3. Mix & coat your potato slices. Transfer the potato slices into a large bowl. Add the olive oil, minced rosemary (or your chosen herbs), garlic powder, kosher salt, and black pepper. Toss to combine, ensuring you separate the slices to coat them evenly. Potato slices will release their juices after you mix them. Be sure to drain it before using them to assemble the roses.
Person showing how to roll potato roses.
  1. Layer your potato rosettes. On a clean work surface, lay out a slice of bacon, then place a line of potato slices on top, overlapping each one until you have used approximately 20 slices. Then, sprinkle the potato layer with 1 to 2 tablespoons of Parmesan cheese.
A collage of images showing how to make potato rosettes.
  1. Roll your potatoes into roses. Gently roll the bacon base around the potatoes until it has formed a rosette shape.  
  2. Arrange your potato roses in the pan. Place your potato rosette in a muffin cup, then add about 10 more potato slices around the bacon-wrapped rose. This is a visual choice—feel free to play around with the potato slices, adding more or less to “fluff” up the edges of your roses.  
  3. Finish assembling your bacon potato roses. Repeat the layering and rolling steps above with the remaining bacon, potato slices, and cheese. You will have 6 potato roses when you’re finished.
Person showing how to remove potato roses from the muffin tin.
  1. Bake your rosette potatoes. Place your muffin tin in the oven and bake, uncovered, for 20 minutes. Then place your foil on top of the potato roses  to prevent them from burning and bake for an additional 30 minutes or until the centers are tender and cooked through. When inserted into the middle of the potato rose, a sharp paring knife will pierce the potato center easily.
  2. Serve your bacon potato roses. Let your potato roses rest for 10 minutes, then gently run a paring knife on the outer edge of each rose to remove them from the muffin tin. Place them onto a serving platter, or plate them individually on each dish.

How to Store and Reheat Leftovers?

If you happen to have leftover potato bacon roses (however unlikely that may be, considering what a crowd-pleaser they are!), you can store and reheat them for another snack or meal later. 

  • To store your potato roses: Allow them to come to room temperature; do not attempt to contain them while they’re still warm. Place them upright in an airtight container. Our potato roses recipe will keep for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. 
  • To reheat the potato rosettes: Place your rose potatoes on a baking sheet and heat them in a 300 degree F oven until warmed throughout—roughly 5-10 minutes. 

Serving Suggestions

This potato roses recipe is a malleable dish that wows in a variety of scenarios. Here are some pairing suggestions:

A potato rosette on a plate.

FAQs

You’ve got rose potato questions, we’ve got answers! Also, if there is something we do not cover here, please feel free to head to the comments section and we will do our best to get back to you in a timely manner. 

Do I need to soak potato slices in water before making potato rosettes?

We found this to be an unnecessary step. However, if you have a desire to remove extra starch, you’re welcome to soak them, but be sure to dry them as much as you can prior to using them in the recipe.

Do I need to cover my potato and bacon roses in foil?

Yes. Covering the rosette potatoes with foil will help protect your petals and prevent them from burning. 

How will I know when my bacon potato roses are fully cooked?

The easiest way to test your potato roses for doneness is to take the tip of a sharp paring knife and gently poke the center of the potato rosette; it will pierce easily if it is done.

If you make your own Potato Roses recipe following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Bacon wrapped potatoes on a plate.
Print

Potato Roses Recipe

Savory and decadent, bacon potato roses are an impressive appetizer or side dish for your holiday meals and other festive occasions. The potato rosette shape adds a playful element to your plates and is easy to achieve with this foolproof recipe.  
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 30 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour 20 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 245kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter melted
  • 4 Yukon gold potatoes approximately 1.4 lbs, rinsed with the skin on
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon fresh rosemary finely minced
  • 2 teaspoons garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 cup grated parmesan cheese loosely packed (approximately 1 ounce)
  • 6 slices bacon pork or turkey

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 C. Brush 6 cups of a 12-cup muffin tin generously with melted butter*.
  • Thinly slice the potatoes using a mandoline with a handguard (aka handrail), or using a sharp knife to approximately 1/16 – ⅛ thickness.
  • Transfer the potato slices into a large bowl*. Add 2 tablespoons of olive oil, minced rosemary, garlic powder, kosher salt, and black pepper. Toss to combine.
  • On a clean work surface, lay out a slice of bacon, then place the potato slices overlapping each one until you have used approximately 20 slices.
  • Sprinkle 1 to 2 tablespoons of Parmesan cheese over the potatoes.
  • Gently roll up the combined bacon and potato slices until it has formed a rose.
  • Place your potato rosette in a muffin cup and add 10 more potato slices around the bacon-wrapped rose. If needed, you can adjust the potato slices to “fluff” out the edges of your rosette more.
  • Repeat with the remaining bacon, potato slices, and cheese. You will have 6 potato roses when you’re finished.
  • Place your muffin tin in the oven and bake, uncovered, for 20 minutes. Then place your foil on top of the potato roses and bake for an additional 30 minutes, or until tender and cooked through. A sharp paring knife, when inserted into the middle of the potato rose, will pierce the potato center easily.
  • Let your potato roses rest for 10 minutes, then gently run a paring knife on the outer edge of each rose to remove them from the muffin tin. Place onto a serving platter.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes six potato roses, but you can multiply it to serve a larger crowd. The nutritional values below are per rose.
  • Don’t skimp on the butter when greasing your muffin tin: A generous coating of butter will keep the rose potatoes from sticking to the pan. Make sure to coat not only the inside but also the outer edges of each muffin cup. This will ensure that the outer layers of the roses don’t stick as they bake and crisp up beautifully. We do not recommend using parchment liner as it didn’t allow the potato roses to crisp. 
  • Drain the liquid: After mixing the potato slices with the olive oil, rosemary, and seasonings, they tend to release some moisture. While we initially tried drying the slices with a kitchen towel before seasoning, we found that the potatoes still released juices once combined with the other ingredients. To avoid soggy potatoes, we recommend draining any excess liquid that collects at the bottom of the bowl before assembling your potato rosettes.
  • Separate the potatoes while you’re mixing them: Because your potato slices will be thin, it’s essential that you manually separate them during the mixing step into your olive oil and spices so that all of your slices get evenly coated.
  • A sharp knife can be used if you do not own a mandoline: While it may take you a bit longer (cue: patience) to slice your potatoes with a knife, it is doable. Do your best to slice them as thinly and evenly as possible.
  • Can I make potato roses in advance? Unfortunately, we do not recommend it. We attempted to prepare these bacon and potato roses ahead of time, but after sitting in the fridge for a night, the potatoes oxidized. The change in color wasn’t appetizing and they simply didn’t taste as fresh when they were baked. We encourage you to make your potato roses the day you plan on serving them.
  • Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for upto 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 245kcal | Carbohydrates: 23g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 25mg | Sodium: 689mg | Potassium: 523mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 273IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 164mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/potato-roses/feed/ 2
Sweet Potato Stacks https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-stacks/ https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-stacks/#comments Thu, 03 Oct 2024 12:26:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=78286 Versatile in flavor and impressive in appearance, this surprisingly easy-to-prepare sweet potato stackers recipe is the perfect side dish to…]]>

Versatile in flavor and impressive in appearance, this surprisingly easy-to-prepare sweet potato stackers recipe is the perfect side dish to serve alongside just about any main dish. A great alternative to classic sweet potato casserole, this recipe takes about 20 minutes of prep time when you follow the uncomplicated step-by-step instructions below.

After you give these crispy sweet potato stacks a try, we also have a Bacon Potato Roses and Sweet Potato Souffle recipe both of which are family favorites during the holiday season. And our Easy Mashed Sweet Potatoes are a fun spin on traditional mashed potatoes.

Sweet potato stacks on a plate from the front view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

While these sweet potato stacks look like an elevated showstopper, this is truly a simple side dish—they’re essentially sliced sweet potatoes in a muffin pan. The rest of the ingredients may already be in your fridge and pantry. Otherwise, they can be easily obtained at your local grocer. Here’s what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Sweet potatoes: We used the traditional orange sweet potatoes in this recipe. They’re the most common type of sweet potato that you can find in stores and hold their shape beautifully when sliced. Seek out relatively narrow potatoes of similar diameter so they will fit into the muffin tin cups uniformly.
  • Fresh thyme leaves: We prepared our sweet potato stacks recipe with fresh thyme, though dried thyme will work, if that’s what you have on hand. Just keep in mind that you’ll need to adjust the recipe to only 1 teaspoon, if you’re using dried. You can also swap in other fresh herbs, such as fresh rosemary and sage, if you prefer. But remember: small amounts go a long way!
  • Unsalted butter: If you only have salted butter in hand, that will work too. However, be sure to adjust the amount of additional salt you use in the seasoning step. While we love the flavor combination of butter and sweet potatoes, you can use an equal amount of olive oil or ghee for a dairy-free alternative.
  • Garlic: We tested this recipe with both fresh garlic and granulated garlic. We found that while both options are acceptable, the granulated garlic dispersed more evenly amongst the stacks, and we preferred the milder flavor overall. 
  • Seasonings: The naturally sweet flavor of the sweet potatoes doesn’t require much else by way of seasonings. And thus, we use an elegantly simple blend of Kosher salt and black pepper only. 
  • Maple Syrup (optional): If you’d like to lean into more of a sweet flavor profile, a drizzle of maple syrup adds a delicious touch. Alternatively, you can also make these sweet potato stacks with brown sugar.
  • Ground cinnamon (optional): If you’re adding maple syrup, ground cinnamon pairs well. Again, just remember that a little of this spice goes a long way.
  • Shredded Parmesan cheese (optional): If you’d like to make these sweet potato stackers more on the savory side, a ½ cup of grated parmesan cheese (or gruyere cheese) does the trick. Crispy parmesan sweet potato stacks are always a favorite when served with beef stew and pot roast.

How To Make Sweet Potato Stacks in A Muffin Tin?

Consider this recipe a grown-up version of a layered sweet potato bake. By finely slicing our sweet potatoes in muffin tins, we end up with lovely little stacks of potatoes that are crispy on the outside and buttery soft on the inside. 

  1. Preheat your oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees C. 
A collage of images showing how to prepare sweet potatoes to bake in a muffin pan.
  1. Grease your muffin tin: Using a pastry brush and 1 tablespoon of butter, apply a thin layer of coating to the inside of each individual muffin cup. Set the pan aside. 
  2. Slice your sweet potatoes: Using a mandolin or a sharp chef’s knife, slice the potatoes as thinly and evenly as possible. Transfer them to a large mixing bowl.
  3. Prepare your potatoes: In the bowl of sweet potatoes, add the rest of the melted butter, chopped thyme, garlic powder, kosher salt, and pepper. If you’re going with the maple syrup and cinnamon, add them at this step. Or, alternatively, if you’re using Parmesan for a savory touch, add the grated cheese at this step.
  4. Coat your sweet potatoes: Using tongs (or your clean hands work fine too!), toss the sweet potatoes to ensure that all of the slices are evenly coated with the rest of the ingredients in the bowl. 
A collage of images showing how to make sweet potato stackers recipe.
  1. Assemble your sweet potato stacks: Layer the sweet potatoes in each muffin cup until they reach approximately ¼ inches above the rim. We used 30 (yes, 30!) ⅛ -inch slices of sweet potatoes in the batches pictured here.
  2. Bake: Bake your garlic butter sweet potato stacks for 30-35 minutes until tender and golden brown.
  3. Cool and serve: Remove the muffin tin from the oven and allow your sweet potato stacks to cool in the pan for 10 minutes. Then, delicately remove them from each muffin cup using an offset spatula (or a butter knife) and transfer them onto a serving platter. Garnish each stack with chopped thyme and serve while still warm.

How To Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

If you plan on doing some advance meal preparations whether it be for a dinner party or holiday event, these muffin-tin sweet potatoes are the perfect flexible and easy side dish.

  • Make Ahead: These crispy sweet potato stacks can be prepped 1 day before you plan on serving them. Simply follow the instructions through Step 6, where you’ve assembled the stackers in the muffin tin, then wrap them tightly with aluminum foil and refrigerate. The next day, remove them from the refrigerator to bring to room temperature about 30 minutes before you plan on baking them, then bake as directed. 
  • Storage: If you have leftover sweet potato stackers, they will keep in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. Be sure to bring them to room temperature before placing them in an airtight container.
  • Reheating: To reheat your leftover sweet potato stacks, place them on a baking sheet (there’s no need to grease it this time). Warm your stackers in a 350-degree F oven for 5-7 minutes, or until heated through.

If you make your own Sweet Potato Stacks following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Other Potato Recipes You Might Also Like

Sweet potatoes cooked in a muffin tin on a plate.
Print

Sweet Potato Stacks Recipe

Sweet potato stacks with crispy edges and tender centers, baked to perfection with butter and thyme—a showstopping side dish perfect for any time of the year, but especially for Thanksgiving or Christmas dinners when you want to impress.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 35 minutes
Total Time 55 minutes
Servings 12 stacks
Calories 98kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 – 4 sweet potatoes peeled (approximately 2 ½ pounds)
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme minced – plus more as garnish (or 1 teaspoon dried thyme)
  • 4 tablespoons unsalted butter + 1 tablespoon for greasing the muffin tin (melted and cooled divided)
  • 2 teaspoons garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 3 tablespoons maple syrup optional
  • ½ teaspoon cinnamon optional

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees C. Brush each muffin cup of a 12-cup muffin tin using 1 tablespoon of butter (for the whole muffin tin). Set it aside.
  • Using a mandolin slicer or a sharp chef’s knife, slice the potatoes as thinly (and evenly) as possible. Transfer the sliced potatoes to a large mixing bowl.
  • In the bowl, add the melted butter, chopped thyme, garlic powder, kosher salt, and pepper. If using, add the maple syrup, and ground cinnamon.
  • Using tongs or clean hands, toss to ensure that all of the potato slices are evenly coated with the rest of the ingredients in the bowl.
  • Layer the sweet potatoes in each muffin cup until they reach approximately ¼ inches above the rim. We used 30 ⅛ -inch slices of sweet potatoes.
  • Bake sweet potato stacks for 30-35 minutes until tender and golden brown.
  • Remove from the oven, let cool in the pan for 10 minutes. Using a butter knife or an offset spatula, carefully remove them from the muffin tray and transfer them onto a serving platter.
  • Garnish with chopped thyme and serve while still warm.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 12 roasted sweet potato stacks. The nutritional values below are per stack.
  • The size of the potatoes: When shopping for this recipe, pick out potatoes that are similar in size and large enough to fit in a muffin cup. 
  • Evenly sliced sweet potatoes are essential: The most crucial aspect of this recipe is that your sweet potato slices are thin and uniform in thickness (otherwise, baking times will be inconsistent). Using a mandoline slicer makes this task foolproof. If you don’t have one, then the next best option is a very sharp knife. Slicing them thinly with a knife requires a bit more patience, but it is doable.  Do your best to slice them as thinly (and evenly) as possible.
  • Greased muffin cups are the key to crispy sweet potato stacks: When testing this recipe, we tried lining the muffin cups with parchment paper, but the potatoes wouldn’t crisp. Don’t be shy when greasing your muffin cups – use plenty of butter. 
  • Layer plenty of sweet potatoes in your stacks: The sliced sweet potatoes in your muffin pan will compress while baking, so be sure to fill your muffin cups just slightly above the rim to get the most height out of your stackers. We used 30 slices of sweet potatoes in each muffin tin. You might consider it a lot, but it will shrink after it is baked.
  • There is no need to cover it with foil: During our recipe testing, we did not feel the need to cover the sweet potato stack with aluminum foil during the baking process. 
  • Make ahead: You can prep everything a day before, cover it tightly with foil, and store it in the fridge. On the day you plan to serve, remove it from the oven 30 minutes before you plan to bake it and bake it as directed in the recipe.
  • Storage: Bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 98kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 129mg | Potassium: 213mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 8160IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 27mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/sweet-potato-stacks/feed/ 2
Muhammara Recipe (Roasted Red Pepper Dip) https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/#comments Mon, 26 Aug 2024 23:12:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=27123 If you are a fan of similar Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt…]]>

If you are a fan of similar Middle Eastern dips and sauces, be sure to check out my Eggplant Yogurt Dip, Roasted Carrot Hummus, Mediterranean Hummus, Baba Ganoush, and Roasted Vegetable Dip recipes.

What is Muhammara?

Muhammara is a traditional Middle Eastern red pepper dip or condiment typically served a dip or sauce with warm pita bread. It is claimed by many countries, but the actual origin is the Syrian city of Aleppo.

Also called Muhumra, Hamara, or Marmara, the dip is popular throughout Lebanon, Turkey, Armenia, the Middle East, and Meditteranean. It’s one of those recipes widely adapted according to the region and personal taste.

Muhammara is served in a large bowl and garnished with walnuts, scallions, and dill.

If you’ve never made this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, prepare to be amazed! Similar to its simpler version, roasted red pepper walnut dip, it is robust in flavor with sweet red peppers, nutty walnuts, and pomegranate molasses added to it to make it closer to its traditional version. All you need is a food processor and 30 minutes for a Meditteranean-inspired dip that is bright in color and flavor! Intrigued? Let’s break it down.

My aunt was the queen of Muhammara sauce! This a delicious dip I grew up eating. We put it on everything – pasta, eggs, vegetables – and brought it to all our special occasions. Being one of the popular recipes of the Turkish Cuisine, pita chips and muhammara dip was our version of bread and butter.

Key Ingredients:

To make this Mediterranean red pepper sauce, you will need the following ingredients:

All of the ingredients are photographed from the top view
Walnuts are roasted in a baking sheet
  • Red Bell Peppers – Purchase fresh, organic, sweet red bell peppers the day you are going to prepare the dip for the best flavor. If you’re in a pinch, jarred roasted red peppers can be substituted; however, it’s worth noting that the flavor of homemade roasted red peppers is much sweeter than using ones from a jar, and the texture is softer.
  • Raw Walnuts – Toasting walnuts beforehand brings out more of their nutty, creamy flavor. I like to purchase a bulk of walnuts and toast them in a single layer on a large baking sheet in a 350-degree oven until light golden brown (about 7 minutes) as soon as I get home from the store, then cool completely and store them in an airtight container in the freezer. That way I have toasted walnuts ready whenever I need them!
  • Crackers – The authentic muhammara recipe is made with bread crumbs. In this modern version, I followed in the footsteps of the authors of the Vegetable Illustrated and used crackers instead. You can use any type of lean crackers, such as the simple water cracker. However, for even more flavor variation, use a cracker scented with rosemary, thyme, flax seeds, or sesame seeds. For best results, gently crack the crackers in a zip-top bag and finish crushing with a rolling pin.
  • Scallions – Use both green and white parts and be sure to roughly chop prior to adding to the bowl of your food processor.
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil – This is a raw, uncooked sauce, so a good-quality Extra Virgin Olive Oil makes all the difference. My favorite is California Olive Ranch (affiliate link).
  • Pomegranate Molasses – If you are unfamiliar with pomegranate molasses, it is a slightly sweet, slightly tart syrup made from boiling down pomegranate juice (similar to how balsamic glaze is prepared). It gives the dip its signature sweet and tangy taste, adding an extra depth of flavor. It is a very popular ingredient in Middle Eastern cuisine and an authentic ingredient for this red pepper spread. Most supermarkets sell pomegranate molasses, but you can also purchase it online. If you need a suggestion, this pomegranate molasses (affiliate link) is the brand I use.
  • Lemon Juice – A hint of fresh acidity goes a long way and locks in the color of those beautiful roasted red peppers.
  • Paprika – I prefer sweet paprika over hot since the spice factor will come from the cayenne.
  • Cumin – Although not typically included, I like the punch of savory, smoky goodness cumin brings to this dip.
  • Kosher Salt – Use the amount called for in the recipe and adjust the taste to your liking at the very end. I also recommend finishing it off with some flaky sea salt.
  • Cayenne Pepper (or red pepper flakes) – A slight kick from the cayenne pepper transforms it into a healthy spicy capsicum dip (capsicum is another word for pepper). If you are not into spiciness, you can simply omit it. Alternatively, if you can get your hands on it, you can swap cayenne pepper with Aleppo pepper.

How to make Muhammara?

To make this Middle Eastern pepper sauce, simply:

Red peppers are roasted and charred
  1. Roast bell peppers. Prepare the bell peppers by slicing off the stem end, removing the seeds and core with a spoon, slice in half and cut each half in three pieces. Remove the stem from the end and slice the end into large chunks. Transfer to a parchment-lined baking sheet and broil for 10 minutes, or until skins are well charred, making sure to rotate halfway through.
  2. Steam the bell peppers. Once roasted and charred, transfer the red bell peppers to a large bowl and cover with plastic wrap to steam for 10 minutes (this makes it easier to remove the skins). At this point, you can either leave the skins on for extra charred flavor or remove them.
  3. Crush the crackers. Place the crackers in a plastic bag, seal tight and gently crush with your hands. Finish crushing the crackers into coarse crumbs by rolling over with a rolling pin.
Ingredients are placed in a food processor and photographed from the top view
Dip is photographed in the food processor after it is processed
  1. Process all the ingredients. In the bowl of a food processor, add the roasted red peppers, walnuts, crackers, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, cumin, salt, and cayenne and process until smooth, about 15-20 seconds, scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through.
  2. Garnish and serve. Transfer to a small bowl, spread it with the back of a spoon, garnish with fresh dill, scallions, sesame seeds, and a drizzle of olive oil. Serve with more crackers, pita or crudites.

Expert Tips:

  • Don’t have crackers on hand? Substitute ¼ cup plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional. The crumbs are necessary to absorb extra moisture so the finished dip isn’t runny.
  • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika. Also, if you can handle the heat, be sure to sprinkle it with Aleppo chili flakes.
  • For a vegan red pepper dip, make sure to purchase crackers that are vegan compliant.
  • Add a clove of garlic: While it is not a traditional ingredient, I sometimes add in a clove of minced garlic into the food processor for additional garlicky flavor as I did in this Vegan Red Pepper Dip recipe.

FAQs

How do you pronounce Muhammara?

Muhammara is the formal pronunciation and it sounds like it is written (though the “h” is slightly sibilant, almost as if you are exhaling through a sore throat). Not so easy to get right! Mm’hamara is a more idiomatic version. It also means roasted or burnt (made red), sharing the same etymological root as the word red (Ahmar).

Is Muhammara Similar To Harissa?

Not quite. Muhammara has a mildly spicy, tangy and sweet flavor and usually served as a dip, spread or a sauce, whereas Harissa is more of condiment that is usually used as a flavoring agent for soups, stews, marinades with rich spicy flavors.

Can I Use Jarred Roasted Red Bell Peppers?

You sure can. Just be sure to drain all the liquid before placing the peppers into the food processor or blender.

Can I Substitute The Pomegranate Molasses?

While it won’t be the same thing, you have a few options when it comes to substituting pomegranate molasses when making this Middle Eastern red pepper dip. You can use balsamic glaze, cranberry juice concentrate, or you can mixa few teaspoons of lemon juice with a tablespoon of honey to get a similar sweet and tangy flavor.

How Many Calories?

This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups and easily serves 6 people. And one serving of it is only 176 calories! When you pair the dip with fresh sliced vegetables, it’s even better for you. So go ahead, eat your veggies!

Can I Make Muhammara Without A Blender/Food Processor?

Yes, you can. You can first start by chopping all of the ingredients finely using a sharp chef’s knife and then mix them in a bowl. Alternatively, you can use a mortar and pestle for a smoother texture.

Is This Recipe Spicy?

The authentic Muhammara is usually mildly spicy. However, the spiciness level depend on the recipe you are using. Usually the spiciness comes from Aleppo pepper (or red pepper flakes). When making muhammara at home, you can easily adjust the amount of red pepper flakes you use according to your preference.

Storage Instructions:

  • To store your roasted bell pepper dip: Place muhammara in an airtight container and store it in the fridge for up to 5 days. Alternatively, drizzle it with a thin layer of olive oil to extend its shelf life. Doing so helps prevent air from reaching the roasted red pepper dip and, as a result, keeps it fresh longer.
  • Freezing: If you prefer to store it for a longer period of time, you can freeze this red bell pepper spread. Simply place it in an airtight container (or a freezer bag) remove the air out as much as you can and freeze for up to 2 months.
  • Thawing: Thaw it in the fridge overnight and give it a good stir before serving.

Ways to serve this Syrian pepper sauce recipe

There are a number of ways to serve this muhammara dip recipe, such as:

  • Dip: Definitely the most authentic, serve it as a dip with seed crackers, pita bread, or fresh sliced vegetables as a part of your mezze platter.
  • Spread: Slather it on sandwiches, fresh pita bread, wraps, or your morning toast. In my opinion, leftover muhammara makes the best sandwich spread.
  • Pasta Sauce: Prepare your favorite pasta and toss it in a large bowl with the muhammara and a bit of pasta water – no additional cooking required!
  • Pizza Sauce: Replace the tomato sauce on pizza with muhammara – such a fun, Meditteranean twist!
  • Topping: A scoop of muhammara makes an excellent topping for homemade CAVA bowls and pairs beautifully with other Mediterranean sauces like tzatziki and hummus.
A bowl of the dip is served with crackers on the side

Other sauce/dip recipes you might also like:

If you try this Muhammara dip recipe or any other Middle Eastern Dip recipes mentioned in this post, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

muhammara dip in a bowl from the top view
Print

Muhammara Recipe

Muhammara is a traditional Syrian red pepper dip made with roasted red peppers, walnuts, and pomegranate molasses. This recipe is easy to make, vegan and gluten-free. Serve as a dip, spread, or even as a pasta sauce. It is deliciously addictive!
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Middle Eastern
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 30 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 176kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 red bell peppers medium-sized
  • ½ cup walnuts lightly roasted
  • cup crackers any type of lean cracker can be used*
  • 3 scallions chopped (both green and white parts)
  • ¼ cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 ½ tablespoons pomegranate molasses*
  • 4 teaspoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 ½ teaspoons paprika
  • 1 teaspoon ground cumin
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • teaspoon cayenne pepper

Instructions

  • To roast the bell peppers: Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper. Slice the tops of the bell peppers and remove the stems from the tops. Using a paring knife (or a spoon) take out the core. Cut the bell pepper into three pieces. Place them on the sheet pan skin side up. 
  • Adjust oven rack 3 to 4 inches from the broiler element (or at the top rack) and heat broiler. Broil until the skin is well charred, 10 minutes. Be sure to rotate the sheet pan halfway through.
  • Place the now-charred peppers in a bowl, cover with plastic wrap and let it steam for 10 minutes. At this point, it is up to you to whether or not remove the skin. If you like the charred flavor, feel free to keep the skins on. If not remove and discard them. You should end up with approximately 1 cup of roasted bell peppers.
  • Place crackers into a ziplock bag and crush them with a rolling pin.
  • Place roasted peppers, walnuts, cracker crumbs, scallions, olive oil, pomegranate molasses, lemon juice, paprika, ground cumin, salt, and cayenne pepper into the bowl of a foods processor. 
  • Process until pureed, 15-20 seconds scraping down the sides of the bowl halfway through processing. 
  • Transfer to a bowl and serve with crackers, pita bread, and/or crudites.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1 1/2 cups of muhammara, which is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer/dip. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Best way to store: You can store this roasted red pepper dipping sauce recipe in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • * If you don’t have crackers on hand, substitute ¼ cups of plain breadcrumbs, which is actually more traditional.
  • Want an even more smoky flavor? Replace the sweet paprika with an equal amount of smoked paprika.

Nutrition

Calories: 176kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 227mg | Potassium: 149mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 1358IU | Vitamin C: 55mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 1mg

This recipe has been adapted (with minor changes) from Vegetables Illustrated (affiliate link).

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/muhammara-recipe/feed/ 17
Muffin Tin Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/muffin-pan-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/muffin-pan-potatoes/#comments Sun, 25 Aug 2024 21:31:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1836 If you’re a fan of potato dishes like we are, be sure to check out our other easy potato recipes…]]>

If you’re a fan of potato dishes like we are, be sure to check out our other easy potato recipes like Smashed Fingerlings—crispy on the outside, tender on the inside, and perfect for dipping—or our creamy and comforting Rosemary Garlic Mashed Potatoes. These dishes are just as delicious and easy to prepare as this muffin tin potatoes gratin recipe, offering more ways to enjoy this versatile vegetable!

Scalloped potatoes in a muffin tin baked until golden brown on a plate.

Ingredients You’ll Need for Muffin Pan Potatoes

Baking potatoes in a muffin pan is easy and quick. Plus, this recipe is made with a short list of simple ingredients readily available at the grocery store. We will need the following:

Ingredients to make scalloped potatoes in muffin pan.
  • Potatoes: You can use a few types of white potatoes to cook in muffin cups. Go for Russet potatoes if you prefer a fluffy and light texture (similar to french fries) or use yellow potatoes, like Yukon gold potatoes, for a creamy, tender bite. If both are unavailable, red potatoes are the next best substitute.
  • Butter: We need unsalted butter to grease the muffin tins, but olive oil or avocado oil cooking spray can also be used.
  • Garlic: Fresh garlic offers a delicious savory punch, but garlic powder is a good substitute for a milder garlic taste.
  • Cheese: Parmesan cheese has a rich, slightly nutty flavor that works beautifully with scalloped potatoes in a muffin tin. Gruyere cheese or cheddar cheese would be just as delicious.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper makes the cheesy potatoes to shine. But depending on your preference and serving accompaniments, you can try additional seasonings, such as chili powder, ground cumin, or Italian seasoning.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh thyme offers a delicate and subtle earthy flavor, but you can substitute with dried thyme if fresh isn’t available, using about 1 teaspoon. Alternatively, you can other herbs like fresh rosemary, fresh parsley, dill, or chives, based on what you have on hand.
  • Cream: Heavy cream will provide a rich, buttery flavor, but whole milk can also be used.

How to Make Muffin Tin Potatoes?

Making scalloped potatoes in a muffin tin is straightforward and rewarding. The potato mixture can be prepped and ready in 15 minutes, with the oven doing the rest. Follow the below step-by-step instructions to create delicious, individual muffin tin potato stacks that are guaranteed to impress.

  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees C.
A collage of images showing how to make muffin tin potatoes gratin.
  1. Prepare potato slices: Slice each into 1/4-inch thin slices using a mandolin slicer. If you do not own a mandoline, you can use a sharp knife to slice them as thin and evenly as possible.
  2. Grease muffin tray: Generously coat each muffin cup with the melted butter using a pastry brush.
  3. Begin stacking potatoes: Stack 3-4 slices of potatoes in each muffin cup of the prepared muffin tin. Then, sprinkle one-third of the garlic, parmesan cheese, Kosher salt, pepper, and thyme over each stack.
A collage of images showing how to make muffin tin scalloped potatoes.
  1. Add a second layer of potatoes: Top each stack with 3-4 more slices of potatoes, then sprinkle with more garlic, cheese, salt, pepper, and thyme. Repeat this step until the muffin cup is fully filled with sliced potatoes. Continue to fill the rest of the muffin cups following the same order of ingredients.
  2. Add heavy cream: Gently pour one tablespoon of the heavy cream over each potato stack.
  3. Bake: Transfer it to the preheated oven and bake for 25-30 minutes, until tender and golden brown.
  4. Cool and serve: Cool in the muffin pan for 5 minutes, then run a knife around the edges, remove the potatoes, and serve. Garnish with fresh thyme leaves, if desired.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

While these muffin tin potatoes are best enjoyed fresh from the oven, they can be made ahead, stored, and reheated for later enjoyment. Here are some tips to help you make the most of these muffin tin potato stacks:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare the scalloped potato cups as instructed, but do not bake. Cover tightly with foil and place in the fridge for up to 1 day. When ready to bake, remove it from the refrigerator 30 minutes before baking it in the oven. Bake as directed.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days. Be sure to cool the potatoes completely before storing them. Warm potatoes will create excess moisture and condensation, making them soggy.
  • Reheat: Reheat the leftover mini potato gratin stacks in a preheated low-heat oven (300 degrees F) or toaster oven to ensure they stay crispy and delicious. 

What to Serve It With?

You can serve muffin pan scalloped potatoes as a side dish or an appetizer. They are perfect when served with eggs for breakfast or your favorite meat dishes. Some of my favorite dishes to serve them with are:

Potatoes cooked in muffin cups served with eggs for breakfast.
  • Meat: Whether serving these potatoes as part of a casual weeknight dinner or an elevated side dish for special occasions and Christmas dinners, meat and potatoes are a match made in heaven. The crispy cheesy potato stacks go especially well with Prime Rib or Beef Tenderloin and a fresh salad.
  • Turkey: You can’t have Thanksgiving without potatoes, and what better way to impress your guests than with a platter of scalloped potatoes in a muffin tin. These are best served to a crowd with a classic Thanksgiving Turkey. Or, you could try Baked Turkey Wings or Baked Turkey Breasts when serving a small crowd.
  • Breakfast: Don’t save these potatoes just for the holidays. Think of them as a year-round recipe that can be served as part of your breakfast with eggs and bacon or alongside Feta and Spinach Frittata. If you are inspired, make cheesy bacon potato stacks by tossing in some cooked and crumbled bacon (or turkey bacon) between the slices.
  • Snack: There’s nothing more comforting than potatoes when you need something to munch on. Dollop the tops with sour cream or with Guacamole for a fun and delicious appetizer.

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

While the recipe is straightforward, there are a few things to remember to succeed on your first try. Here are some of my expert tips for the best muffin tin potatoes recipe:

  • Check for doneness: The cooking time will vary depending on the thickness of the potato slices. If you can easily pierce the center of the potato stacks with a knife and they appear to have crispy edges, they are ready.
  • Pay attention to the size of the potatoes: No matter what potato you choose, muffin tin scalloped potatoes are best made with long and narrow-sized potatoes. As you shop for this recipe, take a few extra minutes to look for potatoes roughly the same size and diameter as your muffin tin.
  • Peel the potatoes: Peeling the potato skin is optional, but during our recipe testing, we found potatoes without the skins provided the best texture.
  • Mandoline will create the most uniform slices: A mandoline is a handy kitchen tool that will give you even slices. A sharp knife and a steady hand will suffice if you do not own a mandoline.
  • Brush the muffin cups generously with butter: Butter is potatoes’ best friend. We want to be generous when brushing the muffin tins with butter, as this will create crispier potatoes and easy removal. We do not recommend using parchment paper liners for this recipe.
  • Layer or toss with the seasonings: We found it easier to stack the potatoes, and then layer with the seasonings. However, you also have the option to toss the potato slices with the garlic, cheese, salt, pepper, and thyme in a large mixing bowl, then stack as directed.

More Potato Recipes

If you make this Muffin Tin Potatoes recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Muffin tin potatoes garnished with thyme.
Print

Muffin Tin Potatoes Recipe

Muffin Tin Potatoes is the easiest yet most delicious appetizer or side dish. Stacked potato slices layered with garlic, parmesan cheese, and fresh thyme baked in a muffin cup to perfection.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 30 minutes
Total Time 40 minutes
Servings 12 servings
Calories 114kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 medium russet potatoes peeled, about 1 ½ pounds
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter melted
  • 4 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed or 2 teaspoons garlic powder
  • ½ cup Parmesan cheese grated
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon fresh ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon fresh thyme
  • 12 tablespoons heavy cream or whole milk

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F/204 degrees C.
  • Slice each potato into 1/4-inch (or thinner) slices using a mandoline. If you do not have one, use a sharp knife to slice them as thin and evenly as you can.
  • Using the pastry brush, generously coat each muffin cup with the melted butter.
  • Stack three slices of potatoes in each muffin cup. Lightly sprinkle one-third of the garlic, parmesan cheese, Kosher salt, pepper, and thyme over each stack.
  • Top each stack with three more slices of potatoes, then sprinkle a third of the garlic, parmesan cheese, Kosher salt, pepper, and thyme. Repeat this step again until you reach the top of the muffin tin cup.
  • Continue with the rest of the muffin cups, following the same steps.
  • Gently pour one tablespoon of the heavy cream over each muffin cup.
  • Bake for 25-30 minutes, until tender.
  • Let cool in the muffin pan for 5 minutes, then gently remove from the pan and serve.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe, baked in a 12-cup standart muffin tin, make 12 stacked potatoes. The nutrition information below is per potato stack.
  • Generously butter the muffin tins with butter: Do not skip buttering the muffin tins generously with butter; otherwise, it’ll be hard to get the butter stacks after they are baked. We tested this recipe with parchment muffin liners and thought the stacked potatoes were not as crispy.
  • Number of potato slices per cup: The number of slices per cup depends on the thickness of your potato slices. Aim for filling them all the way to the top and pack as many as you can. They tend to shrink as they bake.
  • Thickness of the slices: While a mandoline does a beautiful job, a sharp knife is just as efficient. And if potato slices are a bit thicker, do not worry; it will still bake beautifully. You’ll see in the video below (that I made in 2017) even thicker potato slices bake beautifully.
  • Covering it with foil: During our recipe, we found some versions of this recipe that recommended covering it with aluminum foil while baking. We tried that and did not feel it was necessary.
  • Storage: Bring the leftover potato stacks to room temperature, place them in an airtight container, and store them in the refrigerator for up to three days. Reheat in a low heat oven (250-300 degrees F) for 8-10 minutes or until they are warmed to your liking.
  • This recipe is adapted from Martha Steward’s Muffin Pan Potato Gratins recipe.

Nutrition

Calories: 114kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 25mg | Sodium: 267mg | Potassium: 174mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 340IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 69mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/muffin-pan-potatoes/feed/ 28
Eggplant Caprese https://foolproofliving.com/eggplant-caprese/ https://foolproofliving.com/eggplant-caprese/#respond Tue, 06 Aug 2024 11:59:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=77481 It is no secret that Caprese is a summer classic. With all the fresh and colorful summer tomatoes and fresh…]]>

It is no secret that Caprese is a summer classic. With all the fresh and colorful summer tomatoes and fresh basil abundant in the garden, it is the easiest yet most delicious summer recipe. While I make my Burrata Caprese often, this summer, I have been loving this grilled eggplant caprese. 

If you are a fan of eggplant recipes, this easy recipe is a great way to use them in your daily cooking.

Eggplant Caprese on a plate garnished with basil leaves.

Ingredients

The list below includes two sets of items: what you’ll need to grill the eggplant and what you’ll need to make the eggplant Caprese salad.

Ingredients for the recipe with text on each ingredient.
  • Eggplant: The widely available globe eggplants work beautifully in this recipe. However, if you can get your hands on other eggplant varieties, like Italian Graffiti eggplants, you can use them as well. Keep in mind that each variety offers a slightly different flavor and texture, but all will work beautifully in this recipe. There is no need to peel the eggplant as the skin is edible. 
  • Olive Oil: This is used both for the marinade and the final drizzle. Choose an extra virgin olive oil that offers a rich but subtle flavor.
  • Balsamic Vinegar: We are using balsamic vinegar both in the marinade and in the assembled dish. I recommend a good-quality aged balsamic vinegar (affiliate link), but any of your favorite brands would work.
  • Garlic: Freshly minced or pressed garlic adds a pungent, savory depth to the marinade.
  • Seasonings: Kosher salt (or flaky sea salt) and ground black pepper are all you need for seasoning this eggplant recipe.
  • Tomatoes: If you can find them, use sweet, ripe heirloom tomatoes. However, any type of tomato would work in this caprese salad with eggplant. For even layering, try to choose tomatoes that are similar in size.
  • Fresh mozzarella cheese: Sliced thickly, fresh mozzarella pairs perfectly with the tomatoes and eggplant. While it is not traditional, you can take things up a notch by using burrata instead.
  • Fresh Basil Leaves: Fresh basil is key for that authentic Caprese taste. We recommend tearing larger leaves by hand instead of chopping them with a knife, which will bruise them.
  • Balsamic Glaze – Optional: This is an optional ingredient, but if you have it on hand, drizzle it over the salad for a touch of sweetness and acidity.

How to make this recipe?

Creating this eggplant Caprese is simple and straightforward. It starts with grilling the eggplant and then assembling the salad. Below are the step-by-step instructions:

  1. Fire up the grill: Preheat your grill to medium-high heat, approximately 400 degrees F.
Person showing how to prepare eggplant to make caprese with eggplant.
  1. Prepare the eggplant: Slice eggplant into ½-inch thick rounds and place them in a single layer on a baking sheet.
  2. Make the marinade: In a shallow baking dish, whisk together olive oil, balsamic vinegar, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper until combined.
  3. Marinade the eggplant: Place the sliced eggplant in the marinade and make sure that they are coated on both sides. Let them rest for 10 minutes. 
  4. Grill: Place the eggplant slices directly on the grill grate for 4-5 minutes, flip, and cook for an additional 2-3 minutes just until tender to maintain its structure and avoid a mushy texture. 
A collage of images showing how to assemble the caprese with eggplant and tomatoes.
  1. Assemble: Arrange the grilled eggplant slices with sliced mozzarella, tomato slices, and fresh basil leaves on a large serving platter.
  2. Season and garnish: Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar (or balsamic glaze) and sprinkle with salt and black pepper. Garnish with fresh basil leaves and serve immediately.

How To Serve Caprese Eggplant?

The beauty of this Italian classic is that it can be served in many different ways, making it a versatile summer dish that you can prepare on a moment’s notice. Here are some serving suggestions:

  • A light meal or appetizer: Serve it with a loaf of crusty bread for an impressive summer appetizer that is great for serving a crowd.
  • A vegetarian dinner: Place eggplant caprese stacks on top of a bowl of a hearty grain like quinoa or wild rice for a complete vegetarian meal.
  • Side Dish with grilled meats and seafood: If you are wondering what to serve with eggplant caprese, know that any grilled protein would work. I especially like to pair it with my Grilled Wild Salmon and Shrimp and Vegetable Kabobs.
  • Make it a sandwich or a wrap: Use the eggplant mozzarella stacks to make a quick sandwich with Italian bread or a wrap with flour tortilla for a quick lunch.
Person serving eggplant Caprese salad along with wine.

Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Like

If you make your own Eggplant Caprese following our recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Eggplant caprese on a plate from the top view.
Print

Eggplant Caprese Recipe

Grilled eggplant slices layered with mozzarella cheese and juicy tomatoes garnished with basil leaves. If you are a fan of the classic Italian Caprese, be sure to try this eggplant version.
Course Salad
Cuisine American/Italian
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 8 minutes
Resting Time 10 minutes
Total Time 28 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 279kcal

Ingredients

For The Eggplant

  • 1 large eggplant or two medium eggplant (approximately 1 lb)
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • ¼ cup balsamic vinegar
  • 2 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Caprese

  • 1 lb. fresh tomatoes any tomatoes would work (we prefer heirloom or cherry tomatoes) sliced 1/2 inch thick
  • 8 oz. fresh mozzarella sliced ½ inch thick
  • ¼ cup fresh basil leaves
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar or balsamic glaze optional
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt or flaky sea salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat your grill to medium-high heat, approximately 400 degrees F.
  • Slice the eggplant into ½-inch thick rounds—place as a single layer on a baking sheet.
  • To make the marinade, whisk together olive oil, balsamic vinegar, garlic, kosher salt, and pepper in a shallow baking dish (9X13) until combined.
  • Place the eggplant slices in the marinade, coating them fully on both sides. Let them rest for 5-10 minutes. When ready to grill, remove them onto a platter shaking the excess marinade.
  • Place the eggplant slices directly on the grill grate and cook for 4-5 minutes until lightly golden brown. Using a spatula, flip and cook for an additional 2-3 minutes or until tender.
  • To assemble the eggplant caprese, arrange grilled eggplant, sliced juicy tomatoes, and mozzarella in an overlapping pattern on a large serving platter. Alternatively, you can layer them in stacks starting with eggplant slices followed by mozzarella cheese, sliced tomatoes and fresh basil leaves.
  • Drizzle with olive oil and balsamic vinegar (or balsamic glaze, if using). Sprinkle with salt and pepper.
  • Garnish with fresh basil leaves and serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 7-8 (loose) cups of eggplant caprese, which is ideal for serving 6 people as a side dish. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Cooking Eggplant: We made this recipe using grilled eggplant since it’s perfect for the summer months. However, you can enjoy this eggplant dish all year round. You don’t have to stick to grilling; try air-frying, sautéing in a skillet, or baking in the oven your eggplant for equally delicious results.
  • Crispy Eggplant: Another alternative to grilling eggplant could be my Baked Crispy Eggplant or Breaded Eggplant in Air Fryer. Coating sliced eggplant with a mixture of panko breadcrumbs, parmesan cheese, garlic powder, and other seasonings adds yet another layer of flavor to the eggplant caprese.
  • Salting eggplant: It is not necessary to salt eggplant if you buy it from a supermarket during the summer months when it is in season. Thanks to the advancements in eggplant farming, farmers have bred out much of that signature bitterness, especially in the globe eggplants you find in US supermarkets. However, if you prefer to salt it, you can do so by following our guide on salting eggplant.
  • Serve at room temperature: While you can make this salad a few hours in advance, I find that it is best when served at room temperature. For the best results, simply take it out of the fridge 30 minutes before serving.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 279kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Cholesterol: 30mg | Sodium: 827mg | Potassium: 405mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 957IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 213mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/eggplant-caprese/feed/ 0
Crazy Feta https://foolproofliving.com/crazy-feta/ https://foolproofliving.com/crazy-feta/#comments Sat, 06 Jul 2024 14:45:10 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76598 I didn’t think feta cheese could get any better until I stumbled upon the crazy feta dip at the popular…]]>

I didn’t think feta cheese could get any better until I stumbled upon the crazy feta dip at the popular Cava restaurant chain. When I first had it, I knew I had to create a homemade crazy feta I could enjoy anytime I wanted. And I have to admit, I think this version is better than the original.

If you are into Cava and the taste of their delicious dips and spreads, you might also like other Mediterranean staples, including Tzatziki Sauce, Mediterranean Hummus, Baba Ganoush, and Harissa Sauce.

Cava feta dip served in a bowl with veggies and  pita chips from the top view.

What is Crazy Feta at Cava?

Cava is a popular Mediterranean fast-casual chain that opened in the DC area. It is known for its quick pick-up mezze bowls. Crazy feta is one of the featured dips, along with tzatziki, hummus, harissa, and roasted eggplant dip.

Cava’s crazy feta is made with feta, jalapenos, onions, and olive oil. The vegetables are roasted, and all the ingredients are whipped together until smooth.

Crazy Feta Ingredients

Cava feta dip requires just a handful of simple ingredients, which are easy to find at the grocery store. We will need:

Ingredients for the recipe with text on the image on each ingredient.
  • Jalapeno peppers: Look for two large jalapenos for the best flavor.
  • Onion: One yellow onion is all we need, but red onions could also work.
  • Garlic bulb: The roasted garlic head adds an incredible depth of flavor and a natural sweetness. I like to break the garlic bulb into garlic cloves for faster roasting or use already-made Roasted Garlic or Air Fryer Roasted Garlic.
  • Olive oil: Extra virgin olive oil provides a rich, fruity flavor.
  • Seasonings: A simple seasoning of Kosher salt and black pepper makes the roasted veggies and feta cheese shine.
  • Feta cheese: Look for two 8-ounce feta cheese blocks (or feta bricks) in the cheese section of your grocery store, either made from cow’s milk, sheep’s milk, or a mix of the two.
  • Lemon: We need both the lemon zest and lemon juice, so zest the whole lemon before juicing.

How to Make Crazy Feta?

This crazy feta recipe is ready in 25-30 minutes, thanks to the quick roasting time. Here are the step-by-step instructions:

  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
A collage of images showing how to make Cava feta dip recipe.
  1. Prepare vegetables: Place the sliced jalapenos, chopped onion, and peeled garlic cloves on the sheet pan. Drizzle with 2 tablespoons of olive oil, then season with Kosher salt and black pepper.
  2. Roast vegetables: Roast for 15 minutes, tossing once halfway through for even cooking. When pierced with a knife, the vegetables should be soft. Set aside to cool.
  3. Whip feta: In the bowl of a food processor (or blender) with the S-blade, add the feta cheese (broken into small pieces), olive oil, lemon juice, and lemon zest. Pulse several times until all ingredients are incorporated, scraping down the sides of the bowl as needed.
A food processor filled with feta, jalapeno, garlic and onion, before and after it is whipped.
  1. Make feta dip: Add the roasted vegetables to the feta mixture. Pulse until pureed to your desired consistency, scraping down the bowl as needed. Taste and adjust seasoning.
  2. Serve: Transfer to your favorite serving bowl and drizzle it with a teaspoon of olive oil, if desired. Serve as an appetizer with pita chips, crackers, or veggies on the side (see more Serving Suggestions below).

How to Serve Crazy Feta?

Crazy feta is one of those recipes that is extremely versatile. The Mediterranean flavors take front and center served as a dip or spread in any of the following ways:

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

Here are some of my expert tips for the best Cava crazy feta dip recipe:

  • Adjust the heat level: If you prefer a spicy dip, leave the seeds and ribs intact on the jalapenos.
  • Cut the vegetables roughly the same size: Chopping the vegetables about the same size (jalapenos sliced in half, onion cut into large chunks) and slicing the garlic cloves in half ensures they cook quickly and evenly.
  • Control the texture with the food processor: I love a smooth and creamy texture, but you can make this jalapeno feta dip as chunky or smooth as you like.
  • Make it your own: Customize it in any way you like, such as adding sun-dried tomatoes in oil, a sprinkling of fresh herbs, or some roasted red pepper.

FAQs

Is Cava feta pasteurized?

Yes, according to its packaging (sold at Whole Foods), the feta cheese is made with pasteurized cow’s milk and sheep’s milk.

How many carbs are in crazy feta cheese?

This recipe serves eight people as an appetizer, with each serving offering 4 grams of carbs.

Other Cava-Inspired Dips and Spreads

If you try this Cava Feta Dip recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Cava Copycat Crazy feta in a bowl served with pita chips and vegetables.
Print

Crazy Feta Recipe

If you are a fan of the Mediterranean food restaurant chain Cava, you are likely a fan of their Crazy Feta as well. If you have ever wanted to make it in your home kitchen, you have found the best copycat recipe. This quick and easy creamy feta dip is ideal for serving with pita chips and veggies or topping your favorite grain bowls and salads.
Course Condiment – Dip
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 8 serving
Calories 249kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

For The Vegetables:

  • 2 large jalapenos cut in half and deseeded
  • 1 medium sized yellow onion peeled and cut into large chunks
  • 1 bulb garlic peeled and sliced in half (10-12 cloves)
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Feta Dip:

  • 16 ounces feta cheese 2-8 ounce blocks, crumbled
  • ¼ cup olive oil plus more for drizzling
  • 4 tablespoons lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Place the jalapenos, onion, and garlic cloves on the sheet pan. Drizzle with 2 tablespoons of olive oil and sprinkle with the kosher salt and pepper.
  • Roast for 15 minutes, tossing once halfway through the process to ensure even cooking. Vegetables should be soft when pierced with a knife. Remove from the oven and set them aside to cool.
  • Place the feta cheese, olive oil, lemon juice, and lemon zest in the food processor. Pulse several times until all ingredients are incorporated. Scrape down the sides of the bowl as needed.
  • Add the roasted vegetables and pulse until pureed to your desired consistency, scraping down the sides of the food processor bowl to incorporate all ingredients. Taste and adjust seasoning as necessary.
  • Transfer to a serving bowl and if preferred, drizzle with olive oil. Serve with pita chips, crackers or veggies on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 2 cups of Crazy feta dip, ideal for serving eight people as an appetizer. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Adding salt: Feta can be salty, so it’s best to taste the feta before adding any additional salt to the recipe.
  • Best when served at room temperature: While the dip should be chilled, the flavors are most prominent at cool to room temperature. If you have stored the dip for later, remove it from the fridge 20 minutes before enjoying it.
  • Storage & Make-Ahead Instructions: This Cava crazy feta recipe tastes better the longer all the ingredients have a chance to mingle in the fridge, making it a great make-ahead recipe. To make ahead and store, simply:
    • Make Ahead: Prepare the dip at least 1 hour before serving. Keep covered in the fridge.
    • Storage: Store leftover dip in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days.
    • Freeze: The leftovers of this feta jalapeno dip can be frozen. Simply place them in a freezer-safe container, cover them with a lid, and freeze for up to a month. Thaw in the fridge overnight.

Nutrition

Calories: 249kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 50mg | Sodium: 793mg | Potassium: 73mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 278IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 285mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/crazy-feta/feed/ 3
Elote Dip https://foolproofliving.com/elote-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/elote-dip/#comments Mon, 01 Jul 2024 20:45:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=76149 Tender, flavorful, and fresh, corn appetizer recipes make a great addition to any savory meal. My Mexican Street Corn Salad…]]>

Tender, flavorful, and fresh, corn appetizer recipes make a great addition to any savory meal. My Mexican Street Corn Salad strikes an irresistible balance between heat and tanginess, while Corn Black Bean Salad has all the garden-fresh, zingy undertones you could want in a side dish.

Elote corn dip in a bowl garnished with lime with chips on the side.

What is Elote Dip?

Elote dip is a creamy, corn-based appetizer that gets its flavors from traditional Mexican street corn. This recipe’s original “street food version” starts by grilling corn on the cob and slathering it with a rich mixture of mayonnaise, sour cream, and lime juice. People then sprinkle it with ingredients like cilantro and chili powder to enhance its fresher, spicier notes.

The “dip form” of this recipe takes all of the same ingredients and flavors, transforming it into a scoopable appetizer—often served with a side of tortilla chips, as a condiment for tacos, or on top of other savory mains.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Wondering why this recipe for elote dip is so irresistible? With only a few simple ingredients, this dish packs all the creamy, fresh, and spicy flavors you love in Mexican street food.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Corn: Nearly any type of corn will work in this elote dip recipe. When fresh sweet corn is in season in the summer, I prefer buying it fresh. However, you can also make this dish with canned or frozen corn if it is out-of-season (like when serving it as a part of your Cinco de Mayo spread) or if you want to simplify your meal prep. 
  • Olive oil: We used extra virgin olive oil because of its milder flavor, but you can also use an equal amount of unsalted butter.
  • Fresh garlic cloves: To ensure an even infusion of flavor, finely mince or press your garlic before adding it to your recipe.
  • Mayonnaise: Most recipes for this sweet corn dip use mayo as the base when making the creamy elote dressing. However, if you want a more decadent option, you can also make this Mexican corn dip with cream cheese instead, though your recipe will likely have a thicker consistency.
  • Sour cream: Sour cream is vital to this recipe’s cool tanginess. However, you can make a more authentic elote dip recipe with Mexican crema or use plain Greek yogurt for a lighter version.
  • Fresh lime juice and zest
  • Seasonings: I opted for a basic mix of kosher salt, ground pepper, and chili powder to season my elote dip. However, you can use an authentic Mexican Tajin seasoning or Trader Joe’s Everything But the Elote Seasoning Blend (affiliate link) for a zestier, more robust chili taste. And if you like your dip spicier, a pinch of cayenne pepper would be a welcome addition.
  • Red onion: If you prefer a milder “onion” flavor, use green onions instead of red for this recipe.
  • Jalapeno: One fresh, finely chopped jalapeno is all you need to add fresh heat to this elote cheese dip. Though I prefer removing the seeds from my jalapenos before cutting, you can achieve a spicier blend by leaving some seeds in.
  • Cotija cheese or queso fresco: These two kinds of cheese are classic choices for this dip, but almost any Mexican cheese will work. Though not traditional, you can also use feta cheese, pepper jack cheese, or Parmesan cheese if you’re in a pinch.
  • Cilantro: Fresh, chopped cilantro is an easy way to give your dip a touch of freshness and color, but you can substitute it for parsley or omit it altogether if preferred.

How to Make Street Corn Dip?

This easy elote dip comes together in five simple steps, making it a boon for first-time cooks and expert chefs alike.

A collage of images showing how to make elote dip.
  1. Saute the corn: Pour the olive oil into a large, heavy-bottom skillet and heat over medium-high heat. Add the sweet corn kernels and, stirring frequently, saute until they turn a light golden color (7-10 minutes). Note: You may need to saute your corn in two batches to ensure you don’t overcrowd the skillet. Then, add the garlic to the pan and saute for 30 seconds, stirring constantly. Remove the garlic-corn mixture from the skillet, set it aside, and let it cool for 10-15 minutes.
  2. Make the dressing: Add the mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, lime zest, chili powder, kosher salt, and ground pepper to a large mixing bowl. Whisk the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
  3. Assemble the dip: Add the cooled corn, red onion, jalapeno, and cilantro to the bowl with the dressing. Toss to combine, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary.
  4. Serve: Transfer the dip to a serving bowl, garnish with cotija cheese, and serve with a side of your favorite chips.

How to Serve this Mexican Street Corn Dip Recipe?

One of the best parts about this easy Mexican street corn dip is its versatility. It’s good enough to eat with a spoon, but you can also pair it with countless other dishes to make a flavorful, filling meal.

  • Chips on the side: An undeniable crowd-pleaser, this elote chip dip makes the perfect party appetizer when served alongside a bowl of tortilla chips. (Warning: Don’t expect to have any leftovers!)
  • Tacos and burritos: This creamy elote dip tastes amazing with taco recipes, balancing their savory flavor with a bright, smooth tang. In particular, I love serving it with juicy Flank Steak Tacos, smoky Brisket Tacos, and vegan Black Bean Quinoa Tacos. You can even use this easy dip as a burrito topping for an equally delicious Mexican meal.
  • Vegetable platter: Another delectable way to enjoy this roasted street corn dip is one of the healthiest. Serve this creamy dish alongside a platter of fresh veggies—especially bell peppers, carrot sticks, and cherry tomatoes—for an equally delicious and colorful snack platter.
  • Salads and taco bowls: This recipe is more than a tasty dip. When mixed into taco bowls and salads, it also makes a delicious elote salsa.
  • Grilled seafood: In the mood for a light, seaside menu? This easy elote corn makes an incredible topping for dozens of fresh fish mains, whether you’re craving savory-sweet Grilled Mahi Mahi, umami-rich Grilled Sockeye Salmon, or smoky Grilled Shrimp.

Aysegul’s Expert Tips

It’s a cinch to make the best Mexican street corn dip recipe with these tasty tips. Below, you’ll find out how to prepare this dish just as you like—with maximum flavor and zero hassle.

  • Other ways to cook corn: In the recipe below, I sauteed my corn on the cob because it’s an easy way to achieve rich, tender flavors. However, you can also lend your elotes dip bolder, smokier notes by cooking your corn on the grill or in the oven. Alternatively, you can try Air Fryer Corn on the Cob or cook it in the microwave for a quick, indoor option.
  • Can be served warm, room temperature, or cold: You can serve this dish at any temperature you prefer. When served right away while the corn is still warm, hot elote dip is delicious with chips. Equally, after resting in the fridge for a few hours, its cold version makes a great appetizer.
  • It gets better as it sits: If you have time, I highly recommend making this recipe a day in advance and storing it in the fridge until it’s ready to eat. Just be sure to add fresh, delicate ingredients (like cilantro and cheese) right before serving to maintain their texture and taste.
Person serving a chip with Mexican elote dip.

You Might Also Like:

If you are a fan of the classic elote recipe and flavors, you might also like:

If you make this Elote Dip recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a great way to support this website and help those planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the Foolproof Living community.

Corn elote dip in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Elote Dip Recipe

Tangy, creamy, and smoky, this elote street corn dip will immediately add fresh, Mexican flavor to any menu. The best part is that you can make this authentic dish in less than 30 minutes with only a handful of ingredients!
Course Appetizer, Condiment – Dip
Cuisine Mexican Cuisine
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 25 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 196kcal

Ingredients

For The Corn

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 6 ears of corn husks remove and kernels cut from the cob*, about 4-5 cups
  • 2 cloves garlic finely minced or pressed

For The Creamy Elote Dressing:

  • 3 tablespoons mayonnaise
  • 3 tablespoons sour cream or Greek yogurt or Mexican crema
  • 3 tablespoons lime juice
  • 1 teaspoon lime zest
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

For The Dip:

  • ¼ cup red onion or green onions finely chopped
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and finely chopped
  • ½ cup crumbled cotija cheese or queso fresco
  • cup fresh cilantro chopped

Instructions

  • To cook the corn: In a large heavy-bottom skillet (such a cast iron skillet), heat olive oil over medium-high heat. Add the corn kernels and saute for 7-10 minutes, stirring frequently until lightly golden. Do not overcrowd the skillet. Saute in 2 batches if needed. Add the garlic and saute, stirring constantly, for 30 seconds. Remove from the heat and set aside to cool for 5-10 minutes.
  • To make the dressing: Whisk together the mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, lime zest, chili powder, kosher salt, and black pepper in a large bowl (big enough to mix the whole dip) until thoroughly combined.
  • To assemble: Add the now-cooled corn, onion, jalapeno, cotija cheese, and cilantro to the bowl and toss to combine. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Transfer to a serving bowl and garnish with more cilantro. Serve with your favorite chips on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes approximately 4 cups of dip that is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Corn: During the summer months, I prefer using fresh sweet corn for this recipe. On the other hand, when corn is not in season, I use canned (and drained corn) or frozen corn kernels. If using frozen corn, there is no need to thaw it. Either way, you will need 4-5 cups of corn kernels to make this recipe.
  • Adding Salt: Be sure to taste your cheese before adding it to your Mexican street dip. Some varieties are saltier than others, so you might alter your seasoning depending on your cheese’s flavor profile. 
  • Adjust spiciness: My recipe for street taco dip is relatively mild, as I remove the seeds of my jalapenos before adding them to my mix. However, if you’re looking for an extra kick of heat, leave some seeds in or add a dash of your favorite hot sauce.
  • Storing leftovers: You can store this elote corn dip recipe in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. I don’t recommend freezing your dip, however, as the extreme temperatures will interfere with the dressing’s texture and taste.

Nutrition

Calories: 196kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 296mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 398IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 76mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/elote-dip/feed/ 1
Mediterranean Nachos https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/ https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/#comments Thu, 20 Jun 2024 13:13:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14175 You know those cravings when you want to munch on something extra delicious? Well, say hello to Mediterranean nachos. They’re…]]>

You know those cravings when you want to munch on something extra delicious? Well, say hello to Mediterranean nachos. They’re the perfect combination of fresh ingredients and crispy pita chips, and they’ll keep you coming back for more.

Vegan Greek nachos on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

Mediterranean-style nachos require a mix of fresh produce and pantry staples. While the topping has a medley of fresh vegetables, you can simplify it even more with Greek Cucumber Salad. But to make it as I did here, we will need:

Pita chips and oil for the base of the recipe.

For The Pita Chips:

  • Pita: I used whole wheat pita, but you can use regular pita if that is all that’s available at the grocery store. Alternatively, you can make our homemade pita recipe using a DIY approach. If you are short on time, store-bought baked pita chips can be used in a pinch.
  • Olive Oil: Use extra virgin olive oil for the most fruity flavor.
  • Kosher Salt
Topping ingredients for Greek nachos.

For The Topping:

  • Chickpeas: Chickpeas (or garbanzo beans) give it that Mediterranean style, but you can also use white cannellini beans or navy beans.
  • Tomatoes: Small and juicy cherry tomatoes provide both acidity and sweetness. Grape tomatoes, Roma tomatoes, or heirloom tomatoes all work too.
  • Cucumbers: I love small, thin-skinned Persian cucumbers, which you don’t need to peel. If you are using regular cucumbers or English cucumbers, be sure to peel and remove the watery seeds.
  • Green Onions: Mild scallions give it a savory bite. Red onion is another good option.
  • Olives: Greek Kalamata olives provide a delicious briny bite. Black olives or green olives will also work, or a mix of all three for a more complex flavor. Not a fan of olives? Omit them altogether.
  • Lemon Juice: Freshly squeezed lemon juice offers the best citrus flavor. We will need it for the topping and the tahini sauce.
  • Garlic: Garlic gives the salad an extra bite. Use one fresh garlic clove for the best flavor.
  • Seasonings: Kosher salt and black pepper are all we need, just make sure to season the pita chips, salad topping, and tahini sauce and taste as you go.
Tahini dressing for nachos.

For The Herbed Tahini Sauce:

  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh parsley keeps it simple, but you can amp up the flavor even more with fresh dill, fresh basil, or fresh mint. Don’t have any fresh herbs on hand? Make this Lemon Tahini Sauce instead.
  • Tahini: Look for a runny tahini, and make sure to mix it well before using.
  • Fresh Garlic
  • Water: Water helps thin out the tahini dressing to the right consistency. Start with 2 tablespoons, then add more water, one tablespoon at a time, until a dressing-like consistency is reached.

Optional Add-Ins

For a few twists and different variations, add one, two, or all of the following:

How to Make Mediterranean Nachos?

If you think that you can not make nachos without cheese, think again! Here are the step-by-step instructions and photos to make this Greek nachos recipe:

  1. Prep: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper.
Steps showing how to prep Mediterranean nachos pita bread and topping.
  1. Prepare pita: Brush both sides of the pita bread lightly with olive oil. Stack them on top of each other and cut them into 8 triangles. If it is hard to cut it, you can do it in two batches.
  2. Bake pita chips: Spread the pita wedges into one single layer on the prepared sheet pan. Season with salt. Bake for 9-10 minutes, flipping halfway through. Remove from the oven and set aside while you prepare the topping.
  3. Make the topping: In a medium bowl, combine chickpeas, tomatoes, cucumber, green onions, olives, parsley, lemon juice, garlic, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Stir to combine.
A collage of images showing how to make the tahini dressing and assemble the nachos.
  1. Make the tahini sauce: In the bowl of a food processor with the blade attachment, add the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, parsley, water, and salt. Process until smooth and creamy. If the sauce is too thick, add water, one tablespoon at a time.
  2. Assemble nachos: Spread the toasted pita chips on a large platter. With a slotted spoon, scoop the tomato and cucumber mixture over the pita bread. Drizzle it with the tahini sauce. Garnish with more parsley, if desired. Enjoy!
Vegan Turkish nachos drizzled with tahini dressing from the top view.

FAQs

Can Mediterranean nachos be prepared ahead of time?

If you want to get ahead, components of the nachos can be prepared and stored separately. Dice the vegetables and make the tahini sauce up to 3 days in advance. Store all components separately. I recommend baking the pita chips right before assembling the nachos. 

How do you layer nachos so they don’t get soggy?

Start with a base of thick pita chips and layer evenly so that the toppings and sauce are evenly distributed. Also, use a slotted spoon for the salad topping, as we don’t want the extra juices.

Similar Appetizer / Party Food You Might Like:

Reprinted (with minimal changes) from the Love Real Food by Kathryne Taylor, Vegan Nachos Recipe by permission of Rodale Books.

Mediterranean Nachos recipe on a plate drizzled with herbed tahini sauce.
Print

Mediterranean Nachos Recipe

This Mediterranean Nachos recipe is a 20-minute vegan appetizer made by layering toasted pita chips with a quick tomato chickpea salad. Drizzled with homemade herbed tahini dressing, this is an easy recipe that is not only delicious but also visually impressive.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 9 minutes
Total Time 19 minutes
Servings 6 Servings
Calories 246kcal

Ingredients

For the toasted pita chips:

  • 4 whole wheat pitas 7-inch
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt

For The Toppings:

  • 1 can chickpeas drained and rinsed (15-ounce can)
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes sliced
  • 1 Persian cucumber peeled (or not peeled), sliced thinly or half of an English cucumber
  • 2 stalks green onions chopped
  • ¼ cup black olives pitted and sliced (such as Kalamata olives)
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley chopped
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

For The Herbed Tahini Sauce:

  • cup tahini shaken well
  • ¼ cup lemon juice
  • 1 garlic clove minced
  • ¼ cup fresh parsley leaves plus more as garnish
  • 2 tablespoons water plus more as needed
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

Instructions

  • To make the pita chips, preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Brush both sides of the pita bread lightly with olive oil. Stack them on top of each other and cut them into 8 small wedges. If it is hard to cut them at the same time, you can do it in two batches.
  • Spread the pita wedges in an even layer on the prepared sheet pan and sprinkle them with salt. Bake for 9-10 minutes, flipping halfway through. You want them to be crispy, but they burn quickly, so keep a close eye on them as they bake. Remove them from the oven and set aside to cool for a few minutes.
  • Meanwhile, prepare the topping. In a medium bowl, combine chickpeas, tomatoes, cucumber, green onions, olives, parsley, lemon juice, garlic, olive oil, salt, and pepper. Stir to combine and set aside.
  • To make the herbed tahini sauce, place the tahini, lemon juice, garlic, parsley, water, and salt in the bowl of a food processor fitted with the blade attachment. Blend* until smooth. It should have a creamy consistency, so if needed, add more water in one-tablespoon increments.
  • To assemble: Spread the toasted pita chips on a large plate in an even layer. Using a slotted spoon, scoop the tomato and cucumber mixture over the pita bread. Drizzle it with the tahini sauce.
  • Garnish with more parsley, if desired. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 8-10 (loose) cups of nachos which is ideal for serving 6 people in appetizer portions. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Not a fan of olives? You can omit them.
  • No food processor?* You can make the tahini sauce by hand by finely chopping the parsley and vigorously whisking it until smooth.
  • Evenly distribute all the toppings: Make sure the toppings are scattered throughout the entire layer of pita chips. This way, each bite is just as delicious as the last.
  • Storage: While the nachos are best enjoyed the moment they are made, leftovers can be stored in an airtight container for an additional day. 

Nutrition

Calories: 246kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 749mg | Potassium: 290mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 458IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/vegan-greek-nachos/feed/ 15
Mint Sauce for Lamb https://foolproofliving.com/mint-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/mint-sauce/#comments Wed, 03 Apr 2024 20:39:44 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=74652 If you’re looking for a creamier condiment to brighten your menu, you can check out my Mint Yogurt Sauce and…]]>

If you’re looking for a creamier condiment to brighten your menu, you can check out my Mint Yogurt Sauce and Chimichurri with Mint to strike the perfect balance between tangy, cool, and luscious flavors.

Mint sauce for lamb in a small jar with a spoon.

Ingredients You’ll Need

One of the best parts about making mint sauce for lamb is how few ingredients you need to get the freshest, most vibrant taste. In fact, you likely already have these simple ingredients in your kitchen, making this recipe a must whether you’re preparing for a special occasion or a quick weeknight dinner.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Fresh mint: I highly suggest using fresh mint leaves or common garden mint for this mint sauce recipe. However, you should be able to find fresh mint at your local grocery store. If you are growing your own mint, then peppermint or spearmint varieties would both work. 
  • Sugar: There are many ways to add a touch of sweetness to this iconic condiment. Classic mint sauce recipes for lamb use granulated sugar, but you can also use a cane, coconut, or brown sugar if you’re looking for an alternative, pantry-ready option. Or, if you’d prefer a thicker, more complex sweetness, you can also use honey instead of raw sugar. 
  • Kosher salt: A pinch of salt is an excellent addition to this recipe, balancing its sweetness while bringing out its bright mint taste.
  • Vinegar: Adding an acidic component to this lamb mint sauce is critical to enlivening it with savory, tart notes. The original British mint sauce calls for distilled malt vinegar, but you can use white wine vinegar (which I used) or apple cider vinegar if you don’t have any malt vinegar on hand.
  • Boiling water

How to Make Mint Sauce from Mint Leaves?

Quick, simple, and hassle-free, this fresh mint sauce recipe is a cinch to make, regardless of your skill level. These step-by-step instructions will guarantee you can serve a fresh, tangy, and savory sauce in less than five minutes.

Steps showing how to make mint sauce for lamb.
  1. Prepare the mint leaves: Remove the fresh mint leaves from their stems, chop them finely, then transfer them to a bowl. Or, you can put it together in a lidded heat-resistant jar as well.
  2. Add flavorings: Add the sugar, Kosher salt, and white wine vinegar to the chopped mint leaves, then stir the ingredients until thoroughly blended.
  3. Add the water: Slowly pour the boiling water over the other ingredients, then stir the mixture to combine.
  4. Cool: Set the jar aside and let it cool for a minimum of 30 minutes. 
  5. Serve: Serve the cooled fresh mint sauce alongside the rest of your menu. Or, if you plan to use the condiment later, cover and refrigerate it until ready to use.

How to Store and Freeze?

Once you learn how to make mint sauce for lamb, you’ll want to use it alongside all your favorite recipes. These pro storage tips will ensure your leftover sauce stays as fresh as possible, whether you want to enjoy it later in the week or use it for long-term meal prep.

  • Storage: After transferring it to an airtight container, you can store it in the refrigerator for 2-3 days. However, remember that the sauce will turn a darker green the longer it sits since the fresh mint loses its bright color during storage. Therefore, even if its taste doesn’t diminish, the sauce may not have the same bright green color as when you first prepared it.
  • Freeze: The best way to freeze this easy mint sauce is in individual portions, ensuring effortless use later on. To do so, I recommend pouring the sauce into an ice cube tray and freezing it until solid. Then, remove the cubes from the tray and place them in a freezer-safe container, such as a Ziplock bag, with as much air removed as possible. Replace the container in the freezer, and you can use each individual serving whenever your menu calls for a serving of bright, cool sauce.

Other Ways to Use Mint Sauce

No one can deny that mint sauce with lamb is one of the most classic flavor combinations, from a succulent roast dinner to a smoky Grilled Rack of Lamb or Boneless Leg of Lamb Roast

Mint lamb sauce served with lamb chops as a condiment.

However, if you have extra sauce or want to try out a new menu, there are dozens of other mouthwatering pairings to try, a few of which I’ve detailed below:

  • Incorporate it into salad dressings: This mint sauce makes a fantastic base for salad dressing recipes. Simply mix a tablespoon or two of this sauce with a bit of lemon juice and olive oil, and you’ll have a zesty, light dressing perfect for a bed of leafy greens.
  • Add it to yogurt: If you’re like me, you love making a quick, gourmet-level dip you can use for all your favorite snacks. You can quickly transform this recipe into a mint dipping sauce by mixing 1-2 tablespoons into a serving of Greek yogurt and serving it with fresh veggies, pita bread, or as part of a mezze platter. 
  • Use it as a marinade for other meats, like chicken or fish: Want to add a brilliantly bright, herby flavor to your meats? Add a bit of this mint sauce to your marinade recipe, and its vibrant notes will beautifully compliment your main dish’s savory, succulent base.
  • Spread over spring vegetables: You can enhance any veggie side by adding a dollop of this minty spread to your plate. In particular, mint sauce makes a great accompaniment for fresh or blanched peas and green beans (especially my Air Fryer Green Beans!), as well as heartier veggies such as roasted potatoes.

Expert Tips

Any chef—beginner or professional—can easily make this homemade lamb mint sauce. These tips will ensure you come out with the tastiest sauce possible, including expert suggestions for chopping, flavor adjustment, serving, and more.

  • Mint stems: Since this recipe requires so much mint (you’ll need 1 large bunch), I encourage you to consider your herb’s freshness when deciding whether to use only the leaves or include the stems. Young, freshly picked stems—like the kind you grow in your home garden—are OK to use in this recipe. However, older stems—the kind you might find at your local grocery store—tend to have a harder, woodsier taste, which might negatively impact the overall flavor of your recipe. No matter which type of minty herb you use, it’s essential that you finely chop it to ensure the leaves fully release and evenly distribute their flavors into the sauce.
  • Food processor: You may have seen that other mint sauce recipes ask you to use a food processor or blender to cut up your mint leaves more thoroughly and blend them with the other ingredients. However, though this is technically an option, you can achieve an ideal fineness by chopping your herbs with a sharp knife. Furthermore, processing your mint may bruise the delicate mint leaves, leaving you with a sauce that has a slightly bitter taste rather than the fresh, vibrant flavor that finely hand-chopped mint leaves can offer.
  • Taste and adjust: The best mint sauce for lamb is one that you adjust according to your personal preference. That’s why I highly encourage you to use this recipe as a base, taste it before serving, and add more seasoning as necessary. I should also note that I find most jarred mint sauces to be too sweet for my taste, so I use a minimal amount of added sugar compared to other recipes. Therefore, if you prefer a sweeter profile, you may add more sweeteners to achieve your ideal balance of sweet and acidic flavors.
  • Let it rest: If you have the time, this homemade mint sauce recipe should rest for 30 minutes before serving. This resting time ensures that the ingredients have time to develop and deepen their flavors.
  • Adjust consistency: Depending on how you plan to use your mint lamb sauce recipe, you might want to adjust its consistency. As written, this recipe will result in a thicker sauce—more like a mint paste—which is ideal for serving with lamb dishes due to their rich meat flavor. However, if you’re looking for a thinner consistency, as you might when making a salad dressing or a saucy drizzle, all you need to do is add more water or vinegar to your mixture.
  • Serve it at room temperature: Though I recommend storing it in the refrigerator, it has the best taste and consistency when served at room temperature. Therefore, if you’ve stored it in the fridge beforehand, I suggest taking it out at least 30 minutes before adding it to your dinner table.

FAQs

What is mint sauce?

Mint sauce is a bright, vibrant, herb-based condiment often served with lamb dishes. In addition to fresh mint leaves, this thick sauce usually includes other ingredients, like sugar, vinegar, water, salt, and pepper, to enhance its flavor. Many store this mixture in a small jar, which you can likely find at your local grocery store.

Is mint jelly the same as mint sauce?

Though mint jelly and mint sauce are common accompaniments for lamb dishes, they’re not the same. Mint jelly has a more gelatinous texture due to its inclusion of pectin, and it tends to be sweeter because of its higher concentration of sugar—especially American mint jelly. By comparison, mint sauce is more herbaceous, spreadable, and tart. Because of its fresh mint base, it boasts a more potent mint flavor, and its use of vinegar and sugar creates a more vibrant flavor profile than mint jelly.

Why is mint sauce served with lamb?

Lamb and mint sauce is such an iconic pairing because the refreshing, minty taste of the sauce often helps balance the richness of lamb—especially back in the day, when lamb had a more pronounced gamey flavor. Together, lamb and mint sauce create a savory, fresh, and succulent base that’s as delicious as it is good for digestion.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this mint sauce recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It will be a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

Mint sauce for lamb in a jar with a spoon.
Print

Mint Sauce for Lamb Recipe

Easy, fresh, tasty, and homemade mint sauce perfect for roast lamb. All you need are just a few simple ingredients and 5 minutes of your time to make it.
Course Condiment/Sauce
Cuisine American Vegan
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Resting time 30 minutes
Total Time 35 minutes
Servings 0.5 cup
Calories 104kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 cups fresh mint rinsed, from 1 large bunch (~ 2 cups (34 grams) packed leaves)
  • 1 tablespoon granulated sugar or cane, coconut, brown sugar, or honey
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • 2 tablespoons white wine vinegar or apple cider vinegar
  • 3 tablespoons boiling water

Instructions

  • Remove the fresh mint leaves from their stems*. Finely chop the mint leaves and transfer them to a heat-resistant jar with a lid.
  • Add sugar, kosher salt, and white wine vinegar. Give it a quick stir.
  • Slowly pour in the boiling water and stir to combine.
  • Set it aside and let it cool for at least 30 minutes before serving. If not using right away, cover and refrigerate.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes ½ cup of mint sauce, ideal for serving with two racks of lamb. The nutritional information below is for the full recipe.
  • Mint stems*:  You are welcome to use the stems of freshly picked mint, but I wouldn’t recommend using the stems of store-bought mint as they tend to be woodsy.
  • Adjust the sweetness and consistency: I find most jarred versions of this mint lamb sauce to be too sweet, so this recipe is minimally sweetened. However, you can add more sugar if you prefer. The same goes for the consistency. If you find it too thick, feel free to add more boiling water, 1 teaspoon at a time, until it reaches your desired consistency.
  • Making Ahead and Storage Instructions: You can make this sauce a day in advance and store it in the fridge for up to 2-3 days. Keep in mind, though, that it will lose its bright green color and vibrancy as it sits.
  • Freezing: You can make a large batch of this mint sauce and freeze it using an ice cube tray. Place 1 tablespoon of the mint sauce in each cube and freeze. After they are frozen, remove the cubes from the tray and place them in a storage container in your freezer. You can have the perfect portion anytime you need mint sauce in your favorite recipe. Check out the blog post for other recipe ideas to use your sauce in.

Nutrition

Calories: 104kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 0.02g | Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 2335mg | Potassium: 24mg | Sugar: 24g | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 8mg | Iron: 0.3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mint-sauce/feed/ 3
Mint Yogurt Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/mint-yogurt-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/mint-yogurt-sauce/#comments Tue, 02 Apr 2024 14:29:04 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=74568 If you can’t resist the tangy, deliciousness of Greek yogurt recipes, you are not alone. While this minty condiment is…]]>

If you can’t resist the tangy, deliciousness of Greek yogurt recipes, you are not alone. While this minty condiment is a no-brainer when you want a yogurt and mint sauce for lamb, there are many other creamy yogurt recipes to enjoy! My Greek Yogurt Dressing will immediately enliven any salad with light, zesty flavors. Or, you can give your meal an authentic Mediterranean spin with the earthy, creamy, and herby notes of my Tzatziki Sauce or Yogurt Tahini Sauce.

Want to serve a crowd? My Yogurt Ranch Dip is the ultimate solution for party spreads, whether you want to serve chips, veggies, or any other fan-favorite finger foods!

A small bowl with mint yogurt sauce for lamb from the top view.

Ingredients

This mint yogurt sauce recipe requires only six simple ingredients to transform your weeknight menu into a gourmet spread. In fact, you can probably find these ingredients in your pantry already!

Ingredients for the recipe with text on the image from the top view.
  • Greek yogurt: I recommend using plain, full fat yogurt to give this dip the richest, creamiest flavor. However, you can also use low- or non-fat yogurt if you prefer a lighter alternative and don’t mind a thinner sauce.
  • Fresh mint leaves: Use widely available supermarket fresh mint for this recipe. I recommend removing the leaves from the stems and chopping them up finely. If you are growing your own mint, both spearmint and peppermint leaves would work. 
  • Lemon juice: Fresh lemon juice is my go-to for this yogurt mint sauce, as it has a brighter, deeper citrus flavor than bottled lemon juice. 
  • Fresh garlic cloves: The best way to infuse this mint yogurt recipe with robust, savory flavor is to use finely chopped or pressed fresh garlic. However, if you don’t have fresh garlic handy, one teaspoon of garlic powder will give your sauce similarly bold notes while also blending nicely into your mixture.
  • Kosher salt & black pepper

Optional Add-Ins & Substitutions

  • Olive oil: If desired, you can drizzle your mint dip with olive oil or mix olive oil with your other ingredients to achieve a richer, more full-bodied blend—just like I do in my Creamy Yogurt Dill Sauce!
  • Spices & dried herbs: Because this sauce is so versatile, I encourage you to customize its seasonings based on the menu you’d like to serve. Ground cumin, cayenne pepper, red pepper flakes, and dried mint are all impeccable additions if you want to lend this condiment nutty, smoky, or spicy undertones.
  • Water: If you want to turn this creamy dip into a thinner mint yoghurt dressing, all you need to do is add a little bit of water to your mixture. Just be sure to taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Then, add your mint yogurt dressing to your favorite salads for the perfect side dish, light lunch, or veggie-packed meal.
  • Vegan yogurt: If you follow a vegan diet, you can still enjoy this mint sauce recipe by substituting the dairy-based Greek yogurt for plain vegan coconut yogurt or almond milk yogurt—as long as it’s unsweetened.

How to Make Mint Yogurt Sauce?

Anyone can make this minted yogurt sauce in just five minutes—with only two steps! Below, you’ll find out how to make a refreshingly light, creamy condiment in no time.

A collage of images showing how to make mint and yogurt sauce.
  1. Combine the ingredients: Add the yogurt, chopped mint, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and black pepper to a small bowl. Whisk the ingredients until they’re thoroughly combined and smooth.
  2. Season and serve: Taste the mint sauce for seasoning, and add more if necessary. When you reach your ideal balance of flavor, your sauce is ready to enjoy!

How to Store & Freeze?

This effortless recipe is excellent for easy storage, whether you want to make it ahead of time, use it throughout the week, or save it for future meal prep.

  • Storage: First, transfer this mint yogurt sauce into a tight-fitting jar or airtight container to keep it fresh. Then, store it in the refrigerator for up to five days, being sure to shake or whisk the mixture before using it.
  • Freeze: Technically, you can freeze this sauce for later use. However, yogurt tends to separate when it thaws, so be sure to whisk it before serving it. Furthermore, if you want to store this condiment for individual servings, you can pour it into an ice cube tray and use each frozen “cube” as needed.

How to Use Mint Sauce With Yogurt?

This hassle-free recipe is just what you need to compliment your menu with light, minty flavors. Below are some ideas to get you started:

  • Meat dishes 
    • With lamb: In the mood for a classic? Lamb with yogurt mint sauce perfectly balances this succulent, grassy meat with bright, fresh flavors. For example, this mint yogurt sauce makes an exquisite pair with my Roasted Rack of Lamb, Grilled Lamb Rack, and even individual lamb chops if you want a smaller portion size. Or, if you’re in need of a quick lamb dinner, my Pressure Cooker Lambs Shanks make an excellent pairing with this sauce. 
    • Chicken: People often use this Greek sauce for lamb, but it also makes a delectable condiment for countless other Mediterranean meat dishes. Succulent and tender, my Shish Taouk and Oven Chicken Kabobs expertly balance the delicate freshness of my mint dip with their smoky taste. Otherwise, you can drizzle this creamy sauce recipe over a Pita Chicken Wrap or pita sandwiches for a protein-filled meal you can enjoy at picnics, barbecues, and on-the-go meals.
    • Beef: Savory, filling, and flavorful, my Kofte Meatballs and Oven Beef Kabobs are also delicious paired with this mint yogurt dipping sauce. Pour a helping of this light condiment over your hearty beef dish, or serve it on the side for a restaurant-ready menu that comes together in no time.
  • Dipping sauce: One of my favorite ways to use this versatile sauce is as a minted yogurt dip. It makes a delicious dipping sauce with roasted or grilled vegetables or as a part of a mezze platter with other dips like Hummus and Muhammara, of course, with pita bread on the side.
  • Dressing for salad: Because of its light, cool taste, this condiment makes a fantastic mint yogurt salad dressing—especially when you add a little water to thin out its base. Pair this tasty dressing with my Cucumber Greek Yogurt Salad for a refreshingly crisp side everyone can enjoy, or pour it over my Chicken Salad With Greek Yogurt for a hearty yet fresh dish that will delight any potluck.
  • Sandwiches and burgers: Mint yogurt dip isn’t only delicious alongside gourmet mains; it’s also a tasty topping for your favorite sandwich recipes! Spread this sauce on my Steak Sandwich for a juicy, hand-held meal. Or, if you’re in the mood for a vegetarian option, whip up a Bulgur Burger or Falafel Sandwich and top it with mint yogurt sauce for a Middle Eastern dish your dinner guests will love.
  • Vegetable dishes: If you’re looking for a deliciously nutritious dish, try spooning or drizzling this yoghurt and mint sauce over your favorite veggie sides. This light and creamy condiment perfectly accompanies my tender Sauteed Eggplant, or you can drizzle it over my Sauteed Mushrooms and Asparagus or Air-Fried Asparagus for a savory, flavorful side you can customize for any menu.

Expert Tips

It is no secret that this is a super simple recipe. However, during our recipe testing, we learned a few things that are worth noting to help you succeed on your first try:

  • Chop mint finely: The key to getting the freshest, most evenly distributed flavor is to chop your mint as finely as possible. Some versions of this recipe use a food processor to achieve a super-fine consistency, but I found this unnecessary. As long as you have a chopping board and a sharp knife, you should be able to get a similarly fine cut in your fresh mint.
  • Stir well: Because this lamb yogurt sauce uses fresh, wet, and dry ingredients, you must stir it thoroughly before serving. Doing so will help avoid clumpiness, give you a super-smooth texture, and ensure a more even distribution of flavor.
  • Experiment with seasonings according to your recipe: Whether you use this Greek yogurt sauce for lamb, chicken, beef kebabs, or any other dish, I recommend playing around with your seasonings and fresh herbs to best complement your menu. Some of my favorite additions are fresh dill, fresh parsley, and fresh cilantro—all of which offer uniquely refreshing, earthy, and grassy notes.
  • Adjust consistency: To make it thicker, add a little more yogurt to the sauce. However, if you prefer a thinner consistency—as you might for a salad dressing or drizzly topping—add a little bit of water to your mixture.
  • Let it rest: If you have the time, I highly recommend letting this mint sauce rest for 30 minutes in the fridge before using it. This resting time will allow the ingredients to more thoroughly infuse the sauce, leading to a deeper, more complex flavor profile.

FAQs

Want to know more about this tantalizingly cool sauce? Below, you’ll find answers to all your questions, from alternative preparation methods to consistency adjustments.

How is this yogurt mint sauce different than Indian mint sauce served at Indian restaurants?

True, both yogurt mint sauce and Indian mint sauce are yogurt-based sauces that use fresh mint to get their iconic cool taste. However, the Indian version—a popular condiment at Indian restaurants—includes additional ingredients, such as fresh cilantro, lemon juice (or lime juice), green chilies, cumin, sugar, and salt, to achieve a brighter, more herbaceous base.

How do you thicken mint yogurt sauce?

Try adding more yogurt to your mixture to thicken your yogurt and mint sauce. Conversely, if you want to thin out your sauce, add a bit of water to your bowl.

How to make mint yoghurt with mint sauce?

A great way to cut down on extra prep time when making this yogurt mint sauce recipe is to begin with English mint sauce (either from the store or homemade). Then, add 2-3 tablespoons of this pre-made sauce to your Greek yogurt, stir, and enjoy!

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Mint Yogurt Sauce recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It will be a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. If you take some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them in my stories.

Yogurt mint sauce in a small bowl with spatula in it.
Print

Mint Yogurt Sauce Recipe

Yogurt mint sauce is a quick, easy, and flavorful condiment to serve with lamb, chicken, beef, or simple roasted vegetables. While we are making it as a sauce here, by making small adjustments you can easily turn it into a dip or dressing as well.
Course Condiment/Sauce
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 1 cup
Calories 154kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup plain full fat Greek yogurt
  • ½ cup fresh mint leaves loosely packed and finely chopped
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 garlic cloves minced or pressed through a garlic press
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt plus more to taste
  • 1/8 teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Place yogurt, mint, lemon juice, garlic, salt, and black pepper in a small mixinf bowl and whisk until fully combined.
  • Taste for seasoning and adjust if necessary.
  • You can use it right away or store it in a jar with a tight-fitting lid and refrigerate it for up to 5 days.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes one cup of sauce. You can easily multiply the recipe based on what you are serving it with. The nutritional values below are for the whole recipe.
  • Fresh mint: I used store-bought fresh mint, but if you are growing your own, you can use peppermint or spearmint to make this recipe.
  • Storing leftovers: Store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 5 days. Be sure to give it a good whisk and taste for seasoning before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 154kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 10mg | Sodium: 1243mg | Potassium: 469mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 968IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 291mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mint-yogurt-sauce/feed/ 4
Seed Crackers https://foolproofliving.com/seed-crackers/ https://foolproofliving.com/seed-crackers/#comments Tue, 12 Mar 2024 12:20:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=74092 If you’re like me, you can’t get enough of the super-crisp, nutty taste of homemade seed crackers. If you want…]]>

If you’re like me, you can’t get enough of the super-crisp, nutty taste of homemade seed crackers. If you want to try more gluten-free recipes, I highly recommend whipping up my protein-packed Seed and Nut Bread—an ideal pick for an easy breakfast or a quick midday snack. Or, try out my Buckwheat Millet Bread for a foolproof loaf that tastes as good by itself as it does when topped with your favorite jam.

Person cracking seed crackers on a sheet pan.

Ingredients You Will Need

In my opinion, the best way to make healthy crackers is by using this tasty variety of seeds. These simple ingredients—many of which are also superfoods!—are delicious, nutritious, and usually available at the local grocery store.

Ingredients for healthy crackers recipe in small bowls.
  • Chia seeds: Packed with fiber, protein, and antioxidants, chia seeds are a must-have ingredient in this recipe for crackers with seeds. Not only do they have a mild nuttiness that’s undeniably delicious, but they’re also helpful in supporting bone health and aiding weight loss.
  • Raw & Unsalted Sunflower seeds: One of the most classic types of seeds, sunflower seeds lend these homemade crackers a nuanced sweetness and delicate crunch—but that’s not all! Sunflower seeds also transform this basic recipe into “anti-inflammatory crackers,” as their high levels of vitamin E and other plant compounds help reduce inflammation and boost heart health. When selecting sunflower seeds for this recipe, look for all-natural, raw ones to ensure they don’t have any added salt.
  • Unsalted Pumpkin seeds: Pumpkin seeds are also a great source of healthy fats, magnesium, antioxidants, and fiber, which may have other beneficial effects, such as regulating blood sugars and getting a good night’s sleep. I recommend buying pumpkin seeds that don’t have any additional salt—in other words, look for raw pumpkin seeds when shopping for this recipe.
  • Sesame seeds: Crunchy and buttery, sesame seeds taste fantastic in this recipe’s seed mixture. However, they also boast a range of other health benefits. For example, their high levels of B vitamins, calcium, and protein contribute to good vascular, muscular, and nerve health.
  • Ground flaxseeds (aka Flax meal): Flaxseeds are among the greatest superfoods to eat when you want to boost your digestive health. In particular, they contain high levels of fiber and omega-3 fatty acids that help relieve constipation and promote digestive regularity. During my recipe research, I found variations of this recipe where others used whole flaxseeds, but I chose to use ground flaxseeds (AKA flax meal) because they’re easier to digest and help work as a binder—similar to how flour works in bread recipes. Other versions may also use psyllium husk as a binder, but I found this unnecessary, given my use of ground flax seeds.
  • Hemp seeds: The addition of hemp seeds gives these seed crackers earthy and nutty undertones. This tiny seed also contains essential nutrients and minerals, such as fatty acids and manganese, which help maintain healthy skin, joints, and bones through collagen production.
  • Kosher or sea salt: Salt helps with flavoring the crackers and helps them achieve more of a store-bought savory flavor, so do not skip it.
  • Olive oil: I used olive oil to give these crackers their rich, full-bodied taste and golden-brown exterior, but you could also use avocado oil if preferred.
  • Water: If you’ve seen other seeded crackers recipes, you might find that some ask you to use boiling water—particularly when making psyllium husk crackers. However, I’ve found that the temperature of your water doesn’t affect seed crackers that don’t use psyllium husk as a binder. Therefore, room-temperature water will work just as well as warm water when following my flaxseed cracker recipe.

Variations with Optional Add-Ins

One bite of these sunflower seed crackers, and you’ll want to whip up a batch every week. Once you get the hang of it, you can even put your own spin on this basic recipe, giving it nutty, herby, or even cheesy undertones. The following are just a few of my go-to additions:

  • Seasonings and herbs: If you want to give your crunchy seed crackers bright, garden-fresh notes, I highly recommend adding some of your favorite herbs, like dried rosemary or thyme. Or, if you want a more robustly flavored chip, seasonings like garlic powder, onion powder, black pepper, and paprika will lend your seed cracker recipe irresistibly savory flavors. You can even make an easy everything bagel crackers recipe by adding a pinch of everything bagel seasoning!
  • Nuts: Filling, protein-packed, and oh-so-delicious, nuts make a great addition to this seeded cracker recipe. Depending on your desired flavor profile, I recommend using finely chopped nuts such as walnuts, pecans, or pistachios. You can also use a few tablespoons of almond flour (or even Homemade Almond Flour!) to reduce your prep time while still getting that classic “nut and seed crackers” taste. No matter which nuts you use, just be sure to use less of another dry ingredient to ensure a consistent ratio of wet-to-dry additions.
  • Nutritional yeast: No one can resist the savory, rich taste of a cheesy cracker. Simply add a bit of nutritional yeast to your recipe to give it a cheesy—yet vegan-friendly!—flavor.

How to Make Seed Crackers?

If you’ve never tried making crackers at home, you’re in luck! It’s a cinch to make these healthy crackers, and my step-by-step instructions will ensure they always come out with that satisfying “crunch.”

  1. Heat the oven: Preheat the oven to 325 degrees F. (162 degrees C.), line a baking sheet with parchment paper, and set it aside.
A collage of images showing how to make seed crackers.
  1. Mix the dry ingredients: Add the chia seeds, sunflower seeds, pumpkin seeds, sesame seeds, ground flaxseeds, hemp seeds, and salt to a large mixing bowl. Stir the ingredients until thoroughly combined.
  2. Add the wet ingredients: Pour the olive oil and water into the same bowl and stir to combine. Let the mixture sit for five minutes—but no more than 7-8 minutes—until it thickens slightly. Too much resting time will result in an overly thick cracker.
  3. Transfer to pan: Scoop the mixture onto the prepared baking tray and use an offset spatula or large spoon to spread it into a single, even layer. Alternatively, you can place another piece of parchment paper on top of the mixture and spread it with your hands.
Freshly baked crackers on a baking sheet from the top view.
  1. Bake: Bake the sesame seed crackers in the preheated oven for 50-55 minutes or until the edges turn a light brown. Then, remove them from the oven and let the crackers cool before serving.

How to Store & Freeze?

One of the best parts about this gluten-free cracker recipe is its easy storage. With long-lasting crispiness and hearty flavor, these crackers will stay fresh whether you store them in the pantry or the freezer.

  • Store: These keto seeded crackers can be stored in an airtight container at room temperature for up to ten days.
  • Freeze: For extra-long storage, you may freeze your crackers in a freezer-safe container until ready to eat. However, keep in mind that the low temperatures may make the seed chips more brittle, so you should store them in a flat orientation to avoid breakage.

Ways to Serve These Seeded Crackers

Homemade crackers are a must-try for anyone who loves versatility in their snacks. While they’re absolutely wonderful by themselves (literally, they’re such a great stand-alone snack!), they also make a fantastic spread when paired with other tasty recipes.

  • Dips: Easy, filling, and nutritious, this sesame crackers recipe makes a great snack alongside classic Mediterranean dips. Hummus is a zesty, creamy classic that pairs great with the earthy undertones of this easy cracker. You can also serve your recipe with smokier, savory-sweet dips, like Baba Ganoush or Muhammara.
  • Serve it as a flatbread: My favorite way to enjoy this recipe for seed crackers is as a flatbread topped with avocado, sliced eggs, and pickled red onions. You can also spread this cracker with cream cheese and smoked salmon for a quick morning fix. Or, if you’re in the mood for a sweeter variation, try spreading your crackers with nut butters, like peanut butter or almond butter, for a satisfying yet healthy dessert.
  • Cheese: No one can resist a five-star Meat and Cheese Board brimming with crisp crackers, flavorful cheeses, and savory meats. These multi-seed crackers make the perfect addition to any charcuterie board, but if you’re short on time, they also make an unbelievably delicious pairing with your favorite cheese.
  • Topping for salads: This sesame seed cracker recipe is the ultimate choice when you want to add a light crunch to your salad. You can crumble these crackers on top of any bowl of greens, from a sweet and tangy Apple Kale Slaw to a creamy Cauliflower Broccoli Salad.
  • With soups: Healthier and more flavorful than oyster crackers, these pumpkin seed crackers are an excellent topping for soup when crushed into small, crunchy bits. I especially love using this cracker recipe with my smooth-yet-zingy Carrot and Ginger Soup and creamily spiced Sweet Potato Soup.
Avocado and egg toast made using homemade crackers with seeds.

Expert Tips

These gluten-free seed crackers are a foolproof recipe for beginners and experienced chefs alike. Check out the below pro-level tips for the crunchiest, most flavorful crackers, regardless of your skill level.

  • Rest timing: Though resting is essential in making this recipe, don’t let the mixture rest for more than five minutes. Too much resting time will cause the chia seeds to swell, giving you a “doughier” mix that’s harder to spread. As a result, your seed crackers will be thicker and less crisp.
  • Spread it evenly: Even spreading is vital to ensuring your super seed crackers come out with a thin, crisp, and uniform texture. You can use a spatula, a spoon, or the back of a ramekin to spread your mixture effectively. Or, for easier clean-up, you can also place an additional sheet of parchment paper on top of the cracker mixture and use your hands (or a rolling pin) to press it into an even layer—as long as you remove this second piece of parchment paper before baking, of course.
  • Sheet pan size: I suggest using an 18 x 13-inch pan to make these chia crackers, as this large pan size will allow for a very thin layer of batter. However, if your baking sheets are smaller, I recommend baking your crackers in two batches to ensure the mixture doesn’t lay too thickly.
  • Parchment paper: Lining your sheet pan is critical to easy cracker removal post-baking. If you’re a baker, you can also use a silpat to line your pan due to its reusable, non-stick silicone base.
  • Cutting: I usually choose to “cut” this multi-seed crackers recipe by cracking it, giving each cracker a rustic, aesthetically pleasing shape. However, you can also use a pizza cutter or a sharp knife to cut individual crackers if you prefer a less hands-on splitting method. If you want more uniformly shaped crackers, remove them halfway through baking and score the sheet with a sharp knife. That way, your keto crackers will split into more uniform portions once fully cooked.

FAQs

Have more questions about this healthy cracker recipe? This handy FAQ has everything you need, from nutritional information to term definitions.

What are seed crackers?

Seed crackers are a crispy, thin “flatbread” type of cracker that uses seeds—sesame, pumpkin, sunflower, chia, and more—as its primary base. In addition to these seeds, this cracker often uses other natural ingredients, like salt, water, and herbs, to give it texture and taste. These low-carb crackers also tend to be gluten-free, paleo-, and keto-friendly, as they use flour-alternative binders, like psyllium husk or ground flaxseeds. Furthermore, they often have a greater nutritional content due to their seeds’ high levels of fiber, vitamins, and antioxidants.

What’s the difference between seeded crackers and Norwegian flatbread crackers?

Also known as Norwegian crispbread, Norwegian flatbread crackers are similar to seeded crackers due to their thin, crispy consistency and several core ingredients. However, the Norwegian variation—popular at specialty grocery stores like Trader Joe’s—is thinner and more delicate, and it also includes ingredients like oat flakes, rice bran, sugar, and rye flour. Meanwhile, seed crackers don’t traditionally include flour, and they boast a slightly thicker, seed-based body.

Are flaxseed crackers healthy?

Definitely—in moderation, of course! Unlike store-bought crackers, this healthy crackers recipe includes nutrient-rich superfoods, like chia and sesame seeds, which have higher levels of protein and fewer carbs than flour-based alternatives. 

How many calories in a seeded cracker?

There are approximately 204 calories in each of these seed crackers.

If you try this Seed Crackers recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Person cracking freshly made seeded crackers from the top view.
Print

Seed Crackers Recipe

Once you try these superfood-packed homemade crispy seed crackers, you’ll never want to buy crackers from the store again. This easy cracker recipe is vegan, gluten-free, low-carb, nut-free, and keto-friendly. Serve it as a snack, in place of bread (for avocado toast), or as a crunchy topping for salads and soups.
Course Healthy Snacks
Cuisine American, American Vegan
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 55 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 8 servings
Calories 204kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ cup chia seeds
  • ¼ cup sunflower seeds raw and unsalted
  • ¼ cup pumpkin seeds raw and unsalted
  • ¼ cup sesame seeds both white or black sesame seeds would work
  • ¼ cup ground flaxseeds (aka flax meal)
  • 3 tablespoons hemp seeds optional
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt or sea salt
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 cup water

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 325 degrees F. (162 degrees C.). Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • In a large bowl, combine chia seeds, sunflower seeds, pumpkin seeds, sesame seeds, ground flaxseeds, hemp seeds, and salt. Stir to combine.
  • Pour in olive oil and water. Mix to combine. Let it sit for 5 minutes or until it is slightly thickened (gel-like consistency.) Do not let it sit for more than 7-8 minutes, or otherwise, your crackers will be thicker.
  • Transfer the mixture to the prepared sheet and spread it evenly throughout the sheet pan using an offset spatula or a large spoon. Alternatively, you can place another parchment paper on top and spread it using your hands or a rolling pin.
  • Bake for 50-55 minutes or until the edges turn light brown. Remove from the oven and let it cool before serving.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes a large sheet of crackers, ideal for 8 servings. The nutritional values listed below are per cracker.
  • Source: This recipe has been adapted from my dear friend Alexandra of Occasionally Eggs’ wonderful cookbook. I made a few minor changes to her original recipe, but all credit goes to her.
  • Water: Some versions of this multi-seed crackers recipe use boiling water. I tested it using both boiling and room-temperature water and decided that room-temperature water works just fine.
  • Make it your own: After you make this recipe (as written) a few times, feel free to experiment with different flavors by adding other ingredients like poppy seeds, fennel seeds, garlic powder, onion powder, nutritional yeast, and more.
  • Store: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container at room temperature for up to ten days.
  • Freeze: For extra-long storage, you may freeze leftovers in a freezer-safe container until ready to eat. However, keep in mind that the low temperatures may make them more brittle, so you should store them in a flat orientation to avoid breakage.

Nutrition

Calories: 204kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 296mg | Potassium: 149mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 38IU | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 139mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/seed-crackers/feed/ 21
Shredded Chicken Nachos https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-nachos/ https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-nachos/#comments Tue, 06 Feb 2024 16:36:33 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=16128 No party menu is complete without this chicken nachos recipe. However, suppose you want to take this dish to the…]]>

No party menu is complete without this chicken nachos recipe. However, suppose you want to take this dish to the next level. In that case, you can pair it with dozens of other delectable Mexican recipes, such as my creamy Basic Guacamole Recipe or my sweet-and-spicy Easy Street Corn.

Or, if you’re in the mood for another savory and succulent meat dish, my Slow Roasted Chicken Wings strike the perfect balance between crispy, flavorful skin and tender meat. No matter what you choose, you can easily spice up the day with a pitcher of my Easy Pineapple Margarita Recipe.

Pulled chicken nachos garnished with corn, avocados, and tomatoes on a sheet pan.

Chicken Nachos Ingredients

There’s no need to empty out your wallet to make this easy shredded chicken nachos recipe. You only need a handful of pantry-ready ingredients to make this authentically delectable, restaurant-quality dish.

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Chicken: Nearly any shredded chicken would work when making pulled chicken for nachos, whether you want to use boneless chicken thighs or boneless chicken breasts. In terms of preparation, I roasted my chicken in the oven with a coating of spices, then shredded them while warm to achieve the most attuned seasoning profile. However, if you prefer a more hands-free method, you can also make nachos with rotisserie chicken or cook your chicken in a crock pot.
    You can even use leftover chicken if you have some on hand or make a grilled chicken nachos recipe for a smokier, summer-fresh flavor. Regardless of your cooking process, just be sure you have 4-5 cups of shredded chicken before assembling your nachos. That being said, however, you can also substitute this recipe’s chicken for sauteed ground beef if you’d prefer a savorier, more pronounced meat flavor.
  • Oil: Though I use olive oil to cook chicken for nachos, any other flavorless vegetable oil, such as avocado oil, would work.
  • Seasoning: I’ve found that the best seasoning for chicken nachos is a basic, smoky, and piquant mix of chili powder, ground cumin, salt, and pepper. Alternatively, you can use your favorite pre-made taco seasoning if you’re in the mood for a quicker seasoning solution.
  • Enchilada sauce: Though an optional addition, I love adding enchilada sauce to my shredded chicken nachos, as it adds a savory, light richness to the mixture. You can use any store-bought brand you prefer (my favorite is Siete Red Enchilada Sauce -affiliate link) or make your enchilada sauce from scratch.
  • Tortilla chips: When selecting a chip for this chicken nacho bake, I highly recommend picking thick, sturdy, restaurant-style tortilla chips. This chip style better withstands baking and won’t get as soggy as other varieties. Furthermore, if you have the time, you can also make homemade tortilla chips for a fresher, more customizable taste. However, I don’t recommend making chicken nachos with Doritos and any other commercially seasoned chips, as they are relatively flimsy and won’t withstand the moisture of the wetter ingredients.
  • Cheese: To ensure an even distribution of cheese throughout your nachos, you must use shredded cheese. I use Monterey Jack cheese due to its buttery flavor and highly meltable composition. However, you can use Pepper Jack cheese, mozzarella, or Colby Jack, as well, to achieve a spicier, creamier, or tangier flavor profile. Or, you can even use a blend of cheeses for a more full-bodied taste, with some of my favorites being a Mexican blend cheese and Cheddar Jack (a mix of cheddar cheese and Monterey Jack).
  • Black beans: Black beans are a great way to add a tender, mildly sweetheartiness to chicken and cheese nachos. Don’t have any black beans in the pantry? You can use pinto beans instead, giving your nachos a creamier, earthier taste.

What to Put on Chicken Nachos?

The sky’s the limit when it comes to toppings and customizing this loaded chicken nachos recipe. However, these classic toppings—zesty, creamy, and bright—are my favorite ingredients to give this dish an authentic Mexican taste.

Topping ideas for homemade nachos with chicken from the top view.
  • Salsa with Cherry Tomatoes: This easy salsa recipe is my go-to when making easy chicken nachos. Not only does this sauce boast robustly bright flavors, but it also comes together in just ten minutes! No time to make salsa? Sliced or diced tomatoes would also work.
  • Guacamole: Creamy, garlicky, and tangy, guacamole is a no-brainer when it comes to nachos. One taste of this simple side and the entire bowl will disappear in seconds.
  • Jalapenos: If you’re a fan of heat, jalapenos are just what you need to lend a kick of spice to your chicken cheese nachos. If you prefer a crisper, fresher, and more colorful topping, I recommend using fresh jalapeños. However, if you’re in the mood for a softer texture and a more tart flavor, pickled jalapenos are the way to go.
  • Sour cream: Sour cream—smooth, light, and tangy—makes an excellent addition to the savory, meatier base of this Mexican chicken nachos recipe. Serve this ingredient as a dippable side or a dollop on top, and your guests will be licking their fingers clean.
  • Corn: This mildly sweet and tender addition adds a beautiful pop of color to these sheet pan nachos.
  • Olives: If you’ve ever found yourself reaching for the table salt to add extra flavor to your meal, this ingredient is for you. Black olives are briny, salty, and brilliant at giving these chicken nachos a savory depth. 
  • Squeeze of lime juice: My favorite way to balance the hearty composition of pulled chicken nachos is to add a little bit of lime juice to the mixture. This addition adds a bright, acidic element to the recipe, ensuring every ingredient comes to life.
  • Mexican Pickled Red Onions: Tangy, citrusy, and oh-so-flavorful, pickled onions are a great way to enliven your nachos with equal tenderness and crunch.

How to Make Chicken Nachos with Shredded Chicken?

There’s a reason why this easy nachos recipe is such a classic. My step-by-step instructions take the stress out of menu planning, requiring minimal effort and zero hassle. If you are using leftover or rotisserie chicken, you can skip the first six steps and start assembling your nachos.

  1. Prep the oven: Preheat your oven to 400 degrees F.
A collage of images showing how to prepare and cook chicken to make nachos.
  1. Dry the chicken: Use paper towels to pat dry the chicken, then transfer them onto a baking sheet. I use a 13 x 18-inch baking sheet (also known as a half-sheet pan) to fit all my poultry comfortably.
  2. Season the chicken: Drizzle the chicken with olive oil and sprinkle both sides with chili powder, ground cumin, salt, and pepper.
  3. Bake: Add the seasoned chicken to the oven and let it roast for 15-20 minutes or until its internal temperature reaches 165 degrees F.
  4. Shred: Remove the cooked chicken from the oven, then shred it using two forks.
Images showing how to assemble shredded chicken, tortilla chips and cheese to make nachos.
  1. Add enchilada sauce (optional step): Drizzle the shredded chicken with the enchilada sauce, and broil the mixture for two minutes. When done, remove the chicken from the oven and set it aside.
  2. Prepare the baking sheet: Turn down the oven’s temperature to 350 degrees F., and line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  3. Assemble the first layer: Spread your first layer of tortilla chips on the lined pan. Top them off with half of the shredded cheese, black beans, and shredded chicken.
  4. Build the second layer: Place a second layer of chips on top of the first, followed by the remaining black beans and shredded chicken.
  5. Bake: Put the chicken nachos in the oven and bake them for 15-18 minutes or until the cheese melts thoroughly.
Chicken cheese nachos topped of with nacho toppings from the top view.
  1. Add the toppings: Top off your baked nachos with your preferred toppings and serve while still hot.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat? 

It’s no secret that homemade chicken nachos—crunchy, flavorful, and melty—taste best on the day you make them. Therefore, I recommend assembling the dish right before serving to achieve maximum crispiness.

Need more time for day-of preparation? Not to worry: These expert make-ahead and storage tips will ensure you can cut your prep time in half and don’t have to forfeit a single bite of this chicken nacho recipe.

  • Make ahead: The best way to kickstart your meal prep is by making the shredded chicken for nachos ahead of time and cooking and shredding it in advance. That way, you only need to assemble and bake the nachos just before you want to serve it. Also, you can plan out and prepare your toppings ahead of time to simplify serving the day of.
  • Storage: To store your pulled chicken nachos, first let them come to room temperature. Then, either transfer them to an airtight container or tightly cover them with stretch film. You can then put them in the fridge until ready to reheat.
  • Reheat: I recommend reheating these chicken nachos in the oven under low heat—about 300 degrees F.—or until the cheese melts and the remaining ingredients heat through. I also suggest removing any fresh toppings from the dish before heating, as they won’t withstand the higher temperatures of the oven, thereby losing their freshness. Then, you can re-add them to the nachos when ready to serve.

What Tastes Good with Chicken Nachos? 

Versatile, snackable, and utterly irresistible, chicken black bean nachos are one of the best dishes to make if you love putting your unique spin on new recipes. Below, I’ve assembled essential recipes to serve with your savory bake, transforming this simple dish into a five-star menu.

  • Dips and salsas: One of the most iconic pairings, salsa exquisitely balances the heartier base of roast chicken nachos with light, bright, and tomatoey flavors. Pico de gallo is an effortless go-to for this dish, though you can also add notes of tropical, juicy flavors by making my Pineapple Mango Salsa or Peach Salsa. Or, you can whip up an easy Hummus Dip for an even creamier, umami-rich condiment.
  • Tacos: When you think of Mexican cuisine, chances are you immediately think of tacos—a savory, fresh, and flavor-filled dish anyone can customize to their liking. With my recipe for Brisket Tacos, you can fill your plate with smoky, melt-in-your-mouth flavors. Or, try pairing your nachos with Quinoa Black Bean Tacos for a vegan-friendly dish that has all the zesty, creamy taste you could want from your favorite Mexican food.
  • Salads: Want to add a lighter, more nutritious edge to your nachos? Serve them alongside a bowl of Black Bean and Corn Salad for a zesty, veggie-packed side, or spoon out a serving of Mexican Street Corn Salad (AKA “esquites”) for a dish that’s equal parts spicy, tangy, and creamy.
  • Margaritas: What party menu is complete without a sweet, boozy treat? My Easy Pineapple Margarita and Blueberry Margaritas are just what you need to give this classic drink a sweet, fruity spin. You can even blend up a Strawberry Basil Margarita to balance your juicier notes with a gourmet, herby finish.
Person with a chunk of pioneer woman nachos in her hand.

Expert Tips

Authentic Mexican chicken nachos are at your fingertips when learning from these pro-level tips. Below, you’ll find everything you need to make crisp, gooey, and savory nachos, from proper layering to serving suggestions.

  • Layer evenly: When making sheet pan chicken nachos, it’s vital that you evenly distribute the cheese across the chips to prevent uneven and/or soggy nachos. If you plan on making more than two layers, I recommend keeping the middle layer to a minimum (except for the cheese, of course!). I also suggest draining your black beans and chicken before adding them to your nachos to keep them from becoming soggy.
  • Don’t skimp on shredded cheese: The secret to making restaurant-style nachos is to be generous when it comes to the cheese. Though four cups of cheese may sound like a lot, it’s the key to giving each chip a balance of crisp, gooey, and rich flavors so you don’t end up with bland or topping-less bites in your final dish.
  • Make it your own: The beauty of making homemade nachos with chicken is that you can customize it any way you like. Use this easy recipe as a starting place, and then feel free to mix and match the dish with what you have on hand. Remember, too, that this recipe is pretty forgiving, so it’s up to you what you want to add to your mixture.
  • Drain properly: I think it’s safe to say that no one enjoys soggy nachos. Therefore, the best way to prevent sogginess is to thoroughly drain each of your ingredients (besides the cheese and chips) before layering them into your recipe. In particular, I recommend draining the shredded chicken, beans, and wet toppings before making this simple chicken nachos recipe.
  • Add the toppings right before serving: For best results, I recommend adding your fresher toppings to your dish right before serving. Otherwise, these additions (like guacamole or pico de gallo) may lose their texture and flavor, resulting in a wet, flavorless layer.
  • Serve right away: Gooey, succulent, and flavorful, baked chicken nachos taste stellar when they’re warm. That’s why I always suggest serving this dish immediately when the cheese is still melty, and the ingredients are hot.

FAQs

You don’t have to be a professional Mexican chef to make chicken nachos in the oven. I answer all your remaining questions in this easy guide, ensuring your dish comes out exquisitely layered and delightfully crisp.

How do you layer nachos so they don’t get soggy?

The best chicken nachos recipe is one that doesn’t turn soggy after adding your favorite toppings. To ensure your nachos remain as dry and crisp as possible, fully drain all the ingredients—besides the cheese and the chips—before adding them to your recipe. You may also consider keeping any wet ingredients to a minimum to reduce their chances of releasing excess liquid. Finally, using a sturdy chip—such as a restaurant-style tortilla chip—is the key to reducing sogginess, as they tend to be thicker and less absorbent than other varieties.

What order do you layer nachos in?

In general, I recommend beginning each layer of your nachos with chips, topped with cheese, and other heat-friendly toppings (such as black beans). Then, each layer should have the same combination of chips, cheese, and beans. After removing your nachos from the oven, you may then add your fresh toppings—such as guacamole and tomatoes—to ensure they maintain their flavor and texture. Despite these instructions, however, remember that this dish is highly forgiving, so don’t worry if you miss an ingredient in a layer or want to play around with your ingredients.

Other Game Day Recipes You Might Also Like

Once you learn how to make shredded chicken nachos, you’ll be itching for more tasty dishes to serve at your next game-day party. These lip-smacking recipes will ensure everyone gets their fill with a perfectly savory, seasoned, and snackable taste.

If you try this Shredded Chicken Nachos recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Sheet-Pan Chicken Nachos Recipe Photographed from the top view from a closer view.
Print

Healthy Game Day Recipe Idea – Shredded Chicken Nachos

Here is a reader-favorite football food recipe idea: Tortilla chips layered with cheese, black beans, tomatoes, avocado, and other veggies for a drool worthy Shredded Chicken Nachos perfect for any party. Take it out of the oven, serve warm, and accept the compliments.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 15 minutes
Cook Time 45 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 8 servings
Calories 998kcal

Ingredients

For The Chicken

  • 1 ½ lb boneless skinless chicken thighs or breasts
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 tablespoon chili powder
  • 1/2 teaspoon ground cumin
  • 1 teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • ½ cup enchilada sauce

For The Nachos

  • 8 cups tortilla chips
  • 4 cups shredded Monterey Jack cheese or mozzarella
  • 1 14 oz can black beans, drained and rinsed

As Toppings (optional)

  • 1 cup guacamole
  • 1 cup tomatoes diced or sliced
  • 1 cup fresh or canned corn drained if using canned
  • 1/4 cup jalapenos fresh/sliced or pickled

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees.
  • Pat dry chicken with paper towels. Transfer them onto a baking sheet (I used a half-sheet—AKA a 13 x 18-inch baking sheet.).
  • Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with chili powder, ground cumin, salt, and pepper on both sides.
  • Roast in the oven for 15-20 minutes or until the internal temperature reaches 165 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Remove from the oven. Shred the now-cooked chicken using two forks.
  • Drizzle them with the enchilada sauce and broil for 2 minutes. Remove from the oven and set it aside.*
  • Turn the oven temperature down to 350 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Spread tortilla chips on a sheet pan in a single layer. Top them off with half of the cheese, black beans, and shredded chicken ensuring that they are distributed evenly.
  • Continue with a second layer of chips, cheese, beans, and shredded chicken.
  • Bake for 15-18 minutes or until the cheese is fully melted.
  • Right before serving, top it off with your favorite nacho toppings and serve while still hot.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields nachos that is ideal for 8 servings when served as an appetizer. The below calorie information is per serving and does not include any of the optional toppings.
  • Chicken: While we roasted the chicken to make nachos, this recipe would also work with any cooked leftover chicken or store-bought rotisserie chicken. All you have to do is to shred it before assembling. You’ll need about 4-5 cups of shredded chicken to make this easy chicken nachos recipe. Additionally, if you are cooking your own chicken, you can use skinless chicken breasts instead of chicken thighs as well.
  • Enchilada Sauce: Broiling chicken with enchilada sauce is an optional step and can be skipped if you want to make it faster or you do not have enchilada sauce on hand. 
  • Drain: To prevent your nachos from becoming soggy, be sure to drain black beans very well before layering with chips and cheese.
  • Make Ahead: This recipe tastes best on the day that it is made. However, you can make the chicken ahead of time and have it ready for assembly. Once you have the chicken cooked, all you need to do is to layer it as written in the recipe.
  • Storage: Before refrigerating your nachos, be sure to bring them to room temperature. Then, either transfer them to an airtight container or tightly cover them with stretch film or aluminum foil and store them in the fridge for up to 2 days.
  • Reheat: We recommend reheating these chicken nachos in the oven under low heat—about 300 degrees F.—or until the cheese melts and the remaining ingredients heat through. Be sure to remove any fresh toppings from the dish before heating, as they won’t withstand the higher temperatures of the oven, thereby losing their freshness.

Nutrition

Calories: 998kcal | Carbohydrates: 84g | Protein: 35g | Fat: 60g | Saturated Fat: 18g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 16g | Monounsaturated Fat: 22g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 121mg | Sodium: 1213mg | Potassium: 608mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1128IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 560mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/chicken-nachos/feed/ 15
Horseradish Yogurt Sauce https://foolproofliving.com/horseradish-yogurt-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/horseradish-yogurt-sauce/#comments Wed, 31 Jan 2024 18:58:17 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=73362 If you love yogurt-based sauces, be sure to make Yogurt and Dill Sauce, Tzatziki, and Tahini Yogurt Sauce, too. Ingredients…]]>

If you love yogurt-based sauces, be sure to make Yogurt and Dill Sauce, Tzatziki, and Tahini Yogurt Sauce, too.

A bowl of horseradish yogurt sauce from the top view.

Ingredients

This Greek yogurt horseradish sauce recipe is made with only 8 ingredients, most of which are probably already in your pantry and fridge. Gather together:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Horseradish: Most grocery stores sell “prepared horseradish” or “horseradish grated in vinegar” in glass jars in the condiment aisle (Gold’s (affiliate link) is a popular brand). If you are lucky enough to spot a fresh horseradish root in the grocery store (prime time season is late autumn and early spring), feel free to peel and grate it fresh at home. Just note that fresh horseradish is much stronger than jarred, so start with 1 tablespoon and work your way up from there.
  • Plain Greek yogurt: Full-fat Greek yogurt will offer the creamiest texture. The rich, creamy texture also balances the spicy notes of the horseradish and gives it a nice cooling bite. If you can’t find Greek yogurt, Icelandic Skyr is the next best choice.
  • Mayonnaise: Mayo adds another layer of creaminess and a tangy flavor. If you prefer to make yogurt horseradish sauce without mayo, simply omit it and adjust the seasonings to your liking.
  • Apple cider vinegar: Apple cider vinegar gives it that special pop and slightly sweet flavor. White wine vinegar is a great substitute.
  • Dijon mustard: Dijon mustard enhances the natural spiciness in the horseradish.
  • Seasonings: Keep it simple with Kosher salt and black pepper to allow the horseradish to shine.
  • Chives: Fresh chives, or scallions, give it an extra bite and an almost herbal finish at the end.

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

  • Garlic cloves: Grate a fresh garlic clove or smash some roasted garlic so that it blends right into the sauce.
  • Crushed red pepper flakes: For a little extra spice, a dash or two of red pepper flakes would be especially nice.
  • Lemon juice: If you don’t have any apple cider vinegar or prefer not to use vinegar, try fresh lemon juice instead.
  • Sweetener: Two teaspoons of sweetener, such as granulated sugar, brown sugar, or honey, will tame the spiciness and balance the flavors. Add more if you prefer a sweeter flavor.
  • Fresh herbs: Horseradish sauce with dill or parsley would be another great option. I prefer fresh dill or parsley, but dried versions can also be used.

How to Make This Recipe?

A super flavorful, punchy, spicy horseradish sauce with Greek yogurt is ready in less than 5 minutes. With only two easy steps, you’ll wonder why you never made this healthy horseradish sauce in the first place. Here’s how I like to do it:

A collage of images showing how to make yogurt horseradish sauce recipe.
  1. Make horseradish sauce: In a small bowl, whisk together prepared horseradish, Greek yogurt,  mayonnaise, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, salt, and pepper until smooth and combined.
  2. Add chives: Gently stir in the chives or scallions, if using.

How to Store and Freeze?

Horseradish sauce with yogurt can be made well ahead of time and even stored in the freezer. To ensure this creamy sauce keeps as long as possible, simply:

  • Storage: Transfer the yogurt horseradish sauce to an airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to 1 week. Give it a good stir just before serving.
  • Freeze: Store in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. For meal prep and portion control, flash-freeze the sauce in a silicone ice cube tray for 1-2 hours. Then, pop them out and transfer them to a freezer-safe plastic bag. Each cube is good for one serving.

Serving Suggestions

Whether you want a yogurt sauce for steak or an exceptional accompaniment to lamb, pork, chicken, or seafood, this horseradish sauce with yogurt will hit the spot. It also pairs well with vegetables and potatoes, too. Some of my favorite ways to serve include:

  • Beef: You can’t get any more classic than horseradish sauce and beef. The spicy, tangy, cooling sauce compliments the fatty, umami-like textures and flavors of beef. Serve a dollop with any cut of steak, such as Filet Mignon or NY Strip, or serve it with Sunday roasts, like Standing Rib Roast or Instant Pot Pot Roast.
  • Pork and lamb: Just as horseradish compliments beef, it also compliments other types of meat, including pork and lamb. Give Pork Chops that much more zippy bite, or serve it alongside the robust flavors of Lamb Chops.
  • Sandwich spread: Don’t stop with weeknight dinners. Jazz up your lunch and spread it on sandwiches of all types, like a roast beef sandwich, turkey, chicken, and of course, leftover prime rib sandwich.
  • Seafood: The delicate, flaky texture of Grilled Sockeye Salmon and Baked Sockeye Salmon go so well with the bold richness of horseradish cream sauce.
  • Vegetables: Give any of your favorite roasted veggies a healthy, creamy kick (with some added protein from the Greek yogurt) by serving it as a drizzle or a dip. I love serving it with my Air Fryer Beets, which makes a great side to serve with meat dishes.
  • Potatoes: The flavors of horseradish, chives, and yogurt pair so beautifully with baked or roasted potatoes, like Air Fryer Fingerling Potatoes and Air Fryer Red Potatoes it will make your taste buds tingle.

Expert Tips

  • Adjust the seasoning: Taste as you go and adjust the horseradish and seasonings to your taste. Keep in mind that the horseradish will get stronger the longer it stays in the fridge.
  • Bring to cool room temperature: Cover and place in the refrigerator until ready to serve. For best results, remove from the fridge 30 minutes before serving.
  • Give it a good stir before serving: Some of the liquid naturally floats to the top, so make sure to stir it to bring all the ingredients back together.
  • Thin to your desired consistency: If the sauce is too thick, thin it out with a tablespoon of water.

FAQs

What is creamy horseradish sauce made of?

This version of horseradish sauce with yogurt is made with prepared horseradish, Greek yogurt, mayonnaise, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, salt, pepper, and either chives or scallions.

What goes well with horseradish sauce?

Horseradish sauce is classically paired with roasted meats, like Prime Rib and Pot Roast, but is exceptional with pork, lamb, chicken, vegetables, and potatoes.

What is the difference between horseradish and horseradish sauce?

Horseradish is simply the ingredient itself, a root vegetable with a long white root and green leaves. Horseradish sauce adds a creamy component to the mix, such as sour cream, Greek yogurt, and/or mayonnaise.

Other Greek Yogurt Sauce/Dip Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Horseradish Yogurt Sauce recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of horseradish yogurt sauce with a spoonful from the top view.
Print

Horseradish Yogurt Sauce Recipe

Horseradish Yogurt Sauce is a lighter alternative to the classic condiment we all love. Made with Greek yogurt, it is still super creamy and tangy with fewer calories. It is the perfect accompaniment to meat (especially Prime Rib), fish and vegetable dishes.
Course Condiment/Sauce
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 30kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons prepared horseradish
  • ½ cup Greek yogurt full fat
  • 1 tablespoon mayonnaise
  • 1 teaspoon apple cider vinegar
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon chives or scallions, chopped (Optional)

Instructions

  • In a medium bowl, whisk together the prepared horseradish, Greek yogurt, mayonnaise, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, salt and pepper until fully combined.
  • Gently stir in the chopped chives or scallions if desired. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary.
  • Refrigerate until ready to serve then remove from the fridge 30 minutes before serving.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 3/4 cup horseradish yogurt sauce, which is ideal for 6-7 servings. The calorie information below is per serving.
  • Storage: Transfer it to an airtight container. Store in the fridge for up to a week. Give it a good stir just before serving.
  • Freeze: Store it in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Alternatively, for meal prep and portion control, flash-freeze the sauce in an ice cube tray for 1-2 hours. Then, pop them out and transfer them to a freezer-safe plastic bag. Each cube is good for one serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 30kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.04g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.04g | Trans Fat: 0.002g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 254mg | Potassium: 46mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 24IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 0.1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/horseradish-yogurt-sauce/feed/ 2
Horseradish Sauce For Prime Rib https://foolproofliving.com/horseradish-sauce/ https://foolproofliving.com/horseradish-sauce/#respond Wed, 24 Jan 2024 23:18:56 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=73287 Horseradish Sauce Ingredients You only need seven simple ingredients to make this horseradish sauce.  Below, you’ll find everything you need,…]]>
Aysegul Sanford from the front view.

Like many people, I have a handful of go-to recipes I rotate through at Christmas. It’s usually a toss-up between prime rib, beef tenderloin, or a cozy pot roast.

No matter which one ends up on the table, this creamy horseradish sauce is the one thing I always make to serve alongside it.

It’s the kind of sauce you’d expect at a steakhouse, but once you make it yourself, you’ll see how easy it is.

The best part is that it doesn’t stop at Christmas dinner. The next day, I use it as a spread for sandwiches, which feels like a little bonus.

Horseradish Sauce Ingredients

You only need seven simple ingredients to make this horseradish sauce. 

Below, you’ll find everything you need, along with a few substitution ideas and optional add-ins to customize it to your taste:

Sour cream and horseradish sauce ingredients from the top view.

Prepared horseradish: Often labeled as “prepared horseradish” or “grated horseradish in vinegar,” it is usually found in the refrigerated section of the grocery store in a small jar. 

It’s made by grating fresh horseradish root and preserving it in vinegar, which tames its strong flavor.

If you grow horseradish at home or want to make it with fresh horseradish, you can make this recipe from scratch. Just keep in mind that homemade horseradish tends to be much stronger, so you may have to adjust your recipe accordingly.

Sour cream: I like to use sour cream for its gentle tang and creamy texture, which helps balance the sharpness of the horseradish. I recommend using full-fat sour cream, as it gives the sauce a smoother texture.

Mayonnaise (optional): This adds a bit of extra creaminess and mild tang to the sauce. It is optional, so you can leave it out if you prefer a lighter horseradish sauce or want to keep the flavors more straightforward.

Dijon mustard (optional): Most horseradish sauce recipes don’t include Dijon mustard, but I love that a small amount (1 teaspoon) adds an extra layer of complexity to the sauce. However, you can omit it if you prefer.

Apple cider vinegar: This is a great way to balance the richness of this sauce. However, white wine vinegar, lemon juice, or champagne vinegar would also work. 

Chives: Chives add a mild onion note and a bit of freshness to the sauce. If you don’t have chives on hand, you can use scallions.

Seasonings: A simple mix of salt and black pepper is all you need to bring out the horseradish’s natural flavors.

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

Greek yogurt: If you prefer to make a horseradish sauce recipe without sour cream, you can use ½ cup of Greek yogurt for a lighter sauce. Or better yet, try my horseradish yogurt sauce for a recipe that uses no mayo or sour cream.

Crème fraîche: If you like a richer finish, ½ cup of crème fraîche is another great substitute for sour cream.

Heavy cream: For a milder, less tangy version, you can replace the sour cream with heavy cream.

Worcestershire sauce: If you want a bit more depth, add up to ½ teaspoon to the sauce.

Sweetener: To make it slightly sweeter (similar to Arby’s-style sauce), stir in 1-2 teaspoons of sugar or honey to taste.

Prepared Horseradish vs Fresh Horseradish: What Works Best for Sauce

If you’re wondering whether to use prepared horseradish or fresh horseradish root, here’s a quick breakdown:

Prepared horseradish is grated horseradish root preserved in vinegar. It’s what’s most commonly used in horseradish sauce recipes and is typically sold in small jars in the refrigerated section near the condiments or produce.

I prefer using prepared horseradish here because you’ll get consistent heat and flavor, and let’s face it, it is quick and easy.

Fresh horseradish would also work, but keep in mind that it is significantly stronger than the prepared horseradish you’d buy at the store. So, start with 1 tablespoon of freshly grated horseradish, taste, and adjust as needed.

Freshly grated horseradish can quickly overpower the sauce, so a little goes a long way.

How to Make Horseradish Sauce

If you’ve never made horseradish prime rib sauce at home, you’ll be happy to know it comes together quickly and requires no special equipment.

I’ve tested this ratio many times, and whisking everything by hand gives you the smoothest, most balanced sauce.

A collage of images showing how to make this recipe.

Step 1 – Whisk the base ingredients: Add the prepared horseradish, sour cream, mayo, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, salt, and black pepper to a medium bowl. 

Whisk until the mixture is completely smooth and well combined. Take a quick taste and adjust the seasoning if needed. The sauce should be creamy with a noticeable but balanced horseradish kick.

Step 2 – Fold in the chives (optional): If using, gently stir in the chopped chives or scallions. This adds a subtle onion note and a bit of freshness without overpowering the sauce.

Serve right away, or refrigerate until ready to use.

Homemade Horseradish Sauce in a bowl.

Expert Tips for the Best Horseradish Sauce

While this is a simple sauce, a few small adjustments can make a big difference in both its taste and how well it pairs with your meal.

Here’s what I’ve learned through years of making this recipe:

  • Adjust based on what you’re serving: One of the benefits of making horseradish cream sauce at home is its ease of customization. If you want to make it steakhouse-style and serve it with rich dishes like roast beef or prime rib, increase the prepared horseradish to 4 tablespoons for a bit more kick. For sandwiches, burgers, or roasted vegetables, I recommend using 2-3 tablespoons to keep the sauce milder so it doesn’t overpower the other ingredients.
  • Taste before serving: Always give the sauce a final taste and adjust the seasoning as needed. This is especially important if the sauce has been refrigerated, as flavors can mellow slightly over time.
  • Let it rest if you can: While this sauce is ready to use in about 5 minutes, letting it sit in the refrigerator for at least 30 minutes makes a big difference, as it helps the flavors come together. 
  • Stir before serving: Because this sauce contains both dairy and vinegar, some separation is normal. A quick stir before serving ensures an even texture and balanced flavor.
Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.
Spoonful of horseradish sauce in a bowl.
Print

Horseradish Sauce for Prime Rib Recipe

This homemade horseradish sauce is perfect for steak, prime rib, roast beef, and beef tenderloin. Made with just a few basic pantry ingredients, it can be served as a creamy sauce to various meat dishes (beef, pork, chicken), as a spread for sandwiches, or as a dipping sauce for veggies.
Course Condiment, Sauce
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 58kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons prepared horseradish aka jarred horseradish
  • ½ cup sour cream full-fat
  • 1 tablespoon mayonnaise full fat
  • 1 teaspoon apple cider vinegar
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon chives or scallions chopped – optional

Instructions

  • In a medium-size bowl, whisk together the prepared horseradish, sour cream, mayonnaise, apple cider vinegar, Dijon mustard, salt, and pepper until fully combined.
  • Gently stir in the chopped chives, if desired. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 3/4 cup horseradish sauce, which is ideal for 6-7 servings. The calorie information below is per serving.
  • Prepared Horseradish: Also known as jarred horseradish, you can buy prepared horseradish from your grocery store. You can make this recipe using grated fresh horseradish, but if you go in that direction, I would recommend starting with 1 tablespoon of it (and increasing it from there), as the fresh variety has a more potent flavor.
  • Make Ahead: You can make this recipe 2 days ahead and keep it in the fridge in an airtight container. Just be sure to give it a good stir before serving.
  • Storage: Place in an airtight container (or a mason jar) and refrigerate for up to 7 days.
  • Freezing: Place it in resealable freezer-safe bags or ice cube trays (in smaller portions) and freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw in the fridge a few hours before you are ready to serve it.

Nutrition

Calories: 58kcal | Carbohydrates: 2g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 11mg | Sodium: 254mg | Potassium: 47mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 142IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 25mg | Iron: 0.1mg

Make Ahead, Storage, and Freezing

This horseradish sauce is easy to make ahead and stores well, making holiday prep a little easier. Here’s how I do it:

How to make ahead & store: Transfer your prepared horseradish sauce to an airtight container or a mason jar. It will stay fresh in the refrigerator for up to a week.

I recommend stirring the mixture before serving, as the ingredients tend to separate.

How to freeze: While some people recommend against freezing dairy-based sauces due to separation, I have found that a quick 30-second whisk after thawing re-emulsifies the sauce well. For easy portioning, freeze the sauce in an ice cube tray. Once frozen, remove the frozen cubes from the mold and transfer them to a freezer bag. They should keep well for up to 3 months.

FAQs

What does horseradish sauce taste like?

Horseradish sauce has a creamy, tangy base with a noticeable sharpness from the horseradish. The heat is present but balanced by the dairy.

Why is horseradish sauce served with prime rib?

Prime rib is rich and well-marbled, and horseradish sauce helps cut through that richness. The sharpness of the horseradish and the creaminess of the sauce create contrast, which keeps each bite from tasting too heavy.

Can I make horseradish sauce without mayonnaise?

Yes. The mayonnaise in this recipe is optional; I use it mainly for added tangy flavors. You can leave it out and still end up with a well-balanced horseradish sauce.

How long does horseradish sauce last in the fridge?

When stored in an airtight container, it will keep well in the refrigerator for up to one week. Give it a quick stir before serving, as it might separate.

Does horseradish sauce get stronger over time?

Not really. It can mellow slightly as it rests, which is why I recommend giving it a good stir, tasting before serving, and adjusting if needed.

What to Serve Horseradish Sauce With

This creamy horseradish sauce pairs well with a wide range of dishes, from classic beef recipes to more unexpected uses.

Here are a few of my favorite ways to enjoy it:

Classic Pairings

Horseradish sauce is a natural match for beef, and it’s especially popular as a prime rib dipping sauce, since its sharpness balances the richness of classic holiday meat dishes. Here are a few of the classic ways I like to serve it:

Everyday Pairings

  • Sandwiches and burgers: Use it as a spread for a leftover Prime Rib Sandwich or add it into burgers, like my Bacon Avocado Burger, for extra creaminess.
  • Roasted or grilled vegetables: Serve this creamy horseradish recipe as a dip or topping for roasted vegetables or a baked potato for an easy, elevated side dish.
  • Crudité: This creamy sauce makes a great spicy dip to serve as a part of crudité platters, meat, or cheese boards.

Less Traditional Ideas

  • Seafood: Horseradish sauce for salmon pairs surprisingly well with richer seafood dishes, such as Baked Sockeye Salmon or Grilled Sockeye Salmon.
  • Bloody Marys: Stir in a small dollop to add a little extra depth and spice.
Person mixing creamed horseradish with a whisk.
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/horseradish-sauce/feed/ 0
Bread Dipping Oil https://foolproofliving.com/olive-oil-bread-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/olive-oil-bread-dip/#comments Sun, 31 Dec 2023 05:01:49 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=25983 So, you know how you go to your favorite Italian restaurant, and as soon as you sit down, you can’t…]]>

So, you know how you go to your favorite Italian restaurant, and as soon as you sit down, you can’t wait for the olive oil dipping sauce and crusty bread to be placed on your table. It’s restaurant-style at its best (I’m looking at you, Carrabba’s Italian Grill, Bertucci’s, California Pizza Kitchen, Olive Garden, Maggino’s, and Macaroni Grill!) That is this recipe!

With the right mix of bread dipping seasoning and the best olive oil you can find, you can make restaurant-style food in your home kitchen. It serves as the perfect appetizer for those get-togethers with family and friends. Who knew bread and olive oil could taste so good?!

Person holding bread dipped in oil.

Ingredients You Will Need

You need a handful of basic ingredients to make this olive oil dip for bread. The good news is that the recipe itself is so forgiving that if you are missing an ingredient or two, you can easily substitute it with another ingredient. Below is what you’ll need, including the best oil for bread dipping:

Olive oil dipping spices and herbs from the top view.
  • Fresh or Dried Herbs: You will need fresh or dried basil, oregano, thyme, and rosemary to make this olive oil dip. If you decide to use dried herbs, I recommend using half the amount as they tend to be stronger. You can find the correct measurements in the recipe card below.
  • Seasoning and Spices: I know it may seem a bit basic, but the salt and pepper you use make all the difference. If you can, avoid table salt and pre-ground black pepper. Use flaky sea salt or kosher salt and freshly cracked black pepper for the best flavor. However, if you do not mind your olive oil bread dip being a little bit spicy, you can also add a pinch of red pepper flakes (or red chili flakes) for some heat.
  • Olive Oil: There are so many olive oils on supermarket shelves these days, and it’s hard to know which one is the best olive oil for dipping bread. A general rule of thumb is to purchase cold-pressed extra virgin olive oil from one supplier or country. These are the fruitiest and most flavorful. Avoid olive oil blends or refined versions. 
  • Garlic: Garlic is a big flavor provider and enhancer in this olive dipping oil recipe. When mixed with spices (or fresh herbs), it infuses oil with additional Mediterranean flavors. However, it is also such a delicate ingredient. Use this list as a guide depending on how strong you want the garlic flavor when whipping up your own garlic bread cheese dip.
    • Minced Fresh Garlic cloves: Using fresh minced garlic will provide a strong garlic flavor. I recommend using this version right before you are going to serve. 
    • Oven Roasted Garlic – Roasted garlic olive oil dip is my absolute favorite! When you roast garlic, it brings out a natural, caramel sweetness that is simply divine. Once the garlic cloves are roasted, you should be able to easily mash them with a fork and mix them in. Use the moment you are going to serve. 
    • Garlic Powder – A good substitute if you want to make olive oil dip ahead. Use 1 teaspoon of garlic powder to replace the fresh.
  • Cheese: Grated Parmesan cheese is a classic ingredient in any restaurant-style Italian dipping oil, but it is an optional ingredient here. You can omit using it if you want to make it vegan or dairy-free. If you do not have Parmesan cheese, you can also use grated Pecorino Romano, cubed feta, or those small mozzarella balls for fresh, cheesy flavor.
  • Acid: Acid gives it a fresh flavor and a nice tang and balances the richness of the olive oil, so don’t skip it! My favorite is freshly squeezed lemon juice. But you can make an olive oil and balsamic vinegar bread dip with a splash of balsamic vinegar as well. If you decide to go with balsamic vinegar, simply use a tablespoon of balsamic in place of freshly squeezed lemon juice.

Optional Ingredients and Substitutions:

  • Olives: While it is not a traditional ingredient, a handful of chopped green or black (such as Kalamata) olives would take this Italian olive oil bread dip up a notch, especially if you are a fan of olives.
  • Italian Seasoning: For those times I am short on time, I keep a jar of homemade Italian seasoning in my pantry so that I can make this in minutes. Below is my go-to Italian seasoning recipe:
    • 1 tablespoon dried basil
    • 1 tablespoon dried oregano
    • ½ tablespoon dried rosemary
    • ½ tablespoon dried thyme
    • ½ teaspoon red pepper flakes
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • Shallots: Thinly sliced shallots would be a great substitute for garlic if preferred.
  • Other spices: While the combination of basil, oregano, rosemary, and thyme is often used in Italian restaurants, you can also use other olive oil dipping spices such as paprika, dried dill, dried sage, parsley, and even fennel seeds whenever you want to switch it up.

How to Make Olive Oil Bread Dip?

This olive oil dipping sauce for bread comes together quickly and easily. Below are the steps:

A woman is pouring olive oil to make Italian Bread Dipping oil
  1. Mix the herbs and spices: To make it, mix together dried or fresh rosemary, basil, oregano, thyme, and red pepper flakes (if using) in a shallow bowl. 
  2. Add the olive oil: Pour in the olive oil and lemon juice (or balsamic vinegar). Add in the garlic and parmesan cheese.
  3. Add the spices: Season lightly with salt and pepper. Stir it well to make sure that everything is fully mixed.
  4. Rest (Optional): If you have the time, let it rest in the fridge for an hour for the flavors to meld together nicely. 
  5. Serve: Place the bowl of seasoned oil on a large plate with sliced bread around it. Serve!

What Kind of Bread Do You Dip in Olive Oil Bread Dip?

When it comes to choosing the best bread for dipping in oil, you have so many options. While any fresh bread would work, below are a few suggestions:

Garlic bread dipping sauce in a bowl with bread on the side.
  • Italian bread: The classic Italian breads like fresh focaccia and ciabatta would be wonderful to dip into this homemade bread dipping oil.
  • French Bread: With its crispy crust and chewy interior, French baguette is a wonderful option. It also has a long and thin shape, which makes it ideal to slice and dip. Alternatively, if you prefer a soft bread for dipping, you can serve it with storebought or homemade brioche
  • Sourdough Bread: The tangy flavors of sourdough pair beautifully with this garlic bread dip. Plus, its dense texture holds the oil well.
  • Homemade bread: If you do have the time, I highly recommend making my No Knead Bread or Rustic Olive Bread (my personal favorite bread to serve it with.) They are both wonderfully crusty with a hearty texture and robust flavor.
  • Garlic Bread: The rich and savory flavor of garlic bread compliments the taste of herb and oil bread dip. If you need a good recipe, try my Air Fryer Garlic Bread.
  • Pita Bread: Widely used in Mediterranean and Middle Eastern cuisine, pita’s soft and slightly chewy texture is a good choice for dipping.

How To Make Ahead and Store This Dipping Oil?

While making this Italian dipping sauce takes no more than 5 minutes, with a few adjustments, you can make it ahead and store it for serving later. Here is how I do it: 

  • Make Ahead: If you prefer to make this bread dipping oil a few days ahead, I recommend using dried herbs and spices instead of fresh herbs. Also, it is best to use garlic powder instead of fresh garlic, as when raw garlic sits in oil for an extended period of time, food-borne illness can occur. To make ahead, mix all the ingredients (except cheese) in a jar with a tight-fitting lid and store it at room temperature. Finally, I would add the parmesan cheese right before serving.
  • Storage: If you are making this olive oil dipping recipe with fresh herbs and fresh garlic, it is best to consume it on the day it is made or store it in an airtight container for an additional day or so. However, if you are using dried herbs and garlic powder, you can store the oil mixture for up to 5 days in an airtight container in the fridge.

Expert Tips:

There is a reason why this recipe went viral on social media. It is not only super easy to make but also ready in minutes. 

With that being said, during our recipe testing, we learned a few lessons that I’d like to share so that you can have the best olive oil garlic dip for bread on your first try:

  • Adding Salt: While we listed salt as an ingredient, it is best to taste the mixture first before adding it, especially if you are using Parmesan cheese since it can already be quite salty.
  • Let it rest: If you have the time, let it rest in the fridge for an hour or so. Doing so helps the flavors to meld together.
  • Serve at room temperature: Olive oil tends to become cloudy and thicken when refrigerated. Therefore to maintain its ideal, fluid consistency and make it easier (and more pleasant) to dip, I recommend serving this bread oil dip at room temperature. 
  • Warm the bread: If you have the time, serve your dipping oil with warm bread as they do in fancy Italian restaurants.
  • Serving children: This easy bread dip is perfect to serve to family and friends, especially during the holiday season. To adjust the recipe for children, omit the red pepper flakes and use less of the overpowering dried herbs like rosemary and thyme. 
  • Dip it “well”: If you let the bread sit in the oil for a good minute or so, it absorbs even more of its delicious flavor.
  • Serving suggestions: While you can serve this bread and olive oil appetizer by themselves, for a special occasion, you can also make it a part of your meat and cheese platter. And if you want to amp up your weeknight dinner, try drizzling it on fish before roasting it in the oven.
  • Salad Dressing: I am pretty sure that you won’t have leftovers, but if you do, this olive oil bread dip makes a great salad dressing.
Person drizzling olive oil spread for bread into a jar.

FAQs

What kind of oil do you dip bread in?

The most commonly used and recommended oil for bread dipping is extra virgin olive oil (EVOO). A good olive oil for bread dipping is one that uses olives from a single origin. EVOO is preferred for its fruity and peppery flavors that pair well with various types of bread. However, while it is not common, you can also use commercially sold infused olive oils, avocado oil, or walnut oil to make this dipping oil for bread.

How to season olive oil for dipping bread?

Seasoning olive oil for dipping bread involves infusing it with a variety of flavors. In most cases, olive oil is infused with a combination of dried or fresh herbs (such as thyme, basil, rosemary, and oregano), spices and seasonings (like red pepper flakes, salt, and black pepper) and acid (like lemon juice, red wine or balsamic vinegar.)

How long does bread dipping oil last?

If you make a version of this recipe using dried herbs and seasonings, you can store it for a long time, potentially up to a month. However, if you use fresh ingredients such as fresh garlic and Parmesan cheese, it should be used within 5 days.

Why dip bread in olive oil?

Dipping bread in olive oil is a practice enjoyed in Mediterranean cultures, often a part of the dining experience, reflecting the region’s culinary heritage where olive oil is harvested and produced locally. Additionally, olive oil adds a rich flavor to the bread. The fruity and peppery flavors of oil paired with bread create a delightful experience.

If you try this bread dip recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Bread dipped in olive oil dipping sauce in a person's hand.
Print

Bread Dipping Oil Recipe

Homemade Bread dipping oil just like they do in your favorite Italian restaurant! Made with extra virgin olive oil, dried spices (or fresh herbs), lemon juice, and parmesan cheese, this Italian-restaurant-style olive oil bread dip is guaranteed to impress.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Italian
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 329kcal

Ingredients

  • ½ tablespoon dried basil
  • ½ teaspoon dried thyme
  • ½ teaspoon dried oregano
  • ¼ teaspoon dried rosemary
  • ¼ teaspoon red pepper flakes optional
  • 1 cup extra virgin olive oil
  • 3 cloves fresh garlic minced or one teaspoon of garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon lemon juice or balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons parmesan cheese shredded (optional)
  • 1/4 teaspoon kosher salt*
  • 1/4 teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Place dried basil, thyme, oregano, rosemary, and red pepper flakes in a bowl. Pour in the olive oil. Give it a mix.
  • Add in the garlic, lemon juice, and parmesan cheese. Stir to combine and serve with crusty bread on the side.

Video

Notes

  • Yields: This bread dip oli recipe makes a cup of dipping oil, which is ideal for 6 servings when served as an appetizer with bread on the side. The calorie information below is per serving.
  • Fresh herbs: If you are growing your own herbs, you can use fresh herbs instead of dried herbs following the measurements below. Be sure to chop them before using in the recipe.
    • 1 tablespoon fresh basil
    • 1 teaspoon fresh oregano
    • 1/2 teaspoon fresh thyme
    • 1/4 teaspoon fresh rosemary
  • Storage: If you are making this recipe using dried herbs, you can store the oil mixture for up to 5 days in an airtight container in the fridge. If using fresh herbs and fresh garlic, I would recommend storing it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.
  • Adding Salt: While we listed salt as an ingredient, it is best to taste the mixture first before adding it, especially if you are using Parmesan cheese since it can already be quite salty.
  • Let it rest: If you have the time, let it rest in the fridge for an hour or so. Doing so helps the flavors to meld together.

Nutrition

Calories: 329kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 26g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 126mg | Potassium: 23mg | Fiber: 0.3g | Sugar: 0.1g | Vitamin A: 47IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/olive-oil-bread-dip/feed/ 63
Air Fryer Fingerling Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-fingerling-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-fingerling-potatoes/#respond Tue, 28 Nov 2023 16:41:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=72183 Rich, buttery, and firm, fingerling potato recipes are a family favorite for us. If you feel the same way, you…]]>

Rich, buttery, and firm, fingerling potato recipes are a family favorite for us. If you feel the same way, you might like our Fingerling Smashed Potatoes as well.

Air fried fingerling potatoes on a plate with a spoon on the side.

Ingredients

Air-frying fingerling potatoes require only a handful of basic ingredients to achieve their tasty texture and incomparable flavor. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.
  • Fingerling potatoes: As the name suggests, you will need fingerling potatoes for this air fryer potato dish. Though you don’t need to peel your potatoes before using, be sure to remove any blemishes from the potato skin and cut the potatoes evenly—preferably halved lengthwise. While we used the yellow (one color) variety, this recipe would also work with colorful fingerling potatoes, which are usually sold at grocery stores during the holiday season.
  • Oil: I use olive oil to give my fingerling potatoes their thorough seasoning and crisp outsides. However, any other neutral-flavored vegetable oil, like avocado oil, will also work.
  • Parsley: Both fresh and dried parsley will give this fingerling potato recipe a five-star presentation and a pop of bright, garden-fresh taste.
  • Seasonings: I’ve found that the best seasoning mix for this dish is garlic powder, salt, and pepper—a simple, balanced, and savory combination. However, you can use other spices like paprika, ground cumin, and ground coriander if they match the flavor profile of the dish you are serving them with.

Substitutions and Other Seasoning Options

  • Garlic butter: My buttery Garlic Butter Sauce is an easy way to take these air-roasted fingerling potatoes to the next level and turn them into a restaurant-quality side. If you happen to have some on hand, simply use a tablespoon of it instead of using olive oil. 
  • Parmesan cheese: Who can say “no” to the nutty, rich, cheesy taste of garlic parmesan fingerling potatoes? While I don’t recommend adding the cheese to the potatoes before air frying them, I highly recommend sprinkling them with cheese right after removing them from the air fryer. The residual heat will melt the cheese without burning it, allowing the potatoes to absorb its buttery flavor. 
  • Lemon juice or vinegar: Give your fingerling potatoes an authentic English spin by drizzling them with lemon juice or vinegar. This simple addition adds a bright tang that immediately lightens the potatoes’ heartier base.
  • Spice mixture: The best way to customize this air-fried potato recipe is to use a spice mixture that matches the other dishes on your menu. Try flavoring your fingerling potatoes with my Blackening Seasoning for smoky, spicy, and bold Cajun flavors. Or, use Italian Seasoning or Mediterranean Spice Mix for a more herbaceous, zesty finish.
  • Fresh herbs: Sprinkling your air fryer fingerling potatoes with fresh rosemary or chopped thyme is an easy way to give this dish a sophisticated, herbal finish. However, many different herbs (i.e., fresh parsley, chives, sage, or cilantro) would also work if they match the flavors in your other dishes.

How to Cook Fingerling Potatoes in the Air Fryer?

Once you learn how to air fry fingerling potatoes, you’ll likely never go back to cooking them in the oven. These hassle-free instructions will show you how to get perfectly tender-crisp potatoes in six steps.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
A collage of images showing how to air fryer fingerling potatoes.
  1. Mix the seasonings: Add the olive oil, dried parsley flakes, garlic powder, salt, and pepper to a large bowl. Whisk the ingredients until thoroughly mixed.
  2. Coat the potatoes: Add the fingerling potatoes to the olive oil mixture and toss them until they have an even coating.
  3. Layer the basket: Arrange the coated potatoes in the air fryer basket in a single layer, avoiding overcrowding.
  4. Cook: Air fry the fingerling potatoes for 12-15 minutes, shaking the air fryer tray halfway through. When done, the potatoes should be tender when pierced with a knife. If they need more time after 15 minutes, cook them in one-minute increments until fork tender.
  5. Serve: Transfer the air-fried fingerling potatoes to a serving platter, and—if desired—sprinkle it with fresh or dried herbs.

How to Store and Reheat?

After making fingerling potato recipes in the air fryer, you don’t have to sacrifice a single bite of leftovers. Though I recommend enjoying this recipe on the day you make it, these storage tips will keep your potatoes ready to eat days after preparation.

  • Store: You can store your cooked fingerling potatoes in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat, place your fingerling potatoes in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.

How to Serve Air Fried Fingerling Potatoes?

Air-frying fingerling potatoes is a great way to add a tender, savory taste to any meal, whether it be a weeknight dinner, a simple snack, or a feast for a special occasion. Below are a few serving suggestions to help you with menu planning:

  • Main proteins: Few combinations are as tasty as this simple yet delicious side dish and a hearty, protein-packed main course. For a light, zesty Mediterranean menu, I recommend serving your potatoes alongside perfectly portioned Chicken Skewers in the Oven or my tangy Greek Yogurt Chicken. Or, for a more decadent spread, my Baked Chicken Parm is a crisp, rich, and cheesy dish guaranteed to impress any dinner guest.
  • Seafood: Inspired by the classic fish-and-chips pairing, this easy side dish makes a great addition to dozens of seafood menus. I love balancing the hearty savor of these air fryer potato wedges with fan-favorite recipes, like my smoky and light Baked Blackened Cod and zesty Baked Sockeye Salmon Fillet.
  • Snack: Making roasted fingerling potatoes in the air fryer is a quick, simple way to please the whole family with a tasty snack, appetizer, or game-day finger food. To brighten their hardier taste, serve these crispy potatoes with your favorite tomato-based sauce, like ketchup or Basil Tomato Sauce. Or, serve them with creamy sauces, like Ranch Dressing with Greek Yogurt or Blue Cheese Sauce Without Cream, for a tangier, richer flavor.
  • Potato Salads: If you are a fan of roasted potato salads, consider trying your crispy air fryer fingerling potatoes as an innovative twist. These potatoes can not only elevate your potato salad with their crunch but also serve as a crunchy addition when chopped and sprinkled over salads.

Expert Tips

While making this fingerling potato recipe is quite easy and straightforward, during our recipe testing, we learned a few important things to help you get crisp, tender, and flavorful potatoes on your first try. Below are a few helpful tips for success:

  • Dry and clean: Begin by giving your potatoes a good scrub and thoroughly patting them dry with a paper towel or a clean kitchen towel. Damp potatoes won’t coat well with the seasoning mixture, and this oiled exterior is necessary to help the potatoes crisp up in the air fryer.
  • Single layer: When cooking fingerling potatoes in the air fryer, it’s essential not to overcrowd them in the basket. Air frying only works if the hot air can evenly circulate throughout the chamber, so if not all of your potatoes fit in the basket, I recommend cooking them in batches. 
  • Shake the basket: I suggest shaking your air fryer basket halfway through air frying your fingerling potatoes to ensure even cooking. This step will also help you ascertain how much more time your potatoes will need before eating.
  • Size matters: It is important to note that the size of the potatoes and air frying time are directly correlated. If your fingerling potatoes are larger (or smaller), you may have the adjust the cooking time accordingly.
  • Air fryer brand: Every air fryer is different, so depending on which brand you own, you may have to adjust your potatoes’ cooking time and temperature accordingly. 
  • No need to soak: Some recipes suggest soaking the potatoes first to remove excess starch, but you do not need to do that for the recipe.

FAQs

Have more questions about air-fryer fingerling potatoes? Don’t stress! Below, you’ll find everything you need to know, from how long to cook fingerling potatoes to master tips for maximum crispiness.

How long to air fry fingerling potatoes?

I recommend air frying your fingerling potatoes for 12-15 minutes at 400 degrees F. However, depending on your air fryer brand and potato size, you may have to adjust the timing. To test whether your potatoes are ready to serve, try piercing them with a knife. If the blade easily enters and exits the potatoes’ flesh, you can remove your potatoes from the heat and serve. If the blade still encounters resistance, continue cooking your potatoes in one-minute increments until ready.

Are fingerling potatoes similar to Yukon Gold?

Though both are buttery, rich, and firm, fingerling potatoes and Yukon Gold potatoes have several critical differences. First, Yukon Golds are larger potatoes that are more spherical than fingerling potatoes, which are smaller and more elongated. Furthermore, fingerling potatoes have a slightly nuttier profile, a less creamy texture, and thin skins. However, both are versatile and popular in many traditional recipes.

Why didn’t my fries get crispy in the air fryer?

Suppose that your potatoes don’t come out as crisp as desired. In that case, there are two main possibilities: Either you didn’t thoroughly dry your potatoes before coating them in your olive oil mixture, or you may have overcrowded the pan, thereby constricting airflow throughout the air fryer chamber.

Other Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like

Air fryer veggies strike the ultimate balance between crisp, tender, and nutritious flavors. These quick sides are just what you need to fill your cookbook (and dinner table!) with perfectly customizable flavors.

If you try this air fryer fingerling potatoes recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Fingerling potatoes roasted in air fryer on a plate from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Fingerling Potatoes Recipe

A delicious recipe for Air Fryer Fingerling Potatoes that are great for serving as a side dish with main dishes or finger food with dipping sauces. Gluten-free and vegan.
Course Side Dish, Vegan side dish
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 120kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 pound fingerling potatoes washed, blemishes removed and halved lengthwise (no need to peel)
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon dried parsley flakes or 2 teaspoons of freshly chopped parsley plus more for sprinkling on top
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 400 degrees F.
  • In a large bowl, whisk together the olive oil, dried parsley flakes, garlic powder, salt, and pepper.
  • Add the fingerling potatoes and toss to combine.
  • Place the potatoes in a single layer without overcrowding the air fryer basket.
  • Cook the potatoes until tender when pierced with a knife, 12-15 minutes, shaking halfway through. If not tender after 15 minutes, continue to cook in 1-minute increments until done.
  • Transfer onto a serving platter. If desired, sprinkle it with fresh herbs.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes 1 pound of fingerling potatoes, which is about 3 cups. It is ideal for serving 4 people. The nutritional information below is per serving.
  • Dry them thoroughly: It is important to make sure that the potatoes are dry before tossing them in the olive oil mixture to ensure that the potatoes are evenly coated and can crisp up during the cooking process.
  • Adding parmesan: I initially tested this recipe by adding the shredded parmesan cheese to the oil and garlic mixture, but then we found out that the quick air frying process burned the cheese before fully cooking the potatoes. Therefore, I  recommend sprinkling them with cheese right after removing them from the air fryer. The residual heat will melt the cheese without burning it, allowing the potatoes to absorb its delicious umami flavor. 
  • Size matters: It is important to note that the size of the potatoes and air frying time are directly correlated. If your fingerling potatoes are larger (or smaller), you may have the adjust the cooking time accordingly.
  • Store: Air fried fingerling potatoes are best right after they are fried. However, you can store them in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to three days.
  • Reheat: To reheat, place them in the air fryer at 350 degrees F. for 5-7 minutes or until warmed through.

Nutrition

Calories: 120kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 484mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 3IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-fingerling-potatoes/feed/ 0
Mediterranean Hummus Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/ https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/#comments Tue, 05 Sep 2023 00:39:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2804 While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that…]]>

While I love a good flavored hummus like my Carrot Hummus recipe, there really is something about plain hummus that just brings me back to my roots. Simple, straightforward, and with just a few pantry staples, homemade hummus is only a few steps away.

A bowl of hummus garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Hummus Ingredients

A traditional hummus recipe requires just a handful of ingredients. Since hummus is the Arabic word for chickpeas, it’s no wonder this is the main ingredient. Below is what you’ll need:

Ingredients for basic hummus recipe.
  • Chickpeas: Although you can cook your own chickpeas (more on this below), I find using canned chickpeas is easier and does not require any advanced planning. We will need one can of chickpeas (also known as garbanzo beans) rinsed and drained.
  • Lemon Juice: Fresh lemon juice will provide a fresh pop of citrus.
  • Water: A bit of water helps with consistency. For best results, use ice-cold water.
  • Tahini Paste: A high-quality tahini (sesame paste) makes all the difference and gives this easy hummus recipe that special nutty flavor. I love super creamy Soom tahini (affiliate link) or Seed + Mill (affiliate link.)
  • Extra Virgin Olive Oil: Use good quality olive oil for the best flavor.
  • Garlic Cloves: I use raw garlic when making this hummus recipe from scratch. However, if you want to take things up a notch (and are not a fan of the pungent garlic flavor), you can use Roasted Garlic, or, quicker, Air Fried Garlic as well. 
  • Seasonings: Cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt add Mediterranean flavor and warmth.
  • Fresh Herbs: Upon serving, a final sprinkle of fresh herbs like parsley is all you need. 

Substitutions and Optional Garnish Ideas

While you can serve this DIY hummus simply as is, I find extra garnishes and Mediterranean additions compliment the classic characteristics of hummus and give it depth of flavor. Some favorites you can try include:

  • Chickpeas: If you would prefer to make hummus from dried chickpeas, I recommend trying Ottolenghi’s method of cooking chickpeas. Place 1 ⅓ cups dry chickpeas in a bowl, cover with cool water, add 1 teaspoon baking soda, cover and soak overnight. The next day, drain, rinse, and cook in a pot of water for 40 minutes to an hour, or until softened. And if you prefer it to be quicker, you can cook chickpeas in a pressure cooker as well.
  • Olive Oil: Create a deep crevice into the bowl of hummus with a large spoon and finish with a generous drizzle of olive oil.
  • Pine Nuts + Olives: Add crunch and fruitiness by finishing with toasted pine nuts and chopped Kalamata olives or green olives.
  • Hummus Seasoning: Finish with an array of spices and herbs, such as my Mediterranean Seasoning or Baharat Spice Blend, bright and tangy sumac, or dried oregano.
  • Greek: Garnish with chopped sun-dried tomatoes, crumbled feta cheese, chopped red onion, and a drizzle of olive oil.

How to Make Hummus From Scratch?

If you are ever looking for a step-by-step hummus recipe, you have come to the right place. Making your own hummus will always be better than store-bought hummus and might even be faster than taking a trip to the grocery store. Here’s how I like to do it:

Step by step photos showing how to make hummus recipe.
  1. Prep ingredients: Combine the lemon juice and water in a small bowl. Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  2. Mix Tahini: In another small bowl, whisk together the tahini and olive oil until shiny and smooth.
  3. Blend chickpeas: In the bowl of a food processor with the steel blade or a high-powered blender, add the remaining chickpeas and process for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice/water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until the mixture begins to form into a paste, about 1 minute.
Person showing how to make creamy hummus in a collage of images.
  1. Add tahini: With the food processor running, slowly add the tahini paste mixture through the tube and process until creamy, about 30-40 seconds. Be sure to stop the machine a few times and scrape down the sides.
  2. Serve: Transfer the hummus to a large bowl. Using the back of a spoon, create a deep crevice in the center. Finish with reserved chickpeas, a drizzle of olive oil, and chopped fresh parsley, and enjoy.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

Easy homemade hummus can be made ahead and stored in both the fridge and freezer. To do so, simply:

  • Make Ahead: Prepare this homemade hummus recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftovers of this chickpea hummus recipe can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.
  • Freeze: Store in a freezer-safe airtight container, with a little space at the top (to count for expansion), for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the fridge.

How to Serve

This basic hummus recipe can be served in a number of different ways. Go the more traditional route or think outside of the box by serving as:

  • Mezze Platter: The adoration for hummus is a social activity that is meant to be enjoyed amongst the company, and no mezze plate would be complete without it. Enjoy it alongside Baba Ganoush and Middle Eastern Red Pepper Dip for an authentic experience.
  • Grilled Meat: Make it a part of a filling meal by serving your garbanzo bean hummus alongside Mediterranean Chicken, Chicken Kabobs, Grilled Lamb, or beef kabobs.
  • Appetizer / Dip: Cut up fresh veggies like raw celery sticks, English cucumber, carrots, bell peppers, or radishes and dip right into Mediterranean hummus bowls. And if you want to take it up a notch, drizzle it with a spoonful of skhug sauce for that authentic Middle Eastern taste.
  • Spread: Use it as a sandwich spread to make your lunch that much more enjoyable, or add it to your favorite grain bowls.
  • Pita / Bread: Give it a casual approach with toasted pita bread, pita chips, crackers, Air Fried Garlic Bread, Olive Bread, or No Knead Artisan Bread.
Greek hummus in a bowl garnished with chickpeas and parsley.

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this authentic hummus recipe is pretty simple and straightforward, below are a few tips to ensure you get perfect results on your first try:

  • Should I remove the skins of chickpeas? I am sure you’ve seen a lot of recipes suggesting removing the chickpea skins. While I get why they recommend doing so, I personally do not have the time or patience to do so. And I guarantee you that this recipe is just as creamy and delicious without removing the skin. 
  • Use high-quality tahini: The quality of your tahini makes a huge difference here. For optimal taste and texture, use a brand of tahini that uses the buttery white Humera sesame seeds from Ethiopia. It should also be soft and creamy. If the tahini bottle has been sitting in the fridge for a while, be sure to give it a good stir before using it.
  • Use an ice cube: This is an optional step, but it really works. To achieve an extra smooth and creamy hummus, add 1-2 ice cubes near the end of processing.
  • No food processor? Use a blender. However, please keep in mind that if you have a high-speed blender like Vitamix (affiliate link), you might have to stop the machine and scrape the sides a few times.
  • Serve at room temperature: Fun fact – restaurant hummus is never refrigerated and is made fresh each morning. While I refrigerate my batch of homemade hummus to get ahead, I always serve it at room temperature.

FAQs

What is the secret to the creamiest hummus?

The creamiest hummus is made from soft chickpeas and a high-powered food processor or blender. Adding 1-2 ice cubes at the end of the processing time would also help.

Can you have hummus on a Mediterranean diet?

Yes, hummus is a staple of the Mediterranean diet and is celebrated for being plant-based and full of protein, dietary fiber, and healthy fats.

What is the main ingredient in hummus?

The main ingredient in hummus is chickpeas, sometimes referred to as garbanzo beans.

How much tahini for hummus?

This is more about personal preference and cultural influence, but I use ⅓ cup tahini for every 1 (14-15 oz) can of chickpeas.

Other Mediterranean Recipes You Might Enjoy:

It is no secret that I love making and sharing Turkish recipes on the blog. Below are other Mediterranean classics that I know you’ll like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Mediterranean Hummus Recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Authentic hummus in a bowl drizzled with olive oil.
Print

Mediterranean Hummus Recipe

A restaurant style yet Homemade Mediterranean Hummus recipe. This recipe makes the creamiest and most delicious hummus that you can make in minutes. Top it off with pine nuts, chopped olives, and a drizzle of oil for extra deliciousness.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 6 people
Calories 139kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 1/4 cup water
  • 1/3 cup tahini paste
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 can chickpeas (14 oz.) drained and rinsed
  • 2 small cloves garlic minced
  • 1/4 teaspoon cumin
  • Pinch of cayenne pepper
  • Pinch of black pepper
  • 1/2 teaspoon salt
  • 2 tablespoons Italian parsley finely chopped

Instructions

  • In a small bowl, combine the lemon juice and water.
  • In a separate bowl (or a measuring cup), whisk together the tahini paste and olive oil until thoroughly incorporated.
  • Reserve 2 tablespoons of chickpeas as a garnish.
  • Place the rest of the chickpeas in a food processor and process them for 15 seconds. Add lemon juice and water mixture, garlic, cumin, cayenne pepper, black pepper, and salt. Process until mixed, scraping down the bowl as necessary, 50-60 seconds.
  • While the food processor is running, slowly (in a steady stream), pour the tahini paste and olive oil mixture from the tube, and process until smooth and creamy (or it reaches your desired consistency,) for 30-40 seconds.
  • Transfer the hummus to a plate and sprinkle it with chopped parsley and reserved chickpeas. If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil. Serve it with fresh pita, pita chips or toasted bread on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 ½ cups of hummus, which is ideal for 6 servings when served as an appetizer. If you are serving a larger crowd, you can multiply the recipe. The nutrition information below is for one serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the recipe as directed up to 2 days in advance. Place it in an airtight container and store it in the fridge. The flavors actually get better the longer they have a chance to marry together.
  • Store: Leftover hummus can be kept in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 139kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 242mg | Potassium: 86mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 132IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/homemade-mediterranean-hummus/feed/ 15
Baba Ganoush Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/#respond Mon, 21 Aug 2023 15:24:58 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69873 What is Baba Ganoush? Baba ganoush (also referred to as baganoush, baba gahanouj, baba ghanouj, papa ganoush, and baba ghanoush)…]]>

What is Baba Ganoush?

Baba ganoush (also referred to as baganoush, baba gahanouj, baba ghanouj, papa ganoush, and baba ghanoush) is an eggplant- and tahini-based appetizer native to Levantine regions—now located the Middle East and Mediterranean. Directly translated, baba ganoush’s meaning is “pampered papa” or “coy daddy,” which may refer to the recipe’s smooth, rich taste.

Babaganoush in a bowl garnished with pomegranate seeds served with pita chips on the side.

If you are wondering, what is in baba ganoush, this savory, smoky spread generally consists of roasted eggplant, creamy tahini, zesty lemon juice, rich olive oil, and bold garlic. However, many also add unique blends of seasonings to give this Middle East eggplant dip a tantalizingly complex flavor profile.

Ingredients

Baba ganoush ingredients include a handful of fresh, natural, and flavorful ingredients—all of which you may already have in your pantry!

Ingredients used in the recipe from the top view.
  • Eggplant: There are many eggplant varieties to choose from when selecting a baba ganoush eggplant. Plump and round, globe eggplants are an excellent option for this recipe and are the easiest type to find in most American grocery stores. However, if you can get your hands on Italian eggplants, I highly recommend them, as this variety has a more tender flesh, fewer seeds, and a deliciously sweet flavor. Japanese eggplants will also work, but you’ll need more (7-8) due to their thinner shape and smaller size. If you’d prefer not to work with fresh eggplants, you may also use canned roasted eggplant (affiliate link), though it may not have the same tenderly mild flavor.
  • Fresh garlic cloves
  • Fresh lemon juice
  • Sesame Tahini: Ground sesame paste, aka tahini, has an earthy, nutty flavor that perfectly balances the mild, smoky taste of roasted eggplant baba ganoush. My favorite tahini brand is Soom (affiliate link), which is incredibly smooth and creamy.
  • Olive oil: I recommend using extra virgin olive oil for this recipe, as it has a higher quality with pure pressed olives, a lighter color, and a more neutral taste.
  • Kosher salt
  • Optional spices: While adding spices is not traditional to the original recipe, you can add more depth to your baba ganoush by adding a mixture of ground cumin and sweet, peppery paprika. For an extra deep taste, you may also use smoked paprika to complement your smoked eggplant baba ganoush. You can also add red pepper flakes for additional heat or black pepper for slightly pinier undertones.
  • Garnishes: Topping this Mediterranean eggplant dip with different garnishes is a great way to revitalize your spread with sweet, crunchy, and fresh notes. For a tart, sweet finish, try topping your dip with pomegranate seeds, or use sesame seeds and pine nuts for a nuttier taste. Or, if you want bright, fragrant overtones, fresh herbs like parsley are some of my go-to’s.

How to Cook Eggplant for Baba Ganoush?

There are three different ways to prepare your eggplant for this simple recipe, depending on your preferred cooking method: roasted, charred, and grilled eggplant for baba ganoush.

Roasting Eggplant in the Oven

Roasting eggplant for baba ganoush is a cinch when you use my foolproof method for preparing Whole Roasted Eggplant. These instructions will ensure your eggplants come out tender and creamy with little prep time.

Person showing how to roast eggplant for baba ganoush.
  1. Prep the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F.
  2. Poke the eggplants: Use the tines of a fork to poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes around the exterior of each eggplant.
  3. Roast: Place eggplants on a baking sheet lined with aluminum foil in a single layer and bake for 50-60 minutes, turning them every 20 minutes until they burst, collapse, and soften.

Char Eggplant On a Gas Stove

The most authentic way to prepare eggplant for this baba ganoush recipe is by charring it over the open flame of a gas stove. Making Roast Eggplant on a Gas Stove is quicker than other cooking methods and will result in a smoky baba ganoush recipe with an irresistibly complex, aromatic flavor.

Person showing how to char eggplant on a gas stove.
  1. Prepare the stove: Line the base of a gas range stove with aluminum foil, ensuring that the burners are still exposed.
  2. Add the eggplants: Turn the burners to medium heat and place the eggplants directly on the flame. Two eggplants can fit on the larger burners, and one can fit on the smaller ones.
  3. Roast: Roast the eggplants for 15-20 minutes, depending on their size, turning them every five minutes with a pair of tongs. Be careful not to burn yourself while handling the hot eggplants.
  4. Remove from heat: Remove the charred eggplants from the flame when their skin becomes burnt and flaky, and their flesh is soft.

Grill Eggplant

Learning how to grill eggplant for baba ganoush is an easy way to give this Mediterranean dip its classic rich, smoky flavor and smooth texture. Here’s how to do it:

  1. Prep the grill: Preheat the gas grill (or charcoal grill) to medium heat.
  2. Grill the eggplants: Place the eggplants directly on the grill and cook them for 40-50 minutes, turning them every 10 minutes or so. Continue grilling until the eggplants have charred skin on all sides and are fully tender.

How to Make Baba Ganoush?

There’s no secret to making an authentic baba ganoush recipe. These foolproof instructions will ensure your tastebuds explode with fresh, Mediterranean flavors in just eight basic steps.

A collage of images showing how to make baba ghanoush.
  1. Let the eggplant cool: Cook your eggplant following one of the three methods mentioned above. Allow your cooked eggplant to cool down. In the meantime, place a fine-mesh strainer over a bowl and set it aside for later.
  2. Scoop the eggplant flesh: Once cool, draw a knife lengthwise through each eggplant until cut in half. Then, use a spoon to scoop out the eggplants’ flesh, trying to remove as much skin as possible.
  3. Strain: Transfer the scooped eggplant into the fine mesh strainer and use the back of a spoon to gently press against the flesh, removing as much moisture as you can. Let the eggplant drain while you prepare the remaining ingredients. Discard the juices.
  4. Mix the garlic and lemon: Transfer the eggplant to a medium bowl and add the garlic and lemon juice. Use a fork to mix the ingredients, breaking apart and mashing the large chunks of eggplant until thoroughly combined.
A collage of images showing how to make Lebanese baba ganoush recipe.
  1. Add the tahini: Stirring constantly, pour the tahini, followed by the olive oil, into the mixing bowl in a steady stream. Mix the ingredients until emulsified.
  2. Add the seasoning: Add the salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if desired) to the bowl. Taste the mixture and add more seasoning and lemon juice if necessary.
  3. Garnish: After giving it a good stir, transfer the baba ghanoush to a serving bowl and garnish with fresh parsley and pomegranate seeds if using.
  4. Serve: If wanted, drizzle the spread with olive oil and serve with pita chips.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze?

This homemade baba ganoush is a must-have for anyone seeking easy meal prep. Whip up this simple dip for healthy snacking throughout the week, or make it in advance for a five-star party appetizer.

  • Make ahead: You can make this baba ganoush recipe up to four days in advance. Then, store your prepared baba ghanoush in an airtight container in the fridge until ready to eat.
  • Store: You can store your freshly made eggplant garlic dip in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to four days.
  • Freeze: While you can technically freeze this vegan baba ganoush recipe, please keep in mind that it will likely lose its creamy texture after it is exposed to freezing temperatures, so it might not taste as good after storage. However, if you still want to freeze, first transfer the mixture into an airtight container, removing as much air as possible. Then, store your baba ganoush in the freezer for up to one month. 
  • Thaw: Thaw your frozen aubergine dip in the fridge overnight. Because your mixture will likely become watery the longer it sits, drain it of excess liquid, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary before serving.

What to Serve with Baba Ganoush?

One of the best things about preparing babaganoush is the many delectable ways to serve it. Though many traditionally serve this dish alongside pita triangles or vegetables, it also works as a tasty spread on toast, sandwiches, wraps, and more. 

  • Bread: Who can say no to an appetizer as effortless and tasty as this? Serve a bowl of this popular Middle Eastern dip with your favorite pita chips, roasted pita wedges, or crackers, and you’ll have the perfect crowd-ready snack.
  • Raw vegetables: Crisp, nutritious, and garden-fresh, fresh veggies make an incomparable pair with a bowl of smoky eggplant dip recipes. My favorite raw vegetables include cucumber slices, carrot sticks, cherry tomatoes, and sliced radishes.
  • Other Middle Eastern or Mediterranean dips: Wondering what to do with baba ganoush that will make even the pickiest eaters hungry for more? Try pairing your creamy eggplant dip with other classics, like Mediterranean Hummus, Muhammara, and Tzatziki. To transform this simple spread into a next-level meze platter, you can also serve them with a side of olives and nuts—gorgeous and delicious.
  • Grilled or roasted meats: A tasty way to serve baba ganoush is as a light, creamy side dish for hearty protein mains. For a classic Middle Eastern pairing, serve it alongside brightly spiced Chicken Shish Tawook or Oven Chicken Kabobs. Or, if you want an irresistibly juicy, perfectly portioned poultry meal, try this simple dish with Grilled Cornish Game Hens.
  • Use it as a topping: A dollop of baba ganoush is an excellent topping for homemade CAVA bowl and pairs beautifully with honey harissa chicken or grilled harissa chicken.
A bowl of baba ghanouj garnished with pomegranate seeds and parsley.

Expert Tips

You don’t have to be a Middle Eastern chef to make an epic baba ganoush the whole family will love. These pro tips have everything you need to keep your spread as flavorful and smooth as possible.

  • Roasting time might change based on the sizes of your eggplant: Depending on the size and variety of your eggplant, they may need more or less cooking time. Japanese eggplants are smaller and thinner, requiring less time on the stove/grill, while globe eggplants are larger and may need more time to develop tender insides than other types. In total, however, you should have about 17 ounces (~480 gr.) of cooked eggplant flesh to make this babaganoush recipe.
  • Eggplant seeds: Globe eggplants tend to have a lot of seeds—more than Italian eggplants. Though these seeds are entirely edible and blend into the dip after everything is mixed, you may remove them if you are not a fan.
  • Roasted eggplant skin: It is totally okay if some of the charred eggplant skin goes into the mixture. While we want to remove as much of the skin as we possibly can, the eggplant skin is edible, so don’t worry about it if some skin gets mixed into your baba ganouj.
  • Don’t skip the draining: The secret to an epic baba ganoush recipe is to remove as much liquid as possible from the eggplants after they are cooked. Not only do not skip this step but also take your time to ensure that the juices are fully drained as much as possible to ensure it is as creamy and tasty as possible.
  • Add the oil in a steady stream: When adding the tahini and olive oil to the mixture, it is imperative to drizzle them in a steady stream while you are vigorously mixing the eggplant mixture. If you add them at the same time, they will not mix properly, and you’ll most likely end up with a less creamy and smooth baba ganoush.
  • Taste for seasoning: One other important tip for making the best baba ganoush recipe is tasting the mixture for seasoning before serving. I cannot stress this step enough, as it’s vital that you adjust the taste of your spread to your liking. Add more salt, cumin, or paprika to achieve a more robustly flavored dip, or if you prefer a more acidic, tart flavor, add more lemon juice.
  • Let it rest: Letting your eggplant baba ganoush rest for thirty minutes will allow its flavors to mix and develop, giving every bite a rich, Middle Eastern flavor. While it is an optional step, if you do have the time, let it rest in the fridge before serving.
  • Baba ganoush without Tahini: If you are not a fan of tahini, you can use an equal amount of plain Greek yogurt for a different but equally delicious version of this recipe.
  • For the iconic smoky taste: If you want to give your roasted eggplant spread an authentically smoky, robust taste, I highly recommend charring your eggplants over an open flame. Whether you cook them on a gas stovetop or on the grill, the smoky flavor that comes from the charred eggplants is worth the effort and time, especially if you are after the traditional baba ganoush recipe you enjoy in Middle Eastern restaurants.
  • Food processor or blender: Though not a traditional preparation method, you may use a food processor or blender to make an easy baba ganoush without heavy mixing. Simply fit your food processor with a steel blade and place the roasted eggplant flesh, garlic, lemon juice, tahini, olive oil, salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if using) in the bowl. Pulse 7-9 times until thoroughly combined or longer, depending on how smooth you want the texture of your dip to be. Then, transfer the mixture to a bowl, garnish it with fresh parsley and a drizzle of olive oil, and serve.

FAQs

If you have more questions about this classic baba ganoush recipe, don’t worry! This simple FAQ has all you need to know:

Where is baba ganoush from?

Baba ganoush originated in the Levantine regions, roughly located in the Middle East and Mediterranean. This area now includes several modern-day countries, including Palatine, Lebanon, Syria, Jordan, and Turkey.

Is baba ganoush vegan?

Yes! This baba ganoush recipe is vegan, dairy-free, and gluten-free, making it the perfect recipe for anyone with dietary restrictions.

How long to grill eggplant for baba ganoush?

When grilling eggplant for baba ganoush, your eggplants will need 40-50 minutes of cooking time, depending on their size.

What does baba ganoush taste like?

This creamy roasted eggplant dip offers a delectable balance of smoky, savory, and zesty flavors—a classic profile in Mediterranean and Middle Eastern cuisine. Not only does this spread taste incredible on its own, but it also makes a fabulous appetizer when served alongside a bowl of pita bread or raw veggies.

Is baba ganoush served hot or cold?

I recommend serving baba ghanouj chilled or at room temperature to ensure you can taste all its complex flavors. 

Why is my babaganoush bitter?

If your babaganoush comes out bitter, your eggplant may be old or not in season. I recommend selecting only fresh eggplants, which tend to have milder, sweeter flesh. Furthermore, it’s possible that the tahini paste you used has a naturally bitter profile or that you added too much during the mixing process. Always be sure to taste your babaganoush as you go so that you can adjust the seasoning to counteract any unwanted bitterness. You may also try adding extra fats, such as olive oil or Greek yogurt, to balance out any bitterness you taste.

What is the difference between hummus and baba ganoush?

Though they have a similarly smooth, rich flavor profile, hummus comes from a mixture of chickpeas and tahini, while baba ganoush contains a blend of eggplants and tahini.

Is baba ganoush healthy?

Absolutely! This recipe only uses the freshest, most natural ingredients—all packed with healthy nutrients. In fact, eggplants are high in antioxidants, fiber, and vitamins, helping reduce your risk of heart disease.

How long does baba ganoush last in fridge?

As long as it is kept in an airtight container in the fridge, your baba ganoush should last for up to 4 days.

Other Eggplant Recipes You Might Also Like

Wondering what to do with roasted eggplant? If you can’t resist adding this eggplant tahini dip to every meal, you’ll love adding these other eggplant recipes to your family cookbook.

Baba ganoush in a bowl with pita wedges on the side.
Print

Baba Ganoush Recipe

Learn how to make Baba Ganoush like the pros using our foolproof method. Made with just a few simple ingredients, this popular Middle Eastern recipe is the perfect appetizer for any party.
Course Dip
Cuisine Mediterranean
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 50 minutes
Total Time 1 hour
Servings 6 servings
Calories 152kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 ½-3 lbs globe or Italian eggplant ~ 2-3 eggplants if using globe eggplants
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • ¼ cup lemon juice plus more to taste
  • ¼ cup tahini
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil plus more as a drizzle
  • 1 ½ teaspoons kosher salt plus more to taste
  • Pinch ground cumin optional
  • Pinch paprika to finish it off – optional
  • 1 tablespoon fresh Italian parsley chopped (as garnish)
  • Handful of pomegranate seeds optional

Instructions

  • To cook eggplants for baba ganoush, you have three options:
    a. Roast whole eggplants in the oven: Preheat oven to 400 degrees F. Using a fork, poke 7-10 ¾-inch holes throughout each eggplant. Place eggplants on the sheet pan on a single layer and roast them for 50-60 minutes, turning them every 20 minutes until they burst, collapsed, and softened.
    b. Roast eggplants on the gas stove: Line the base of a gas range with aluminum foil, making sure to keep the burners exposed. Turn the burners on medium -heat and place eggplants directly on an open flame. You can put 2 eggplants on the larger burners and 1 on the smaller ones. Roast eggplants for about 15-20 minutes (depending on their size), turning every 5 minutes or so using a pair of tongs, being careful not to burn yourself. You will know that it is fully roasted when the skin is burnt and flaky and the flesh is soft.
    c. Grill eggplants: Preheat a gas grill (or a charcoal grill) to medium heat. Place eggplants directly on the grill and cook, turning every 10 minutes or so for 40-50 minutes or until charred on all sides and fully tender.
  • Let the now-cooked eggplant cool down. Meanwhile, place a fine-mesh strainer over a large bowl and set it aside.
  • When cool enough to handle, working on one eggplant at a time, slit open each eggplant lengthwise and carefully scoop the eggplant flesh removing as much of the skin as possible.
  • Transfer the eggplant flesh into the fine mesh strainer. Using the back of a spoon, gently press to remove as much of the liquid as much as possible. Let it drain while you are working on the rest of the ingredients. In the end, you should have about 17 ounces (~480 gr.) of eggplant flesh.
  • Transfer the eggplant to a medium bowl. Add minced garlic and lemon juice. Using a fork, give it a mix while breaking the large chunks of eggplant flesh until fully combined.
  • While stirring constantly, pour in the tahini, followed by olive oil, in a steady stream. Mix until fully combined.*
  • Add salt, ground cumin, and paprika (if using.). Taste for seasoning and add in more seasoning and/or lemon juice if you want.
  • Transfer baba ganoush to a serving bowl, garnish with fresh parsley and pomegranate seeds if desired.
  • If preferred, drizzle it with olive oil and serve with pita chips on the side.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields about 2 cups of this roasted eggplant dip, which is good for 4-6 servings when served as an appetizer.
  • * Food processor: While it is not traditional, you can make baba ganoush using a food processor or blender. To do so, place eggplant flesh, garlic, lemon juice, tahini, olive oil, salt, and ground cumin and paprika (if using)  in the bowl of a food processor fitted with a steel blade. Pulse 7-9 times until fully combined. You can run it for longer if you prefer it to have a smoother texture. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Transfer to a bowl, garnish with parsley and a drizzle of olive oil, and serve with pita chips on the side.
  • Eggplant seeds: Globe eggplants tend to have a lot of seeds—more than Italian eggplants. The seeds are entirely edible and will blend into the dip after everything is mixed. However, if you are not a fan, you can remove them.
  • Don’t skip the draining: The secret to an epic baba ganoush recipe is to remove as much liquid as possible from the eggplant flesh. So, be sure to take your time when draining as much liquid as possible. 
  • Add the oil in a steady stream: When adding the tahini and olive oil to the mixture, it is imperative to drizzle them in a steady stream while you are vigorously mixing the eggplant mixture. If you add them at the same time, they will not mix properly, and you’ll most likely end up with a less creamy and smooth baba ganoush.
  • Storage: Leftovers can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 152kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 589mg | Potassium: 497mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 107IU | Vitamin C: 10mg | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/baba-ganoush-recipe/feed/ 0
Ina Gartenโ€™s Roasted Eggplant Spread https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-vegetable-dip-with-tahini/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-vegetable-dip-with-tahini/#comments Sun, 20 Aug 2023 20:28:16 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=408 As one of my favorite Eggplant Recipes, this eggplant spread is just as elegant as the Barefoot Contessa herself. It…]]>

As one of my favorite Eggplant Recipes, this eggplant spread is just as elegant as the Barefoot Contessa herself. It is easy to make with just a few simple ingredients; it is a great appetizer to serve with crackers, pita bread, and veggies.

Barefoot Contessa's roasted eggplant red pepper spread in a bowl.

Ingredients

While this could be an eggplant red pepper spread, I like to think eggplant is the star here. Here’s a quick glance at what we need:

  • Eggplant: Eggplant Types vary, but I used the easy-to-find globe eggplants for this recipe. If you can get your hands on Italian eggplants, you can use them as well. Since we are roasting the eggplant in the oven pre salting the eggplant is not necessary here. However, it is important to cut eggplant into equal-sized cubes to ensure even roasting.
  • Bell Pepper: I like the sweeter red bell peppers, but you can use any color, such as yellow or orange.
  • Red Onion: All you have to do is peel and cut the onion into big chunks.
  • Garlic Cloves
  • Olive Oil
  • Seasoning: This includes Kosher salt, black pepper, and a touch of (optional) cayenne pepper for some kick.
  • Lemon Juice: Use freshly squeezed lemon juice for the best flavor.
  • Tahini: Go for a high-quality, runny tahini, such as Soom (affiliate link.) The flavor makes all the difference.
  • Herbs: I love fresh chopped parsley here, but you can also add fresh mint to enhance those Mediterranean flavors. Fresh basil leaves as a garnish are a nice addition, too.
  • Pita Bread: Whether you prefer to toast fresh pita bread triangles or enjoy it with store-bought pita chips, this red pepper eggplant dip will be delicious either way.
Ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

Optional Add-Ins

  • Tomato Paste: The original recipe from the Barefoot Contessa cookbook contains tomato paste. While I did not include it here, you can add 1 Tablespoon of tomato paste for a richer flavor.
  • Extra Seasoning: Give it a smoky eggplant dip flavor with the addition of 1 teaspoon smoked paprika or an herbal kick with 1 teaspoon dried oregano.

How to Make Eggplant Spread

This Ina Garten eggplant spread recipe is a cinch to make, with most of the work done by the oven and the food processor. Here’s how to do it in a few easy steps:

A collage of images showing how to make the recipe.
  1. Preheat oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a large baking sheet with parchment paper.
  2. Prepare the vegetables: Spread the eggplant, bell pepper, onion, and garlic onto the baking sheet. 
  3. Season the veggies: Toss with olive oil, salt, pepper, and cayenne, if using.
  4. Roast vegetables: Bake for 35-40 minutes, tossing halfway through. Allow to cool for 5 minutes.
  5. Make spread: In the bowl of a food processor with the steel blade, add the roasted vegetables, lemon juice, tahini, and 2 tablespoons parsley. Pulse 4-5 times until the mixture resembles a coarse puree. 
  6. Taste: Taste for seasoning and add more salt and lemon juice, if necessary. 
  7. Serve: Transfer to a serving bowl. Top with the remaining parsley. Serve immediately with pita bread, crackers, or veggies on the side.

Serving Suggestions

This recipe for roasted eggplant dip is so versatile and can be served in a number of creative ways. Think outside the box and try:

  • Appetizer / Snack: Serve it as a fun and pleasing appetizer or snack with fresh pita triangles, pita chips, crackers, or fresh vegetables.
  • Mezze Plate: Make it a part of a full-on mezze plate, alongside Muhammara and Mediterranean Hummus.
  • Sandwich Spread: Eggplant dip for bread will be your new favorite sandwich addition. Spread it on crusty No Knead Olive Bread or Artisan Bread.
  • Side Dish: Serve it as a delicious side dish to grilled seafood, like Grilled Shrimp Skewers or Grilled Mahi Mahi, grilled lamb, or classic Mediterranean Lemon Chicken.
  • Pizza / Pasta: Think of it more as an eggplant paste recipe to spread on pizza dough or stir into pasta.

How to Store

This Barefoot Contessa roasted eggplant dip recipe actually gets better the longer it sits, as the flavors have a chance to marry together. You can either:

  • Make Ahead: Make the eggplant spread up to 2 days in advance for the best flavor.
  • Storage: Store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. You may have to give it a good stir just before serving. Serve chilled or at room temperature.

Expert Tips

While the recipe for this eggplant red pepper dip is an easy one, here are a few tips to help you achieve perfect results on your first try: 

  • Cut the vegetables into the same size pieces: This ensures the vegetables will be done at the same time.
  • Single layer: Be sure to spread the veggies on a single layer to ensure even baking. If they don’t fit in one baking sheet, you can spread them on two separate sheets.
  • Pay attention to the cooking time: We want the vegetables to be tender and slightly caramelized. Overcooking can lead to a bitter flavor.
  • Do not over-process: We want a chunky spread, not a puree. Pulse just a few times in the food processor.
  • Make a double batch: Use two sheet pans and double the recipe. It’s a wonderful dip to have on hand when hosting a party.

FAQs

Should eggplant be peeled before roasting?

Although eggplant skin can impart a bitter flavor, it is not necessary to peel eggplant before roasting.

How do you prepare eggplant before cooking?

Eggplant preparation depends on the dish you are making it for. In this roasted eggplant dip, all we have to do is cut it into 1-inch cubes and let the oven do the rest of the work for us.

More Delicious Dips and Spreads You Might Like:

If you are like us, a fan of serving dips and spreads while entertaining, you might also enjoy the recipes below:

If you try Ina Garten’s Roasted Eggplant Spread recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Barefoot Contessa's Eggplant spread in a bowl
Print

Ina Garten’s Roasted Eggplant Spread Recipe

Barefoot Contessa’s roasted eggplant spread is an easy appetizer that you can serve with pita bread, crackers, or raw vegetables.
Course Appetizer, Dip
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 222kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 medium-sized eggplants with skin on and cut into small cubes (~1 pound each)
  • 1 red bell pepper seeded and cut into smaller pieces
  • 1 red onion peeled and chopped into big chunks
  • 3 cloves garlic peeled – no need to mince
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon black pepper
  • Pinch cayenne pepper optional
  • 5 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2 tablespoons tahini
  • 3 tablespoons Italian parsley chopped
  • Pita bread for serving

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper.
  • Place the eggplant, bell pepper, onion, and garlic on the baking sheet.
  • Drizzle it with olive oil and sprinkle it with salt, pepper, and cayenne. Give it a gentle toss.
  • Roast vegetables for 35-40 minutes, making sure to give it a toss halfway through the baking. Let them cool for 5 minutes.
  • Place the roasted vegetables, lemon juice, tahini, and 2 tablespoons of parsley in the bowl of a food processor. Pulse 4-5 times to blend. Taste for seasoning and add if necessary.
  • Transfer to a bowl. Garnish with the rest of the Italian parsley. Serve immediately with pita wedges.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe makes about 2 cups of eggplant spread, which is ideal for serving 6 people as an appetizer. The nutritional values below are per serving.
  • Make Ahead: Make the eggplant spread up to 2 days in advance for the best flavor.
  • Storage: Store in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 4 days. You may have to give it a good stir just before serving. Serve chilled or at room temperature.

Nutrition

Serving: 6servings | Calories: 222kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 884mg | Potassium: 687mg | Fiber: 9g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 1341IU | Vitamin C: 53mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-vegetable-dip-with-tahini/feed/ 18
Cherry Tomato Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/#comments Tue, 01 Aug 2023 21:11:43 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=69426 Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed…]]>

Whether you are growing them in your garden or getting them from your local farmer’s market, if you are blessed with an abundance of cherry tomatoes, be sure to also try our Tomato Mozzarella Salad. It is a colorful, crisp, and light dish that uses juicy cherry tomatoes to bring out its garden-fresh taste. Alternatively, you can whip up my Black Eyed Peas Salad for a delicious bean salad that allows the cherry tomatoes to shine.

A bowl of cherry tomato salsa with chips on the side.

Ingredients

This cherry tomato salsa recipe only uses the most flavorful, simple ingredients to get its signature freshness. To make this tasty mix, you’ll need the following:

Ingredients for the recipe from the top level with text on each ingredient.
  • Cherry tomatoes: I prefer fresh cherry tomatoes or grape tomatoes in this recipe due to their bright, tart flavor. With very minimal difference between the two varieties, both types of tomatoes would work here. Additionally, you can make this simple recipe using any other tomato—heirloom, Roma, colorful cherry tomatoes, or beyond.
  • Onion: I use roughly-chopped white onions in my version, but you can also use red onion for a mild salsa. You can also use green onions (or a combination of both!) if you prefer a less intense flavor profile.
  • Fresh Garlic Cloves
  • Jalapeno: Jalapeno is a spicy, garden-fresh ingredient perfect for adding heat and color to this homemade salsa. If you prefer it to be less spicy, be sure to remove the seeds from your jalapeno prior to chopping.
  • Cilantro: Lemony and bright, chopped cilantro leaves is a classic ingredient in this recipe. However, if you’re not a fan of cilantro, you may either omit the ingredient or substitute it with other fresh herbs, such as parsley, oregano, or mint.
  • Lime juice: Fresh lime juice is best when making your salsa due to its brilliant, citrusy flavor. While it is not traditional, lemon juice can also be used. If you don’t have any limes (or lemons) on hand, you may also use bottled lime juice in this recipe.
  • Seasonings: Only salt and ground black pepper are necessary to give this fresh salsa recipe its rich taste. For a warmer, nuttier profile, you may also add a pinch of ground cumin.
  • Olive oil: You’ll need olive oil only if you are for making roasted cherry tomato salsa. 

How to Make Salsa with Cherry Tomatoes?

Making salsa with cherry tomatoes is a great way to add bright tomato flavor to your favorite recipes. These simple instructions will teach you how to make salsa in two ways: by hand and in the food processor.

Make it by Hand

Whether it’s your first recipe or your hundredth, preparing fresh cherry tomato salsa—also known as salsa fresca—is an easy way to add light, zesty flavor to your table. Plus, it only takes 10 minutes!

Person showing how to make homemade cherry tomato salsa in a collage of photos.
  1. Prepare the tomatoes: Place a colander in another bowl and set the two aside. Then, use a sharp knife to cut the cherry tomatoes into smaller pieces and add them to the colander. Let their juices drain while you prepare the remaining ingredients.
  2. Combine the ingredients: Transfer the cut tomatoes to a medium bowl once drained. Add the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
  3. Add the lime: Drizzle the mixture with lime juice, and sprinkle it with salt and pepper.
  4. Mix and serve: Stir the ingredients until thoroughly combined. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. When ready, serve the salsa fresca with chips or on the side of your main dish.

In the Food Processor or Blender

When serving a crowd, the last thing you want to do is spend hours in the kitchen prepping your ingredients. With this simple method, you can make salsa from cherry tomatoes with little prep time.

Person showing how to make grape tomato salsa in a food processor.
  1. Blend the veggies: Add the onion, garlic, and jalapeno to the bowl of your food processor. Pulse the ingredients 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
  2. Add the tomatoes: Place the cherry tomatoes in the food processor, along with the other ingredients, and process the mixture for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred texture.
  3. Drain: Place a colander over a bowl, and pour the mixture into the colander. Use the back of a spatula to remove as much excess liquid as possible.
  4. Add seasonings: Transfer the drained veggies into a medium-sized bowl. Add the lime juice, salt, and pepper, and stir until combined.

What if I Want to Roast Tomatoes?

Roasted cherry tomato salsa adds irresistibly smoky, rich undertones to traditional pico de gallo recipes. Below, I’ll show you how to make a delicious roasted salsa that comes together in no time.

  1. Heat the oven: Preheat the oven to 450 degrees F.
  2. Prep the tomatoes: Arrange the cherry tomatoes on a baking sheet, and drizzle them evenly with a tablespoon of olive oil.
  3. Bake the tomatoes: Roast the tomatoes in the preheated oven for 10-12 minutes, flipping them halfway through the cooking process. Cook until the tomatoes slightly burst. For a fire-roasted cherry tomatoes version, turn on the broiler for the last 2-3 minutes of the cooking time.
  4. Cool the tomatoes: Let the roasted tomatoes rest and cool for 15 minutes. Then, transfer them to a cutting board and chop them to your desired size.
  5. Drain the tomatoes: Place the roasted tomatoes in a colander, and set the colander in another bowl. Once the excess liquid drains away, transfer the tomatoes to a medium bowl.
  6. Add the remaining ingredients: Add the chopped onion, jalapeño, cilantro, lime juice, salt, and pepper to the chopped tomatoes. Stir until combined.
  7. Taste and serve: Taste the mixture for seasoning, adding more if preferred, then serve.
A bowl of salsa with cherry tomatoes from the top view.

How to Store the Leftovers?

It’s best to serve homemade salsa with cherry tomatoes the day of, as this condiment tends to get watery as it sits. Therefore, I recommend serving it as-is and draining any excess liquid before plating your sauce.

However, if you need to store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. If necessary, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.

How to Serve?

Pico de gallo with cherry tomatoes is one of the most versatile condiments in my recipe book. Zesty and fresh, this salsa makes a delicious pair with everything from tacos to shrimp.

  • Chips: No one can resist a classic—especially one as simple as this! Serve up your salsa alongside your favorite tortilla chips for the ultimate crowd-ready appetizer, snack, or side dish.
  • Grilled or roasted meat and seafood: If you love grilled meats’ succulent, savory taste, these salsa-friendly recipes are for you! Serve your homemade salsa atop a tender fillet of Grilled Sockeye Salmon or marinated Shrimp Kabobs for a five-star meal perfect for the summer months. You can also add a helping of salsa with my Baked Chicken Kabobs if you’re looking for a tender, healthy meal you can make all year round.
  • Tacos: Want to make an authentic, party-ready Mexican menu with your grape tomato salsa? My Beef Brisket Tacos are packed with savory richness, while my Black Bean Quinoa Tacos recipe is a vegan-friendly and oh-so-delicious alternative.
  • Quinoa or burrito bowls: Few weeknight dinners are as hearty or flavor-packed as a traditional burrito bowl. My Mexican Quinoa (and Instant Pot Mexican Quinoa!) load your favorite fresh, Mexican ingredients into every serving. Or, for a meal better than Chipotle, whip up a Homemade Burrito Bowl that will satisfy your cravings and save money.
  • Eggs: My favorite way to serve a hearty, flavor-packed breakfast is with a side of this light homemade salsa recipe. I love adding this iconic salsa recipe to Mexican breakfast staples like Huevos Rancheros and Mexican Breakfast Casserole.
  • Soups and Chilis: Take your soup game to the next level by adding a dollop of this cherry tomato mixture. This salsa pairs beautifully with soups like Mexican Street Corn Soup and Chicken Tomatillo Soup. It also adds a robust tomato finish to hearty chili recipes like my Quinoa Chili and Easy Chicken Chili.
  • Nachos: No nacho recipe is complete without a helping of salsa. This classic salsa recipe makes a great topping for savory fan favorites like Chicken Nachos and Beef Nachos.

Expert Tips

This salsa recipe with cherry tomatoes is easy for any chef to prepare in a snap. These pro tips will ensure that your sauce comes out effortlessly delectable regardless of your experience level.

  • Don’t skip on draining: To keep your salsa from becoming too watery, it’s essential to let your chopped tomatoes rest and drain before adding them to your salsa mixture. Also, be sure to add the seasoning and lime (or lemon) juice only after you drain the mixture, which will result in a perfectly seasoned salsa.
  • Let it rest: While it is an optional step, if you do have the time, I highly recommend making your salsa a few hours in advance and letting it sit in the fridge. The resting time allows the flavors to marinate and develop into a restaurant-quality salsa recipe.
  • Adjust the texture: Salsas come in dozens of different textures, from chunky to pureed. Because the fineness of your chopping doesn’t affect the overall taste of your condiment, feel free to chop your ingredients according to your preference. I recommend a small chop or a food processor for a saucier texture. For a chunkier salsa, cut your ingredients into larger pieces.
  • Taste for seasoning: Any salsa—whether it’s a cherry tomato pico de gallo or an heirloom tomato salsa—needs salt to bring out the ingredients’ natural flavors. Don’t skimp on salt and pepper when seasoning your salsa to ensure your recipe is as flavorful, fresh, and complex as possible.

FAQs

Can you make salsa out of cherry tomatoes?

Yes! Cherry tomatoes have a bright, tart flavor that exquisitely balances the flavors of other salsa ingredients. Plus, their size makes them easy to chop to your desired thickness, resulting in a perfectly tailored mixture.

Do you need to peel cherry tomatoes for salsa?

When you use cherry tomatoes for salsa, there’s no need to peel your tomatoes before adding them to your blend. Cherry tomatoes have a thin skin, which won’t affect the overall texture of your condiment once mixed.

Can I freeze cherry tomato salsa?

Though you technically can freeze this salsa recipe, I don’t recommend it. Freezer salsa with cherry tomatoes may become mushy and watery, and it tends to lose its flavor the longer it remains in storage. However, if you freeze your salsa, place it in an airtight container before storage and thaw it in the refrigerator overnight or until it reaches your desired consistency. I also suggest draining out any excess liquid and tasting for seasoning before serving.

Can I use this recipe for cherry tomato salsa for canning

Unfortunately, this salsa recipe won’t work for canning. Canning requires that you boil your ingredients (and jars) before transferring them to mason jars, and this recipe only uses fresh and/or roasted ingredients.

Other Fresh Tomato Recipes You Might Also Like:

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

If you try this Cherry Tomato Salsa recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of salsa from cherry tomatoes with chips on the side.
Print

Cherry Tomato Salsa Recipe

This Homemade Cherry Tomato Salsa is the ultimate Mexican party food! This easy recipe is wonderful with chips on the side or to serve as a topping with nachos, tacos, soups, stews & more.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 0 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 36kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 cups cherry tomatoes
  • ½ cup onion roughly chopped
  • 2 cloves garlic roughly chopped
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and roughly chopped
  • ½ cup cilantro chopped
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground pepper

Instructions

Make it by Hand:

  • Place a colander in a bowl and set it aside. Cut up the tomatoes into smaller pieces and place them in the colander. Let the juices drain while you are working on the rest of the ingredients.
  • Drain tomatoes and then transfer them to a medium-sized bowl. Add in the chopped onion, garlic, jalapeno, and cilantro.
  • Drizzle it with lime juice and sprinkle with salt and pepper.
  • Stir to combine. Taste for seasoning and add more if necessary. Serve it with chips on the side.

Food processor version:

  • Place onion, garlic, and jalapeno in a food processor. Pulse 6-7 times to give them a rough chop.
  • Add the cherry tomatoes and process for 10-15 seconds, depending on your preferred chunkiness.
  • Pour the mixture into a colander set over a bowl. Using the back of a spatula, remove as much liquid as you can.
  • Transfer to a medium bowl; add lime juice and seasoning. Stir to combine.

Notes

  • Yield: This recipe yields around 2 cups of salsa that should be good for 4 servings as an appetizer. If you need to serve a crowd you can multiply it as many times as you need. The nutritional values below is per serving.
  • Storage of leftovers: To store your leftover salsa, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for up to three days. When ready to serve, add freshness to the mixture by draining it and adding more tomatoes and extra seasoning.
  • Texture difference: We prefer the method made by hand, but if you are serving this salsa to a large crowd you can use the food processor method. However, please be aware that, while it tastes similar, the version made in the food processor has a more liquidy texture.
  • Roasted Cherry Tomato Salsa: If you prefer to make your salsa with roasted cherry tomatoes, place them on a baking sheet and drizzle them with a tablespoon of olive oil. Roast for 10-12 minutes in a 450-degree F. preheated oven, making sure to flip them halfway through. Let them drain in a colander and follow the rest of the recipe as written.

Nutrition

Calories: 36kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 0.2g | Saturated Fat: 0.03g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.03g | Sodium: 596mg | Potassium: 317mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 728IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cherry-tomato-salsa/feed/ 2
Air Fryer Garlic Bread https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-garlic-bread/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-garlic-bread/#comments Fri, 14 Jul 2023 13:39:14 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68957 With so much bold, warm flavor, it’s no wonder why so many people love making garlic toast in the air…]]>

With so much bold, warm flavor, it’s no wonder why so many people love making garlic toast in the air fryer. This simple recipe has all the robust, toasty flavor of my Roasted Garlic Butter Spread while taking as little time to make as my all-purpose Garlic Butter Sauce. You’ll go head-over-heels for all the delectable recipes you can make with these garlic butter recipes.

Air Fryer Garlic Bread on a plate from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

You can say goodbye to complicated Italian recipes with this super-easy side dish. You only need a handful of ingredients to make air fryer homemade garlic bread.

Ingredients to make garlic bread in air fryer with sliced bread.
  • Bread: During our recipe testing, we found that the best bread for this delicious garlic bread recipe is a French baguette because of its fluffy insides and firm yet crusty exterior. Day-old bread, too, is preferable as it is drier compared to a fresh loaf. However, you can also make garlic bread with white, Italian, or French bread if you don’t have a baguette. If you want to make your own loaf, you could also whip up my favorite crusty bread, aka No-Knead Bread, for an effortless solution. However, remember that the air frying time may need to be modified based on the type of bread you are using. Irrespective of the bread variety, we recommend cutting your bread into ½-inch slices to ensure proper cooking.
  • Butter: Unsalted butter is the best choice for garlic bread because it keeps your side from tasting overly salty when paired with parmesan cheese. However, if you want to make this recipe without cheese, I recommend using salted butter or adding a touch of flaky sea salt or Kosher salt to your butter mixture.
  • Garlic: It’s essential to use finely minced garlic in this recipe to ensure its flavors evenly coat each slice of bread. If you prefer fresh garlic, I recommend using a garlic press (affiliate link) to chop the ingredient into an ultra-fine paste. If you don’t have any fresh garlic in your pantry, you may substitute this ingredient for an equal amount of garlic powder. You could also use Roasted Garlic Cloves instead for a rich, caramelized taste.
  • Parsley: Parsley is essential to giving this dish its herby undertones and a pop of bright color. You can use dried or fresh parsley if you chop it thinly.
  • Shredded parmesan cheese: I usually use shredded parmesan when I make cheesy garlic bread in the air fryer, giving each bite a touch of nutty, rich flavor. However, shaved parmesan or shredded mozzarella cheese would also work.

How to Make Garlic Bread in the Air Fryer?

Preparing homemade garlic bread in an air fryer is a simple way to enjoy warm, perfectly toasted sides every night of the week—or even a quick snack! Plus, it only takes six steps and no lengthy oven time.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat your air fryer to 350 degrees F.
A collage of images showing how to make garlic bread in the air fryer.
  1. Make the garlic butter: In a small bowl, mix the butter, garlic, parsley, and parmesan cheese.
  2. Coat the bread slices: Spread about one teaspoon of the butter mixture onto each slice of bread, covering the entire surface.
  3. Transfer the bread: Arrange the buttered bread slices in the air fryer basket. Make sure they lay in a single layer without any overlap. If all your bread doesn’t fit, you may need to cook them in two batches.
  4. Air fry the garlic toast: Toast the garlic bread in the air fryer for approximately five minutes or until golden brown.
  5. Serve: Serve the toasted garlic bread while still warm.

How to Make Ahead, Store, Freeze, and Reheat?

This recipe for garlic bread in the air fryer is an easy way to simplify your meal prep. Prepare this recipe ahead of time for an easy crowd-ready side, or store your leftover garlic bread to enjoy throughout the week.

  • Make-ahead: To make this recipe ahead of time, make the garlic butter mixture up to one day beforehand and slice your bread into ½-inch slices. Then, store the butter mixture in an airtight container in the fridge and keep the bread slices separately, spreading the pieces with the softened butter just before air frying. If you’re preparing for a dinner party and won’t have time to spread the slices before cooking, you can also coat the bread slices with the butter mixture one day in advance. Then, arrange them in a single layer on a sheet pan, cover them tightly with stretch film or aluminum foil, and store them in the fridge until ready to cook.
  • Storage: Bring your slices to room temperature, place them on a plate in a single layer, tightly cover them with stretch film, and store in the fridge for 3 days. When ready to eat, reheat the garlic bread in the air fryer at 300 degrees F. for 2-3 minutes.
  • Freeze: Bring your slices to room temperature to make frozen garlic bread for later use. Then, place parchment paper between each of the slices to prevent sticking, and store them in an airtight freezer-safe container (or Ziploc bag) in the freezer until ready to reheat.
  • Reheat: There’s no need to defrost your slices when reheating garlic bread in an air fryer. Simply place your frozen bread in a 350-degree F. air fryer for 4-5 minutes or until golden brown.

What to Serve with Air Fried Garlic Bread?

Cooking garlic bread in the air fryer is one of the best ways to ensure a five-star meal any day of the week. This simple collection of recipes will satisfy any craving, from creamy pasta to light salads.

Expert Tips

It’s a cinch to toast French bread in the air fryer. With this expert guide, you’ll enjoy deliciously crisp, heartily flavored garlic bread in no time.

  • Evenly sliced bread: When making air fryer garlic bread with sliced bread, slicing your loaf into evenly thick pieces is imperative. The thickness of your slices will directly affect how long they take to cook., so I recommend cutting ½-inch portions to ensure ideal toasting. 
  • Spread butter evenly: An easy way to give each bite of your garlic bread a delectably bold flavor is to spread your butter mixture over your slices evenly. For best results, only about one teaspoon of butter per slice (granted, you are using French baguette slices), as too much will result in soggy bread.
  • Don’t overcrowd the air fryer: Be sure to arrange your garlic bread in the air fryer in a single layer without any overlap to get evenly browned slices. You may have to cook this recipe in multiple batches if you have extra pieces of bread.
  • Different air fryer brands: How long it takes to air fry garlic bread may change depending on the air fryer you own. We tested this recipe both in Ninja Foodie and Instant Pot air fryers. It took slightly shorter to cook Ninja Foodi garlic bread than its Instant Pot air fryer version. Therefore, we recommend using this recipe as a general guide and watching your slices closely to ensure they’re perfectly golden brown before serving.
  • Keep a close eye on it: Because toasting French bread in an air fryer takes so little time, you must watch your bread slices while they cook to keep them from burning—especially when you add parmesan cheese.

FAQs

Making fresh garlic bread in an air fryer is a beginner-ready recipe that comes together with minimal effort. Below, I’ve answered all your questions about this easy dish, taking the stress out of the process.

Can you air-fry garlic bread?

Yes! Preparing homemade garlic bread in an air fryer is a quick and easy way to ensure robustly flavored, evenly toasted slices any day of the week. And the best part, it is much quicker than making it in the oven.

What is the best time and temperature to cook garlic bread in an air fryer?

I recommend air-frying your garlic bread for about five minutes at 350 degrees F. However, this time may change depending on the thickness of your slices and the brand of your air fryer.

How long to cook garlic bread in an air fryer?

When making garlic bread in an air fryer that’s not frozen, you’ll need about five minutes at 350 degrees F. to give your slices an ideal warmth and crispiness.

How long to reheat garlic bread in an air fryer?

To warm up garlic bread in an air fryer, preheat your air fryer to 300 degrees F. Then, toast your slices for 2-3 minutes or until they turn golden brown.

How long to toast frozen garlic bread in an air fryer?

To cook frozen garlic bread, set your air fryer to 350 degrees F. and cook the slices for 5-7 minutes or until golden brown.

How to cook store bought garlic bread in an air fryer?

Though instructions may vary between brands, it only takes five minutes at 350 degrees F. to air-fry Texas Toast (prepackaged.) However, keep in mind that the timing might slightly change based on the brand you are using. Therefore, we recommend watching your batches closely when making store-bought air-fried garlic bread.

Other Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like

No one can resist the hassle-free, tasty eats possible with an air fryer. If you liked this air fryer garlic toast, here are a few other easy air fryer recipes you might also like.

If you try this Air Fryer Garlic Bread recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fried garlic bread on a plate from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Garlic Bread Recipe (Fresh or Frozen)

Making fresh garlic bread in the air fryer is possibly the easiest and quickest way to treat yourself to a delicious side dish or appetizer. Not to mention, using your air fryer cuts down on the cooking time, allowing you to enjoy your garlic bread in minutes.
Course Bread, Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 5 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 12 slices
Calories 107kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • ¼ cup unsalted butter at room temperature (2 ounces)
  • 5 cloves garlic crushed through a garlic press or finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon dried parsley or chopped fresh parsley
  • ½ cup parmesan cheese grated (optional*)
  • 1 baguette sliced into ½-inch thick slices

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 350 degrees F.
  • Mix the butter, garlic, parsley, and parmesan cheese (if using) in a bowl.
  • Spread the butter mixture evenly onto each slice of bread, approximately 1 teaspoon per slice.
  • Place the garlic toast slices in the air fryer in a single layer, ensuring that they are not overlapping. Depending on the size of your air fryer, if they don’t fit, you may have to air fry them in two batches.
  • Air fry for approximately 5 minutes or until golden brown.
  • Serve immediately while they are still warm.
  • Any leftover browned slices can be stored in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days. You can reheat in the air fryer at 300 degrees F for 2-3 minutes until warm.

Notes

  • Yields: This recipe yields 12 slices of French baguette bread. The nutritional information below is per slice.
  • Bread: You can use any other bread you have on hand. Italian bread, sourdough bread, French bread, and even ciabatta would all work. However, keep in mind that there is a direct correlation between the thickness of bread and air frying time. We recommend slicing in ½-inch slices for the best results. We also recommend day-old bread as it absorbs the garlic-butter mixture better.
  • Parmesan Cheese: If you decide to make this recipe without parmesan cheese, add in 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt into the butter mixture.
  • Garlic: We found that minced fresh garlic was way better than garlic powder. However, the two can be used interchangeably in a pinch. If you do have the time, we recommend trying this recipe with Roasted Garlic or Air Fried Garlic for truly next-level garlic bread.
  • Parsley: If you do not have dried parsley, you can substitute it with fresh, but it should be finely chopped when incorporating it into the butter mixture. Alternatively, you can use other dried or fresh herbs such as thyme, oregano, and rosemary. 
  • Keep in mind that individual air fryer brands may perform differently, so consider this recipe as a starting point and adjust the cook time according to your personal preference.
  • Storage: Bring your slices to room temperature, place them on a plate in a single layer, tightly cover them with stretch film, and store them in the fridge for 3 days. When ready to eat, reheat the garlic bread in the air fryer at 300 degrees F. for 2-3 minutes.
  • Freeze: Bring your slices to room temperature, place parchment paper between each of the slices to prevent sticking, and store them in an airtight Ziploc bag in the freezer until ready to cook.
  • Reheat: There’s no need to defrost your slices before reheating. Simply place your frozen bread in a 350-degree F. air fryer for 4-5 minutes or until golden brown.

Nutrition

Calories: 107kcal | Carbohydrates: 11g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 13mg | Sodium: 197mg | Potassium: 40mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 154IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 77mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-garlic-bread/feed/ 2
Mango Pineapple Salsa https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/ https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/#comments Sat, 10 Jun 2023 17:49:18 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=68053 Preparing mango salsa with pineapple is one of my favorite ways to make a fruity, fresh, and zesty condiment that…]]>

Preparing mango salsa with pineapple is one of my favorite ways to make a fruity, fresh, and zesty condiment that pairs with dozens of dishes. Like my Peach Salsa and Cherry Tomato Salsa, this recipe is delicious as an appetizer, a topping for fish-based mains, or even a side for hearty meats. This dish will be your new summer staple, no matter how you serve it.

Mango pineapple salsa in a bowl with chips on the side from the top view.

Ingredients

This recipe for mango pineapple salsa uses a handful of fresh, healthy ingredients to get its signature fruity taste:

Ingredients for the recipe on a white backdrop with text on each ingredient.
  • Pineapple: Pineapple is essential to give this recipe its sweet, tropical overtones. I recommend using fresh pineapple for the freshest, healthiest taste. You can even add grilled pineapple for extra smoky, caramelized flavors. Canned pineapple will work in a pinch if you don’t have fresh alternatives, but be aware of their added sugar.
  • Mango: Fresh, sweet mangos are the best pick for this fresh pineapple mango salsa. Frozen mango will also work, but thaw it completely before adding it to your recipe.
  • Red onion: Red onion gives this simple salsa a sharp, bold flavor kick. You can also use Mexican Pickled Onions for a tangier, zestier take.
  • Jalapeño pepper: A bit of pepper is the key to giving this mango pineapple jalapeno salsa its classic balance of sweet and spicy flavors. I recommend using seeded jalapeno peppers to give this recipe a little heat, but you can also remove the seeds if you like.
  • Fresh cilantro
  • Fresh Lime juice: I recommend using freshly squeezed lime juice for this easy salsa dish. However, you can also use lime juice from a bottle if you don’t have any fresh limes on hand.
  • Salt

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

  • Green onions: Want to make this tangy salsa a little milder? Use a bit of finely chopped green onions instead of red onions. This easy ingredient substitution is both delicious and colorful.
  • Mint: If you’re not a fan of cilantro, fresh mint makes an excellent substitution, giving this recipe a bright, herby flavor.
  • Avocado: Adding a few chunks of ripe avocado is the best way to add a mild, creamy taste to this fruit salsa.
  • Cherry tomatoes: Transform this simple recipe into pineapple mango pico de gallo by adding a cup of finely chopped cherry tomatoes. This addition will add sharp juiciness to each bite—perfect for tacos!
  • Habanero: To increase the heat level of this recipe, add a little bit of finely chopped habanero peppers. These tiny veggies will give your salsa a bold kick, perfect for spice lovers.

How to Make Mango Pineapple Salsa

Even beginner chefs can prepare pineapple mango jalapeno salsa in a snap! With just four steps and a handful of ingredients, your table will overflow with sweet, zesty, and salty flavors.

A collage of images showing how to make mango salsa.
  1. Add the ingredients: Add the chopped pineapple, mango, red onion, jalapeno, cilantro, lime juice, and salt to a large mixing bowl.
  2. Mix: Stir until you thoroughly combine the ingredients.
  3. Let it rest: Cover the mixed salsa with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes to two hours to combine the flavors.
  4. Serve: Serve the mango pineapple salsa as a condiment or with a bowl of tortilla chips.

How to Make and Ahead and Store?

This fresh fruit salsa is a great recipe for make-ahead meal plans during the summer months.

  • Make ahead: You can make this easy salsa recipe up to 24 hours in advance. Simply store it in an airtight container in the fridge until ready to serve.
  • Store: Transfer your leftover salsa to an airtight container and place it in the refrigerator for up to 2-3 days. When ready to serve, give it a good stir, taste for seasoning, and add more if necessary, as fruit salsa tends to lose its saltiness during storage. This step will ensure your recipe’s flavors are still bold and evenly mixed.

What to Serve with Mango Pineapple Salsa?

It doesn’t matter whether you’re preparing a light Thai lunch or pork chops on the grill. With this delectable collection, you’ll never wonder what to serve with pineapple salsa again.

Mango pineapple salsa for fish over blackened mahi mahi on a plate.
  • Appetizer with chips: One of the easiest, tastiest ways to serve this simple salsa recipe is as an appetizer or a snack with your favorite tortilla chips. Served alongside my Super Easy Guacamole and Corn Salsa, this crowd-pleaser will complete your menu of game-day recipes.
  • On grilled or roasted fish: This mango pineapple salsa for fish is a refreshing, bright combination that will make you feel like you’re at a seaside restaurant. Serve this luscious condiment on top of Cajun Mahi Mahi (as pictured above), Grilled Mahi Mahi or Breaded Fish, and it’ll disappear in minutes.
  • Over chicken: No one can resist the tender, sweet combination of grilled chicken with pineapple salsa. Serve your salsa with grilled or roasted chicken using my succulent recipe for Chicken Breast for an elegant pairing perfect for special occasions and weeknight dinners.
  • Tacos: Take your taco game to the next level by topping your spread with this fruity, Instagram-ready condiment. I recommend serving your salsa with fish tacos—especially shrimp tacos!—to bring out your meat’s fresh, tropical flavors.
  • Rice bowls: Adding a few spoonfuls of this pineapple and mango salsa to your favorite rice bowls is an easy way to add a pop of color and sweetness to them. This simple condiment adds a rich, refreshing taste to dishes like a salmon rice bowl and fish taco rice bowl.
  • Pork chops: Few combinations are as sumptuous, sophisticated, or tasty as serving mango pineapple salsa with sweet-and-savory pork. You can even add a touch of classic outdoor smokiness to your plate by preparing grilled pork chops for the table.
  • Thai recipes: Nothing balances Thai recipes’ savory, spicy, and sweet flavors better than a fruity salsa. Top your favorite dishes, like my Thai Steak Noodle Salad, with this 20-minute condiment, and prepare yourself for a host of compliments to the chef.

Expert Tips

If you want a fresh salsa with vibrant color and the best flavor, these pro tips are a great way to cook like a master chef. Follow this simple guide for the perfect balance of presentation and taste.

  • Ripe fruit is the best: The best mango pineapple salsa begins with sweet, ripe ingredients. If you have difficulty telling which fruits are ripe, purchase pre-cut fruit at the grocery store. Not only will this save time, but it’ll also guarantee that your ingredients are maximally fresh.
  • Finely chopped: When making this salsa, it’s essential that you chop your ingredients into small, bite-sized pieces. Use a sharp knife and cutting board to ensure easy slicing, and avoid using a food processor, as it will likely result in a watery, off-colored mixture.
  • Taste for seasoning and add more: No one wants their salsa to come out bland. I recommend tasting your mixture for seasoning before serving and adding more if necessary. 
  • Let it rest: Let your fruit salsa chill for at least 30 minutes before serving. This extra resting time allows the ingredients to mix flavors and absorb the added seasoning, giving each bite an exquisite balance of fruity, savory taste.

FAQs

What can I substitute mango for in mango salsa?

If you don’t have ripe mangos, papaya or pineapple are easy substitutes that perfectly mimic mangos’ juicy, sweet taste. Plus, no one can say no to tropical salsa!

Can you freeze pineapple mango salsa?

I don’t recommend freezing this condiment, as the temperature change may result in a grainy, unpalatable texture.

Save This Recipe
Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

Other Mango Recipes You Might Like

This mango pineapple salsa recipe explodes with sweet, tangy flavors. These simple recipes are just what you need for more refreshing ways to incorporate mango into your weekday menu.

Mango Pineapple Salsa placed in a bowl with a spoon on the side.
Print

Pineapple Mango Salsa Recipe

This pineapple mango salsa recipe is a delicious fruit salsa that is packed with fresh flavors. Serve it as an appetizer with tortilla chips or as a condiment over blackened or grilled chicken, fish, or pork.
Course Condiment
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
Prep Time 20 minutes
Resting time (optional) 30 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 57kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 cup pineapple peeled, cored, and cut into ¼ inch pieces (5.3 ounces)
  • 1 cup mango peeled and cut into ¼-inch pieces (5.3 ounces)
  • ¼ cup red onion roughly chopped (1 ounce)
  • 1 jalapeno seeded and roughly chopped (1 ounce)
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro roughly chopped
  • 4 tablespoons lime juice freshly squeezed; approximately 2 limes
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt

Optional add ins:

  • ¼ cup red bell pepper roughly chopped

Instructions

  • In a bowl, add pineapple, mango, red onion, jalapeño, cilantro, lime juice, and salt. If using, add in the red pepper too.
  • Stir to combine.
  • Cover with plastic wrap and refrigerate for 30 minutes* or up to 2 hours for the flavors to combine.
  • Serve as a condiment or with your favorite tortilla chips on the side.

Notes

  • Storage: You can store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Ripe and finely chopped: We recommend using fresh ripe fruit that is finely chopped for this fruit salsa.

Nutrition

Calories: 57kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 293mg | Potassium: 176mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 828IU | Vitamin C: 56mg | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 0.3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mango-pineapple-salsa/feed/ 2
Steamed Asparagus https://foolproofliving.com/steamed-asparagus-with-white-bean-and-artichoke-aioli/ https://foolproofliving.com/steamed-asparagus-with-white-bean-and-artichoke-aioli/#comments Sun, 09 Apr 2023 22:34:31 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=7431 We’re huge fans of asparagus here at Foolproof Living. From rich, buttery Pan Sautéed Asparagus to tender-crisp Air Fried Asparagus,…]]>

We’re huge fans of asparagus here at Foolproof Living. From rich, buttery Pan Sautéed Asparagus to tender-crisp Air Fried Asparagus, asparagus recipes are a must in my recipe book. If you prefer to cook veggies in the oven, you could even whip up my healthy yet flavorful Baked Asparagus with just five simple ingredients! These simple veggie sides are just what you need to complete your menu during asparagus season.

Steamed asparagus on a plated garnished with lemon wedges.

Ingredients

Whether you’re making steamed asparagus in a steamer or steaming asparagus in a pan doesn’t matter. You only need one simple ingredient to prepare this nutritious recipe: asparagus! Plus, of course, your favorite seasonings such as butter, a squeeze of lemon juice, and salt & pepper (we’ll cover the seasoning options in detail below.)

Seasoning for steamed asparagus; butter, lemon, and salt and pepper on a marble backdrop.

You may choose any fresh asparagus for this recipe, including green, purple, and white asparagus. 

Keep in mind, too, that the steam time for asparagus directly correlates with the thickness of your stalks—not necessarily the type of asparagus. Therefore, your asparagus steam time may vary depending on the thickness of your spears.

After selecting your asparagus, complete the following steps: 

  1. Rinse it under cool water.
  2. Dry it with a kitchen towel.
  3. Remove the woody ends (1-2 inches from the bottom). You can either snap off these ends with your fingers or line up your asparagus stalks on a cutting board and slice them off as a group. Discard the trims or save them for making veggie stock later.
Person cutting the woody ends of asparagus on a cutting board.

Once prepped, you can cook the vegetable immediately or save it for future use. For more handy tips on storage instructions, check out my simple guide on storing asparagus.

How to Steam Asparagus?

This steamed asparagus recipe comes together with minimal effort and in no time, no matter which method you choose. Select any of these four foolproof cooking styles, and you’ll never have to scramble for side dish ideas again.

With a Steamer Basket

Want to steam fresh asparagus perfectly every time? Learn how to steam asparagus with a steamer basket, and your veggies will come out exquisitely tender without hassle. 

A collage of images showing how to steam asparagus using a steamer basket.
  1. Fill the pot: Select a large pot—one that’s large enough to fit your steamer basket—with a tight-fitting lid. Fill the bottom of the pan with 2-3 inches of water. The water level should reach below the bottom of the steam basket.
  2. Prepare the steamer basket: Place a collapsible steamer basket (affiliate link) inside the pot. Add the lid to the pot and bring the water to a boil.
  3. Steam the asparagus: Place the asparagus spears—cut or whole—inside the basket, put the lid back on the pot, and cook for 4-5 minutes for al dente.
  4. Serve: Carefully remove the asparagus stalks from the steamer basket. Top with your desired seasonings, then serve.

On the Stove

Steaming asparagus on the stove is one of the most hassle-free methods of perfectly cooking your veggies. Using this method, you can still get similar results to steaming asparagus in a steamer without having to own yet another kitchen gadget.

A collage of photos showing how to steam asparagus spears on the stove in a skillet.
  1. Prepare the skillet: Fill a large skillet with just enough water to cover its bottom. You shouldn’t have to use more than a cup of water.
  2. Steam asparagus in the pan: Add the asparagus to the skillet, put the lid on, and bring the water to a boil over medium-high heat. Pan-steam the asparagus for 5-6 minutes or until tender.
  3. Serve: Transfer the pan-steamed asparagus to a serving plate.

In the Microwave

Curious about how to steam asparagus without a steamer? Follow this steamed asparagus recipe that I learned from the folks over at The Kitchn! The steps below will have you steaming asparagus in the microwave in no time. 

A collage of images showing how to steam asparagus in the microwave.
  1. Wet the paper towels: Wet four sheets of paper towels with ¼ cup water. Gently squeeze each sheet to remove excess water. Your paper towels should be damp—not soaking wet—by the end of this step.
  2. Assemble: Stack all four paper towel sheets on top of one another, then arrange the asparagus stalks in a single layer. This step is optional but if you want season the vegetables with salt with a little bit of salt (about ¼ teaspoon.)
  3. Wrap: Roll the paper towels with the asparagus inside into a semi-tight bundle. When finished wrapping, your bundle should have several layers of asparagus and paper towels inside.
Person placing asparagus in microwave with paper towel.
  1. Cook asparagus in the microwave: Place the asparagus in the microwave with the paper towel wrap. Cook on high for 3 minutes.
  2. Check for doneness: Remove the microwave-steamed asparagus bundle from the microwave, being careful of its heat. Gently unroll the bundle and pierce one of the spears with a paring knife to check for doneness. If it needs more time, re-roll the bundle and steam the asparagus in the microwave in 1-minute increments until it reaches your desired doneness.

In a Rice Cooker

If you love easy kitchen shortcuts, you’ll adore this foolproof method for fresh steamed asparagus. Put your rice cooker to work and get tender, nutritious spears every time.

A collage of images showing how to steam asparagus spears in a rice cooker.
  1. Prepare the rice cooker: Fill the inner pot of your rice cooker (I own an Aroma Rice Cooker – affiliate link) with 1½ cups of water. Place the steamer tray on top.
  2. Arrange the asparagus: Place asparagus stalks on top of the steamer tray.
  3. Steam the spears: Close the lid, then turn on your rice cooker. Select the steam setting and set your timer for 10 minutes. Because the countdown timer doesn’t start until the water inside boils, even though the actual cook time is only 10 minutes, it takes about 20-25 minutes to steam asparagus in a rice cooker.
  4. Remove the steamer basket: After cooking, open the lid and carefully remove the steaming basket using a tong or oven mitts.
  5. Serve: Transfer the steamed fresh asparagus to a serving platter, season as desired, and serve.

How Long Does it Take to Steam Asparagus?

Wondering how much time it takes to steam asparagus? The quick answer is that this simple recipe usually takes 3-6 minutes to prepare. However, remember that these times are for one bunch of medium-thick spears (about ½-inch diameter).

Below is a quick guide for steaming time for asparagus to an al dente tenderness. If your stalks are different thicknesses, use the following tips:

  • If you select thinner stalks, reduce the cooking time by 1-2 minutes. 
  • If you choose thicker stalks, add 1-2 minutes of cooking time to the recipe.
Steaming MethodAsparagus Steam Time
Using a steamer basket4-5 minutes
On The Stove in a Pan5-6 minutes
In the microwave (high heat setting)3 minutes
In a rice cooker (using the steamer insert)20-25 minutes 

How to Check for Asparagus Doneness

There are two easy ways to check whether your asparagus is ready to eat:

A person checking doneness by inserting a knife into a spear.
  • Knife method: To check the doneness of your asparagus, insert a paring knife into a spear. If the blade enters without extra effort, your asparagus doesn’t need more time. You may also cook your asparagus to whatever tenderness level you prefer.
  • Visual cues: You can also assess whether your asparagus needs more or less time by its color. Perfectly steamed asparagus should have beautiful, fresh green hues. If your spears come out in more of a green-olive color, they’re likely overcooked.

How to Season Steamed Asparagus?

If you love to try new flavor combinations, you’ll enjoy the endless seasoning options that are available to you. The list below includes zesty lemon juice, creamy salad dressing, roasted garlic, and more!

  • Butter: Rich, decadent, and full-bodied, butter is just what you need to bring this easy dish to life. Drizzle your asparagus with two tablespoons of melted butter, or kick it up a notch with my robust and creamy Roasted Garlic Butter.
  • Extra Virgin Olive oil: A small drizzle of olive oil is an easy way to give your delicious asparagus subtle yet mouthwatering complexity. Plus, olive oil makes it much easier to season steamed asparagus with other herbs and spices.
  • Salt & pepper: Who can resist a classic? Always stocked in my spice cabinet, a pinch of sea or kosher salt and a dash of freshly ground black pepper are my go-to seasonings for this steamed asparagus recipe.
  • Garlic: Give this side dish bold, earthy notes by topping steamed asparagus with garlic. Along with a drizzle of olive oil, you can use freshly minced garlic, oven-roasted garlic, air-fried garlic, lightly sautéed garlic, or even garlic powder in this asparagus recipe.
  • Parmesan cheese: Nothing complements steamed asparagus’s grassy, tender taste better than nutty, rich parmesan cheese. Sprinkle your freshly steamed asparagus with one tablespoon of olive oil, 2-3 tablespoons of parmesan cheese, and a dash of black pepper, and voila! An elegant side perfect for any occasion.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh parsley and basil are an iconic seasoning for steamed asparagus. Earthy, fragrant, and visually stunning, these herbs will give every bite a sumptuous flavor.
  • A squeeze of fresh lemon: Bring every bite of your vegetable to life with a light spritz of fresh lemon juice. Brilliant and bright, lemon wedges will also give your asparagus spears a gorgeous presentation.
  • Your favorite salad dressings: To give your asparagus maximum flavor, salad dressing is the way to go. Yogurt Dressing and Ranch Yogurt Dressing are two easy recipes with creamy, tangy richness. Or, try a lighter flavor profile with my fan-favorite recipes for Lemon Salad Dressing and Lemon Mustard Dressing.
  • Hollandaise sauce: You only need four ingredients and two minutes to make this buttery, luxurious topping. Serve this sophisticated asparagus dish at Easter brunch or on busy weeknights. You’ll be licking your plate clean, no matter the time of day.

How to Store, Freeze, and Thaw?

Steaming fresh asparagus is the perfect dish for easy meal prep. Store it for simple lunch salads throughout the week, or freeze it for meals months in advance—the choice is yours!

  • Storage: Before storing, let your steamed asparagus cool completely. Once room temperature, place it in an airtight container in the fridge for 3-4 days.
  • Freezing: I recommend flash-freezing asparagus to ensure it maintains its texture. First, let your steamed spears cool completely. Then, lay them in a single layer on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper. Place the baking tray in the freezer until the asparagus hardens. Once frozen, transfer the stalks to an airtight container, such as a Ziploc bag, and remove as much air as possible. You may then store your asparagus in the freezer for up to a month.
  • Thawing: To thaw your frozen asparagus, take it out of the freezer one to two hours before serving.

How to Serve?

This recipe for steamed asparagus is as versatile as it is delicious. Serve it warm or cold, with a protein or on a salad, or even on its own for a side dish the whole family will love.

  • As a side dish: Light and healthy, steamed asparagus perfectly balance the hearty taste of chicken, beef, pork, and turkey recipes. You can even serve it with morning eggs to start your day with vitamins, antioxidants, and fiber.
  • Make it a part of a spring salad: What pairs better with spring-fresh salads than more delicious vegetables? Mix your steamed asparagus into irresistibly fresh recipes, like my Asparagus Salad or Boston Lettuce Salad, for a light lunch or a crisp vegetarian main course.
  • As a topping: Steamed asparagus makes an ideal topping for dozens of nutritious, filling recipes. Add it to Savory Steel-Cut Oatmeal for a hint of grassy flavor, or layer it atop Asparagus Tart for an earthy, creamy side you’ll serve at every get-together.

Expert Tips

It doesn’t matter whether you prefer preparing your asparagus in a steamer or making asparagus steamed in the microwave. Here are a few pro tips to help you get tasty and tender asparagus every time.

  • Woody ends: Don’t skip trimming off the asparagus spears’ bottom 1-2 inches. These tough ends have a rigid, woody texture and don’t taste good.
  • Cut or not: For any of my four cooking methods, you may steam your asparagus spears whole or cut them into smaller, 2-inch pieces.
  • Using rice cooker and microwave: Please keep in mind that every rice cooker and microwave is different, so I’d encourage you to look at their user manuals before steaming asparagus. Take my recipe instructions as a place to start and adjust them as necessary, especially when it comes to steaming time.
  • Ice water bath: If I am serving y steamed asparagus right away, there is no need to set up an ice water bath. However, if you are planning to serve it later, it is a good idea to fill a bowl with water and ice and place the freshly steamed asparagus stalks in there to stop the cooking. This way it will continue to maintain its bright green color and still be fork-tender when you are ready to serve.

FAQs

There’s no secret to how to steam fresh asparagus. This handy guide will answer all your questions, from how long to steam asparagus to the difference between cooking methods.

Is it better to boil or steam asparagus?

My favorite way to cook asparagus is to steam it instead of boiling it. When you boil asparagus, the vegetables lose some of their nutrients in the water. By contrast, steamed asparagus retains its nutritional value while achieving a warm, tender texture.

How do you tell if steamed asparagus is done?

You can tell asparagus is done using one of two ways. One method is to insert a paring knife into an asparagus spear and see if the spear is tender enough to allow easy insertion. You can also use visual cues to tell. Appropriately steamed asparagus should have a bright green color, while overcooked asparagus is a lighter green with olive undertones.

How do you steam asparagus if you don’t have a steamer?

If you don’t have a steamer, you can also use the other three other methods I detail above: on the stove, in the microwave, or in a rice cooker.

How is steaming asparagus different than blanching?

Unlike steaming, blanching is a form of par-cooking in which you cook asparagus directly in boiling water for 5-6 minutes before immediately transferring it to an ice bath. By contrast, steaming entails cooking asparagus in the steam of boiling water for 5-6 minutes.

Other Asparagus Recipes You Might Like

One bite of this perfectly steamed asparagus, and you’ll be longing for asparagus recipes every night of the week. Satisfy all your garden-fresh cravings with these easy side dishes.

Steamed asparagus on a plate garnished with lemon slices.
Print

Steamed Asparagus Recipe

Steamed asparagus is probably the easiest and most versatile side dish you can make. Below is 4 different methods you can steam asparagus; Using a steamer basket, on the stove, in the microwave, and in a rice cooker.
Course Vegan side dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 1 Bunch
Calories 91kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 bunch of asparagus rinsed
  • Water

Instructions

  • Trim the ends: Snap off the woody ends of the asparagus spears by holding the ends and bending them until they break naturally. Or, if you want to do it faster, you can line them on a cutting board and trim an inch (or two) off the bottom using a knife.

Using a Steamer Basket:

  • Prepare the pot: Fill the bottom of a large pot (one that is large enough to accommodate your steamer basket) with a tight-fitting lid with two to three inches of water. The water level should be below the bottom of the steamer basket.
  • Assemble the steamer basket: Place a collapsible steamer basket inside. Put the lid on and bring the water to a boil.
  • Add the asparagus spears: Place the asparagus stalks inside, put the lid back on, and cook for 4-5 minutes for al dente.
  • Season and serve: Carefully remove steamed asparagus stalks from the steamer basket and season it with your favorite seasonings.

In a Pan on the Stove Top:

  • Prepare the skillet: Fill a large (10 or 12-inch) skillet with water just enough to cover the bottom of it. No more than 1/2 cup.
  • Cook: Add the asparagus, put the lid on, and bring it to a boil over medium-high heat. Let it steam for 5-6 minutes or until tender. I use kitchen tongs to turn them a few times to ensure that they are cooking evenly.
  • Serve: Transfer them onto a plate and season as you wish.

In the Microwave:

  • Prepare the paper towels: Wet 4 sheets of paper towels using ¼ cup water. Gently squeeze each sheet of paper towel to remove excess water. They should be dampened instead of soaking wet.
  • Assemble: Stack all four sheets on top of each other and spread the asparagus spears on top in a single layer. Season with salt.
  • Wrap: Roll the paper towels into a bundle with asparagus spears, forming layers of asparagus and paper towels throughout. It should be a semi-tight bundle more so than a loose one.
  • Microwave: Place the bundle into the microwave and cook on high for 3 minutes.
  • Check for doneness: Remove the asparagus bundle from the microwave. Being very careful (it is hot!!), unroll the bundle and pierce one of the spears with a pairing knife to check for doneness. If it needs more time, roll it again and microwave for 1-minute increments until it is cooked to your liking.

In a Rice Cooker:

  • Prepare the rice cooker: Fill the inner pot of your rice cooker with 1 ½ cups of water. Place the provided steamer tray on top.
  • Add the asparagus: Place the asparagus on top. If the full stalks don't fit, you can cut them into smaller pieces.
  • Steam: Close the lid. Turn on the rice cooker. Select the steam setting and set the timer to 20 minutes. Please remember that the countdown timer does not start until the water inside the cooker comes to a boil.
  • Remove from the rice cooker: When the cooking time is completed (my rice cooker beeps), open the lid and carefully remove the steamer basket using a tong or kitchen mittens.
  • Serve: Transfer the steamed asparagus to a serving platter. Season as desired before serving.

Notes

  • Steaming Time: The time suggested for steaming using every one of these methods is for medium-sized asparagus (about ½-inch diameter) to an al dente tenderness. If your stalks are different thicknesses, use the following tips:
    • If you select thinner stalks, reduce the cooking time by 1-2 minutes. 
    • If you choose thicker stalks, add 1-2 minutes of cooking time to the recipe.
  • Seasoning ideas:
    Below are a few seasoning ideas that you can use to season your steamed asparagus after it is cooked:
    • Melted butter and salt and pepper: Drizzle steamed asparagus with 2 tablespoons of melted butter and sprinkle with salt and pepper. 
    • Extra virgin olive oil, garlic, lemon juice, and salt and pepper: Mix together 2 tablespoons of olive oil, 1 small minced garlic, and 1 tablespoon of lemon juice with ½ teaspoon salt, and ¼ teaspoon pepper in a small bowl. Drizzle it over the steamed asparagus.
    • Olive oil, parmesan cheese, and black pepper: Drizzle asparagus with 1 tablespoon of olive oil and sprinkle it with 2-3 tablespoons of parmesan cheese. Finish it off with freshly cracked pepper. Give it a gentle toss and serve.
  • The method for steaming asparagus is adapted from The Kitchn.

Nutrition

Calories: 91kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Sodium: 9mg | Potassium: 916mg | Fiber: 10g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 3429IU | Vitamin C: 25mg | Calcium: 109mg | Iron: 10mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/steamed-asparagus-with-white-bean-and-artichoke-aioli/feed/ 8
Kale Chips with Nutritional Yeast https://foolproofliving.com/cheesy-oven-roasted-kale-chips/ https://foolproofliving.com/cheesy-oven-roasted-kale-chips/#comments Fri, 03 Feb 2023 20:48:37 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=5103 Short on time? If you have an air fryer, be sure to also try our Air Fryer Kale Chips recipe,…]]>

Short on time? If you have an air fryer, be sure to also try our Air Fryer Kale Chips recipe, which takes less than 5 minutes to make from start to finish.

These homemade kale chips are my favorite way to curb an afternoon salt craving, and they couldn’t be easier to throw together. If you find yourself grabbing for the crunchy, salty, savory snacks throughout the day, you’ll be amazed at how these vegan cheesy kale chips are a great way to replace a bag of chips or pretzels. 

Kale Chips with nutritional yeast after they are baked on a sheet pan.

Not to mention, having your choice of seasoning for kale chips (more on that below) gives you unlimited options of flavors each time you make them. So, go ahead, make your own kale chips, and enjoy a great snack that happens to be good for you.

Ingredients

This quick and easy recipe for kale chips with nutritional yeast requires only a few ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe are placed in bowls from the top view.
  • Kale: Curly kale or lacinato kale (aka dinosaur kale) would both work in this recipe. If you are new to buying kale, be sure to check out our guide on the different varieties of kale.
  • Oil: I recommend using avocado oil, olive oil, or coconut oil. You can even use tahini (sesame paste), which will pair beautifully with the nutritional yeast. Though it is important to thoroughly whisk your tahini before massaging it into the kale.
  • Nutritional yeast: Nutritional yeast is the ingredient that gives these vegan kale chips their great cheesy flavor. The cheesy-tasting cousin to baker’s yeast, nutritional yeast is rich in nutrients. It is mostly used in place of cheese in vegan recipes (such as this vegan nacho cheese sauce) mainly because it tastes very similar to parmesan cheese. In this cheesy kale chips recipe, it is the savory element that makes them extra delicious. You can often find it in the healthy section of the store or order it online (affiliate link.)

Seasonings for Kale Chips:

The best part of this recipe is that it is incredibly versatile; you can easily make it your own by adding a variety of seasonings. Here are a few options:

  • A combination of ½ teaspoon of garlic powder and onion powder would not only pair well with the cheesy qualities of nutritional yeast but also enhance their umami flavors.
  • You can opt for a  Mexican flair by adding a sprinkle of ground cumin, chili powder, and even cayenne pepper for some heat.
  • Sprinkle it with some toasted sesame seeds or Everything But The Bagel seasoning for an extra savory punch. And, of course, you can also finish it with a sprinkle of sea salt to help bring all the flavors together.

How to make kale with nutritional yeast?

The steps of this vegan cheese kale chips recipe are simple and only take a few minutes. 

A collage of images showing how to make kale chips.
  1. Prepare the kale: Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F before you begin prepping the ingredients. Rinse a fresh bunch of kale and tear it into small pieces. Dry them in a salad spinner as much as you can. Alternatively, you can spread them on a sheet pan lined with a kitchen towel and gently pat them dry with a sheet of paper towel.
  2. Mix: Lightly massage kale with oil, nutritional yeast, and any of the kale chip seasonings of your choice in a large bowl. 
Homemade kale chips on a sheet pan before and after they are baked.
  1. Prep for baking: Spread the kale on a large sheet pan in a single layer. This is an important step for achieving crispy kale chips, so if needed, feel free to use two separate baking sheets.
  2. Bake: Bake in the preheated oven for 5 minutes. Remove from the oven, gently flip the kale leaves and bake for another 5-7 minutes keeping a close eye on it. If you are baking two sheets at the same time, be sure to rotate them as well. 

How to make ahead and store leftovers?

  • Make Ahead: Most of the prep time involved in this recipe is the cleaning and preparing of the kale to make the chips. The good thing is that you can easily wash, cut, and store kale in the refrigerator, so it takes just a few minutes to put it all together. If you are new to prepping kale, be sure to check out our guide on storing kale.
  • Store: I’d be surprised if you have leftover kale chips. Truthfully, these crunchy kale chips are best on the day they are made. However, if you do wish to store them, wait until they cool fully, then keep them in an airtight container or a paper bag large enough that they won’t break. They should be good for up to 2 days.

Expert Tips:

Having been making these cheesy vegan kale chips for years, I learned a thing or two. Here are my tips for making the best baked kale chips:

  • Dry kale thoroughly. Take the time to dry the kale thoroughly. While it may sound like an unnecessary step, removing the excess moisture is an important step for getting that addictive crispy texture. Plus, doing so ensures that the nutritional yeast mixture will stick to each piece of kale.
  • Tear or Cut the kale into equally sized pieces. Make sure to tear or cut the raw kale pieces roughly equal in size. This will help them bake evenly and prevent browning.
  • Massage the oil into the kale. Tossing kale with oil and nutritional yeast is an option, but I recommend giving it a gentle massage to ensure that they are distributed evenly throughout. If you are new to it, be sure to check out our quick guide on how to massage kale.
  • Low-temperature oven: Baking kale leaves at a low oven temp is a key step for crispy chips. Low and slow is a safer option for getting evenly baked kale chips with a crispy texture.
  • Watch it closely. We highly recommend keeping a close eye on the kale chips after the 10-minute mark. Since all ovens behave differently, you may have to rely on visual cues to decide whether or not you need the extra few minutes. If it is nice and crisp, it is time to pull it out. If the leaves are still on the softer side, give a minute or two for them to get crisp. Though please be aware that if you leave them in the oven for too long, they will turn brown and burn.

FAQs

Does making kale chips destroy the nutrients?

Surprisingly, when baking kale, very minimal nutrients are cooked off, making it a more nutritious alternative to other salty snacks such as potato chips, pretzels or tortilla chips.

How do you keep kale chips crispy?

The secret to keeping kale chips crispy is to let them cool completely before storing them. We also recommend storing them in a large enough container so they won’t break.

Other Kale Recipes You Might Enjoy

If you love kale or are using kale to add more leafy greens to your diet, here are a few more must-try kale recipes:

If you try this Homemade Kale Chips recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

kale chips in a bowl from the top view.
Print

Kale Chips with Nutritional Yeast Recipe

These Kale Chips are flavored with nutritional yeast for a cheesy yet vegan and healthy snack. Flavored with nutritional yeast, this easy and quick-to-make kale snack recipe is guaranteed to be your next movie night treat. Perfectly crispy, this kid-friendly snack is a great way to sneak some greens into your diet. Paleo, whole30 & gluten-free diet-friendly tool!
Course Healthy Snacks
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 2 cups
Calories 86kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 bunch fresh kale (curly kale) (8 oz. with stems), about 4-5 cups
  • 2 teaspoons olive oil or avocado oil or coconut oil
  • 2 tablespoons nutritional yeast plus more for sprinkling
  • ¼ teaspoon Kosher salt

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 300 degrees F. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper and set aside.
  • Rinse kale under cold water, remove stems, and tear each leaf into bite-size pieces. It is best if they are (roughly) equal in size to help with even roasting in the oven.
  • Using a salad spinner, dry the leaves as much as possible. Alternatively, you can spread them on a sheet pan lined with a kitchen towel and gently pat them dry. Transfer the kale leaves to a large mixing bowl.
  • Drizzle with oil and sprinkle with nutritional yeast and salt. Lightly massage to ensure each leaf is coated with the oil and nutritional yeast.
  • Transfer kale to the parchment-lined baking sheet. Spread them on an even layer making sure that they are not overlapping. You can grab a second baking sheet or bake it in two batches if needed.
  • Bake in the oven for 7 minutes. Remove from the oven, gently flip each piece of kale, and bake for another 5-7 minutes. Towards the end, they should be crisp but not browned.
  • Remove from the oven and let it cool for 1-2 minutes. Serve with an additional sprinkling of nutritional yeast on top.

Notes

  • Dry kale thoroughly. Take the time to dry the kale thoroughly. While it may sound like an unnecessary step, removing the excess moisture is important for getting that addictive crispy texture. Plus, doing so ensures that the nutritional yeast mixture will stick to each piece of kale.
  • Tear kale into equally-sized pieces. Make sure to tear or cut the kale leaves roughly equal in size. This will help them bake evenly and prevent browning.
  • Watch it closely. We highly recommend keeping a close eye on the kale chips after the 10-minute mark. Since all ovens behave differently, you may have to rely on visual cues to decide whether or not you need the extra few minutes. If it is nice and crisp, it is time to pull it out. If the leaves are still on the softer side, give a minute or two for them to get crisp. Though please be aware that if you leave them in the oven for too long, they will turn brown and burn.
  • Storage: While we think that these kale chips are best on the day they are made, you can store them to enjoy later. To do so, bring them to room temperature and store them in an airtight container or a paper bag large enough that they won’t break. They should be good for up to 2 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 86kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 5g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 325mg | Potassium: 376mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 6494IU | Vitamin C: 61mg | Calcium: 165mg | Iron: 2mg

]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/cheesy-oven-roasted-kale-chips/feed/ 6
Air Fryer Kale Chips https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-kale-chips/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-kale-chips/#respond Thu, 02 Feb 2023 20:55:07 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=64342 It’s no secret that we love kale here at Foolproof Living. Made from my favorite superfood, kale chips in the…]]>

It’s no secret that we love kale here at Foolproof Living. Made from my favorite superfood, kale chips in the air fryer are one of my go-to snacks. That’s why I have countless other tasty kale recipes in my recipe book! 

For a light lunch or nutritious side, Avocado Kale Salad and Kale Quinoa Salad are the perfect recipes for busy weekdays. Or, if you want your kale on the go, my Pineapple Kale Smoothie uses only five ingredients to start your morning with a sweet energy boost.

Crispy pieces of air-fried kale in a bowl from the top view.

Ingredients You’ll Need

To make kale in the air fryer, you only need three simple ingredients:

Ingredients for air frying kale in bowls from the top view.
  • Kale: When selecting among types of kale for this recipe, I recommend choosing either curly kale or lacinato kale. Curly kale is available in most grocery stores, making it a go-to for crispy kale chips. Lacinato kale—also known as dinosaur kale—is more delicate, so it will cook more quickly.
  • Oil: Olive oil, coconut oil, or avocado oil will work in this air fryer kale chips recipe. If you want less oil, you can spray the leaves lightly with oil spray. You may also use well-stirred tahini to give your healthy kale chips an earthy, savory flavor.
  • Salt: To bring out the snackable flavor of your air fry kale chips, I recommend using sea salt, kosher salt, or garlic salt.

Kale Chips Seasoning Ideas

  • Ranch seasoning: You don’t need to run to the grocery store to make ranch kale chips in the air fryer. You can easily make it at home. This Homemade Ranch Seasoning calls for ¼ teaspoon each of dried dill, dried parsley (or chives), garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and black pepper.
  • Cheese: Give your air fry kale a rich, gooey flavor by sprinkling it with your favorite cheese. For vegan cheese, use two teaspoons of nutritional yeast. Or, top your kale with one tablespoon of parmesan cheese for savory, nutty undertones.
  • BBQ seasoning: If you count barbecue sauce as one of your favorite seasonings, try this Homemade Barbeque Seasoning. Simply mix ¼ teaspoon of brown sugar, paprika, chili powder, garlic powder, onion powder, salt, and black pepper. You can even add a kick of spice by adding a pinch of cayenne pepper or red pepper flakes on top of the kale.
  • Everything But the Bagel seasoning: Robust and garlicky, Everything But the Bagel seasoning (affiliate link) makes an excellent addition to seasoned kale. However, if you don’t have this seasoning on hand, toasted sesame seeds make a great substitute—especially if you massage your kale with tahini!

How to Prepare Kale for Chips?

Following these simple steps, you don’t need to stress about kale prep time. From cutting kale to cleaning and storing kale, you’ll make kale chips in the air fryer in no time.

  • Wash and dry kale: Wash your raw kale leaves under cold water. To dry, line a baking sheet with paper towels, place the wet leaves on top, and pat them dry with more paper towels. You can also use a salad spinner to dry your kale if you want to avoid using extra towels.
  • Remove stems: Using a cutting board and a sharp paring knife, remove the stems of your kale. Fold the kale leaves in half, so the stem lies at one end, and then slice along the stem to separate the leaves. Or, pull the stem through one closed fist to detach the leaves without using a knife.
  • Tear the kale: Once de-stemmed, tear your leaves into bite-sized pieces. Try to keep your pieces of kale as equal as possible to ensure even cooking.

How to Make Kale Chips in Air Fryer?

If you like healthy eating and have an air fryer, this easy kale recipe is just what you need. Follow these hassle-free steps, and you can prepare kale in the air fryer in just ten minutes.

  1. Prepare the air fryer: Preheat your air fryer to 375 degrees F.
A person showing how to make kale chips in the air fryer from the top view.
  1. Mix the ingredients: Add the fresh kale leaves, olive oil, and salt to a large mixing bowl.
  2. Massage the kale: Using your hands, lightly massage the kale such that you evenly coat each leaf with olive oil. For more detailed instructions on this step, check out my guide on how to massage kale
  3. Arrange in the air fryer basket: Transfer the massaged kale pieces to the air fryer basket. Spread the leaves in a single layer, being sure not to overcrowd them. I recommend frying your kale leaves in batches to make crispy kale in the air fryer.
  4. Air fry the kale: Air fry the arranged kale leaves for 3-5 minutes, flipping them halfway during the process.

How to Make Ahead and Store Leftovers?

You won’t be able to get enough of these air fried kale chips once you give it a go. Here is how I make it ahead and store leftovers to have this flavorful afternoon snack ready whenever a craving strikes:

  • Make ahead: For the crunchiest, best results, I recommend putting your kale in the air fryer on the day you want to enjoy it. However, you can prepare your kale leaves (the part of this recipe that takes the most amount of time) in advance by following my tips on how to store kale. First, wash your kale in cold water, remove the stem, and dry the leaves. Once dry, lay 2-3 kale leaves per paper towel and roll them into a sort of towel-kale cannoli. Place the rolled kale in a plastic storage bag and store it in the fridge. When ready to use, remove the kale from the refrigerator, massage the leaves, and air fry as usual. I recommend using stored kale within 2-3 days.
  • Store: For maximum crunchiness, I prefer to eat homemade kale chips on the day I cook them. However, storing kale chips is an easy way to fit healthy vitamins into your diet throughout the week. Simply place your kale chips in a paper bag or a paper towel-lined airtight container large enough so that the crispy leaves will not break. Your chips will stay fresh for up to two days.
A person holding an air-fried kale chip from the top view.

Expert Tips

It doesn’t matter whether you’re a master chef or new to the air fryer game. This air fryer kale recipe will come out perfectly crisp every time with these foolproof suggestions.

  • Dry kale leaves thoroughly: Drying your kale leaves is the key to getting crispy air fryer chips. I recommend using a salad spinner or laying your washed kale on a paper towel-lined sheet pan for complete dryness. Just don’t let your kale sit out for too long, as the leaves will lose their firmness.
  • Lightly massage kale to coat them with oil: A light, even oil coating is necessary to give your kale chips sufficient crunch. For this reason, it’s essential that you gently massage your leaves in the oil for 30-40 seconds before adding them to the air fryer.
  • Arrange leaves in a single layer: For proper cooking, it’s crucial to arrange your kale leaves in a single layer in your air fryer basket. Overcrowding will prevent the chips from crisping up evenly. Remember that you’ll likely have to cook your kale in batches to avoid overcrowding.
A person placing a rack over pieces of kale in an air fryer.
  • Cover chips with another rack while cooking: Due to hot air circulation, kale tends to fly around in the air fryer during the cooking process. Covering each batch with an air fryer rack or another basket will keep your kale chips in place.
  • Check after three minutes: It doesn’t take long to air fry kale, so you must keep a close eye on it to avoid overcooked chips. After three minutes of cook time, checking each batch will help keep your kale from burning.
  • Play with seasoning ideas: One of the best parts about these easy air fryer kale chips is how simple it is to try different flavor combinations. It doesn’t matter if you’re looking for a savory, herby, or cheesy flavor. Experimenting with kale chip seasonings is a great way to add creativity to your kitchen.

FAQs

There’s no need to stress out about air frying kale. Whether you want to know about air fryer kale chips’ nutrition information or how to make crispy kale in the air fryer, this FAQ has all you need.

Can you air fry kale chips?

Definitely! Making kale chips in an air fryer is one of the easiest snacks in my recipe book. Good for weight loss, dietary restrictions, and cost-effectiveness, air-fried kale chips come together in less than ten minutes using any air fryer brand. (We tested this recipe in a Ninja Air Fryer and Instant Vortex Air Fryer, but any kind should work!)

Are kale chips better in the oven or air fryer?

Kale chips are a delicious snack whether you make them in an oven or an air fryer. The only difference is that cooking them in the air fryer is quicker, though you’ll have to cook them in several batches. By contrast, the oven will require a longer cook time, but you can make your kale chips in a single batch.

How do you keep kale chips so crunchy?

To get your air fryer kale chips as crunchy as possible, dry them thoroughly before massaging them with oil. Then, keep a close eye on them during the air frying process to ensure they crisp up without burning.

Are kale chips healthy?

Yes! Kale chips are one of my favorite healthy snack recipes because they contain a fraction of the fat of regular potato chips and retain their nutritional value during the air frying process. Kale is high in vitamins A, B, and C and has tons of fiber and antioxidants. As an added bonus, these air fryer kale chips are keto, vegan, gluten-free, Whole30, low-carb, and low-calorie!

Can you air fry frozen kale?

Yes, you can air fry frozen kale by frying the frozen pieces for 7-8 minutes at 375 degrees F. When using this method, I recommend placing smaller pieces of kale in your basket to avoid overcrowding, as frozen kale will expand in the hot air. Also, remember that fresh kale tends to result in crunchier chips.

Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Like

Kale chips from the air fryer are a healthy, crunchy snack that’s as satisfying as it is tasty. After trying out these other delicious recipes, your air fryer will be your new favorite appliance.

If you try this Air Fryer Kale Chips recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A bowl of baked kale leaves shown from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Kale Chips Recipe

These Air Fryer Kale Chips are a fun, crispy, and nutritious snack that's ready in about 10 minutes. They're vegan, gluten-free, keto, and low-calorie, too, so you can munch on them guilt-free. Sprinkle these crunchy chips with your favorite seasoning as a great way to get in your veggies for the day!
Course Snack
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 7 minutes
Cook Time 3 minutes
Total Time 10 minutes
Servings 2 cups
Calories 121kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 5 cups kale (1 bunch of kale) rinsed, spin-dried, torn into smaller pieces
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer: Preheat air fryer to 375 degrees F.
  • Add the ingredients to a bowl: Place kale leaves, olive oil, and salt in a large mixing bowl.
  • Massage the kale: Lightly massage the kale, ensuring all leaves are coated with the oil.
  • Place in the air fryer: Transfer the kale to the air fryer basket and spread them in a single layer, making sure not to overcrowd them. It is best to air-fry kale leaves in batches for optimum crispiness.
  • Air fry the kale: Air fry for 3-4 minutes, turning them halfway through the air frying process. Keep a close eye on them around the 3-minute mark to prevent over cooking.

Notes

  • Can I air fry frozen kale? Yes, you can. Frozen kale takes about 7-8 minutes. Keep in mind, though, that kale expands as it air fries, so it’s important not to overcrowd the air fryer basket. Additionally, during our recipe testing, we found that kale chips made with fresh kale were crispier than its version made with frozen kale.
  • You may need to cover kale with another rack while cooking: Due to hot air circulation, the fragile and light kale leaves tend to fly around in the air fryer during the cooking process. Covering each batch with an air fryer rack or another heat-proof basket will keep your kale chips in place.
  • Seasoning ideas: Seasoning is the fun part of making kale chips at home! While you can sprinkle them with parmesan cheese (or nutritional yeast for a vegan option), you can also season them with ranch seasoning, bbq seasoning, or even everything but the bagel seasoning.
  • Make ahead: The part that takes the most time in this recipe is preparing the kale chips (rinse, dry, and cut the leaves into small pieces) for frying. The good news is that you can prepare kale and store it in the fridge a few days in advance.
  • Storage: For maximum crunchiness, we recommend air frying kale chips on the day you plan to consume them. However, if you have some leftovers, you can store them in a paper bag or a paper towel-lined airtight container large enough so that the crispy leaves will not break. Make sure that they are at room temperature before you store them. Your chips will stay fresh for up to two days.

Nutrition

Calories: 121kcal | Carbohydrates: 7g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Sodium: 380mg | Potassium: 583mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 16733IU | Vitamin C: 156mg | Calcium: 426mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-kale-chips/feed/ 0
Catalan Spinach https://foolproofliving.com/catalan-style-spinach/ https://foolproofliving.com/catalan-style-spinach/#comments Tue, 31 Jan 2023 00:28:39 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=1055 Spinach is a staple ingredient that I always keep stocked in my fridge. It’s nutritious, versatile, and pairs well with…]]>

Spinach is a staple ingredient that I always keep stocked in my fridge. It’s nutritious, versatile, and pairs well with sweet and savory flavors. If you’re looking for more savory spinach recipes, you’ll love this Spinach and Cheese Quesadilla, Green Spaghetti Sauce, or this Spinach Shrimp Salad. Or, to sweeten things up, try my Spinach Blueberry Salad.

Catalan spinach served with tomatoes and roasted garlic on the side.

Ingredients

This recipe, also known by its Spanish name, Espinacas a La Catalana, requires only a few simple ingredients. The pine nuts add a nice crunch and an earthy flavor that complements the spinach, while the dried fruit adds texture and a hint of sweetness. 

ingredients for the recipe from the top view.

For this spinach Catalan recipe, you’ll need fresh spinach, raisins, extra-virgin olive oil, an onion, large garlic cloves, pine nuts, kosher salt, and black pepper. 

Ingredient Substitutions

If you’re missing one or more recipe ingredients, feel free to be resourceful and use what you have on hand. Various nuts would work for that crunch factor, while another type of dried fruit would still add a hint of sweetness. Here are a few recommendations: 

  • Spinach: If you don’t have any fresh spinach on hand, you can use frozen spinach instead. You can use a 1:1 ratio of frozen spinach to fresh spinach. Make sure to thaw your frozen spinach overnight in the fridge and squeeze out the excess juices before using it in the recipe. 
  • Onion: While I chose to use a medium onion for this recipe, you can substitute a shallot for a similar flavor. 
  • Pine nuts: I love the earthy, buttery taste of pine nuts, but I know they can be expensive and sometimes difficult to find at the store. If you’d like to substitute a different nut, I recommend sliced or slivered almonds. 
  • Dried fruit: Raisins aren’t everyone’s cup of tea, but I like the chewy texture and subtle sweetness they add to this dish. If you don’t have raisins or aren’t a fan of them, you can use dried cranberries or chopped dried apricots instead. You can also use golden raisins, which are a bit sweeter than regular ones. 
  • Optional addition: Some traditional spinach Spanish recipes also include a golden delicious apple in the dish. If you’d like to add in a small golden delicious apple for additional sweetness and flavor, I recommend chopping it up and sauteing it with the rest of the ingredients.

How to Make Catalan Spinach 

If you’re craving a quick appetizer or snack, it only takes 20 minutes to make this spinach tapas recipe. Here’s how to do it:

Person soaking raisins and sauteing onion in two images.
  1. Soak the raisins: To help the raisins get plump and juicy, soak them in a small bowl of hot water for 15-20 minutes. In the meantime, make the rest of the recipe. 
  2. Saute the onion and garlic: Heat the oil in a skillet. Once hot, add the onion and saute for 5-6 minutes or until translucent, tossing as it cooks. Add the garlic and saute for an additional 30 seconds. 
Person showing how to make this spinach side dish in a collage of images.
  1. Cook the spinach: Add the baby spinach and cook until wilted. At first, it will look like you have a lot of spinach, but as it cooks, it will go down to pretty much, nothing.
  2. Add the plump raisins, nuts, and spinach: Drain the raisins and add them to the skillet, along with the pine nuts. Season to taste with salt and pepper, stir, and cook for about 3 minutes. 
  3. Serve: Transfer the dish to a serving bowl and serve it warm or cold with crusty bread like my Artisan Bread or even more Mediterranean, Kalamata olive bread. I also like it with roasted tomatoes on the side.

How to Store

If you have leftovers or wish to make a double recipe to serve later, you can store the dish in the fridge to have this yummy appetizer ready to go whenever the craving strikes. 

To store leftovers, let the dish cool to room temperature before transferring it to an airtight container. Store it in the fridge and enjoy it for up to four days. 

How to Serve?

If you’re in the mood for a light meal, enjoy this dish tapas-style with bread and other small snacks and appetizers. You can also serve it up as a side dish to pair with a larger main dish for a more filling meal. Here are some serving recommendations: 

  • Serve it with crusty bread: In Spain, this dish is traditionally served with crusty bread, roasted tomatoes, and roasted garlic. I personally love to pair this recipe with a sliced French baguette and a glass of red wine. 
  • Pair it with a grilled dish: The delicate flavors of this spinach dish pair nicely with grilled meat or fish. On a nice evening, fire up your grill and serve this spinach appetizer with my Grilled Mahi Mahi for a zesty, light spring or summer meal, or pair it with Marinated Shrimp for a crowd-pleasing spread.
Catalan spinach from the top view with a wooden spoon on the side.

Expert Tips 

This Spanish spinach dish is pretty quick and easy to make, as it only requires a few basic cooking skills. Even so, I’ve compiled a few tips to help you achieve the best results on your first try. Here’s what you need to know:

  • Buy prewashed spinach: I think it is a time saver and worth the money.
  • Salting the spinach: As the recipe states, ensure to season the spinach after it’s cooked. If you season spinach with salt while cooking, it may become too salty as it absorbs the salted water. 
  • Toast the pine nuts: If you have the time, toast pine nuts in an empty skillet until they turn lightly golden brown. It takes only a few minutes to do so but takes the dish to a whole other level.

FAQs

Can I use frozen spinach instead of fresh?

While you can use frozen spinach in this recipe, we prefer the version made with fresh baby spinach. If you need to use frozen spinach, you can use a 1:1 ratio of frozen spinach to fresh spinach. Make sure to thaw your frozen spinach overnight in the fridge and squeeze out any excess water or juices before using it in the recipe.

What is Catalan spinach?

Catalan-style spinach is a traditional Spanish tapas dish made with spinach, pine nuts, and dried fruit. World-renowned Chef José Andrés created the dish and named it after Catalonia, a region in Spain. He believed the dish represented the Catalonian penchant for combining savory food with sweet flavors, as well as their love for small dishes. 

Other Similar Small Dishes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Catalan Style Spinach recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Catalan spinach in a bowl with tomatoes on the side.
Print

Catalan Spinach Recipes

This Catalan Spinach is a fantastic Spanish Tapas dish that is quick and easy to make. Flavored with pine nuts and raisins, it is a flavor-packed dish that is guaranteed to impress.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Spanish
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 10 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 185kcal

Ingredients

  • 3 tablespoons raisins
  • 8 ounces spinach washed, dried and roughly chopped
  • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
  • 1 onion finely chopped – medium size (about 1 cup)
  • 2 cloves garlic minced
  • 3 tablespoons pine nuts
  • 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt
  • 1/4 black pepper freshly grounded

Instructions

  • Soak the raisins in hot water and let them plump up for 10 minutes. Drain and set aside.
  • Heat the olive oil in a large skillet, add the onion and cook for 5-7 minutes until translucent, stirring occasionally.
  • Add the garlic and cook for 30 seconds.
  • Add the spinach and cook until fully wilted. At first, it will look like you have a lot of spinach, but as it cooks, it will go down to pretty much nothing.
  • Stir in the raisins and pine nuts. Season with salt and pepper, and cook for 3 minutes.
  • Serve with crusty bread on the side.

Notes

  • Serving: Can be served warm or cold. 
  • Storage: Let the dish cool to room temperature before transferring it to an airtight container. Store it in the fridge and enjoy it for up to four days. 
  • Yields: This recipe makes about 1 to 1 ½ cups of spinach that is supposed to be served as tapas style. However, if you want to serve it as a side dish, you can make multiply the recipe as many times as you want.

Nutrition

Calories: 185kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 385mg | Potassium: 810mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 10633IU | Vitamin C: 35mg | Calcium: 124mg | Iron: 4mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/catalan-style-spinach/feed/ 12
Air Fryer Frozen Mozzarella Sticks https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-frozen-mozzarella-sticks/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-frozen-mozzarella-sticks/#respond Tue, 27 Dec 2022 17:00:09 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=63453 A party wouldn’t be a party without at least one easy appetizer, and here on the blog, we love to…]]>

A party wouldn’t be a party without at least one easy appetizer, and here on the blog, we love to share recipes for party foods that are just as fun to eat as they are delicious. If you’re gearing up to host a party and are in need of some recipe inspiration, look no further than my collection of recipes for New Year’s Appetizers and Game Day Recipes

Crispy cheese sticks served on a plate with tomato sauce from the top view.

Ingredients

As the name suggests, the only ingredient you need for this air fryer frozen cheese sticks recipe is a box of your favorite frozen mozzarella sticks! If you love to dunk your mozzarella sticks, feel free to also include your favorite dipping sauce on your shopping list.

Frozen breaded cheese sticks on a plate from the top view.

If you’ve purchased frozen mozzarella sticks before, you’ve probably noticed that stores often carry various brands in the frozen foods section. I personally love the Trader Joe’s mozzarella sticks, but many store brands also make this frozen snack, such as Kroger, Costco, Publix, Member’s Mark (Sam’s Club’s brand), and Market Pantry (Target’s brand). Other popular brands you might find at your local grocery store include Morning Star, Snapps, Feel Good Foods, Nathan’s, Crav’n, Petite Cuisine, and Farm Rich mozzarella sticks. 

I have tried many of these brands in the past and have gotten similar results, so as long as you get the basic mozzarella cheese sticks, they are pretty much the same.

Another well-known brand that makes frozen, cheesy snacks is Bosco Sticks. However, it’s important to note that Bosco Sticks are actually breadsticks, not battered or bread crumb mozzarella sticks. If you purchased Bosco Sticks, I recommend following the package instructions for cooking rather than following these air fryer instructions for mozzarella sticks. 

How to Air Fry Frozen Cheese Sticks

It only takes 10 minutes and an air fryer to transform frozen, store-bought mozzarella sticks into a classic, delicious snack that no one can resist. If you’re wondering how to cook frozen mozzarella sticks in the air fryer, I have all the answers right here.

So, to cook frozen mozzarella sticks in the air fryer, simply:

  1. Preheat the air fryer: Set your air fryer to 360 degrees F (183 degrees C).
Two images showing how to make frozen mozzarella sticks in air fryer.
  1. Place frozen mozzarella sticks in the air fryer: Arrange the mozzarella sticks in the preheated air fryer basket (be careful, it’s hot!), making sure they remain in a single layer. 
  2. Air fry frozen mozzarella sticks: Air fry the cheese sticks for 4 minutes. Carefully flip them over and cook for another 1-2 minutes or until they are crispy golden brown and still holding their shape. A few may open up slightly. 
  3. Remove from the air fryer and serve: Remove the mozz sticks from the air fryer and arrange them on a serving plate. Serve with your dipping sauce of choice, if desired. 

Serving Suggestions

If you’re a sauce fanatic, these air fried cheese sticks are the ideal tasty snack to dunk into a variety of dipping sauces. From your favorite marinara sauce to zesty BBQ sauce and ranch, you’ll find that they pair beautifully with whatever tasty dips you choose. If you’re not a sauce lover, or if your kids prefer them plain, you can rest assured that they taste great as-is. 

If you’re in need of a sauce recipe to pair as a side dish with your frozen mozzarella sticks recipe, try my Basil and Tomato Sauce or this yummy and easy Greek Yogurt Ranch Dressing

How to Store and Reheat Leftovers

If your air fryer cheese sticks need to be revived a little bit, you can easily pop them back in the air fryer to reheat them. You can also store your leftovers to enjoy the next day. Here are a few tips:

  • Store: Store your fried mozzarella sticks in an airtight container with a lid in the fridge for up to two days. 
  • Reheat: To reheat mozzarella sticks in the air fryer, set your air fryer to 360 degrees F and cook the mozzarella sticks for 3-4 minutes, turning them halfway through. Keep a close eye on them as they reheat, as they may split open as the cheese melts if you heat them for too long. 

Expert Tips

While this is a pretty straightforward recipe, I’ve put together a few additional tips to help you achieve a crispy, perfectly gooey texture without much trial and error.

  • No need to thaw: The best part of cooking frozen mozzarella sticks in the air fryer is that you can cook them straight from the freezer without needing to thaw them first. Just make sure to watch carefully as they fry because the cook time might differ slightly based on the air fryer brand you are using. Mine is the Instant Pot brand (affiliate link), which is a large air fryer (5.7 Q), and I find that 6-8 minutes of cook time is the sweet spot. The best way to know is to use this recipe as a starting point, test it with a few frozen cheese sticks, and adjust the time accordingly.
  • Make sure to flip them while cooking: Flipping your frozen air fryer mozzarella sticks halfway through ensures that they cook evenly, and it will also help you gauge their doneness. If they’re starting to split open or leak melty cheese during the halfway-through mark, they might be done. Use your judgment- they’ll taste great either way! 
  • No need to spray the basket with cooking spray: The gooey mozzarella sticks likely won’t stick to your air fryer, even without oil, so don’t feel like you need to spray the basket with oil spray or brush with olive oil. 
  • Air fry mozzarella sticks right before serving: Breaded mozzarella sticks in air fryer are fantastic when piping hot but not so great when cold. For best results, make sure to cook them right before you intend to serve them. 
  • Don’t overcrowd the basket: When arranging them in the basket, make sure they remain in an even layer so they cook evenly. My air fryer basket fits 12 sticks in a single layer, but if you have a smaller air fryer basket, you may need to cook them in smaller batches.

FAQs

Can I cook frozen mozzarella sticks in an air fryer?

Yes, you can. I find that the best way to cook frozen mozzarella sticks is in the air fryer because it’s much quicker than cooking them in a conventional oven. However, since they cook so quickly, check your mozzarella sticks for doneness halfway through the cooking process (the air fryer time for frozen mozzarella sticks is 6-8 minutes).

How long and what temperature do you cook mozzarella sticks in the air fryer?

I’ve found that the best temperature for cooking frozen mozzarella sticks in the air fryer is 360 degrees F, as a hotter air fryer temp for mozzarella sticks may make the sticks split open. Twelve frozen mozzarella sticks should cook in a 360-degree air fryer for a total time of 6-8 mins.

How to make sure cheese doesn’t ooze out of the mozzarella sticks?

One way to prevent your mozzarella sticks from splitting open and oozing gooey cheese during the cooking process is to cook them at a lower temperature, such as 360 degrees F. Since they cook so quickly, it also helps to keep an eye on them. I recommend flipping them halfway through cooking (after around 4 minutes) to gauge their doneness.

Other Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like

Show that trusty air fryer some love and learn a few new air fryer recipes! This little appliance can do everything from party snacks like air fryer pizza rolls to healthier options like air-fried veggies. If you loved this simple, 10-minute Frozen Cheese Sticks in Air Fryer recipe, you’re sure to enjoy these other quick and easy air fryer recipes:

If you try this Frozen Mozzarella Cheese Sticks in Air Fryer recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A person pulling apart an air fried cheese stick from the top view.
Print

Air Fryer Frozen Mozzarella Sticks Recipe

These Air Fryer Frozen Mozzarella Sticks are a no-fuss, 10-minute appetizer that's the perfect party finger food. Serve these cheesy, crispy mozzarella sticks with your favorite dipping sauce for a Game Day party, a New Year's Eve celebration, or anytime you need a quick, crowd-favorite snack.
Course Appetizer
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 2 minutes
Cook Time 7 minutes
Total Time 9 minutes
Servings 12 cheese sticks
Calories 80kcal

Ingredients

  • 12 frozen mozzarella sticks

Optional:

  • Dipping sauce

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer: Preheat the air fryer to 360 degrees F. (183 C).
  • Place cheese sticks in the air fryer: Carefully place frozen mozzarella sticks in the preheated air fryer basket in a single layer.
  • Cook: Air fry frozen cheese sticks for 4 minutes. Flip them, and air fry them for another 2-3 minutes or until they are golden brown and crispy. Ideally, you want to ensure they hold their shape, but a few might open up.
  • Remove and serve: Carefully remove them from the air fryer onto a plate and serve with your choice of dipping sauce on the side.

Notes

  • Optional dipping sauce: If you’re in need of a sauce recipe to pair as a side dish with your frozen mozzarella sticks recipe, try my Basil and Tomato Sauce or this yummy and easy Greek Yogurt Ranch Dressing. Alternatively, you can serve it with your favorite store-bought marinara sauce.
  • Gauging doneness: Do not skip the step where you flip them halfway through, as this step is important to gauge doneness. At that stage, if you see them opening up too fast, you might have to shorten the timing. 
  • Cook time: The results may differ depending on the air fryer you are using. For best results, use this recipe as a starting point, test it with a few frozen mozzarella sticks, and adjust the time accordingly.
  • Store: Store the leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to two days. 
  • Reheat: To reheat mozzarella sticks in the air fryer, set it to 360 degrees F and cook the cheese sticks for 3-4 minutes, turning them halfway through. Keep a close eye on them as they reheat, as they may split open if you heat them for too long.
  • The calorie information below is for one cheese stick, and it is intended as a general reference. The calorie and nutrition information may differ based on the brand of mozzarella sticks you are using.

Nutrition

Calories: 80kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 220mg | Vitamin A: 4IU | Calcium: 20mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-frozen-mozzarella-sticks/feed/ 0
Mascarpone Stuffed Dates with Pomegranate and Honey https://foolproofliving.com/mascarpone-stuffed-dates/ https://foolproofliving.com/mascarpone-stuffed-dates/#comments Thu, 15 Dec 2022 22:08:47 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=11704 If you are in need of an impressive cocktail party appetizer, a showstopping finger food for your cheese charcuterie board,…]]>

If you are in need of an impressive cocktail party appetizer, a showstopping finger food for your cheese charcuterie board, or to perfect light dessert to serve after dinner, these mascarpone stuffed dates are just what you need. They are easy, quick, and addictively delicious!

Need more appetizer inspiration? Be sure to also check out our Bread Dipping Oil, Cheese Apple Appetizer, and Hot Goat Cheese Dip.

Mascarpone stuffed dates on a plate topped off with pomegranate seeds and nuts.

Ingredients

To make this stuffed dates recipe, you will need dates, mascarpone cheese, chopped nuts (I used a combination of walnuts and pistachios), pomegranate seeds, and honey.

When buying dates, look for fresh, plump, and large Medjool dates that are usually sold in the refrigerated section of your grocery store. You can buy pitted dates or remove the pits yourself.

Ingredients for the recipe are placed in small bowls from the top view.

Ingredient Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins:

  • Cheese: You can substitute mascarpone with any spreadable soft cheese. My favorite ones are goat cheese and cream cheese. Alternatively, you can stir in ½ teaspoon of vanilla extract in the cheese to make it even more flavorful.
  • Nuts: You can use any nuts here. I like to stuff my dates with walnuts and salty pistachios, but almonds, hazelnuts, cashews, and pecans would also be lovely. If you have the time, roast your nuts in a skillet for a few minutes for extra flavor.
  • Fruit: Pomegranate arils are wonderful to add a pop of color, but you can also use candied and chopped oranges or dried cranberries.
  • Honey: You can use maple syrup or agave nectar. Or, if you want to make it sugar-free, omit using any sweeteners.
  • Flaky Sea Salt: This is optional, but if you want to take it up a notch, you can sprinkle each mascarpone-filled date with a little flaky sea salt (such as Maldon salt (affiliate link))

How To Make This Recipe?

There are only a few steps to making this finger dessert. However, I recommend getting all your ingredients ready before starting so that you can quickly put them together.

Person showing how to stuff dates with mascarpone cheese in a collage of images.
  1. Remove pits: Using a paring knife, slice dates lengthwise, being careful not to cut them all the way through. Remove the pits and set them aside.
  2. Stuff with cheese: Using a small spoon, stuff each pitted date with a teaspoon of mascarpone cheese. 
person showing how to stuff dates with walnuts and pistachios.
  1. Garnish: Dip the filled dates into the bowl with pomegranate seeds. Gently press them so that they will stick to the cheese.
  2. Sprinkle: Dust each stuffed date with chopped walnuts or pistachios. Set them onto a plate.
  3. Drizzle: Drizzle the mascarpone-stuffed dates with a tablespoon of honey. Serve!

How To Make Ahead and Store?

The best part of this sweet stuffed dates recipe is that you can make it ahead, and it also stores well. Here’s how I do it:

  • To Make Ahead: You can pit the dates, stuff them with cheese, dip them into the pomegranate seeds, and store them in an air-tight container in the fridge for up to two days in advance. Sprinkle them with chopped nuts and drizzle them with honey right before serving.
  • Storage: Leftovers will keep fresh for up to 3 days as long as they are stored in an airtight container in the fridge. They make the perfect snack or afternoon pick-me-up.

Expert Tips:

This easy recipe is pretty self-explanatory, but here are a few tips to help you succeed on your first try.

  • Room temperature: If you make these ahead of time, I recommend bringing them out 30 minutes before serving, as they taste best when they are served at room temperature.
  • Piping bag: You can multiply this recipe as many times as you want. And if you decide to make a larger amount, I recommend using piping or a pastry bag (or a Ziploc bag) instead of using a spoon. Simply fill your bag with mascarpone and fill each date one by one.
  • Mascarpone filling: I find that a light drizzle of honey is all you need to sweeten the already sweet dates. However, if you prefer yours sweeter, you can mix honey with mascarpone and use that honey mascarpone mixture as your filling.
  • Warm dates: An earlier version of this stuffed dates dessert recipe was made by first drizzling dates with a tablespoon of extra virgin olive oil and then warming them up in a 350-degree preheated oven for 10 minutes. If you prefer to serve them warm, you can follow those steps. However, after literally making this recipe for over 10 years, I feel like the room-temperature stuffed dates are just as good.
Stuffed dates with mascarpone and walnuts on a plate from the top view.

FAQs

What cheese pairs with dates?

Any mild-flavored soft and spreadable cheeses would pair well with dates. Goat cheese, mascarpone, and cream cheese are a few to name.

What can you stuff inside dates?

You can stuff dates with nuts, nut butters, soft cheese, and chocolate.

Can you put dates in the oven?

Yes, you can. Simply pop them in a preheated 350 F oven for 10 minutes to warm them up.

Other Party Appetizers You Might Also Like:

If you try this Mascarpone Stuffed Date recipe, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Mascarpone stuffed dates on an oval plate from the top view.
Print

Mascarpone Stuffed Dates Recipe

These Mascarpone Stuffed Medjool Dates are topped off with walnuts and pomegranate seeds and drizzled with honey. This easy recipe takes less than 20 minutes to put them all together. These are the perfect little "finger" desserts to impress your guests or even to satisfy your own sweet tooth.
Course Dessert
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 12 Dates
Calories 134kcal

Ingredients

  • 12 Medjool Dates
  • ½ cup Mascarpone cheese
  • 4 tablespoons pomegranate seeds
  • 3 tablespoons walnuts or pistachios (or both) chopped
  • 1-2 tablespoons honey
  • ¼ teaspoon flaky seas such as Maldon salt, optional

Instructions

  • Cut each date lengthwise making sure to not to cut them all the way through. Remove and discard pits.
  • Fill each date with a teaspoon mascarpone cheese. Dip the stuffed dates into the bowl with pomegranate seeds. Gently press them so they will stick to the cheese.
  • Dust each stuffed date with chopped walnuts and/or pistachios. Set them on a plate.
  • Drizzle them with honey and if using, sprinkle them with some flaky sea salt. Serve!

Notes

  • I recommend prepping all the ingredients before starting to assemble. I usually put each ingredient in a small bowl so that I can put them together quickly.
  • You can multiply this recipe as many times as you want. If making a larger batch, you can fill a piping bag with mascarpone to help you stuff dates faster.
  • To Make Ahead: You can pit the dates, stuff them with mascarpone, dip them into the pomegranate seeds, and store them in an air-tight container in the fridge for up to two days in advance. Sprinkle them with chopped nuts and drizzle them with honey right before serving.
  • Storage: Place leftovers in an airtight container and store them in the fridge for up to 3 days.
  • Warm dates: An earlier version of this recipe warmed the dates in the oven before stuffing them. In this updated version, I decided to skip that step as I think it is an extra step that is not necessary. However, if you prefer that version, feel free to follow the steps below:
    • Preheat the oven to 350 °F. Place dates on a small baking sheet. Drizzle them with olive oil.
    • Bake for 10-12 minutes in the oven. Let cool on the counter for 5 minutes. Fill each date with a teaspoon of mascarpone cheese.
    • Top the dates with honey, pomegranate seeds, and walnuts. Sprinkle them with flaky sea salt. Serve!
  •  

Nutrition

Serving: 12Dates | Calories: 134kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 9mg | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 191mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 18g | Vitamin A: 168IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 0.3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/mascarpone-stuffed-dates/feed/ 20
Smashed Fingerling Potatoes https://foolproofliving.com/smashed-fingerling-potatoes/ https://foolproofliving.com/smashed-fingerling-potatoes/#respond Tue, 22 Nov 2022 20:41:40 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=62341 When it comes to carbs, it doesn’t get better than a good potato recipe. Potatoes are so versatile, inexpensive, and…]]>

When it comes to carbs, it doesn’t get better than a good potato recipe. Potatoes are so versatile, inexpensive, and easy to cook, so I have lots of potato recipes here on the blog. Whip up Mashed Potatoes with Rosemary or cook a batch of Red Potatoes in the air fryer for a classic Thanksgiving dinner, make a Caper Potato Salad for a cold side dish, or throw together Muffin Tin Potatoes for a party-ready appetizer. 

Roasted fingerling potatoes on a plate with chives from the top view.

Ingredients

Fingerling smashed potatoes are so buttery and creamy on their own that they don’t need many ingredients to jazz them up. In this recipe, we’re simply sprinkling on a little garlic powder and topping with fresh herbs to enhance their mild flavor. 

Ingredients for oven roasted potatoes in bowls from the top view.

To make this recipe, you’ll need a pound of fingerling potatoes (you can use colorful ones if they’re available), olive oil, garlic powder, fresh thyme, kosher salt, ground black pepper, and fresh chives (optional).  

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

While you can follow this recipe exactly as written for a classic, great side dish, you can also customize it to suit the occasion or your preferences. Load them up with cheese and bacon for a great Game Day recipe, or top them with lots of fresh herbs for a holiday party. Here are some more suggestions: 

  • Potatoes: I used fingerlings for their small size and mild, buttery taste, but you can also substitute different types of potatoes in this recipe. Try Yukon Gold potatoes (also called Pee Wee potatoes), Honey Gold potatoes, or any other variation of a petite gold potato. 
  • Oil: The olive oil in this recipe helps the potatoes crisp up nicely, but you can also substitute butter for a richer, creamier taste. Just make sure to use melted butter so you can apply it evenly to the potatoes before baking. 
  • Herbs: If you have leftover herbs in your fridge from all your holiday cooking, feel free to add them to this recipe. You can substitute fresh rosemary in place of thyme and turn this recipe into delicious garlic rosemary smashed potatoes. Or use chopped green onions instead of chives if you can’t get your hands on them. Any other fresh herbs you have on hand, such as parsley, would also work. 
  • Garlic: We’re using a little bit of garlic powder in this recipe to enhance the buttery, mild flavor of the potatoes. I would not recommend substituting fresh garlic, as I found that it was prone to burning during the baking process. If you’d like to add extra garlicky flavor, whip up my Roasted Garlic Butter recipe and brush it onto the potatoes once they’re done baking. 
  • Other topping ideas: For a fun take on loaded baked potatoes, top your smashed fingerlings with parmesan cheese and chopped bacon bits. If you love turkey bacon, you can make my Oven Baked Turkey Bacon or Air Fried Turkey Bacon recipe, chop it, and sprinkle it over the potatoes. 

How to Make Crispy Fingerling Potatoes?

This recipe requires minimal prep and baking time, making it the perfect easy, last-minute, and crowd-pleasing dish for any occasion. Plus, smashing the potatoes is oddly satisfying! Here’s how to make them:

A person showing how to make par boiled potatoes from the top view.
  1. Boil the potatoes: Add the potatoes to a medium saucepan or large pot and fill with cold water until the potatoes are covered by an inch. Add a large pinch of salt to the pan, bring the salted water to a boil, and simmer for about 10 minutes, or until the potatoes are al dente and fork tender. Keep in mind that the potatoes may need more or less cooking time depending on their size. You should be able to easily insert and remove a sharp knife when done.  
  2. Drain the potatoes: Use a colander to drain the potatoes and place them back in the pan to “dry” for a few minutes. 
  3. Preheat the oven: While the potatoes are drying, preheat the oven to 450 degrees F. 
  4. Season the potatoes: In the same pan, sprinkle the potatoes with olive oil, garlic powder, thyme, salt, and pepper. Gently toss to evenly coat the potatoes with the seasonings and oil. 
  5. Transfer to a sheet pan: Transfer the potatoes to a rimmed baking sheet and arrange them in an even layer. 
A person showing how to smash potatoes on a baking sheet from the top view.
  1. Smash the potatoes: Use a ramekin, the bottom of a glass or jar, the bottom of a small bowl, or a potato masher to gently smash the potatoes until they’re all about ½ of an inch thick. If your smashing tool gets sticky, brush or spray it with a little oil. 
  2. Bake: Bake the smashed potatoes in the hot oven for about 15-20 minutes until crispy and lightly golden brown. Make sure to flip them at the halfway mark. 
  3. Serve: Transfer the smashed crispy fingerling potatoes from the large baking sheet to a serving plate or platter, sprinkle with chives (optional), and serve. 

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Reheat?

For a perfectly timed holiday dinner party or gathering, you can make these potatoes ahead of time and bake them right before the rest of your dishes are ready. They’re also super easy to store and reheat so that you can look forward to leftovers the next day. Here are some tips: 

  • Make-ahead: If you’re busy juggling multiple recipes for a big dinner or event and don’t have much time, you can prep the potatoes earlier in the day so you can pop them in the oven when you’re ready. Simply boil and smash the potatoes, let them cool, and store them on a covered baking sheet in the fridge. When it’s time to bake the potatoes, brush them with oil and follow the instructions above for roasting in the oven. 
  • Storage: Let the roasted smashed fingerling potatoes cool to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to two days. 
  • To reheat: To reheat, you have two options:
    • Skillet method: For extra crispy potatoes, reheat the smashed potatoes over medium-high heat in a cast iron skillet with hot oil until they’re cooked through and golden brown. 
    • Oven method: Reheat in a 350-degree F oven until cooked through and golden brown (make sure to flip halfway through reheating). If they are too dry, brush them with a bit of oil before reheating. 

What to Serve Them With?

There are endless ways to serve these melt-in-your-mouth, crispy smashed fingerling potatoes. Pair them with dipping sauces for a Game Day appetizer, serve them with your favorite main dish, or get creative with leftovers. If you’re still wondering what to serve with fingerling potatoes, here are a few suggestions:

  • As a crowd-favorite appetizer: These crispy fingerling potatoes will fit right in with all your favorite Game Day Foods. Serve them as grown-up french fries with an herbed sauce, such as Basil Tomato Sauce, Yogurt Dill Sauce, Blue Cheese Dressing without Sour Cream, or Yogurt Ranch Sauce. Or, simply top with a drizzle of Pesto Dressing
  • To serve with main dishes: With a sprinkling of fresh herbs, you can transform these crispy smashed potatoes into a sophisticated side dish to serve with an elegant main for an impressive family dinner. These potatoes pair beautifully with a holiday classic like Baked Turkey Tenderloin or chicken dishes such as Air Fried Chicken Legs, Greek Yogurt Chicken, or Goat Cheese Stuffed Chicken. You could also serve them with this next-level Porchetta recipe for an impressive meal. 
  • Got leftovers?: If you have leftover potatoes, why not turn your fingerling smash into a fingerling hash? Use them as breakfast potatoes and add them to a breakfast hash (don’t forget the bacon and lots of cheese), or throw them in a frittata for extra flavor. 
Smashed down potatoes on a baking sheet from the top view.

Expert Tips

These crispy fingerlings are a breeze to make for even a beginner chef, but following my tips will eliminate guesswork and help you achieve pro results on your first try. Here’s what I recommend:

  • Aim for equal-sized potatoes: If you can, try to buy fairly equal-sized potatoes to ensure even roasting. 
  • Smash with care: While you may be tempted to smash the potatoes with all your might (I was tempted, too), doing so may break the skin of the potatoes or cause split fingerling potatoes. I recommend using the bottom of a ramekin or jar (or a potato masher) to gently smash the potatoes down so that their surface area measures about ½ inch in thickness. Here is a quick visual.
  • Arrange in a single layer: When arranging the crushed fingerling potatoes on your baking sheet, make sure they form an even layer without overlapping. This will help them roast evenly and get nice and crispy on the outside. 
  • Let them dry: After boiling, it’s important to drain the potatoes and return them to the still-warm pan to let them “dry” for a few minutes. Don’t skip this step, as it makes a world of difference in preventing the potatoes from retaining excess moisture and helping them get crispy in the oven. 
  • Use extra oil for maximum crispiness: If you prefer extra crispy skin with crispy edges, oil is your best friend. Once the potatoes are done baking, remove them from the oven and brush them with an additional tablespoon of olive oil (or avocado oil) for the crispiest results. Broil them for 1-2 minutes, keeping a close eye on them so that they don’t burn.

FAQs

What are fingerling potatoes?

Fingerling potatoes are miniature, oblong-shaped potatoes that come in different colors and sizes. These waxy potatoes usually have thin skins, and they have a mild, buttery flavor when roasted.

How are fingerling potatoes different?

Fingerling potatoes are unique, finger-shaped small potatoes that are harvested when they are fully mature. They are usually confused with new potatoes or baby potatoes, which are also smaller potatoes but are harvested before they’re fully mature.

Can smashed potatoes be made ahead?

Yes, you can easily make smashed fingerling potatoes ahead of time. On the day you plan to bake them, boil and smash them, let them cool, and store them on a covered baking sheet in the fridge. Brush them with oil and pop them in the oven when you’re ready to serve.

Can you eat the skin of fingerling potatoes?

The skin of a fingerling potato is fully edible. When they’re smashed, brushed with oil, and oven-roasted, the skin gets super crispy while the inside stays creamy and soft.

What is the difference between mashed and smashed potatoes?

Mashing potatoes is the process of boiling potatoes and then mashing them completely for a smooth, creamy texture. For smashed potatoes, boil fingerling potatoes before roasting and gently smash them down until they form a thin, disk-like shape. Roast and serve.

Other Potato Recipes You Might Also Like

An easy potato recipe is always my go-to for the perfect side dish, appetizer, or snack for a crowd. If you and your family are looking for more ways to prepare this versatile vegetable, browse some of my favorite recipes below for inspiration: 

If you try this Smashed Fingerling Potatoes recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Roasted potatoes with chives on a baking sheet from the top view.
Print

Smashed Fingerling Potatoes Recipe

These Smashed Fingerling Potatoes, seasoned with salt, garlic powder, and fresh thyme, are perfectly crisp on the outside with a buttery, creamy center. Serve them sprinkled with chives for an elegant holiday side dish, or pair them with a dipping sauce for a fun Game Day appetizer. Plus, they're easy to make and require minimal ingredients!
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Total Time 50 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 183kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 lb fingerling potatoes scrubbed
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
  • 3-4 sprigs fresh thyme minced
  • 1/2 teaspoon kosher salt plus more to taste
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon chives chopped – optional

Instructions

  • Boil the potatoes: Place potatoes in a medium saucepan and fill it with cold water until covered by an inch. Season the water with a generous pinch of salt. Bring it to a boil and let it simmer until potatoes are fork-tender for about 10 minutes. They should be al dente. Please be aware that you may have to adjust the timing depending on the size of your potatoes.
  • Drain the potatoes: Drain the potatoes in a colander. Place them back into the pan, and let them dry for a few minutes.
  • Preheat the oven: Meanwhile, preheat the oven to 450 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Add the oil and seasonings: Add olive oil, garlic powder, thyme, salt, and pepper into the saucepan with the potatoes and give it a gentle toss to ensure that they are coated with the olive oil mixture.
  • Prep for baking: Transfer the potatoes onto a baking sheet on a single layer.
  • Smash the potatoes: Using a potato masher, the bottom of a jar, or a ramekin, gently smash each potato to about ½-inch thickness. If it gets sticky, feel free to brush (or spray) the bottom of the glass or ramekin with a little bit of oil.
  • Bake: Bake in the preheated oven for about 20 minutes until they are lightly golden browned, making sure to turn them halfway through the baking process.
  • Serve: Transfer smashed potatoes onto a plate and sprinkle with chives if using.

Notes

  • Make-ahead: You can prep the potatoes earlier in the day so you can pop them in the oven when you’re ready to bake. Simply boil and smash the potatoes, let them cool, and store them on a covered baking sheet in the fridge. When it’s time to bake the potatoes, brush them with oil and follow the instructions above for roasting in the oven. 
  • Storage: After roasting, let the potatoes cool to room temperature and store them in an airtight container in the fridge for up to two days. 
  • To reheat: To reheat, you have two options:
    • Skillet method: For extra crispy potatoes, reheat the smashed potatoes over medium-high heat in a lightly oiled cast iron skillet until they’re cooked through and golden brown. 
    • Oven method: Reheat in a 350-degree F oven until cooked through and golden brown (make sure to flip halfway through reheating). If they are too dry, brush them with a bit of oil before reheating.

Nutrition

Calories: 183kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 490mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 71IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 18mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/smashed-fingerling-potatoes/feed/ 0
Roasted Garlic Butter https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-garlic-butter/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-garlic-butter/#respond Mon, 12 Sep 2022 23:58:41 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=59860 Roasting your garlic is a must for this recipe, which is why we’ve included a step-by-step method for foolproof roasted…]]>

Roasting your garlic is a must for this recipe, which is why we’ve included a step-by-step method for foolproof roasted garlic. Once you roast the garlic, the rest of the recipe comes together in a flash.

A log of garlic butter cut into slices from the side view.

Ingredients

You won’t believe how easy it is to take a stick of butter from boring to restaurant-quality with just a few simple ingredients. Our main ingredient, the roasted garlic, adds so much depth and flavor to the butter, while the fresh herbs brighten everything up. 

Ingredients for roasted garlic butter from the top view.

For this roasted garlic spread recipe, gather:

  • A bulb of garlic
  • Olive oil
  • A stick of unsalted butter
  • Kosher salt
  • Black pepper
  • Fresh herbs (I used fresh rosemary, chives, and parsley)

Substitutions & Optional Add-Ins 

Whether you’re looking for a simple roasted garlic butter for bread or a more complex flavored butter for a specific dish, this butter can do it all. There are a number of swaps and additions you can make to customize the butter to your liking. Here are a few suggestions:

  • Butter: I use unsalted butter in this recipe to control the amount of salt I’m adding, but feel free to use salted butter instead. Just be careful when adding additional salt if you’re using salted butter. This roast garlic butter recipe also works well with vegan butter.
  • Fresh herbs: Fresh, fragrant herbs take this roasted garlic butter spread to the next level and give it that fancy restaurant-quality taste. You can use your favorite herbs or any you have on hand, but I recommend fresh parsley, rosemary, thyme, chives, or basil. As a rule of thumb, use two teaspoons of finely chopped fresh herbs per stick of butter. 
  • Spices: Amplify the flavor of your butter by adding some spices. You can cater the spices to a specific recipe’s flavor profile, so feel free to get creative. Sweet paprika, oregano, or a pinch of red pepper flakes are great additions that complement a variety of recipes.
  • Flaky sea salt: Topping your compound garlic butter with flaky sea salt brings out all the delicious flavors of this recipe and adds the perfect finishing touch. Trust me on this one. My favorite brands of sea salt are Maldon Sea Salt Flakes and Jacobsen Flake Finishing Salt. 
  • Parmesan Cheese: I usually add a few tablespoons of parmesan cheese if I am using it to make my Rosemary Mashed Potatoes.

How to Make Roasted Garlic Butter?

Once you roast the garlic, all you have to do is add in the rest of the ingredients and give it a mix! We’re using our oven-roasted garlic method for this recipe, but if you’re in a pinch, you can cut roasting time in half by following my Air Fryer Roasted Garlic recipe. I even have a Roasted Garlic Without Foil version! Here’s how to make this easy recipe:

  1. Preheat the oven: Set your oven temperature to 400 degrees F.
A person showing how to roast garlic in aluminum foil from the top view.
  1. Prep the garlic: Slice the top of the garlic with a paring knife, so the cloves are exposed and place the bulb on a piece of foil. Add a drizzle of olive oil on top of the cloves. 
  2. Wrap the garlic: Wrap the whole head of garlic tightly with foil so that it resembles a pouch. Place on a baking sheet or in a baking dish. 
  3. Roast: Roast the garlic in the 400-degree oven for 40 minutes. You’ll know the garlic is done if it appears soft and lightly caramelized (be careful when opening the aluminum foil pouch, as it will be hot). If it doesn’t appear done, wrap the garlic back up and roast for another 5-10 minutes. 
  4. Remove the cloves: After letting the garlic cool for at least 20 minutes, remove the roasted garlic cloves by gently squeezing the bulb from the root end until each individual clove is squeezed out. Discard the outer skin and place the cloves in a bowl. 
A series of images showing how to mash garlic and combine it with butter.
  1. Mash the garlic: In a small bowl or on a cutting board, use a fork to mash the roasted garlic until it’s pureed. 
  2. Add the remaining ingredients: To the same bowl, add the softened butter, salt and pepper, and (optional) chopped herbs. Mix until well combined, or blend in a small food processor. 

How to Roll Compound Butter into a Log?

Now that you know how to make roasted garlic butter, you can stop there and store garlic butter in a bowl. However, I find it easy (and fun) to roll my butter into a log. Doing so makes for easy slicing, and, as a bonus, it looks extra fancy! Follow these simple steps:

A person showing how to roll garlic compound butter into a log.
  1. Shape the butter: Place the roasted garlic compound butter on a piece of plastic wrap or parchment paper and shape it into a cylinder. Wrap it up tightly so it holds its shape. 
  2. Cool: Place the butter log in the fridge and cool for at least three hours. To serve, unwrap the butter, cut it into slices, and use it in your favorite recipes! 

How to Use Garlic Butter?

You can use this homemade roasted garlic butter anywhere you’d use regular butter, so the sky’s the limit if you’re a butter fanatic! This flavorful butter is the perfect finishing touch to make any meal or snack come to life. Here are a few suggestions to get you started:

  • Spread it on crusty bread: It’s no secret that you can use this garlic compound butter for garlic bread. There’s nothing better than melty, garlicky butter spread on crusty, fresh bread. This butter pairs beautifully with my No Knead Bread, Olive Bread, French Bread, or your favorite dinner rolls! It is also wonderful to spread on when making garlic bread in an air fryer.
  • Use it to flavor fish: Fish and garlic butter are a match made in heaven! This roasted garlic and herb butter really elevates my Grilled Mahi Mahi, and my Grilled Shrimp Skewers aren’t complete without some garlicky, buttery goodness. 
  • Serve over steak: Many restaurants use roasted garlic butter for steak, and it’s always such a treat to order a buttery, sizzling steak from your favorite steakhouse. But with this delicious butter, you can bring those steakhouse flavors right to your own kitchen! Slather as much butter as you desire on Reverse Sear Beef Tenderloin or Grilled Steak. 
  • Add to roasted vegetables: In my opinion, roasted veggies aren’t complete without a liberal helping of butter. Roasted garlic herb butter adds a more caramelized flavor to roasted mushrooms, so be sure to pair this butter recipe with my Roasted Portobello Mushrooms, Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms, or my Sauteed Asparagus and Mushrooms. Or, transform my Southern-inspired vegetable recipes, such as these Garlic Butter Green Beans, my Mashed Potato Casserole, or Air Fryer Corn on the Cob, into true comfort food by topping them with a dollop of garlic butter with roasted garlic. 
A bowl of compound butter with garlic and herbs from the top view.

How to Store & Freeze

If you still have some extra homemade garlic butter on hand after spreading it on everything you can think of (we won’t judge), then feel free to pop your leftovers in the fridge or freezer so you can enjoy them another day! Here are my storage recommendations:

  • Make Ahead: If you want to save time, you can roast your garlic a day in advance. Simply combine your roasted garlic with butter when ready to serve. 
  • Store: If stored either tightly wrapped or in an airtight container, this simple compound butter recipe stays fresh in the fridge for up to three days. Be sure to consume your butter within this time period, as a foodborne illness called botulism can occur if garlic sits for too long in an oxygen-free environment. Try making a smaller batch of this recipe or make only one batch at a time to avoid waste and ensure you can consume the butter within the three-day period. 
  • Freeze: Freeze your rosemary garlic compound butter for up to a month, either tightly wrapped or in an airtight container. 
  • Thaw: Thaw your butter from frozen by taking it out of the freezer an hour before you expect to serve it. Make sure only to thaw the amount you want to use.

FAQs

Is garlic butter good for you?

Butter has various health benefits and is a great source of vitamins A and E, which support skin health, the immune system, eye health, and heart health. Garlic is also very nutritious, and a major health benefit of garlic lies in its immune-boosting properties.

Can you get botulism from garlic butter?

Botulism, a foodborne illness, can occur when a homemade garlic-in-oil mixture is stored in a room-temperature environment. Bottled or otherwise enclosed raw garlic creates an oxygen-free environment that supports bacterial growth, which can lead to botulism. To reduce the risk of botulism, per food safety guidelines, always store homemade garlic mixtures, including garlic butter, in the refrigerator and consume them within three days.

How many tablespoons are in a clove of garlic?

There are about two to three tablespoons of garlic in each garlic clove, depending on the size of the garlic bulb.

Can I use salted butter?

Yes, you can. However, if you do so, be sure to adjust the amount of salt you use in the recipe below.

Can I make this with pre-peeled garlic?

Yes, you can. However, keep in mind that it takes much less time to roast pre-peeled garlic, so be sure to adjust the roasting time accordingly.

Other Garlic Recipes You Might Like

If you can’t cook a single meal without using garlic, we can definitely relate. That’s why we have so many garlic recipes here on the blog! Check out the links below for more garlic inspiration: 

If you try this Roasted Garlic Butter recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

A log of garlic compound butter cut into slices from the side view.
Print

Roasted Garlic Butter Recipe

This easy Roasted Garlic Butter combines bold oven-roasted garlic with creamy butter and fresh herbs for a mouthwatering addition to endless recipes. Simply spread on fresh bread or elevate your favorite fish, meat, or vegetable dishes by topping them off with a dollop of this delicious butter.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 40 minutes
Resting Time 3 hours
Total Time 3 hours 45 minutes
Servings 4 ounces
Calories 214kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 whole garlic bulb
  • 1 teaspoon olive oil
  • 4 oz. unsalted butter, at room temperature (1 stick)
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt or sea salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 teaspoon chopped fresh herbs rosemary, chives, and parsley

Instructions

  • Preheat: Preheat oven to 400 degrees F.
  • Prep the garlic: Slice the top off the garlic and place it on a piece of aluminum foil.
  • Add oil: Pour olive oil over the garlic bulbs.
  • Roast: Wrap it tightly. It should look like a small pouch. Place it on a baking sheet and roast it in the oven for 40 minutes.
  • Check for doneness: To check doneness, carefully remove the aluminum foil (be careful as it is hot and steamy) and see if the garlic cloves are softened and lightly caramelized. If they are, you are good to go. If not, wrap it back up and let it roast for 5-10 more minutes or until the cloves are fully softened.
  • Remove the cloves: Let the roasted garlic cool for 10-15 minutes. Gently squeeze the head from the root end, pushing out all the soft cloves until you are left with the outer skin. Discard the skin and transfer the roasted garlic into a medium bowl.
  • Mash: Using the back of a fork, mash garlic until it is fully pureed.
  • Combine the ingredients: Into the same bowl, add the softened butter, salt, black pepper, and chopped herbs (if using). Mix until everything is combined. Alternatively, you can do this in a food processor.
  • Shape: You can use your garlic butter right away or shape it into a cylinder (make it a compound butter) for better presentation and portion control. To do so, place the garlic butter on a piece of plastic wrap (or parchment paper), shape it into a cylinder, and wrap it tightly. Place it in the fridge for at least 3 hours before using. When ready to serve, unwrap and cut it into slices and use in your recipe.

Notes

  • Make Ahead: Roast the garlic a day in advance and combine with butter and other ingredients when ready to serve. 
  • Store: Store in the fridge, either tightly wrapped or in an airtight container, for up to three days. 
  • Freeze: Freeze for up to a month, either tightly wrapped or in an airtight container. 
  • Thaw: Take the butter out of the freezer an hour before you expect to serve it. Make sure only to thaw the amount you want to use.

Nutrition

Calories: 214kcal | Carbohydrates: 0.3g | Protein: 0.3g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 61mg | Sodium: 294mg | Potassium: 12mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 0.03g | Vitamin A: 713IU | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 9mg | Iron: 0.04mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-garlic-butter/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Elotes https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-elotes/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-elotes/#respond Sun, 31 Jul 2022 13:26:24 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=57299 Are you looking for more quick corn recipes? Try my Air Fryer Corn on the Cob, lightly seasoned with fantastic,…]]>

Are you looking for more quick corn recipes? Try my Air Fryer Corn on the Cob, lightly seasoned with fantastic, charred corn flavor; it will be ready and on the table in 15 minutes. 

Love the flavors of elotes? Also, try our Elote Dip and Mexican Street Corn Soup recipes.

air fryer Mexican street corn on a plate from the top view

Why Should You Make This Recipe?

This elote recipe is the air fryer version of my fan favorite Mexican Street Corn, one of my most popular recipes. It is the perfect side dish or a quick snack to make when you are short on time. If that’s not reason enough, I have listed a few more below:

  • A great alternative to grilling: Mexican street corn in the air fryer is perfect for you if you don’t have a grill. You still get that excellent, charred corn taste without all the mess of grilling.  And since you can fire up the air fryer no matter the weather, every day can be Cinco de Mayo. 
  • Ready in 20 minutes: You will be stunned at how fast you can whip together this authentic Mexican corn on the cob in the air fryer. 20 minutes is all you need from start to finish.

Ingredients

Using the freshest corn on the cob and a few simple ingredients are all you need to make this melt-in-your-mouth air fryer street corn.

air fryer Mexican corn ingredients

Let’s start by gathering your fresh sweet corn (fully husked) and vegetable oil for cooking. For your elote sauce, you will need mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, and chili powder. And lastly, Mexican cotija cheese and fresh cilantro for your garnish.

Substitutions & Variations

If you are missing some ingredients or want to experiment a little, no worries; I’ve listed a few of the most common substitutions and variations below. Feel free to make this recipe your own.

  • Mexican Crema: If you are lucky enough to get your hands on some authentic Mexican crema, you are in for a treat. A cross between American sour cream and French crème fraiche, Mexican crema is thick and tangy, the perfect addition to Mexican fare, and a great alternative to air fryer corn on the cob with mayo and sour cream-based elote sauce. Simply omit mayo and sour cream and use ½ cup Mexican crema instead.
  • Cheese: Have everything you need but the cotija cheese, don’t panic; you can substitute parmesan cheese and even feta cheese (though I would recommend using low sodium feta) and still end up with excellent results.
  • Elote Seasoning: If you have access to Trader Joe’s, their elote seasoning is worth trying in this recipe.
  • Lemon juice:  If you don’t have any lime juice and are in a pinch, feel free to use some lemon juice in its place.
  • Spice it up: If you enjoy spicy flavors, you can increase the heat by adding more chili powder or cayenne pepper.
  • Frozen corn on the cob: You can use frozen corn to make Mexican fried corn on the cob when fresh is no longer available. You can find the instructions to use frozen corn in the recipe card below.
  • Not a fan of cilantro: You either love it or hate it. If you don’t care for it, omit the cilantro. 

How To Make Air Fryer Street Corn

If you find yourself with an abundance of fresh sweet corn and a craving for Mexican food, this air fryer Mexican street corn recipe is exactly what you need. Follow my step-by-step instructions below for quick and delicious elotes.

Be sure to preheat your air fryer to 380° F.

person making street corn in air fryer
  1. Prep corn: While you wait for your air fryer to preheat, brush each ear of corn with vegetable oil (or olive oil). 
  2. Air Fry corn: Once your fryer is ready, place ears of corn in a single layer in the air fryer basket and cook for 5-6 minutes.
  3. Make your elote sauce: While your corn is cooking, assemble your sauce by gently mixing your mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, and chili powder in a small bowl. 
  4. Rotate corn: Check your corn and rotate the ears to ensure even cooking. Fry for another 7-8 minutes (a total of 12-15 min of air frying time). 
person adding toppings to Mexican corn
  1. Apply sauce and serve: Carefully remove hot ears of corn from the fryer basket and allow to cool. After a few moments, cover each air fried corn generously with Mexican street corn sauce. Sprinkle all sides with Mexican cotija cheese, extra chili powder (if you wish), freshly chopped cilantro, and garnish with lime wedges. Enjoy!

How To Serve

On the cob or off the cob? That is the question. Fortunately, this recipe is a hit either way; I have listed some options for you to try below, let me know your favorite form of serving it.

  • As a snack by itself: My favorite way of eating air fryer Mexican corn on the cob is right from the air fryer and smothered in tangy Mexican flavored sauce; the mixture of hot charred corn and the kick of creamy sauce is pure perfection.
  • Elote in a cup: This is an excellent alternative to eating it on the cob. For elote in a cup, you will slice the charred kernels from the corn cobs and gently mix them in a small bowl with the prepared street corn sauce. For an elegant touch, spoon the corn mixture into glass cups, top with cheese and seasonings, and garnish with lime wedges for a perfect dinner party appetizer.

How To Store

This Mexican street corn air fryer recipe is so scrumptious that it will be hard not to eat it all at once; if you find yourself with some leftovers, below are some instructions for storage.

  • Storage: You can store your delicious corn leftovers in an airtight container. If your street corn is already assembled, it will be good for up to one day in the refrigerator.
  • Freezing: I would not recommend freezing this dish.
air fryer street corn with toppings from the side view

Expert Tips

Is this your first time making air fryer elote? Here are some helpful tips that will guarantee perfect results on your first try:

  • Cut the ears of corn in half: If you own a small air fryer or want to fry a lot of corn at the same time, you can cut each corn on the cobb in half. This way, you can fit more corn in your air fryer basket.
  • Do not overcrowd your fryer basket: To get the best possible char on each ear of corn, you want to be sure to place corn in a single layer.
  • You can use frozen corn: If you don’t have fresh corn on hand, you can make frozen corn elote. My method requires only 5 minutes of additional (hands off time) and requires no thawing. Instructions and cooking time are included in the recipe card below.
  • Use a flat platter for prep: Mixing your sauce ingredients on a flat platter or a large plate and then rolling your ears of corn through the mayonnaise mixture may help you get a more even sauce coverage. Finish each ear with a sprinkle of chili powder, cheese, and cilantro.
  • Extra Salt: Be sure to taste your Cotija cheese before adding salt to the elote sauce, as some Cotija cheese brands can be very salty.
  • Want to make it dairy free? Here is a recipe for Dairy-Free Mexican Street Corn Sauce you can use should you prefer it to have no dairy.

Other Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like:

If you try this Air Fryer Mexican Corn recipe or any other Mexican recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It is a great help to others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

air fryer elotes on a plate with toppings from the top view
Print

Air Fryer Elotes Recipe

These Air Fryer Elotes are perfectly seasoned, roasted to perfection, and topped with a creamy homemade elote sauce and plenty of cheese and cilantro. Serve this take on Mexican Street Corn as a quick appetizer or side dish for a weeknight dinner or your next fiesta. With only a few ingredients, you can throw these together in 20 minutes!
Course Side Dish
Cuisine Mexican
Diet Gluten Free, Vegetarian
Prep Time 5 minutes
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 20 minutes
Servings 5
Calories 213kcal

Ingredients

For The Corn On The Cob

  • 5 ears of corn on the cob husks fully removed
  • 1 teaspoon vegetable oil like avocado oil or melted butter

For The Street Corn Sauce

  • ¼ cup mayonnaise
  • ¼ cup sour cream
  • 1 tablespoon lime juice plus wedges of lime for serving
  • ½ teaspoon chili powder plus more to sprinkle over at the end
  • ½ cup crumbled cotija cheese*
  • 3 tablespoons fresh cilantro chopped

Instructions

  • Preheat the air fryer to 380 degrees F.
  • While it is heating, brush each ear of corn with vegetable oil.
  • Place in the air fryer basket in a single layer and air fry for 12-15 minutes, rotating them halfway through the air frying process. Let it cool for a few minutes before spreading it with the sauce.
  • Meanwhile, make the sauce by mixing together mayonnaise, sour cream, lime juice, and chili powder in a bowl.
  • When ready to serve, brush each corn on the cob with a generous amount of the mayo mixture. Sprinkle each corn with cotija cheese and chopped fresh cilantro on all sides. Serve with lime wedges on the side.

Notes

  • Additional Salt: Be sure to taste the cotija cheese you are using before adding salt to the salt. Some cotija cheese is very salty. If it is not, then you can add in ½ teaspoon salt and adjust it accordingly after giving it a taste.
  • Cut the ears of corn in half: If you own a small air fryer or want to fry a lot of corn at the same time, you can cut each corn on the cobb in half. This way, you can fit more corn in your air fryer basket. However, be sure not to overcrowd the basket to get proper charring.
  • Times may vary: It is a known fact that air fryer cooking times may vary. Take the cooking time here as a place to start and adjust accordingly. One easy way to gauge the process is to check halfway through the frying process. If it is getting too charred, then shorten the cooking time. Or visa versa.
  • Storage: Store leftover corn in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to one day. 
  • Freezing: I would not recommend freezing this dish.

Nutrition

Calories: 213kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 20mg | Sodium: 255mg | Potassium: 275mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 380IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-elotes/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Corn On The Cob https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-corn-on-the-cob/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-corn-on-the-cob/#respond Fri, 29 Jul 2022 19:16:01 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=57261 Can’t get enough? Once you master cooking sweet corn in air fryer, be sure to also try my Air Fryer…]]>

Can’t get enough? Once you master cooking sweet corn in air fryer, be sure to also try my Air Fryer Mexican Street Corn recipe.   

A plate of corn on the cob in air fryer recipe from side view

Ingredients

Crispy, sweet, and juicy corn on the cob is the star of the show in this delicious air fryer recipe, so take advantage of your local farmers’ market to find the freshest, sweetest corn possible. 

Air fryer sweet corn ingredients from the top view

Get started by gathering your ears of sweet corn (make sure you husk them first), some vegetable oil, kosher salt, and black pepper.

Substitutions & Optional Seasonings

  • Vegetable oil: I used avocado oil, but you can also use olive oil. If it is easier, you can also use cooking spray.
  • Unsalted butter: If you want to be decadent, you can use 1 tsp of unsalted butter in place of the vegetable oil. The butter helps crisp the corn and adds a creamy taste to the roasted corn kernels.
  • A sprinkle of parmesan cheese: If you are serving your air-fried corn as a side dish and want to elevate it to the next level, sprinkle it with grated parmesan cheese. The juicy kernels of corn mixed with crispy fried parmesan cheese bits are amazing, addicting, and a must-try.
  • Seasoning ideas: For additional flavors, get creative with your favorite seasoning blends. Try smoked paprika and/or chili powder for a splash of color and a little heat. Garlic powder sprinkled on each ear is also fantastic.
  • Frozen corn: If fresh corn is not in season, you can use this recipe with frozen corn. When using frozen corn, you do not need to thaw it first; it can go straight from the freezer to the air fryer; check the modification to cooking times described below.

How to Cook Corn On The Cob In Air Fryer 

You can make this air fryer corn on the cob at the height of summer or in the middle of winter. Whether you use fresh or frozen corn, the only thing that will be different is how you cook them.

I am giving you both options below to ensure you experience the most incredibly flavorful, crispy air fryer sweet corn imaginable. 

For both methods, preheat your air fryer to 380° F

If using fresh corn:

Person brushing oil on corn and adding salt and pepper from the top view
  1. Oil and season: Lightly brush each ear of corn with a thin layer of oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper (you can also add the optional seasonings at this time).
Roasting corn in the air fryer from the top view
  1. Fill fryer basket: Once your air fryer reaches 380° F, arrange your ears of corn in a single layer. Do not overcrowd your fryer basket.
  2. Air fry for 12-15 minutes: Rotate each ear of corn halfway through (around 6-7 minutes) for even cooking. If you want crispier corn, you can apply a layer of melted butter to each ear before rotating.
  3. Add butter and serve: Carefully remove the corn from the basket and smother it with butter or take it to the next level and try topping it off with my roasted garlic herb butter or drizzling it with Buttery Garlic Sauce. That being said, butter is optional but highly recommended. 

If using frozen corn:

Cooking frozen corn on the cob in an air fryer is not much different. It is only 5 minutes longer and there is no need to thaw the corn.

  1. Fill fryer basket: Once your fryer has reached 380° F, arrange the frozen corn on the cob (no need to thaw first) in a single layer and fry for 5 minutes.
  2. Brush with oil: Carefully remove the hot ears of corn and lightly brush with oil, sprinkle with salt and pepper (additional seasonings can be added now) and place corn back into the fryer basket.
  3. Air fry for 10-12 minutes: You will want to check on the corn after cooking for 5-6 minutes. Rotate and cook for the remaining time.
  4. Add butter and serve: Carefully remove the hot ears and layer on the butter. Again, the butter is optional, though it is highly suggested you give it a try.

What to Serve it With

The amazing thing about this recipe is its versatility. Air fryer roasted corn on the cob makes a perfect side dish all on its own, or you can remove those crispy kernels and add them to any recipe calling for corn. 

Below are a few recipe ideas to serve it with:

  • Seafood: Corn and seafood are a classic combination. Nothing screams coastal vibes more than fried corn and Grilled Shrimp Skewers, except perhaps pairing this corn with my delicious Grilled Mahi Mahi
  • Chicken: If seafood isn’t your thing, I’ve got you covered; corn on the cob makes a fantastic pairing with chicken. Give it a try with my Yogurt Marinated Chicken or alongside Mediterranean Lemon Chicken; either one makes for a delicious combo.
  • Salads: While I am a big fan of eating corn on the cob, I also like to husk it and throw it into my summer salad recipes, such as my Mexican Street Corn Pasta Salad and Esquites. I find that this is especially a good use of the leftover corn.
  • Dips: Use sweet corn kernels to make Elote Corn Dip for a quick and easy appetizer.

How to Store Leftovers and Reheat

Whether you include your air-fried corn on the cob as a part of your weekly meal prep or have some leftovers, below are the instructions to store and reheat:

  • Storage: A perfect make-ahead dish, this corn stores so well that you can keep it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days without losing flavor.
  • Reheat: To reheat the corn, pop it back into the air fryer basket and cook for 5 minutes at 320 F degrees to crisp it up.
Air fryer frozen corn on the cob with butter on it from the top view

Expert Tips

New to air frying? Here are some great tips for the best air-fried corn on the cob (even on your first try!).

  • Choose corn that is equal in size: For the best results, you want to choose corn that is similar in size, as mixing thin corn cobs with thick corn cobs could cause excess browning or undercooked corn.
  • Cut them in half: If you have a small fryer basket, you can cut the cobs in half for a better fit. Cutting them into smaller pieces is also great if you have a crowd of people or to make it easier for children to grab onto.
  • Do not overcrowd the air fryer basket: Keep the corn in a single layer so that the hot circulating air can reach every corn kernel and ensure even cooking.
  • Be sure to rotate the ears halfway through: To keep the corn from being cooked unevenly, you should turn them halfway through cooking.
  • Quick cooking: Air frying corn on the cob takes a fraction of the time necessary for other methods, so while it’s a good idea to get your fryer preheated, you will want to put off cooking the corn until the last thing, when the rest of your meal is close to being ready. Cooking the corn at the end ensures your piping hot meal is ready all at once. If you misjudged the time, it’s no big deal; cover the hot corn with aluminum foil to keep the heat in.
  • Cook time might slightly change based on your air fryer: Pay attention to the color and doneness while you are rotating the corn on the cob in the air fryer halfway through the cooking process. It is a known fact that there might be slight differences in cooking times with different brands of air fryers.

FAQs

How long to air fry corn on the cob?

Air fry corn on the cob for 12-15 minutes in an air fryer preheated to 380° F.

Do I have to cut corn on the cob in half to air fry them?

Cutting the ears of corn is optional. For air fryers with smaller baskets, it may be necessary to cut the corn so it will fit. Cutting the corn also makes it easier for kids to handle.

Can I cook frozen corn ears in the air fryer?

Absolutely! You can pull your frozen corn straight from the freezer and add it to your air fryer; no need to thaw it first. Cooking times and procedures may vary. See the instructions above to make perfect air fryer corn on the cob from frozen corn.

Can corn on the cob pop like popcorn in the air fryer?

Not unless it is a cob of popcorn variety corn. There is a difference between sweet corn and popcorn. The perfect corn for this recipe is sweet corn. So, no worries about it popping in your air fryer.

Can I air fry corn on the cob in husk?

You can air fry corn in its husk, but it will take a much longer time, and you will lose the crispy roasted flavor air-fried corn is famous for. For best results, I suggest husking the corn fully (don’t forget those little corn silks).

Other Easy Air Fryer Recipes You Might Also Like:

Here are a few other side dishes you can make using your air fryer:

If you try this Air Fryer Corn on the Cob recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air fryer corn on the cob on a plate from the top view
Print

Air Fryer Corn On The Cob Recipe

This easy air fryer corn on the cob recipe produces crisp, perfectly tender corn with a hint of sweetness and a buttery finish- without a grill! This versatile, 15-minute recipe makes for an easy side dish to accompany a weeknight dinner or can be served as a crowd-favorite addition to your BBQ or outdoor gathering.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Cook Time 15 minutes
Total Time 15 minutes
Servings 4
Calories 128kcal

Ingredients

  • 4 ears of corn on the cob husks fully removed
  • 1 teaspoon vegetable oil like avocado oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter optional

Instructions

  • Preheat air fryer to 380 degrees F.
  • While it is heating, brush each ear of corn with vegetable oil and season with salt and pepper.
  • Place in the air fryer basket in a single layer and air fry for 12-15 minutes, rotating them halfway through the air frying process.
  • Remove from the air fryer and top it off with butter*, if preferred.

Notes

  • Instructions for making this recipe with frozen corn: If using frozen corn, there is no need to thaw it before air frying them.
    Simply place frozen corn on the cob in the air fryer basket and the air fryer for 5 minutes. Carefully remove them from the basket, lightly brush with oil and season them with salt and pepper. Air fry for another 10-12 minutes making sure to rotate halfway through the air frying process. Carefully remove them from the basket onto a plate and top it off with butter if using.
  • Storage: Store leftover corn in the refrigerator in an airtight container for up to 5 days. 
  • Reheat: Reheat the corn in the air fryer at 320 F degrees for about 5 minutes, or until crisp. 
  • Butter: Use our Roasted Garlic Butter or Melted Garlic Butter Sauce to drizzle them in the end.

Nutrition

Calories: 128kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 305mg | Potassium: 246mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 344IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 4mg | Iron: 0.5mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-corn-on-the-cob/feed/ 0
Crispy Baked Eggplant https://foolproofliving.com/crispy-baked-eggplant/ https://foolproofliving.com/crispy-baked-eggplant/#comments Wed, 27 Apr 2022 21:14:26 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=51169 Why Should You Try this Recipe? Out of all the quick eggplant recipes to make, this oven-fried crispy eggplant is…]]>

Why Should You Try this Recipe?

Out of all the quick eggplant recipes to make, this oven-fried crispy eggplant is guaranteed to be a fan favorite. I personally love it because it is an Italian-inspired dish that is savory, simple, and oh so irresistibly crisp. Here are a few more reasons why it is worth a try:

Crispy baked breaded eggplant served with tomato sauce on the side
  • Ready in less than 30 minutes, crispy baked eggplant rounds are the perfect side dish. It comes together more quickly than everybody’s favorite, Eggplant Parmesan, but offers a very similar flavor and texture profile.
  • With so many ways to prepare eggplant, this recipe is the most flavorful. Packed with robust seasonings, nutty parmesan, and crunchy panko, this dish is rich enough to serve by itself (with your favorite dipping sauce, of course!).
  • This easy eggplant recipe packs serious crunch in every bite. And guess what? It uses no oil which means that it is much healthier than its pan-fried alternatives. So, go ahead and put this baked breaded eggplant recipe on the menu with no guilt.

Ingredients

To make sliced baked eggplant with panko, you will need globe eggplants, large eggs, panko breadcrumbs, shredded parmesan cheese, garlic powder, Italian seasoning, and black pepper.

ingredients for crispy aubergine portioned on the counter

If you prefer to serve it with a condiment on the side, my Homemade Tomato Sauce would be a perfect addition, but any of your favorite tomato sauces would work.

Helpful Notes & Variations

You can make crispy roasted eggplant in countless different ways—each of them delicious. These tasty variations are sure to please, whether you’re accommodating a special diet or simplifying ingredients.

  • Type of eggplant: Though I use globe eggplants—the larger, more spherical type of eggplant most common in the U.S.—you may also use Japanese eggplants for this recipe. However, Japanese eggplant is slightly skinnier, so the baking time may vary. If you are new to the world of eggplants, be sure to check out our guide on Different Types of Eggplants with Pictures.
  • Gluten-free fried eggplant: To make this recipe gluten-free, all you have to do is use gluten-free panko crumbs.
  • Vegan fried eggplant: Wonder how to make crispy eggplant vegan? Simply omit the eggs and parmesan cheese. Instead, dip eggplant slices first in aquafaba and then into a breadcrumb mixture made with panko breadcrumbs and nutritional yeast.
  • No breadcrumbs: If you want to make this crispy baked eggplant with no breadcrumbs, you’re in luck! My recipe for Baked Eggplant Slices preserves the rich flavor of roasted eggplant without the extra breading.

How to Make Crispy Eggplant?

This crispy roasted eggplant is a simple recipe that packs major flavor. Every bite of this easy side dish explodes with seasoned Italian flavor.

person lining sheet pan with parchment and slicing eggplant
  1. Preheat the oven: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F., and line two baking sheets with parchment paper. Set the sheets aside.
  2. Prepare the eggplant: Slice your eggplant into ½-inch slices, and set them aside. If you are new to preparing eggplant for cooking, be sure to check out my how-to guide on slicing an eggplant.
  3. Prepare the breading station: Whisk the eggs until in a shallow bowl. Then, whisk together the breading ingredients; panko breadcrumbs, parmesan cheese, garlic powder, Italian seasoning, and black pepper in a separate bowl.
person showing how to make crispy baked eggplant in four steps in a collage
  1. Coat the slices: Take a slice of eggplant and dip it in the eggs, letting any excess egg drip off. Then, dip the slice in the breadcrumb mixture, ensuring that you coat each side. You may have to gently push down on the slice to give it a full coating. Repeat this step until each eggplant slice has an even layer of egg and panko.
  2. Transfer the slices: Transfer the coated eggplant slices onto the prepared baking tray in a single layer, meaning no pieces overlap with one another.
  3. Bake: Place the baking sheets in the hot oven and bake for 15 minutes. Then, flip the slices of eggplant, rotate the pans, and bake until the veggies are lightly browned on top (12-15 minutes).
  4. Serve: Serve your deliciously crispy oven-fried baked eggplant slices right away alongside your favorite dipping sauce.

How to Serve

One of my favorite things about this crispy roasted eggplant dish is its versatility. Whether you serve it as a crisp side dish or a savory snack, you never have to be at a loss for what to make with eggplant ever again.

crispy brinjal slices topped off with marinara sauce
  • As a side dish: I think we can all agree that a good eggplant side dish recipe is a godsend for meal planning and/or entertaining. Versatile and tasty, these crispy baked rounds make a great pairing with meat dishes like my  Chicken Fricassee, Turkish Kofte, and Spaghetti Bolognese.
  • As an appetizer or a snack: Who says you can’t eat baked panko eggplant by itself? (Not me!) Serve these eggplant chips with warm marinara sauce or my Tomato Basil Sauce (drizzled with yoghurt dressing) or blue cheese sauce for dipping, and the whole tray will be gone in seconds.
  • As a topping: For a lighter meal option, I love chopping up this crispy baked eggplant recipe and using it to top my favorite salads. Spring Mix Salad, Mediterranean Quinoa Salad, and Kale Avocado Salad recipes are a few to name.
  • Use it to make my Eggplant Parm Recipe: I used these breaded eggplant cutlets in my go-to easy eggplant parmesan recipe for a healthier twist on the classic eggplant parmigiana recipe. Baked and breaded eggplant slices are not only easy to put together but also mess-free.

How to Store & Reheat

Follow these easy steps for storing any leftovers so you won’t have to waste a single bite of these delicious breaded eggplant slices. Though, if I am being honest, I think these breaded baked eggplant slices taste best on the day they are made, preferably as soon as they come out of the oven. 

  • Storage: To store any leftovers, place the breaded slices in an airtight container in the fridge. It will stay fresh for up to 2 days, though it will likely lose its crisp texture once placed in the refrigerator.
  • Reheat: To reheat your panko-baked eggplant, place it in a 300-degree F. oven for 10 minutes or until warmed through.
  • Freezing: I do not recommend freezing the leftovers of this dish. 

Expert Tips

This simple recipe is a favorite recipe among beginner chefs—and it’s no wonder why. Follow my foolproof tips to take your eggplant cooking skills to the next level.

  • Olive oil spray: This is an optional step, but if you want to give your eggplant slices extra crispiness, lightly spray them with olive oil spray before placing them in the oven.
  • Not all eggplant is created equal: Because eggplants come in different shapes and sizes, depending on the size of your eggplant, you may have to use more eggs and panko to give your slices a complete coating. For this recipe, I used globe eggplants that were approximately 1 lb. each.
  • Seasoning: There’s no doubt that this recipe has—in my opinion—the best breading for eggplant. However, if you want to switch up your eggplants’ flavor profile or add a fresh twist to your recipe feel free to swap out the seasonings you use in your breading mixture.
  • Sweating eggplants: Though not necessary, you may choose to sweat your eggplant slices before coating them in the egg and panko. Salting eggplant before cooking removes any unwanted bitterness, seasons the veggie from the inside out, and gives your slices extra crunch by removing excess water. For more information on sweating eggplants be sure to check out my detailed article, How To Salt Eggplant.

FAQs

Your crunchy eggplant recipe doesn’t have to be rocket science. Whether you want to know how to bread eggplant for baking or make eggplant taste good, below are answers to some of the most popular faqs:

Is eggplant gluten-free?

Yes! Since gluten comes from wheat and eggplant is wheat-free, eggplant is safe for anyone with a gluten-based dietary restriction.

Is eggplant supposed to be crunchy?

No, unless it is coated with breadcrumbs. Properly cooked eggplant should have a caramelized and crispy exterior and a soft and tender interior. Giving each slice enough room in the pan will result in this ideal texture—no crowding allowed! 

How long to bake breaded eggplant?

I recommend baking your eggplant slices at 400 degrees F. for 15 min on one side and 10-12 minutes on the other. This baking time ensures your eggplant rounds come out with a crisp, golden brown exterior and soft insides.

How to make eggplant taste good?

The best way to make your crispy eggplant slices taste good is to coat them with delicious ingredients. Breading your eggplant in panko breadcrumbs, nutty parmesan cheese, and fresh Italian seasonings will give them a mouthwatering flavor.

Other Baked Eggplant Recipes You Might Like:

Are you still wondering what can you do with an eggplant? Then, here are a few more baked eggplant recipes for you from the archives:

If you try this Crispy Breaded Baked Eggplant recipe or any other eggplant recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment about your experience below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Crispy baked eggplant on a plate with marinara sauce
Print

Crispy Baked Eggplant Recipe

This Crispy Baked Eggplant is made by breading eggplant slices in a mixture of panko, parmesan cheese, garlic powder, and Italian seasoning and then baking them to crispy perfection. Serve it as a side dish or with tomato sauce on the side.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine Italian American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 28 minutes
Total Time 38 minutes
Servings 6 servings
Calories 174kcal

Ingredients

  • 2 medium- sized globe eggplant rinsed and dried ~1 pound each*
  • 2 large eggs
  • 1 ½ cups panko breadcrumbs
  • ¾ cup grated parmesan cheese
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • 1 teaspoon Italian seasoning
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 ½ cups Homemade Tomato Basil Sauce optional

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line two baking sheets with parchment paper. Set them aside.
  • Slice eggplant into ½ inch thick slices.* Set them aside.
  • Set up your dredging station: Whisk eggs in a shallow bowl. Whisk panko breadcrumbs, parmesan cheese, garlic powder, Italian seasoning and black pepper in another shallow bowl.
  • Dip each eggplant slice in eggs (letting the excess drip off) first and then into the panko mixture making sure that it is coated on all sides. You may have to gently push it down to ensure that slices are fully coated.
  • Transfer onto the parchment-lined baking sheet in a single layer. Repeat with remaining eggplant slices.
  • Bake for 15 minutes, flip each eggplant rounds and rotate baking sheets, and bake for another 10-12 minutes or until lightly browned on top and soft to the touch.
  • Serve it right away with your favorite dipping sauce (or Marinara sauce).

Notes

  • Serving size: A globe eggplant that is approximately one pound sliced in 1/2-inch thickness yields 8-10 slices. Based on that, this recipe serves 6 people 3-4 crispy eggplant per person.
  • Based on the size of your eggplant you may have to use a bit more (or less) egg or breadcrumbs. Use this recipe as a starting point and adjust the amounts as necessary.
  • * Sweating eggplants: Thanks to modern farming, nowadays the eggplants sold in the supermarket do not need salting. However, if you prefer to salt yours, check out my foolproof guide on How to Salt Eggplant.
  • Storing leftovers: I think these breaded baked eggplant slices are best on the day they are made, preferably as soon as they come out of the oven. However, you can store leftovers in an airtight container in the fridge for up to 2 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 174kcal | Carbohydrates: 22g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 6g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 65mg | Sodium: 353mg | Potassium: 434mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 229IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 166mg | Iron: 2mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/crispy-baked-eggplant/feed/ 8
Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-shiitake-mushrooms/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-shiitake-mushrooms/#respond Wed, 16 Mar 2022 22:41:13 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=49138 Before roasting shiitake mushrooms it is important to clean them properly. If you are new to it, be sure to…]]>

Before roasting shiitake mushrooms it is important to clean them properly. If you are new to it, be sure to check out my beginner-friendly post for more information on How To Clean Shiitake Mushrooms. And if you’d rather cook them in a skillet, check out my Sauteed Shiitake Mushrooms recipe.

Baked Shiitake mushrooms in a plate with a spoon on the side

Ingredients

To make this baked shiitake mushrooms recipe, you will need fresh shiitake mushrooms, olive oil, kosher salt, and freshly ground black pepper. 

ingredients for the recipe from the top view

Variations and Substitutions

  • Oil: You can use any vegetable oil you like. I usually prefer the neutral flavor of extra virgin olive oil. Still, avocado oil, sesame oil, coconut oil, and even melted butter would also work. 
  • Flavor with garlic: Mince a clove of fresh garlic, and voila: The perfect seasoning for a garlicky roasted shiitake mushrooms dish that’s as flavorful as it is effortless.
  • Additional seasonings and spices: This shiitake mushrooms recipe may be basic, but you can easily jazz it up with numerous spices and seasonings. My favorite way to add flavor to my roast mushrooms is to sprinkle them with garlic powder, ground cumin, red pepper flakes, and/or Italian seasoning.
  • White wine vinegar: Some people also drizzle their shiitakes with a tablespoon of white wine vinegar before roasting them to brighten up their earthy flavor. 
  • Garnishes: Finish off your baked masterpiece with chopped fresh herbs like parsley, thyme, rosemary, or lemon zest to give your mushrooms a fresh twist.
  • A squeeze of lemon juice: If I’m planning to use these baked shiitake mushrooms in a salad, I love drizzling them with some freshly squeezed lemon or lime juice. These coated mushrooms pair well with salad greens such as spring mix and butter lettuce.

Instructions on How to Make

The steps to roasting shiitake mushrooms could not be easier. Simply:

  1. Heat oven & prepare a sheet pan: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees F. Line a roasting pan with parchment paper or aluminum foil and set it aside.
person cleaning shiitake mushrooms
  1. Start by cleaning shiitake mushrooms: Place mushrooms in a colander and rinse under cold water. Transfer onto a clean kitchen towel and pat dry with paper towels to dry them as much as you can. Alternatively, you can use a damp cloth to clean mushrooms one by one. 
    Remove the stems and save them to use in mushroom stock for later.
person seasoning shiitake mushrooms for baking
  1. Add the flavorings: Place the now-cleaned shiitake mushroom caps in a large bowl. Drizzle them with olive oil and season with salt and pepper. Toss mushrooms using clean hands, ensuring that you evenly coat each mushroom with the flavorings.
person arranging mushrooms on a sheet pan
  1. Arrange on the sheet pan: Place mushroom caps onto the prepared rimmed baking sheet and arrange them on in a single layer with the caps facing down (or gill side up).
  2. Bake & turn: Roast shiitake mushrooms in the oven for 10 minutes, remove them from the oven, and turn them over one by one using a pair of tongs. Bake for another 8-10 minutes until they turn golden brown. The larger mushrooms should be crisp on the edges, while the smaller ones should be crispy throughout.
  3. Serve: Transfer onto a serving platter. If preferred, sprinkle with fresh herbs and more freshly ground black pepper. You can serve seasoned shiitake mushrooms warm, at room temperature, or even cold.

What To Do With Shiitake Mushrooms

Deliciously crispy and lightly caramelized, shiitake mushrooms make an addictive snack. However, you can use them in countless other ways. Below are just a few recipes with shiitake mushrooms:

person removing roasted shiitake mushrooms from the sheet pan with a spatula

How To Store

Leftover roasted shiitake mushrooms can be stored in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. They’ll lose their crispness as they sit but still be delicious.

Expert Tips

  • Dry them thoroughly: The secret to crispy/crunchy shiitake mushrooms is to dry them thoroughly. Even though it’s a bit of extra work, take the time to dry them off.
  • Hand-pick them at the store: If you can, hand-pick your mushrooms one by one at the grocery store. When buying shiitakes, look for firm mushrooms with large caps without bruises. Avoid those that are wilted, wet, or slimy.
  • Finish it off with sea salt: If you’re a fan of salt like I am, finish off your roasted shiitakes with coarse sea salt for a bit more flavor.

FAQs

How to make crispy mushrooms?

The secret to making crispy shiitake mushrooms is two-fold. First, be sure to dry them thoroughly after rinsing them. Second, turn mushrooms halfway through the roasting process to make sure they bake evenly. Keep a close eye on them as they roast, too, since the smaller shiitakes crisp quicker than the larger ones. You may have to remove them before the larger ones are crisp throughout and done roasting.

Love Mushrooms? Here are a few recipes you might like:

If you try this Roasted Shiitake Mushroom recipe or any other one of our mushroom recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms in a bowl garnished with fresh herbs
Print

Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms Recipe

Roasted Shiitake Mushrooms are delicious when served by themselves as a snack. They can also be served as a side dish or an appetizer. Ready in less than 20 minutes, this easy recipe is healthy and quick to make.
Course Vegetarian Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 18 minutes
Total Time 28 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 132kcal

Ingredients

  • 1 lb shiitake mushrooms
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil or avocado oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon Italian parsley chopped – optional

Instructions

  • Preheat oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit. Line a rimmed baking sheet with parchment paper and set it aside.
  • Place shiitakes in a colander* and rinse under cold running water for 30-45 seconds while moving them around to help get rid of any dirt or debris. Transfer the mushroom caps onto a clean kitchen towel and pat dry with paper towels to dry them as much as you can.
  • Transfer the shiitakes onto the prepared pan. Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Using your clean hands, toss to make sure that they are evenly coated with oil and seasoning. Arrange them on a single layer with the mushroom caps facing down.
  • Roast in the preheated oven for 10 minutes, remove from the oven, turn them around, and bake for another 8-10 minutes or until the larger mushrooms are crisp on the edges and the smaller ones are crispy throughout.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary. Transfer onto a serving plate and, if preferred, garnish with fresh herbs.

Notes

  • Leftover roasted shiitake mushrooms can be stored in an airtight container for up to 3 days in the refrigerator. They’ll lose their crispness as they sit but still be delicious.
  • If you have a salad spinner, it makes the cleaning process quicker. I included the instructions on how to use it in this How To Clean Shiitake Mushrooms post.

Nutrition

Calories: 132kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 302mg | Potassium: 352mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 85IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 4mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-shiitake-mushrooms/feed/ 0
Air Fryer Green Bean Fries https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-green-bean-fries/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-green-bean-fries/#comments Thu, 03 Mar 2022 03:43:55 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=48937 For another air fryer green beans side dish recipe, check out these easy Air Fryer String Beans. And if you…]]>

For another air fryer green beans side dish recipe, check out these easy Air Fryer String Beans. And if you are in need of more creative green bean recipes, you might also like my Boiled Green Beans and Garlic Butter Green Beans recipe.

Air fried green bean fries in a plate served by a person from top view

Why You Should Make This Recipe

These parmesan green bean fries are packed with flavor that even picky eaters will love this healthier option instead of oily, heavy deep-fried green beans.

  • A quick and easy recipe: This is a simple recipe made with a handful of ingredients that takes about 30 minutes from start to finish.
  • Great way to sneak in some veggies in your diet: Thanks to the panko breading, these air fryer green bean chips are addictively crispy making it a fun yet healthy snack, especially compared to its fried version. 
  • The recipe can be easily adapted to low-carb and keto diets with a simple ingredient swap: almond flour in place of panko.

Ingredients

You will need a handful of ingredients for this simple recipe. Grab fresh green beans, all purpose flour, large eggs, panko bread crumbs, shredded parmesan cheese, and kosher salt and black pepper.

ingredients for the recipe are portioned and placed on a kitchen counter

Green Beans vs Haricot Verts

The recipe below is made with regular supermarket green beans. If you can get your hands on French green beans aka Haricot verts, shorten the cooking time by half as they cook much faster.

How to Make This Recipe?

There are only a few steps for making green bean fries in air fryer. Simply:

person trimming and cleaning green beans and green beans in air fryer
  1. Prep green beans for air frying: Place green beans in a colander and rinse under cold water. Line a kitchen towel (or a few sheets of paper towels) on a sheet pan and spread the beans to dry them as much as you can. Trim the ends. 
  2. Air fry unbreaded green beans: While you can skip this step, during my recipe testing I found out that airfrying green beans for a few minutes before breading yielded fully cooked green bean fries. To do so, preheat your air fryer to 370 F degrees. Place green beans into the air fryer basket making sure that they are in a single layer and air fry them for 2 minutes. Transfer them onto a paper towel-lined sheet pan. If you’re using French green beans (haricot verts), this step is not necessary as they cook faster than normal string beans.
a collage of images showing how to make the recipe
  1. Breading: Set up the breading station with three plates. Place all-purpose flour in the first plate and whisked eggs in the second. Mix the panko breadcrumbs, parmesan cheese, and garlic powder in the third plate. To bread, dip each green bean first into the flour, then the egg mixture, and finally into the panko mixture.Collect them on a baking sheet on the side.
green beans in air fryer before and after they are air fried
  1. Air fry breaded green beans: Air fry the breaded green beans, this time at 390 F for 5 minutes. Be sure to turn them halfway through cooking.
  2. Serve: Let the green beans cool for a few minutes. Season with salt and pepper to taste, and serve with your favorite dipping sauce.

How to Make it Keto-Diet Friendly?

To make keto green beans fries or low carb crispy green bean fries, omit the all-purpose flour and use blanched almond flour instead of panko for a low-carb crispy coating. The version made with almond flour breading is just as delicious and worth trying even if you are not following a keto diet.

Additionally, because low-carb green bean fries cook longer in the air fryer, there is no reason to pre-air fry them. Follow the below steps, after rinsing, drying, and trimming your green beans.

  1. Set up the breading station this time with only two shallow bowls. Whisk the eggs and place it in the first bowl. Then mix together almond flour, parmesan cheese, and garlic powder in the second bowl. 
  2. Bread green beans: Dip green beans in eggs, and then into the almond flour mixture making sure to coat them on all sides. Collect the breaded green beans on a plate.
  3. Air fry breaded green beans: Place them in a single layer in the air fryer basket and air fry them at 390 F for 9-10 minutes making sure to turn them halfway through cooking.
  4. Serve: Let the green beans cool for a few minutes. Season with salt and pepper to taste right before serving.

How to Store

  • Storage: It’s worth noting that green bean fries are best served fresh. If necessary, you can store them in an airtight container, but they will lose some of the crispy texture.
  • Freezing: I would not recommend freezing the leftover air fried green bean fries.

How to Serve

  • Pair it with your favorite dipping sauce: Serve these parmesan crusted green beans by themselves or with your favorite dipping sauce: sriracha mayo, blue cheese dip, or your favorite ranch dressing are all great options.
  • Easy Side Dish: In addition to being the perfect snack, these air fried green bean fries make a great side dish to serve with meat, chicken, seafood and vegetarian dinner recipes.
person dipping a string bean fry in sauce

Expert Tips

  • Prep everything before you start: To make this green bean fries recipe fast, set up the breading station, “ the assembly line”, before you start.
  • Do not overcrowd the air fryer basket: As it is with all air fryer recipes, it is best to have the green bean fries in a single layer. I would recommend air frying them in batches. 
  • Season well: While the recipe for breaded green beans in air fryer below tastes wonderful as it is. You can easily make it even more delicious and flavorful by adding in your favorite spices. In my experience, spices such as paprika, cayenne pepper, red pepper flakes, and chili powder work wonderfully. Just add them into the panko (or almond flour) mixture.
  • Cooking spray: Some people spray the green bean fries with a cooking spray right before air frying. I tested both ways (with and without spraying) and didn’t see much difference in the crispiness. Though if you want you can spray it lightly right before air frying them.

FAQs:

Can I make air fryer green bean fries without all purpose flour?

You can but I find that using a bit of flour helps with making it crispy because it creates a thicker surface for the eggs and breading to stick to. If you prefer not to use all purpose flour, try my version made with almond flour.

Can I bake green bean fries in the oven?

Yes, you can. Follow the recipe exactly written. Instead of frying them in the air fryer, place breaded green beans onto a parchment-lined baking sheet in a single layer. Bake them in a 350 degrees F. preheated oven for 12-13 minutes, carefully flip them over, and bake for another 4-5 minutes or until they turn golden brown.

Other Air Fryer Vegetable Recipes You Might Like:

If you try this Air Fryer Green Bean Fries recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

air fried green beans on a plate
Print

Air Fryer Green Bean Fries Recipe

With an addictively crispy topping, these Air Fryer Green Bean fries are the perfect snack or side dish. They are easy to make and require no additional use of oil.
Course Snack
Cuisine American
Diet Vegetarian
Prep Time 20 minutes
Cook Time 7 minutes
Total Time 27 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 215kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 pound fresh green beans rinsed, dried and trimmed
  • ¼ cup all-purpose flour
  • 2 large eggs whisked
  • 1 cup panko bread crumbs
  • ½ cup shredded parmesan cheese
  • 1 tablespoon garlic powder
  • Salt and pepper to taste optional

Instructions

  • Preheat air fryer to 370 degrees.
  • Add in the fresh green beans into the air fryer making sure that they are not overlapping. You may have to do this in two batches. Air fry for 2 minutes. Remove from air fryer onto a paper towel lined sheet pan. Let them cool for a few minutes.*
  • Meanwhile, set up the breading station by arranging three plates.
  • Place all purpose flour on the first plate. Place whisked eggs into the second plate. Finally, mix together panko bread crumbs, parmesan cheese, and garlic powder in the third one.
  • Preheat the air fryer to 390 degrees.
  • To bread the green beans, dip each green bean into the first plate with the all-purpose flour, then into the eggs, and finally into the panko breadcrumbs mixture.
  • Carefully transfer them into the air fryer basket. Air fry for 5 minutes making sure to turn them halfway through.
  • Remove them from the air fryer and allow them to cool for a few minutes. If preferred, season them with salt and pepper to taste before serving.

Notes

  • I know having to air fry them before breading is an extra step but during my recipe testing I found out that if you skip this step, they don’t fully cook. The breading turns golden brown but the green beans are still raw. You can skip this step if you have blanched green beans on hand.
  • Storage: It’s worth noting that green bean fries are best served fresh. If necessary, you can store them in an airtight container, but they will lose some of the crispy texture.
  • Freezing: I would not recommend freezing these. They are best when made fresh.
  • For a low carb/keto version, omit using all-purpose flour and use blanched almond flour in place of panko bread crumbs. You can also skip the step where you air fry them before breading them. To do so:
    1. Set up the breading station this time with only two shallow bowls. Whisk the eggs and place them in the first bowl. Then mix together almond flour, parmesan cheese, and garlic powder in the second bowl. 
    2. Bread green beans: Dip green beans in eggs, and then into the almond flour mixture making sure to coat them on all sides. Collect the breaded green beans on a plate.
    3. Air fry breaded green beans: Place them in a single layer in the air fryer basket and air fry them at 390 F for 9-10 minutes making sure to turn them halfway through cooking.
    4. Serve: Let the green beans cool for a few minutes. Season with salt and pepper to taste right before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 215kcal | Carbohydrates: 27g | Protein: 13g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 93mg | Sodium: 340mg | Potassium: 347mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1009IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 223mg | Iron: 3mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-green-bean-fries/feed/ 2
Air Fryer Green Beans https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-green-beans/ https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-green-beans/#respond Thu, 03 Mar 2022 03:39:52 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=48692 If you’re a fan of easy vegetable side dishes like this one and want to learn different ways to use…]]>

If you’re a fan of easy vegetable side dishes like this one and want to learn different ways to use green beans in your everyday cooking, be sure to check out my No Mushroom Soup Green Bean Casserole, Garlic Butter Green Beans recipe and my essential guide on How To Boil Green Beans.

Air fryer green beans in a bowl with a spoon on the side

Ingredients For Air Fryer Green Beans

Just a few ingredients go into this easy recipe for air fryer green beans:

  • Fresh green beans or string beans
  • Olive Oil
  • A little salt
  • Some black pepper
Ingredients for the recipe are laid out

Notes on Ingredients

  • Green Beans vs. Haricot Verts: Haricot verts, or also known as French green beans, are thinner and longer than standard green beans because they are harvested earlier in the season. If you’re using haricot verts, halve the cooking time: for air fryer haricot verts, that means cooking them for 3-5 minutes rather than 7-9.
  • Changing it Up: Make this dish your own! Because air fried green beans are so simple to cook, you can have fun with the recipe and add your own unique flair. Try seasoning your green beans with chili powder, garlic powder, red pepper flakes, a squeeze of lemon juice, or your favorite spices for an extra kick, or sprinkle some Parmesan cheese on top before air frying for a melty addition. 
  • Cooking Oil: Although I used olive oil in my version, you can switch the type of oil used in this recipe. For an Asian-inspired flavor, try air frying green beans in sesame oil.

How to Make this Recipe

Person preparing green beans before cooking
  1. Preheat your air fryer to 375 degrees F (190°C)
  2. Wash and dry green beans: Place the green beans in a colander and wash them under cold running water.  Place them on a sheet pan lined with a kitchen towel or paper towels and dry them as much as you can.
  3. Trim green beans: Trim the ends to remove their tough, stringy tails. A great way to cut the beans is to line 5-7 of them up at a time on a cutting board and remove the stem end with a single cut. Based on your personal preference, you can cut them in half or leave them whole.
  4. Dry them off: Gently dry them on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper. Transfer them into a large bowl.
Four images showing how to air fry green beans
  1. Add seasoning: Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Gently toss to make sure all of the string beans are coated with oil and seasoning.
  2. Air fry green beans: Transfer to the air fryer basket, ensuring that they are arranged in a single layer. If not, you may have to cook them in batches. Cook them until crisp-tender, 7-9 minutes, tossing halfway through cooking. For even more crispy green beans, you can extend the air frying time by 1-2 minutes.
  3. Serve: When done, carefully remove them from the air fryer and serve immediately.

How to Store Leftovers

  • Storage: Store your green beans in an airtight container in the fridge for up to a week. Reheat in the air fryer or oven, or just eat them straight away—they make a delicious snack right out of the fridge.
  • Freezing: Freeze your green beans in a Ziploc bag or other container for up to 2 months.
  • Thawing: Reheat your frozen green beans in the air fryer or oven at 375°F for 7-8 minutes.
Air fryer string beans after they are cooking still in the air fryer basket

Expert Tips

Here are a few helpful tips to get the most delicious and perfectly cooked air-fried string beans:

  • Make sure the green beans are dry: For best results, dry your green beans thoroughly with paper towels before air frying for the perfect crispy texture.
  • Single layer: Don’t overcrowd the green beans when you put them into the air fryer basket. Instead, spread them out into a single layer before air frying so each green bean will be perfectly cooked. It is best to do several batches for the crispiest and perfectly air-fried beans.
  • Toss halfway through: To ensure the green beans fry evenly, toss them halfway through cooking.
  • The timing might change: depending on the brand of air fryer you use, the cooking time might vary slightly. I used the Instant Pot Air Fryer, but if you used Nuwave, Actifry, or another brand, you might need to adjust the timing.

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

These quick, versatile air fryer string beans are a perfect side dish (or healthy snack!) that complements a wide variety of main dishes and accommodates diverse diets and tastes. Here are a few reasons why you should give it a try:

  • It’s a quick, easy side dish that takes under 15 minutes from start to finish and uses only a few simple ingredients you probably already have in your pantry.
  • The green beans come out perfectly crispy using much less oil, thanks to the convenience of the air fryer.
  • You can change up the flavor with spices, herbs, and toppings—make it your own!
  • It works perfectly for any occasion ranging from a holiday celebration to a normal weeknight dinner. 

FAQs

How long to cook green beans in the air fryer?

Air fry fresh green beans for 7-8 minutes at 375°F. For air fryer haricot verts (French green beans), the cook time is 4-5 minutes at 375°F. If you have too many green beans for one layer in the air-fryer basket, cook them in batches.

How long to cook frozen green beans in the air fryer?

Cook frozen green beans for up to 11-12 minutes at 375°F. No need to thaw them beforehand.

What temperature to air fry green beans?

The ideal temperature for air frying green beans is 375°F degrees (190°C).

How to air fry green beans without oil?

Simply omit the oil. The green beans will still be delicious but a bit softer instead of crispy.

How to make crispy green beans in air fryer?

For extra-crispy air fried green beans, extend the cooking time by 1-2 extra minutes.

Is this recipe healthy?

Yes, it is. Green beans are low in calories and high in fiber and vitamin C. Additionally, air frying green beans with a very small amount of oil helps us achieve a healthier fried green beans recipe without all the frying oil.

Other Air Fryer Vegetables You Might Also Like:

If you try this Easy Air Fryer Green Beans recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

Air Fryer Green Beans in A bowl
Print

Air Fryer Green Beans Recipe

Air Fryer Green Beans is a quick, easy, and healthy side dish to serve with weeknight dinner or as a holiday side dish. It can be made fresh or frozen making it ideal all year round.
Course Side Dish
Cuisine American
Diet Vegan
Prep Time 10 minutes
Cook Time 9 minutes
Total Time 19 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 66kcal

Equipment

Ingredients

  • 1 lb. fresh green beans
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

Instructions

  • Preheat your air fryer to 375 degrees F.
  • Place green beans in a colander and wash them under cold running water. Trim the ends to remove their tough, stringy tails before cooking. A great way to cut the beans is to line 5-7 of them up at a time on a cutting board and remove the stem end with a single cut. At this point, you can cut them in half or leave them as a whole.
  • Gently dry them on a sheet pan lined with parchment paper. Transfer them into a large bowl.
  • Drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with salt and pepper. Gently toss to make sure all of the string beans are coated with oil and seasoning.
  • Transfer to the air fryer basket ensuring that they are arranged on a single layer. If not, you may have to cook them in batches. Cook them until crisp-tender 7-9 minutes, tossing halfway through cooking.
  • When done, carefully remove them from the air fryer and serve immediately while still warm.

Notes

  • Seasoning ideas: Change it up by seasoning your green beans with chili powder, garlic powder, red pepper flakes, or your favorite spices for an extra kick, or sprinkle some Parmesan cheese right before serving.
  • Green Beans vs. Haricot Verts: Haricot verts, also known as French green beans, are thinner and longer than standard green beans because they are harvested earlier in the season. If you’re using haricot verts, halve the cooking time: for air fryer haricot verts, that means cooking them for 3-5 minutes rather than 7-9.
  • If using frozen green beans: Cook frozen green beans for up to 11-12 minutes at 375°F. No need to thaw them beforehand.

Nutrition

Calories: 66kcal | Carbohydrates: 8g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 4g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Sodium: 298mg | Potassium: 241mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 783IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 43mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/air-fryer-green-beans/feed/ 0
Healthy Blue Cheese Dip Without Sour Cream https://foolproofliving.com/blue-cheese-dip/ https://foolproofliving.com/blue-cheese-dip/#respond Sun, 06 Feb 2022 06:57:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=2340 If you’re looking for a sweet dip recipe to end the night, make sure to include yogurt fruit dip alongside…]]>

If you’re looking for a sweet dip recipe to end the night, make sure to include yogurt fruit dip alongside strawberry and pear slices as part of your Game Day spread.

One of my favorite game day recipes is this slow-baked chicken wings recipe. While it is delicious by itself, it is better when served with a dip that I can serve with vegetables on the side. This is how I ended up with this blue cheese dip recipe. It is your usual blue cheese dip but with a healthy twist! It’s creamy, tangy, crumbly, and savory, with just the right amount of heat and it does not include an ounce of sour cream. All the blue cheese lovers will go crazy for this one.

Blue Cheese Dip Without Sour Cream served with vegetables on the side

Why Should You Try This Recipe?

I love any recipe that allows the ingredients to shine. I know you’ll love it because:

  • It requires only 8 simple ingredients – most of them already tucked inside your pantry and fridge.
  • Healthy and high quality ingredients make a dip that will out beat any grocery store bought brand.
  • One bowl and 5 minutes is all you need to have this easy dip recipe at the ready once party time comes along.
  • It’s easily customizable to suit your tastes and can be made in small batches or doubled or tripled depending on how many guests you have coming over.

Ingredients

The ingredient list for this creamy blue cheese dip requires no sour cream and no buttermilk. Gather together plain yogurt, vegan or regular mayo, garlic, lemon juice, Tabasco sauce, salt, black pepper, and blue cheese.

ingredients for the recipe in small bowls from the top view

Ingredient Substitutions & Notes

  • Yogurt: I originally made this recipe with fat-free plain yogurt, but have come to realize the taste and quality of full-fat yogurt is worth a few extra calories. Greek yogurt would make for an extra thick consistency but any plain (unsweetened) yogurt would work.
  • Mayo: I prefer the taste of vegan mayo, but regular mayo works just as well. Light mayo doesn’t offer the same taste or consistency.
  • Garlic: Use a teaspoon garlic powder or even onion powder if you’re in a pinch.
  • Lemon Juice: Swap out the fresh lemon juice for fresh lime juice or apple cider vinegar.
  • Hot Sauce: Omit the hot sauce completely or swap it out for another favorite, such as Frank’s or Cholula.
  • Blue Cheese: Seek out a wedge of high-quality, crumbly blue cheese. A few different kinds of blue cheese include Gorgonzola, Maytag blue, Stilton, or Roquefort. Crumble it with your fingertips when you get home.

How to Make

I can assure you, this is the best blue cheese dressing recipe that will be ready before you can say, “party time.” And if you think you can not make a blue cheese dressing with no sour cream think again, because it is super easy:

Person showing how to make the recipe
  1. Prepare dip: Place yogurt, mayo, garlic, lemon juice, Tabasco sauce (if using), salt, and pepper in a medium bowl. Give it a big stir. Add the blue cheese. Taste for additional salt and adjust if necessary.
  2. Store: Transfer to a serving bowl, cover, and chill until you are ready to serve.
  3. Serve: Set out on a large platter alongside freshly cut vegetables, bread, chips, pretzels, or spicy buffalo wings.

Serving Suggestions

This creamy, cooling and easy blue cheese dipping sauce work wonders with spicy hot chicken wings, but some of my other recommendations include:

  • Freshly cut vegetables, like carrots, broccoli, celery sticks, tomatoes, and cauliflower or drizzle over a wedge salad
  • Bread cubes, like pumpernickel, whole wheat, sourdough, or rye
  • Chips, such as Kettle cooked, tortilla chips, or pita chips
  • Pretzels of any shape and size

How to Make Ahead and Store

  • Make Ahead Instructions: This veggie dip actually tastes better after chilling for a few hours in the fridge. Make it the night before or morning of, cover with plastic wrap, and store in the fridge.
  • Storage Instructions: To store leftover blue cheese dip, simply transfer to an airtight container and keep for up to 5 days.

Variations

A few additional ingredients can really make this blue cheese sauce one to call your own. Some of my favorites include:

  • Herbs: Add a few tablespoons of freshly minced herbs, such as fresh parsley, dill, or chives.
  • Bacon: Add up to ½ cup crumbled cooked bacon, reserving a few tablespoons for garnish.
  • Onions: Whip up a batch of caramelized onion, finely chop, and stir right in with the remaining ingredients for a fun onion and blue cheese dip recipe.
Healthy blue cheese dip served with vegetables on the side

Expert Tips

  • Use high quality ingredients. Since this recipe requires minimal ingredients, the type of blue cheese matters. Look for a northern Italy or imported blue cheese wedge for the best homemade dressing.
  • Opt for full-fat everything. I used to make this dip with non-fat yogurt, but have come to appreciate the added texture and creaminess of full-fat. Go for full-fat mayo as well.
  • Make at least a few hours or one day in advance. This allows for the ingredients to marry together, making the dip taste so much better.
  • Adjust the quantity of blue cheese. Feel free to add more or less blue cheese crumbles depending on how much you like it.
  • Make it a chunky or smooth dip. This makes a chunky blue cheese dip, with big chunks of cheese throughout. For a smoother consistency, mash the blue cheese with the back of a fork in a separate bowl before adding to the yogurt mixture or whiz it all together in a food processor.

FAQs

What does blue cheese dip taste like?

It is the perfect balance of creamy, cooling, tangy, sharp, and spicy. Give it a stronger flavor with more blue cheese or turn down the spice with less hot sauce, the choice is up to you.

How do you thicken blue cheese dip?

Thicken the dip by first mashing the cheese in a separate bowl and blending it in, or adding more blue cheese crumbles. Allowing it to sit in the fridge for a few hours will help it stay thick upon serving.

What’s the difference between blue cheese dip and dressing?

Blue cheese dip vs dressing comes down to consistency. Blue cheese dressing is simply a thinner version of dip. To turn it into dressing, thin it out with a few tablespoons of whole milk.

How long does homemade blue cheese dressing last?

When stored covered or in an airtight container in the fridge, homemade blue cheese dip will last for 5 days. When serving, keep it out at room temperature for no longer than 2 hours. If the dip develops an off-color or odor after a few days, that means it’s time to throw it out.

Other Yogurt Based Recipes You Might Like:

If you try this Blue Cheese Dip with No Sour Cream recipe or any other recipe on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

person dipping into blue cheese dip with no sour cream with a broccoli
Print

Blue Cheese Dip Without Sour Cream Recipe

A healthier blue cheese dip/dressing made with yogurt instead of sour cream. Even though it is lighter it is still super delicious and great to serve with chicken wings or as a blue cheese dip by itself.
Course Condiment
Cuisine American
Diet Gluten Free
Prep Time 5 minutes
Total Time 5 minutes
Servings 4 servings
Calories 170kcal

Ingredients

  • 1/2 cup plain yogurt preferably full fat
  • 1/4 cup mayonnaise or vegan mayo
  • 1-2 clove garlic minced
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
  • 2-3 dashes Tabasco Sauce or any hot sauce optional
  • 1/2 cup blue cheese crumbled
  • 1/4 teaspoon kosher salt*
  • 1/4 teaspoon coarse black pepper

Instructions

  • Place yogurt, mayonnaise, garlic, lemon juice, and Tabasco sauce (if using) in a medium bowl. Give it a stir. Add the blue cheese.
  • Taste for seasoning and add in salt and black pepper.
  • Chill, covered, until you are ready to serve.
  • Serve with freshly cut carrots, broccoli, celery sticks, tomatoes, and/or chicken wings.

Notes

  • Be sure to give it a taste before adding salt. Most blue cheese has an ample amount of salt so it is important to give it a taste before adding more.
  • Make ahead: This veggie dip actually tastes better after chilling for a few hours in the fridge. Make it the night before or morning of, cover with plastic wrap, and store in the fridge.
  • Storing Leftovers: To store leftover blue cheese dip, simply transfer to an airtight container and keep for up to 5 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 170kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 13mg | Sodium: 630mg | Potassium: 121mg | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 129IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 150mg | Iron: 1mg
]]>
https://foolproofliving.com/blue-cheese-dip/feed/ 0
4 Ingredient Guacamole Recipe https://foolproofliving.com/4-ingredient-guacamole-recipe/ https://foolproofliving.com/4-ingredient-guacamole-recipe/#comments Fri, 04 Feb 2022 22:00:27 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=48350 Ingredients You’ll Need: As the name suggests, you will only need 4 ingredients for this easy guac recipe. So, gather:…]]>

Ingredients You’ll Need:

As the name suggests, you will only need 4 ingredients for this easy guac recipe. So, gather:

  • Avocados: Since the main ingredient in guacamole is avocado, it’s important to select the best kind. In my opinion, the best avocados for guacamole are Hass avocados because of their creamy flesh, rich taste, and protective skin.
  • Fresh Garlic
  • Kosher salt
  • Fresh lime juice
4 Ingredient guacamole from the top view served with tortilla chips

Substitutions and Optional Add-Ins

Whether you make this recipe a game-day snack or a condiment for your favorite Mexican meal, there are countless ways to make it yours. Adding flavor is a snap with these main ingredients.

Ingredients for the recipe are laid out on a kitchen counter

Substitutions:

  • Garlic powder: Garlic powder is an easy, pantry-ready substitute for fresh garlic in this guacamole recipe. 
  • Lemon juice: Don’t like the taste of limes? Lemon juice will give your guac the same vibrancy without any unwanted bitter taste. You can even omit the extra juice for an easy 3 ingredient guacamole recipe.

Optional add-ins:

The beauty of this healthy guacamole recipe is that you can make it even more delicious with one or more of these optional add-ins. Simply chop them up and add them in as you are making your guacamole.

Easy guacamole with optional toppings like onion, cilantro, tomatoes and jalapenos
  • Red onion: Red onion is just the ingredient you need for guacamole that packs a punch. Pungent and crisp, this add-in will take your guac to the next level. And if you want to take it up a notch, try adding a tablespoon of my Mexican Pickled Onions.
  • Fresh tomato or fresh cherry tomato salsa (pico de gallo): These additional ingredients will give your guacamole brilliant color, juicy texture, and a garden-fresh taste that’s out of this world.
  • Jarred salsa: Could you eat salsa by the spoonful? Adding a little of this tasty condiment will give your guacamole a layer of savory, piquant flavor.
  • Cilantro: Fresh and earthy, this herb will bring out all the green flavors of your homemade guacamole. One of the best ways to enliven your guac recipes is to sprinkle a handful of fresh cilantro on top of the guacamole.
  • Jalapeño: If you love spicy foods, then jalapeno is the ingredient you’ve been looking for. This bright pepper will make every bite of your guac explode in your mouth.
  • Ground cumin: Want to add some depth to your four-ingredient guacamole? This rich spice will give any dish a rich, warm, and earthy layer.

How To Make This Recipe?

Ready in five minutes, this easy four-ingredient guacamole recipe is a lifesaver for anyone looking for a quick, delicious fix. Whip up this dish in no time and without the messy clean-up.

Person showing how to make four ingredient guacamole recipe with step by step photos
  1. Prepare the avocados: Peel, pit, and cube your ripe Hass avocado, and put the cubes in a medium bowl. Then, use a potato masher or a fork to mash the cubes until smooth.
  2. Add the rest of the ingredients: Add the garlic, salt, and lime juice to the avocado puree. Stir the mixture until it’s thoroughly combined. You can make it super smooth or leave it chunky depending on your preference. Taste for seasoning and add in more if preferred.

How to Make Ahead, Store, and Freeze

With a working fridge and an airtight container, there’s no reason to let a bite of this basic guacamole go to waste. Meal prep and leftover storage will be a breeze with these handy tips.

A collage of photos showing how to store guacamole
  • Make-Ahead and Storage: You can make your four ingredient guac one day in advance. Evenly spread the guacamole in an airtight container and cover its surface with a thin yet visible layer of water, lemon juice, or lime juice. Then, cover the container with a layer of plastic wrap, pressing the plastic flush against the surface of the guacamole. Store guacamole in the fridge once all air bubbles have been removed and the container is sealed. When ready to eat, remove the liquid and enjoy!
  • Freezing: Unlike guacamole recipes with water-filled ingredients, like tomatoes, onions, and jalapenos, this simple recipe freezes wonderfully. Just store it in an airtight container, such as a Ziploc bag, and remove as much air as possible. Your leftover guacamole will stay fresh for up to three months.

Expert Tips

This 4 avocado guacamole recipe is super simple to make, but you make your life even easier with these pro tips. Find all the scrumptious secrets about my homemade guac right here.

  • Serve your guacamole at room temperature. Not only do ripe avocados have a better flavor when served at room temperature, but cold guacamole is also harder to scoop. Plus, this recipe’s fresh, mild flavors come out when served at room temperature. 
  • Multiply the recipe for an easy dish to serve a crowd. No one has to lose out on this savory dish. Make sure everyone gets their fill by multiplying this recipe to satisfy as many mouths as your table can handle.

How to Use?

It doesn’t matter whether you make this simple guacamole recipe for nachos, serve it with chili, or eat it by the spoonful. This tasty recipe is guaranteed to stun no matter how you serve it.

Person scooping guac with a chip from the top view
  • By itself: Serve this delicious dip with tortilla chips or raw veggies for a healthy snack you can make in minutes. Take the stress out of party menus and afternoon pick-me-ups when you have this simple recipe at your fingertips.
  • With nachos: Warm, cheesy, and bursting with savory flavor, this Mexican classic is the perfect pair with guacamole. Dollop your 5-minute dip atop my layered Chicken Nachos and prepare yourself for a heap of compliments to the chef!
  • With tacos: Guacamole, and tacos? Sounds like a match made in heaven! This mild topping amplifies every bite of savory, rich, and spicy tacos. Try it alongside my Flank Steak Tacos or Brisket Tacos for a meaty meal that will fill you in minutes. Or, serve this good guac with Black Bean Quinoa Tacos for a gluten-free dish vegetarians will adore.
  • With quesadillas: Take your ooey-gooey quesadilla to the next level by serving it alongside a bowl of fresh, flavorful guacamole. Serve this condiment alongside my rich, buttery Spinach Quesadillas or Chicken Quesadilla Cake, and your tastebuds will thank you.
  • To top off chili or burrito bowls: Want to add a rich, creamy taste to your favorite Mexican bowl? Spoon some guacamole on a bowl of hot, smoky chili—like my White Chicken Chili or Vegetarian Chili—or atop homemade Vegan Burrito Bowls to bring out every layer of flavor.
  • Make Avocado Toast or a Burger: If you have any leftovers, simply spread it on a piece of toast the next day and top it off with a fried egg for a delicious and healthy breakfast. Or use it to layer an Avocado Bacon Burger during the BBQ season.
  • With Margaritas: What is better than a bowl of guacamole served with margaritas? Try my Pineapple Margaritas or Blueberry Margaritas to treat yourself with some Mexican deliciousness.

FAQs

Have more questions about this five-star recipe? Make this mild guacamole recipe easy with this collection of most-asked questions. You’ll be an avocado expert in no time. 

Is it safe to eat avocado after it turns brown?

Yes! Though brown avocados may not look appetizing, the browning process results from a chemical reaction when avocado flesh touches to air—a non-toxic process known as oxidation. Avocados can sit out for several days before spoiling.

Is guacamole good for you?

Guacamole has tons of health benefits. This avocado-based recipe has many vitamins, healthy fats, and potassium, among countless other essential nutrients.

  • How many avocados for guacamole for 4?
  • As a general rule, I recommend using one avocado per person. Therefore, you should use four avocados to serve four people.

  • How do you make guacamole for nachos?
  • To make this dish for nachos, follow the recipe as written. Then, put dollops of guacamole on top of your nachos or in a side dish right before serving.

    Why Make This Recipe?

    This fast, easy guacamole recipe comes together in a cinch. With simple preparation, a few minimal ingredients, and a creamy, snackable taste, it’s the perfect dish for avocado lovers, large crowds, and even kids.

    • This basic recipe only takes 4 ingredients and 5 minutes to make, making it the ultimate beginner-level recipe.
    • Gluten-free, low-carb, and vegan, this healthy recipe tastes as good as it is good for you. This avocado-based dish packs a ton of essential nutrients, such as vitamin B6, healthy fats, and potassium.
    • This mild guacamole recipe is kid-friendly since it doesn’t have any spicy jalapeño or large chunks of onion. However, it’s easy to jazz up with other zesty, fresh, and spicy ingredients. More on that below.
    • You can easily make this 4-ingredient guacamole recipe for a crowd by multiplying the recipe. Doubling—or even tripling—this recipe is easy to feed a large group.

    Similar Recipes You Might Like:

    If you are a fan of quick and easy appetizers like this guacamole recipe here are a few more recipes that you might also like:

    Save This Recipe
    Want to save this recipe? Enter your email below and we’ll send the recipe link to your inbox so you can easily come back to it when you are ready to make it. Plus, you’ll get great new recipes every week.

    If you try this 4 ingredient guacamole recipe or any other one of our easy Mexican recipes on Foolproof Living, please take a minute to rate the recipe and leave a comment below. It helps others who are thinking of making the recipe. And if you took some pictures, be sure to share them on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them on my stories.

    4 Ingredient guacamole served in a bowl from the top view
    Print

    4 Ingredient Guacamole Recipe

    This easy 4-ingredient guacamole recipe is made by mixing together ripe avocados, garlic, lime and salt. It is not only the best but also the easiest appetizer you can make in 5 minutes for your next Mexican fiesta.
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine Mexican Cuisine
    Diet Vegan
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Total Time 5 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 326kcal

    Ingredients

    • 2 cloves garlic minced
    • 2 tablespoons lime juice
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • 4 large ripe Hass avocados

    Instructions

    • Mix together garlic, lime juice, and salt in a large bowl.
    • Cut the avocados in half and carefully remove the pit. Scoop out the avocados and place them into the bowl.
    • Using a potato masher or the back of a fork mash the avocados until it reaches to your desired level of chunkiness.
    • Taste for seasoning and add in if necessary.

    Video

    Notes

    • Salt: I used Kosher salt but you can also use table salt or sea salt.
    • Make-Ahead and Storage: You can make this recipe one day in advance. Evenly spread the guacamole in an airtight container and cover its surface with a thin yet visible layer of water, lemon juice, or lime juice. Then, cover the container with a layer of plastic wrap, pressing the plastic flush against the surface of the guacamole. Once all air bubbles have been removed and the container is sealed, store the guacamole in the fridge. When ready to eat, remove the liquid and enjoy!
    • Freezing: Unlike guacamole recipes with water-filled ingredients, like tomatoes, onions, and jalapeños, this simple recipe freezes wonderfully. Just store it in an airtight container, such as a Ziploc bag, and remove as much air as possible. Your leftover guacamole will stay fresh for up to three months.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 326kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 20g | Sodium: 305mg | Potassium: 990mg | Fiber: 14g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 297IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 28mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/4-ingredient-guacamole-recipe/feed/ 8
    Roasted Carrot Hummus https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-carrot-hummus/ https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-carrot-hummus/#comments Tue, 12 Oct 2021 15:48:00 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=14848 Today’s recipe, Roasted Carrot Hummus, is the newest addition to our collection of easy appetizers. Similar to some of the…]]>

    Today’s recipe, Roasted Carrot Hummus, is the newest addition to our collection of easy appetizers. Similar to some of the other reader favorites like my Baked Goat Cheese Dip, Italian Bread Dipping Oil, and Muhammara, it is ready in less than 20 minutes.

    Roasted Carrot Hummus in a bowl with vegetables and olives around it

    Why Should You Make This Recipe?

    • Next-level flavor: The caramelized flavor of roasted carrots mixed in with tahini, chickpeas, and a squeeze of lemon juice is surprisingly flavorful and can be a great alternative to the classic hummus recipe with only one quick step (aka adding roasted carrots)
    • Easy to customize: While the recipe as written is great, if you are having to accommodate different diet restrictions, perhaps requiring it to be made without tahini or chickpeas (for Whole 30), you can easily make a few ingredient swaps to customize it to your needs. It is also vegan, gluten-free and paleo friendly.
    • Versatile: Entertain in style by serving it with crudite vegetables (like I did) or simply use it to spread your morning/avocado toast for a delicious breakfast.

    List of Ingredients:

    To make this carrot hummus recipe you will need three sets of ingredients. The list below might look long but I bet you have all of them in your pantry.

    For Roasting Carrots:

    In terms of veggies, you will need carrots and whole garlic cloves. Make sure to wash and chop your carrots and don’t be afraid to mix them up with some colorful carrots such as purple or yellow. 

    the ingredients for roasted carrots are laid out on a marble backdrop

    I like to cut them into equal (2-inch) pieces to make sure they roast evenly. You will also need a few garlic cloves, olive oil, ground cumin, and salt and black pepper.

    For The Hummus:

    Regular hummus ingredients are portioned out and placed on a marble backdrop

    For the hummus ingredients, gather tahini (aka sesame paste), olive oil, fresh lemon juice, water, salt and black pepper, and chickpeas.

    For The Toppings:

    You can certainly serve this roasted carrot hummus without any toppings, but toppings are usually the fun part. A few of my favorites include black or white sesame seeds, chopped fresh herbs like parsley or dill, and a drizzle of olive oil.

    How To Make It?

    carrots being roasted on a sheet pan
    1. Roast the vegetables: Arrange carrot and garlic cloves in a single layer on a baking sheet. Drizzle it with olive oil and sprinkle it with salt and pepper. Roast in a preheated 400 degrees F oven for 30-35 minutes. Set aside to cool.
    person showing steps of making carrot hummus in four photos
    1. Prep the tahini mixture: Meanwhile, whisk together tahini, olive oil, lemon juice, water, salt and pepper in a small bowl. Place roasted carrots, garlic and drained chickpeas in a food processor.
    2. Process: Pulse 4-5 times to break them. Then while the machine is running, pour the tahini dressing through the opening. 
    3. Scrape: Stop and scrape the sides of the bowl to incorporate any unmixed chunks. Give it a taste and add more seasoning if necessary.
    4. Garnish & Serve: Transfer into a bowl, drizzle it with a tablespoon of olive oil and sprinkle it with fresh parsley.
    roasted carrot hummus with veggies around it

    Variations:

    What I love most about this Roasted Carrot Hummus is that you can easily accommodate various dietary needs with a few simple ingredient adjustments. Here are a few variations I tried:

    • Carrot Hummus without Chickpeas: Not allowed to eat legumes because you’re following the Whole30 diet? No worries! Simply replace the can of chickpeas with 2 or 3 more carrots or a ½ cup of cauliflower florets. 
    • Carrot Hummus without Tahini: If you’re not crazy about the taste of sesame paste, use an equal amount of unsalted and unsweetened peanut or almond butter in place of tahini.
    • Carrot Turmeric Hummus: For a little extra boost of seasoning, add ½ teaspoon of dried turmeric but keep in mind that a little goes a long way.
    • Moroccan Spiced Carrot Hummus: If you want to add a unique flavor straight from the Middle East, try adding a mix of ¼ teaspoon each of ground cinnamon, ginger, coriander, and all spice to the hummus while blending in the food processor.
    • Carrot Sriracha Hummus: Like your dip with a little bit of kick? Try mixing in 1 tablespoon of sriracha!
    • Switch up the flavors with toppings: Inspired by the way I serve my Whole Roasted Carrots, you can top it off with crumbled feta, fresh dill, and pomegranate seeds.

    How and What to Serve With?

    There are so many options when it comes to serving this carrot hummus dip and no wrong way to eat it! Here are a few of my favorite ways to serve this appetizer:

    Carrot hummus is being served as a part of cheese platter
    • Serve it with crackers & raw vegetables: Pita chips, crackers, root vegetable chips, raw veggies (like snap peas, cauliflower, and broccoli) provide a colorful serving option.
    • Serve it as a part of a charcuterie board: Present this homemade hummus as part of a meat and cheese platter for a unique spin on an appetizer display.
    • Use it as sandwich spread: On the next day, use it to spread over toasted bread and top it off with sliced avocado for a delicious vegan breakfast.

    How To Store, Freeze, and Thaw

    • To Store: If you have leftovers, place them in an airtight container (make sure that it is at room temperature)  and store in the fridge for upto 3 days. 
    • To Freeze: As long as it is kept in an airtight container, carrot hummus will keep fresh for upto a month.
    • To Thaw: Thaw in the fridge overnight. You may have to give it a stir before serving as ingredients tend to separate. Thawed out hummus is good for up to 5 days and should not be refrozen.

    Expert Tips

    • Chunky or smooth: If you prefer chunkier hummus, keep an eye on the food processor and stop it before it becomes too well blended. For fluffy hummus with a smooth texture, allow the processor to mix the ingredients for a longer period of time. 
    • Scrape the bowl: Like it is with any dip recipe, it is a good idea to stop the machine and scrape the sides a few times to make sure it is processing evenly.
    • Taste for seasoning: Be sure to give it a taste before serving and season accordingly.
    • Don’t have a food processor? While a food processor is your best option, a high speed blender (such as Vitamix) will work as well. However, since they are more powerful it is a good idea to keep a close eye on it as it blends.

    FAQs

    Do I have to peel the carrots when making this carrot hummus recipe?

    This is a personal choice. If you wash it well and scrub it lightly with a kitchen brush to get rid of any of the debris, you do not need to peel the carrots, especially if your carrots are organic.

    How many calories are in carrot hummus?

    A serving of this carrot hummus is around 188 calories.

    Is carrot hummus Keto-diet friendly?

    Hummus is considered keto-friendly. However, due to the high carb content of chickpeas and carrots, they should be consumed in small amounts.

    Other Carrot Recipes You Might Also Like:

    Whether you are a fan of Food Network / Giada’s Carrot Hummus or have always loved Bon Appetite’s Roasted Carrot Hummus recipe, I hope you give my version a try. I know those are favorited by many people but I promise you that my version is just as good, if not better.

    And if you have some leftover carrots, here are a few more recipes to try”

    [/su_note]
    roasted carrot hummus in a bowl close up from the top view
    Print

    Roasted Carrot Hummus Recipe

    This Roasted carrot hummus has all of the creaminess of classic hummus, but with the volume turned up. The sweetnees coming from caramelized roasted carrots mixed with tahini and chickpeas take the simple hummus recipe to a whole new level. Serve this easy dip as an appetizer or as a part of your meat and cheese boards.
    Course Appetizer
    Cuisine American
    Diet Gluten Free, Vegan
    Prep Time 10 minutes
    Cook Time 35 minutes
    Total Time 45 minutes
    Servings 6 servings
    Calories 188kcal

    Ingredients

    For the Roasted Carrots:

    • 8-10 medium carrots scrubbed well and cut into big chunks ( about 1 1/4 pounds)
    • 2 cloves garlic peeled
    • 2 tablespoons extra virgin olive oil
    • ½ teaspoon ground cumin
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper freshly ground

    For the Hummus:

    • 2 tablespoons tahini sesame paste
    • 3 tablespoons of extra virgin olive oil
    • 3 tablespoons lemon juice freshly squeezed
    • 2 tablespoons water more if needed
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper
    • ¾ cup canned chickpeas rinsed and drained

    Optional Garnish:

    • 1 teaspoon black or white sesame seeds
    • Drizzle of olive oil
    • 1 tablespoon chopped parsley

    Instructions

    • Pre-heat the oven to 400 degrees. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper. Place the carrots and garlic onto the prepared sheet, drizzle with olive oil and sprinkle with ground cumin, salt and pepper. Roast for 30 minutes. Let them cool for 10 minutes.
    • Whisk together the tahini, olive oil, lemon juice, water, salt and pepper in a bowl until thoroughly combined.
    • Transfer the roasted carrots and garlic into the bowl of a food processor. Add in the chickpeas. Pulse 4-5 times, scrape the sides of the bowl and then turn the processor on. As it runs, drizzle the tahini mix through the tube. Let it run until the hummus is creamy. You might have to stop and scrape the sides of the bowl a few times.
    • Taste for seasoning and add in more salt and pepper if necessary.
    • Garnish with a drizzle of olive oil, sesame seeds, and parsley if using.

    Notes

    • This carrot hummus recipe yields 1 1/2 – 2 cups of carrot hummus.
    • To Store: If you have leftovers, place them in an airtight container (make sure that it is at room temperature)  and store in the fridge for up to 3 days. 
    • To Freeze: As long as it is kept in an airtight container, carrot hummus will keep fresh for up to a month.
    • To Thaw: Thaw in the fridge overnight. You may have to give it a stir before serving as ingredients tend to separate. Thawed out hummus is good for up to 5 days and should not be refrozen.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 188kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Sodium: 503mg | Potassium: 330mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 13598IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 46mg | Iron: 1mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/roasted-carrot-hummus/feed/ 29
    Spinach Quesadilla https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-quesadilla/ https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-quesadilla/#comments Wed, 11 Aug 2021 16:35:25 +0000 https://foolproofliving.com/?p=43466 This Spinach Quesadilla pleases your tastebuds, wallet, and picky eaters with nothing but simple, fresh, and flavorful ingredients. After all,…]]>

    This Spinach Quesadilla pleases your tastebuds, wallet, and picky eaters with nothing but simple, fresh, and flavorful ingredients. After all, who can resist the rich taste of sauteéd spinach, hearty garlic, and buttery cheese? Plus, when served with Mr. Spice’s zesty, vegan Tangy Bang sauce, this spinach quesadilla recipe really comes to life.

    Add to your collection of Mexican party food by serving this spinach and cheese quesadilla alongside other fresh and savory recipes, like my Easy Mexican Street Corn and Quinoa Chili.

    Spinach Quesadilla cut into small pieces and served on a plate

    Ingredients

    You will need just a few simple ingredients to make this cheesy spinach quesadilla recipe. For the spinach filling, you will need:

    • Unsalted butter: Melted butter is needed to saute spinach and brush the tortillas before cooking them. Olive oil (or any other vegetable oil) can be used instead if preferred.
    • Spinach: I used fresh baby spinach. However, frozen spinach can be used. If you decide to go that route, be sure to thaw it in the fridge overnight and squeeze all the juice out of it before using it as a filling.
    • Fresh garlic cloves: A small clove of minced garlic will help flavor the spinach, but if you want, you can omit using it.
    • Kosher salt & pepper
    Ingredients for the recipe are laid out on a marble backdrop

    To prepare the spinach tortillas part of the recipe, gather:

    • Flour tortillas: I used store-bought 9-inch flour tortillas. However, gluten-free tortillas, corn tortillas, or even wheat tortilla quesadillas work just as well for those following a special diet.
    • Monterey Jack Cheese: While the authentic quesadilla recipe uses Qaxaca cheese, since it is not widely available most people use Monterey Jack cheese when making quesadillas. If you can get your hands on Qaxaca cheese, go for it. Alternatively, you can use shredded Mexican cheese blends that are available in most grocery stores.
    • Mr Spice’s Tangy Bang Sauce (Optional): To add a bold, citrusy heat to this easy quesadilla recipe, Mr. Spice’s Tangy Bang sauce is just what you need. Not only is this sauce GMO-, gluten-, and sodium-free, but it’s also low-calorie and low-carb! For another healthy flavor addition, you can also try Mr. Spice’s Garlic Steak sauce to give your quesadillas a meaty, smoky twist.

    Optional Add-Ins & Variations

    Whether you want to add a tender protein, a crisp vegetable, or a diet-friendly twist to this dish, spinach quesadillas are one of the easiest recipes to make your own.

    Here are a few ideas to make it your own:

    • Mushrooms: Get an irresistible umami flavor by turning this recipe into a spinach mushroom quesadilla. All you need is 1 cup of sliced and sauteéd baby portobello or sauteed shiitakes.
    • Chicken: To make a chicken and spinach quesadilla, just add cubed baked chicken breasts or leftover rotisserie chicken. Only 1 cup is necessary for 4 tortillas.
    • Shrimp: Bring the smoky, summer taste of the grill to your quesadilla by adding in grilled shrimp.

    How To Make Spinach Quesadillas?

    Because these spinach and cheese quesadillas can be made in four steps and less than 20 minutes, they’re the perfect dish for any cook on a time crunch.

    Person showing how to saute spinach
    1. Sauteé the spinach: Melt 1 tablespoon of butter in a 10- or 12-inch, large nonstick skillet over medium heat. Add the spinach, put on the lid, and cook for 3-4 minutes. Once the spinach has lost most of its volume, add in the garlic, Tangy Bang sauce, salt, and pepper. Stir, and then transfer the fully cooked spinach onto a plate or small bowl. Use a paper towel to clean the skillet and set it aside.
    Person showing how to assemble spinach and cheese tortillas with photos
    1. Assemble the tortillas: Lay 4 flour tortillas on a flat work surface. Place ½ cup shredded cheese on one half of each tortilla. Then, divide the cooked spinach mixture equally among the tortillas and place it on top of the cheese. Fold the plain half of the tortilla on top of the spinach. Brush each tortilla with melted butter.
    Person showing how to pan sear quesadillas
    1. Cook the quesadillas: Place the large skillet over medium heat and place the quesadillas butter side down. Then brush the top with the rest of the melted butter. Cook them 1-2 minutes on each side, until the cheese melts and they’re golden brown. Transfer the cooked quesadillas to a cutting board and repeat the cooking process with the remaining quesadillas.
    spinach cheese quesadilla cut into small pieces on a cutting board
    1. Serve: Slice the quesadillas into wedges and garnish with cilantro leaves. If desired, serve the quesadillas with a side of Tangy Bang sauce and sour cream for dipping.

    How to Store and Reheat?

    • Storage: Crispy, gooey, and hot off the skillet, quesadillas are best on the day they’re made. However, leftovers can be stored in the fridge in an airtight container for up to 2 days.
    • Reheating leftovers: To reheat, set the oven to 300 degrees F. and place the quesadillas inside for 5-8 minutes.

    Serving Ideas:

    While you can serve these cheese and spinach quesadillas by themselves (and they are wonderful that way) or with a side of Mr. Spice’s Tangy Bangy sauce, you can take them up a notch by serving them with some of the classic Mexican condiments such as:

    • Guacamole: If I am serving quesadillas to a crowd, I usually make a big batch of my 4-ingredient Guacamole recipe. People can use it to top them off or as a dip on the side.
    • Salsa: During the summer months, when cherry tomatoes are in abundance, I make a batch of my Cherry Tomato Salsa to serve as a sauce/dip on the side.
    • Mexican Street Corn Salad: Serve this humble quesadilla recipe with my Mexican Street Corn Salad to transform it into a delicious meal.
    Person dipping spinach quesadillas in a sauce

    Expert Tips:

    This is a rather easy recipe, but there are a few things that I’d like to mention to help you succeed on the first try. Be sure to read the expert tips below before you start making the recipe:

    • Liquid in spinach: After sauteing spinach, be sure to drain any excess liquid to prevent your quesadillas from becoming mushy.
    • Don’t overfill your quesadillas: While it is tempting to fill them to the brim, it is best to follow the recipe as written and avoid overfilling the quesadillas. Otherwise, they could potentially fall apart when you flip them.
    • Reheat your skillet: The secret to getting quesadillas that are crispy on the outside and soft and cheesy on the inside is to brush them with melted butter and cook them in a preheated hot skillet. I usually preheat the skillet over medium-high heat first. Then turn it down to medium as soon as I put my spinach quesadilla on top so that it won’t burn.

    Why Should You Try This Recipe?

    Need more convincing? These spinach and cheese quesadillas are one of the most beloved Mexican recipes. With toasty tortillas and melty cheese, what’s not to love about this delicious side dish?

    • Quick and easy, this dish is so simple that you can make it for breakfast on your busiest mornings without skipping a beat.
    • These veggie quesadillas are a great way to get fussy eaters (hello, toddlers!) to eat leafy greens and even ask for seconds.
    • Customize this spinach quesadillas recipe with hundreds of delicious add-ons, from sauteéd mushrooms to smoky grilled shrimp.

    FAQs

    When scouting out a new recipe, you deserve to know what’s in it! Learn all you need to know about nutrition information and ingredients right here.

    What’s the best cheese for Quesadillas?

    The best cheese for quesadillas is Qaxaca cheese. However, since it is not widely available, most people use Monterey Jack cheese. Alternatively, you can make your own cheese blend by mixing Monterey Jack, mozzarella, and cheddar cheese.

    Can you use mozzarella cheese for quesadillas?

    Though it’s not the traditional choice, mozzarella can be used as a creamy and easy-to-melt quesadilla cheese. Add some basil and tomato, too, and you can even make Caprese quesadillas!

    How many calories are in spinach quesadillas?

    Each serving of spinach quesadillas is around 386 calories.

    Are spinach quesadillas healthy?

    Spinach quesadillas are an excellent source of dairy, leafy greens, and fiber, making them both a delicious and nutritious choice. Plus, spinach is packed with vitamins and minerals that boost the immune system, iron levels, and skin health.

    Got Some Leftover Spinach? Try These Recipes:

    If you make this recipe, I would greatly appreciate it if you could take a minute to rate it and leave a comment below. It is a wonderful way to support this website and help those who are planning to make it. Also, if you took pictures, I’d love to see them. Share your creations on Instagram using #foolproofeats so I can share them with the whole Foolproof Living community.

    Spinach Quesadilla cut up and served on a plate with sauce on the side.
    Print

    Spinach Quesadilla Recipe

    These delicious Spinach Quesadillas are to cheer your picky eaters. This gooey, cheesy, and easy to make recipe is Ready in 15 minutes and it can be served as breakfast or a light snack.
    Course Breakfast
    Cuisine Mexican
    Diet Vegetarian
    Prep Time 5 minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 386kcal

    Ingredients

    For The Spinach Mixture:

    • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter
    • 5 cups baby spinach rinsed and spin-dried
    • 1 clove garlic minced
    • 1 tablespoon Tangy Bang sauce (optional) plus more to serve as a dip on the side
    • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
    • ¼ teaspoon black pepper

    For The Spinach Tortillas

    • 4 flour tortillas mine are 9-inch in diameter – use gluten-free tortillas if preferred
    • 2 cups shredded monterey jack cheese or a combination of monterey jack, Oaxa cheese
    • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter melted

    Optional:

    • Sour cream
    • 1-2 tablespoons chopped cilantro

    Instructions

    • Heat 1 tablespoon of butter in a 10 or 12-inch nonstick skillet with a lid over medium heat.
    • Add the spinach in. Put the lid on and let it cook for 3-4 minutes or until spinach starts to lose most of its volume. Add in the garlic, Tangy Bang sauce (if using) and season it with salt and pepper and and give it a stir. Transfer the now-fully cooked spinach onto a plate and set it aside. Clean the skillet with a paper towel and set it aside. No need to wash it.
    • To assemble the tortillas, lay 4 flour tortillas on a flat surface, add ½ cup shredded cheese on one half of each tortilla. Divide the cooked spinach amongst the tortillas mounting it onto the cheese. Fold the other half over the filling.
    • Place the skillet over medium heat. Brush each tortilla with melted butter and transfer 2 of them onto the skillet. Cook 1-2 minutes on each side (or until it turns golden brown). Once cooked, transfer them onto a cutting board to cool off. Repeat the same process with the rest of the quesadillas.
    • Slice them into wedges. If using, garnish with cilantro leaves. Serve with more Tangy Bang sauce and sour cream on the side for dipping.

    Notes

    • Yields: This recipe makes four spinach quesadillas ideal for 4 servings. The nutritional values below are per serving.
    • Can you use mozzarella cheese for quesadillas? Though it’s not the traditional choice, mozzarella can be used as a creamy and easy-to-melt quesadilla cheese. 
    • Storage: Leftovers of these spinach quesadillas can be stored in the fridge in an airtight container for up to 2 days. To reheat, set the oven to 300 degrees F. and place the quesadillas inside for 5-8 minutes.
    • For a gluten-free quesadilla recipe be sure to buy gluten-free quesadillas.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 386kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 17g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 73mg | Sodium: 830mg | Potassium: 309mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 4221IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 495mg | Iron: 2mg
    ]]>
    https://foolproofliving.com/spinach-quesadilla/feed/ 17